OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

V100R004C01
Hardware Description
Issue 02
Date 2008-10-25
Part Number 00440769
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any
assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.


Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com






Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1
1 Cabinet.........................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Cabinet Structure.............................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Configuration of the Integrated Cabinet..........................................................................................................1-3
1.3 Specifications..................................................................................................................................................1-3
1.4 DC Power Distribution Box............................................................................................................................1-4
2 Subrack.........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Structure..........................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Slot Description...............................................................................................................................................2-4
2.3 Fan Area..........................................................................................................................................................2-8
2.4 PIU..................................................................................................................................................................2-9
2.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................2-10
2.4.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................2-10
2.4.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................2-10
2.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................2-10
2.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................2-11
2.4.6 Specifications of the PIU......................................................................................................................2-11
2.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces.....................................................................2-12
2.5.1 Interfaces in the Interface Area............................................................................................................2-13
2.5.2 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board.................................................................................2-15
2.5.3 PIN Assignment of Interfaces..............................................................................................................2-16
3 Frame............................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 DCM Frame.....................................................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 CRPC Frame...................................................................................................................................................3-2
4 Overview of Boards...................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions..................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.2 Laser Safety Label..................................................................................................................................4-4
4.2 Bar Code for Boards........................................................................................................................................4-5
4.2.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................4-5
4.2.2 Characteristic Code................................................................................................................................4-6
4.3 Board Category...............................................................................................................................................4-6
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Contents
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
5 Optical Transponder Unit........................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1 ECOM.............................................................................................................................................................5-3
5.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................5-3
5.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................5-3
5.1.3 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................5-4
5.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................5-5
5.1.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................5-9
5.1.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-10
5.1.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................5-10
5.1.8 Specifications of the ECOM................................................................................................................5-13
5.2 L4G................................................................................................................................................................5-16
5.2.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-17
5.2.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-17
5.2.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................5-17
5.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-19
5.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-22
5.2.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-24
5.2.7 Characteristic Code for the L4G..........................................................................................................5-24
5.2.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................5-24
5.2.9 Specifications of the L4G.....................................................................................................................5-27
5.3 LDGD............................................................................................................................................................5-32
5.3.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-33
5.3.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-33
5.3.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................5-33
5.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-35
5.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-37
5.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-39
5.3.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD.......................................................................................................5-39
5.3.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................5-40
5.3.9 Specifications of the LDGD.................................................................................................................5-42
5.4 LDGS............................................................................................................................................................5-47
5.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-48
5.4.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-48
5.4.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................5-48
5.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-49
5.4.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-52
5.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-53
5.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS.......................................................................................................5-53
5.4.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................5-53
5.4.9 Specifications of the LDGS..................................................................................................................5-56
5.5 LDM..............................................................................................................................................................5-61
5.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-62
Contents
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
ii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
5.5.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-62
5.5.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................5-63
5.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-65
5.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-67
5.5.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-69
5.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LDM.........................................................................................................5-69
5.5.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................5-69
5.5.9 Specifications of the LDM...................................................................................................................5-70
5.6 LDMD...........................................................................................................................................................5-78
5.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-78
5.6.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-78
5.6.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................5-79
5.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-80
5.6.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-83
5.6.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-84
5.6.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMD......................................................................................................5-84
5.6.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................5-85
5.6.9 Specifications of the LDMD................................................................................................................5-86
5.7 LDMS............................................................................................................................................................5-92
5.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-93
5.7.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-93
5.7.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................5-94
5.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-95
5.7.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-97
5.7.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-99
5.7.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMS.......................................................................................................5-99
5.7.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................5-99
5.7.9 Specifications of the LDMS...............................................................................................................5-100
5.8 LOG.............................................................................................................................................................5-107
5.8.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................5-107
5.8.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................5-107
5.8.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................5-108
5.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................5-109
5.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................5-112
5.8.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................5-113
5.8.7 Characteristic Code for the LOG.......................................................................................................5-113
5.8.8 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................5-113
5.8.9 Specifications of the LOG..................................................................................................................5-116
5.9 LOM............................................................................................................................................................5-121
5.9.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................5-122
5.9.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................5-122
5.9.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................5-123
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Contents
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
5.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................5-124
5.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................5-127
5.9.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................5-129
5.9.7 Characteristic Code for the LOM.......................................................................................................5-130
5.9.8 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................5-130
5.9.9 Specifications of the LOM.................................................................................................................5-131
5.10 LQG...........................................................................................................................................................5-137
5.10.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-138
5.10.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-138
5.10.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-138
5.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-140
5.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-142
5.10.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-144
5.10.7 Characteristic Code for the LQG.....................................................................................................5-144
5.10.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-144
5.10.9 Specifications of the LQG................................................................................................................5-147
5.11 LQM..........................................................................................................................................................5-151
5.11.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-152
5.11.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-152
5.11.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-153
5.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-155
5.11.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-157
5.11.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-159
5.11.7 Characteristic Code for the LQM.....................................................................................................5-159
5.11.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-159
5.11.9 Specifications of the LQM...............................................................................................................5-163
5.12 LQMD.......................................................................................................................................................5-171
5.12.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-171
5.12.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-172
5.12.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-172
5.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-174
5.12.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-177
5.12.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-179
5.12.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMD..................................................................................................5-179
5.12.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-180
5.12.9 Specifications of the LQMD............................................................................................................5-183
5.13 LQMS........................................................................................................................................................5-192
5.13.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-193
5.13.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-193
5.13.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-194
5.13.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-196
5.13.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-200
Contents
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
5.13.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-202
5.13.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMS...................................................................................................5-202
5.13.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-202
5.13.9 Specifications of the LQMS.............................................................................................................5-207
5.14 LSX...........................................................................................................................................................5-216
5.14.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-217
5.14.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-217
5.14.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-218
5.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-219
5.14.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-222
5.14.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-224
5.14.7 Characteristic Code for the LSX......................................................................................................5-224
5.14.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-224
5.14.9 Specifications of the LSX................................................................................................................5-225
5.15 LSXL.........................................................................................................................................................5-230
5.15.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-230
5.15.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-231
5.15.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-231
5.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-232
5.15.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-235
5.15.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-236
5.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXL....................................................................................................5-236
5.15.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-237
5.15.9 Specifications of the LSXL..............................................................................................................5-237
5.16 LSXLR......................................................................................................................................................5-240
5.16.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-240
5.16.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-240
5.16.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-241
5.16.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-242
5.16.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-244
5.16.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-245
5.16.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXLR.................................................................................................5-245
5.16.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-245
5.16.9 Specifications of the LSXLR...........................................................................................................5-246
5.17 LSXR.........................................................................................................................................................5-248
5.17.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-248
5.17.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-248
5.17.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-249
5.17.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-250
5.17.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-252
5.17.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-253
5.17.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR...................................................................................................5-253
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Contents
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
5.17.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-253
5.17.9 Specifications of the LSXR..............................................................................................................5-254
5.18 LWX2........................................................................................................................................................5-257
5.18.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-258
5.18.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-258
5.18.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-258
5.18.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-259
5.18.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-261
5.18.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-263
5.18.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2...................................................................................................5-263
5.18.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-264
5.18.9 Specifications of the LWX2.............................................................................................................5-264
5.19 LWXD.......................................................................................................................................................5-271
5.19.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-271
5.19.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-271
5.19.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-272
5.19.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-273
5.19.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-275
5.19.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-277
5.19.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD..................................................................................................5-277
5.19.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-278
5.19.9 Specifications of the LWXD............................................................................................................5-278
5.20 LWXS........................................................................................................................................................5-284
5.20.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-285
5.20.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-286
5.20.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-286
5.20.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-287
5.20.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-289
5.20.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-291
5.20.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS..................................................................................................5-291
5.20.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-291
5.20.9 Specifications of the LWXS.............................................................................................................5-292
5.21 TMX..........................................................................................................................................................5-298
5.21.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-299
5.21.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-299
5.21.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-299
5.21.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-301
5.21.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-303
5.21.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-305
5.21.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX.....................................................................................................5-305
5.21.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-305
5.21.9 Specifications of the TMX...............................................................................................................5-306
Contents
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit...................................................................................................6-1
6.1 ND2.................................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................6-2
6.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................6-2
6.1.3 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................6-3
6.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................6-4
6.1.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................6-6
6.1.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................6-8
6.1.7 Characteristic Code for the ND2............................................................................................................6-8
6.1.8 NM Configuration Reference.................................................................................................................6-8
6.1.9 Specifications of the ND2....................................................................................................................6-12
6.2 NS2................................................................................................................................................................6-13
6.2.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-14
6.2.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................6-14
6.2.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................6-15
6.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-17
6.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................6-20
6.2.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-22
6.2.7 Characteristic Code for the NS2...........................................................................................................6-22
6.2.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................6-22
6.2.9 Specifications of the NS2.....................................................................................................................6-26
6.3 TBE...............................................................................................................................................................6-30
6.3.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-31
6.3.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................6-31
6.3.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................6-32
6.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-34
6.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................6-37
6.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-39
6.3.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................6-39
6.3.8 Specifications of the TBE....................................................................................................................6-41
6.4 TDG...............................................................................................................................................................6-46
6.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-47
6.4.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................6-47
6.4.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................6-47
6.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-48
6.4.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................6-50
6.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-52
6.4.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................6-52
6.4.8 Specifications of the TDG....................................................................................................................6-55
6.5 TDX...............................................................................................................................................................6-57
6.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-58
6.5.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................6-58
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Contents
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
6.5.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................6-59
6.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-59
6.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................6-63
6.5.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-65
6.5.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................6-65
6.5.8 Specifications of the TDX....................................................................................................................6-68
6.6 TOM..............................................................................................................................................................6-70
6.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-70
6.6.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................6-71
6.6.3 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................6-74
6.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-76
6.6.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................6-85
6.6.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-87
6.6.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................6-87
6.6.8 Specifications of the TOM...................................................................................................................6-94
6.7 TQM............................................................................................................................................................6-101
6.7.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................6-102
6.7.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................6-102
6.7.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................6-103
6.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................6-104
6.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................6-107
6.7.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................6-108
6.7.7 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................6-108
6.7.8 Specifications of the TQM.................................................................................................................6-112
6.8 TQS.............................................................................................................................................................6-118
6.8.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................6-119
6.8.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................6-119
6.8.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................6-119
6.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................6-120
6.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................6-122
6.8.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................6-124
6.8.7 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................6-124
6.8.8 Specifications of the TQS..................................................................................................................6-126
6.9 TQX.............................................................................................................................................................6-129
6.9.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................6-130
6.9.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................6-130
6.9.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................6-130
6.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................6-131
6.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................6-133
6.9.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................6-135
6.9.7 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................6-135
6.9.8 Specifications of the TQX..................................................................................................................6-137
Contents
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
6.10 TSXL.........................................................................................................................................................6-139
6.10.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................6-139
6.10.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................6-139
6.10.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................6-140
6.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................6-140
6.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................6-142
6.10.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................6-144
6.10.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................6-144
6.10.8 Specifications of the TSXL..............................................................................................................6-146
7 Cross-connect Unit.....................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 XCS.................................................................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................7-3
7.1.3 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................7-3
7.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................7-4
7.1.5 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 7-5
7.1.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................7-6
7.1.7 Specifications of the XCS......................................................................................................................7-6
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit.......................................................................8-1
8.1 M40................................................................................................................................................................. 8-2
8.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................8-2
8.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................8-3
8.1.3 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................8-3
8.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................8-3
8.1.5 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 8-5
8.1.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................8-8
8.1.7 Characteristic Code for the M40............................................................................................................8-8
8.1.8 NM Configuration Reference.................................................................................................................8-9
8.1.9 Specifications of the M40...................................................................................................................... 8-9
8.2 M40V............................................................................................................................................................8-10
8.2.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................8-11
8.2.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-11
8.2.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................8-12
8.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................8-12
8.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-14
8.2.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-17
8.2.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V.......................................................................................................8-17
8.2.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................8-18
8.2.9 Specifications of the M40V..................................................................................................................8-19
8.3 D40................................................................................................................................................................8-19
8.3.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................8-20
8.3.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-20
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Contents
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
8.3.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................8-21
8.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................8-21
8.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-23
8.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-26
8.3.7 Characteristic Code for the D40...........................................................................................................8-26
8.3.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................8-27
8.3.9 Specifications of the D40.....................................................................................................................8-28
8.4 D40V.............................................................................................................................................................8-28
8.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................8-29
8.4.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-29
8.4.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................8-30
8.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................8-30
8.4.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-32
8.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-35
8.4.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V........................................................................................................8-35
8.4.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................8-36
8.4.9 Specifications of the D40V..................................................................................................................8-37
8.5 FIU................................................................................................................................................................8-37
8.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................8-38
8.5.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-39
8.5.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................8-39
8.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................8-39
8.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-41
8.5.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-42
8.5.7 Characteristic Code for the FIU...........................................................................................................8-42
8.5.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................8-43
8.5.9 Specifications of the FIU......................................................................................................................8-44
8.6 ITL.................................................................................................................................................................8-44
8.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................8-45
8.6.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-46
8.6.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................8-46
8.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................8-47
8.6.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-48
8.6.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-51
8.6.7 Characteristic Code for the ITL............................................................................................................8-51
8.6.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................8-52
8.6.9 Specifications of the ITL......................................................................................................................8-52
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit............................................................................9-1
9.1 CMR2..............................................................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.3 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................9-3
Contents
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
9.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................9-3
9.1.5 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 9-4
9.1.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................9-6
9.1.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR2.........................................................................................................9-6
9.1.8 NM Configuration Reference.................................................................................................................9-7
9.1.9 Specifications of the CMR2...................................................................................................................9-7
9.2 CMR4..............................................................................................................................................................9-9
9.2.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................9-9
9.2.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................9-9
9.2.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................9-10
9.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-10
9.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-12
9.2.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-13
9.2.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR4.......................................................................................................9-13
9.2.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................9-14
9.2.9 Specifications of the CMR4.................................................................................................................9-15
9.3 DMR1............................................................................................................................................................9-16
9.3.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................9-17
9.3.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................9-17
9.3.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................9-17
9.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-18
9.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-19
9.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-21
9.3.7 Characteristic Code for the DMR1.......................................................................................................9-21
9.3.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................9-21
9.3.9 Specifications of the DMR1.................................................................................................................9-22
9.4 MR2...............................................................................................................................................................9-23
9.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................9-24
9.4.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................9-24
9.4.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................9-24
9.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-25
9.4.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-26
9.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-28
9.4.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2.........................................................................................................9-28
9.4.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................9-28
9.4.9 Specifications of the MR2....................................................................................................................9-29
9.5 MR4...............................................................................................................................................................9-30
9.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................9-31
9.5.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................9-31
9.5.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................9-31
9.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-32
9.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-33
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Contents
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
9.5.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-35
9.5.7 Characteristic Code for of MR4...........................................................................................................9-35
9.5.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................9-36
9.5.9 Specifications of the MR4....................................................................................................................9-36
9.6 MR8...............................................................................................................................................................9-38
9.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................9-39
9.6.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................9-39
9.6.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................9-39
9.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-40
9.6.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-41
9.6.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-42
9.6.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8.........................................................................................................9-42
9.6.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................9-43
9.6.9 Specifications of the MR8....................................................................................................................9-44
9.7 SBM2............................................................................................................................................................9-46
9.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................9-46
9.7.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................9-46
9.7.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................9-47
9.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-47
9.7.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-48
9.7.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-50
9.7.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................9-50
9.7.8 Specifications of the SBM2..................................................................................................................9-51
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit...........................................10-1
10.1 RMU9..........................................................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................10-3
10.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................10-4
10.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................10-6
10.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................10-8
10.1.7 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................10-8
10.1.8 Specifications of the RMU9...............................................................................................................10-9
10.2 ROAM.......................................................................................................................................................10-10
10.2.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................10-10
10.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................10-11
10.2.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................10-11
10.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................10-12
10.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-13
10.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-17
10.2.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................10-17
10.2.8 Specifications of the ROAM............................................................................................................10-17
Contents
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
10.3 WSD9........................................................................................................................................................10-19
10.3.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................10-19
10.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................10-20
10.3.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................10-21
10.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................10-22
10.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-23
10.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-25
10.3.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................10-26
10.3.8 Specifications of the WSD9.............................................................................................................10-26
10.4 WSM9.......................................................................................................................................................10-28
10.4.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................10-28
10.4.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................10-29
10.4.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................10-30
10.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................10-31
10.4.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-32
10.4.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-34
10.4.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................10-35
10.4.8 Specifications of the WSM9............................................................................................................10-35
10.5 WSMD4....................................................................................................................................................10-37
10.5.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................10-37
10.5.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................10-38
10.5.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................10-38
10.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................10-39
10.5.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-41
10.5.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-43
10.5.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................10-43
10.5.8 Specifications of the WSMD4..........................................................................................................10-44
11 Optical Amplifying Unit......................................................................................................11-1
11.1 CRPC...........................................................................................................................................................11-2
11.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................11-2
11.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................11-3
11.1.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................11-3
11.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................11-4
11.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................11-7
11.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................11-8
11.1.7 Dip Switch and Jumper......................................................................................................................11-8
11.1.8 Characteristic Code for of CRPC.......................................................................................................11-9
11.1.9 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................11-10
11.1.10 Specifications of the CRPC............................................................................................................11-10
11.2 HBA..........................................................................................................................................................11-11
11.2.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................11-12
11.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................11-12
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Contents
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiii
11.2.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................11-12
11.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................11-13
11.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-15
11.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-16
11.2.7 Characteristic Code for the HBA.....................................................................................................11-16
11.2.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................11-17
11.2.9 Specifications of the HBA................................................................................................................11-18
11.3 OAU1........................................................................................................................................................11-19
11.3.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................11-19
11.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................11-20
11.3.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................11-20
11.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................11-21
11.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-23
11.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-25
11.3.7 Characteristic Code for the OAU1...................................................................................................11-25
11.3.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................11-26
11.3.9 Specifications of the OAU1.............................................................................................................11-27
11.4 OBU1........................................................................................................................................................11-30
11.4.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................11-31
11.4.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................11-31
11.4.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................11-32
11.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................11-33
11.4.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-34
11.4.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-36
11.4.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU1...................................................................................................11-36
11.4.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................11-37
11.4.9 Specifications of the OBU1..............................................................................................................11-37
11.5 OBU2........................................................................................................................................................11-39
11.5.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................11-39
11.5.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................11-39
11.5.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................11-40
11.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................11-41
11.5.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-42
11.5.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-44
11.5.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU2...................................................................................................11-44
11.5.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................11-45
11.5.9 Specifications of the OBU2..............................................................................................................11-45
12 System Control and Communication Unit........................................................................12-1
12.1 SCC............................................................................................................................................................. 12-2
12.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................12-2
12.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................12-2
12.1.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................12-2
Contents
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
12.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................12-3
12.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................12-5
12.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................12-6
12.1.7 Jumper................................................................................................................................................12-6
12.1.8 Specifications of the SCC..................................................................................................................12-7
12.2 AUX............................................................................................................................................................12-7
12.2.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................12-7
12.2.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................12-8
12.2.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................12-8
12.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................12-8
12.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................12-9
12.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................12-10
12.2.7 Jumper..............................................................................................................................................12-10
12.2.8 Specifications of the AUX...............................................................................................................12-10
13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit..................................................................................... 13-1
13.1 SC1..............................................................................................................................................................13-2
13.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................13-2
13.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................13-3
13.1.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................13-3
13.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................13-4
13.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................13-7
13.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................13-8
13.1.7 Characteristic Code for the SC1.........................................................................................................13-8
13.1.8 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................13-9
13.1.9 Specifications of the SC1...................................................................................................................13-9
13.2 SC2............................................................................................................................................................13-10
13.2.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................13-11
13.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................13-11
13.2.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................13-12
13.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................13-12
13.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................13-15
13.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................13-16
13.2.7 Characteristic Code for the SC2.......................................................................................................13-16
13.2.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................13-17
13.2.9 Specifications of the SC2.................................................................................................................13-17
14 Optical Protection Unit......................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1 DCP.............................................................................................................................................................14-2
14.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................14-2
14.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................14-3
14.1.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................14-4
14.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................14-5
14.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................14-7
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Contents
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xv
14.1.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................14-10
14.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCP......................................................................................................14-10
14.1.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................14-11
14.1.9 Specifications of the DCP................................................................................................................14-12
14.2 OLP...........................................................................................................................................................14-13
14.2.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................14-13
14.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................14-14
14.2.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................14-15
14.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................14-16
14.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................14-18
14.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................14-20
14.2.7 Characteristic Code for the OLP......................................................................................................14-20
14.2.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................14-21
14.2.9 Specifications of the OLP................................................................................................................14-21
14.3 SCS............................................................................................................................................................14-23
14.3.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................14-23
14.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................14-24
14.3.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................14-24
14.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................14-25
14.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................14-26
14.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................14-28
14.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SCS.......................................................................................................14-28
14.3.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................14-28
14.3.9 Specifications of the SCS.................................................................................................................14-29
15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit.......................................................................................................15-1
15.1 MCA4..........................................................................................................................................................15-2
15.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................15-2
15.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................15-2
15.1.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................15-3
15.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................15-3
15.1.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................... 15-5
15.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................15-6
15.1.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA4.....................................................................................................15-6
15.1.8 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................15-7
15.1.9 Specifications of the MCA4...............................................................................................................15-7
15.2 MCA8..........................................................................................................................................................15-8
15.2.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................15-8
15.2.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................15-9
15.2.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................15-9
15.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................15-9
15.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................15-11
15.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................15-12
Contents
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
15.2.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA8...................................................................................................15-12
15.2.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................15-13
15.2.9 Specifications of the MCA8.............................................................................................................15-13
15.3 WMU.........................................................................................................................................................15-14
15.3.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................15-14
15.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................15-14
15.3.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................15-15
15.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................15-16
15.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................15-17
15.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................15-18
15.3.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................15-18
15.3.8 Specifications of the WMU..............................................................................................................15-18
16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit.......................................................................................16-1
16.1 VA1.............................................................................................................................................................16-2
16.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................16-2
16.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................16-3
16.1.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................16-3
16.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................16-4
16.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................16-5
16.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................16-7
16.1.7 Characteristic Code for the VA1........................................................................................................16-7
16.1.8 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................16-7
16.1.9 Specifications of the VA1..................................................................................................................16-8
16.2 VA4.............................................................................................................................................................16-9
16.2.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................16-9
16.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................16-10
16.2.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................16-10
16.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................16-11
16.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................16-12
16.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................16-14
16.2.7 Characteristic Code for the VA4......................................................................................................16-14
16.2.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................16-14
16.2.9 Specifications of the VA4................................................................................................................16-15
17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit..............................................................17-1
17.1 DCU............................................................................................................................................................17-2
17.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................17-2
17.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................17-2
17.1.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................17-3
17.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................17-3
17.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................17-4
17.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................17-6
17.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCU.......................................................................................................17-6
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Contents
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xvii
17.1.8 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................17-6
17.1.9 Specifications of the DCU..................................................................................................................17-7
17.2 GFU.............................................................................................................................................................17-7
17.2.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................17-8
17.2.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................17-8
17.2.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................17-9
17.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................17-9
17.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................17-10
17.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................17-12
17.2.7 Characteristic Code for the GFU......................................................................................................17-12
17.2.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................17-12
17.2.9 Specifications of the GFU................................................................................................................17-13
18 Cables.......................................................................................................................................18-1
18.1 Power Cables and Grounding Cables..........................................................................................................18-2
18.1.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cables......................................................................................18-2
18.1.2 Subrack Power Cables........................................................................................................................18-5
18.2 Optical Fibers..............................................................................................................................................18-6
18.2.1 Classification......................................................................................................................................18-6
18.2.2 Connectors..........................................................................................................................................18-7
18.3 Grounding Cables........................................................................................................................................18-8
18.3.1 Cabinet Door Grounding Cables........................................................................................................18-8
18.3.2 PDU Grounding Cable.......................................................................................................................18-9
18.4 Alarm Cables.............................................................................................................................................18-10
18.4.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable....................................................................................................................18-11
18.4.2 Alarm Interface Cable......................................................................................................................18-12
18.4.3 Alarm Concatenating/Inter-Subrack Concatenating Cable..............................................................18-13
18.5 Management Cables..................................................................................................................................18-15
18.5.1 OAM Serial Port Cable....................................................................................................................18-15
A Indicators...................................................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Cabinet Indicators..........................................................................................................................................A-2
A.2 Subrack Indicator...........................................................................................................................................A-2
A.3 Board Indicators............................................................................................................................................A-3
A.4 Fan Indicator..................................................................................................................................................A-6
A.5 PIU Indicator.................................................................................................................................................A-6
B Bar Code for Boards..................................................................................................................B-1
B.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................................B-3
B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.......................................................................................................................B-3
B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs................................................................................................B-4
B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs..............................................................B-6
B.2.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUs.................................................................................................B-6
B.3 Characteristic Code for Line Unit..................................................................................................................B-7
Contents
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
xviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
B.4 Characteristic Code for FOADMs.................................................................................................................B-7
B.4.1 Characteristic Code for the CMR2.......................................................................................................B-8
B.4.2 Characteristic Code for the CMR4.......................................................................................................B-8
B.4.3 Characteristic Code for the DMR1.......................................................................................................B-9
B.4.4 Characteristic Code for the MR2..........................................................................................................B-9
B.4.5 Characteristic Code for of MR4..........................................................................................................B-10
B.4.6 Characteristic Code for the MR8........................................................................................................B-11
B.5 Characteristic Code for MCAs.....................................................................................................................B-11
B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4.....................................................................................................B-11
B.5.2 Characteristic Code for the MCA8.....................................................................................................B-12
B.6 Characteristic Code for OAUs.....................................................................................................................B-12
B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the HBA........................................................................................................B-13
B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the OAU1......................................................................................................B-13
B.6.3 Characteristic Code for the OBU1......................................................................................................B-14
B.6.4 Characteristic Code for the OBU2......................................................................................................B-14
B.6.5 Characteristic Code for of CRPC........................................................................................................B-15
B.7 Characteristic Code for Optical MUX/DMUX Units..................................................................................B-15
B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the D40.........................................................................................................B-16
B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V.......................................................................................................B-16
B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the FIU..........................................................................................................B-17
B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the ITL..........................................................................................................B-17
B.7.5 Characteristic Code for the M40.........................................................................................................B-18
B.7.6 Characteristic Code for the M40V......................................................................................................B-18
B.8 Characteristic Code for Protection Units.....................................................................................................B-19
B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the DCP.........................................................................................................B-19
B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the OLP.........................................................................................................B-20
B.8.3 Characteristic Code for the SCS.........................................................................................................B-20
B.9 Characteristic Code for VOAs.....................................................................................................................B-21
B.9.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1.........................................................................................................B-21
B.9.2 Characteristic Code for the VA4.........................................................................................................B-21
B.10 Characteristic Code for PDE Units............................................................................................................B-22
B.10.1 Characteristic Code for the DCU......................................................................................................B-22
B.10.2 Characteristic Code for the GFU......................................................................................................B-22
C Parameter Description.............................................................................................................C-1
C.1 Optical Transponder Units (OTUs), Tributary Units and Line Units............................................................C-2
C.1.1 Path Use Status.....................................................................................................................................C-2
C.1.2 Optical Interface Loopback...................................................................................................................C-3
C.1.3 Service Type.........................................................................................................................................C-4
C.1.4 Client Service Bearer Rate (M).............................................................................................................C-6
C.1.5 Port Mapping........................................................................................................................................C-7
C.1.6 Laser Status...........................................................................................................................................C-8
C.1.7 Automatic Laser Shutdown...................................................................................................................C-9
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Contents
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xix
C.1.8 Current Bearer Rate (M).......................................................................................................................C-9
C.1.9 Service Mode......................................................................................................................................C-10
C.1.10 FEC Working State...........................................................................................................................C-11
C.1.11 FEC Type..........................................................................................................................................C-12
C.1.12 PAUSE Frame Flow Control............................................................................................................C-12
C.1.13 Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz).....................................................C-13
C.1.14 Configure Band Type........................................................................................................................C-14
C.1.15 Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)...........................................................C-14
C.1.16 Actual Band Type.............................................................................................................................C-15
C.1.17 Maximum Packet Length..................................................................................................................C-16
C.1.18 Ethernet Working Mode...................................................................................................................C-16
C.1.19 LPT Enabled.....................................................................................................................................C-17
C.1.20 Path Loopback..................................................................................................................................C-18
C.1.21 SD Trigger Condition.......................................................................................................................C-18
C.1.22 FC Distance Extension......................................................................................................................C-19
C.1.23 Board Mode......................................................................................................................................C-19
C.1.24 Line Rate...........................................................................................................................................C-20
C.2 Optical Multiplexing Units (MUXs) and Optical Demultiplexing Units (DMUXs) ..................................C-21
C.2.1 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)............................................................................................C-21
C.2.2 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) ..............................................................................................C-22
C.2.3 Configure Band...................................................................................................................................C-22
C.2.4 Configure Working Band Parity.........................................................................................................C-23
C.2.5 Actual Band........................................................................................................................................C-24
C.2.6 Actual Working Band Parity...............................................................................................................C-24
C.2.7 Board Mode........................................................................................................................................C-25
C.3 Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing Units (OADMs)........................................................................................C-25
C.3.1 Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)......................................C-25
C.3.2 Configure Band Type..........................................................................................................................C-26
C.4 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit (ROADMs)......................................................C-26
C.4.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) ..............................................................................................C-27
C.4.2 Wavelength Target Power (dBm).......................................................................................................C-27
C.4.3 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)............................................................................................C-28
C.4.4 Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)......................................................................................................C-29
C.4.5 Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB).......................................................................................................C-29
C.4.6 Configure Band...................................................................................................................................C-30
C.4.7 Configure Working Band Parity.........................................................................................................C-30
C.4.8 Actual Band........................................................................................................................................C-31
C.4.9 Actual Working Band Parity...............................................................................................................C-31
C.5 Optical Amplifier Units...............................................................................................................................C-32
C.5.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) ..............................................................................................C-32
C.5.2 Laser Status.........................................................................................................................................C-33
C.5.3 Gain (dB)............................................................................................................................................C-33
Contents
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
xx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
C.5.4 Nominal Gain (dB).............................................................................................................................C-34
C.5.5 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB).................................................................................................C-35
C.5.6 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB).................................................................................................C-35
C.5.7 Rated Optical Power (dBm)................................................................................................................C-36
C.5.8 Board Work Type...............................................................................................................................C-37
C.5.9 Configure Band...................................................................................................................................C-37
C.5.10 Configure Working Band Parity.......................................................................................................C-38
C.5.11 Actual Band......................................................................................................................................C-38
C.5.12 Actual Working Band Parity.............................................................................................................C-39
C.6 Optical Supervisory Channel Units (OSCs)................................................................................................C-39
C.6.1 Optical Interface Loopback.................................................................................................................C-39
C.6.2 Laser Status.........................................................................................................................................C-40
C.7 Optical Protection Units...............................................................................................................................C-41
C.7.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) ..............................................................................................C-41
C.7.2 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB).......................................C-42
C.7.3 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)..........................................C-42
C.8 Spectrum Analyzer Units.............................................................................................................................C-43
C.8.1 Optical Monitoring..............................................................................................................................C-43
C.8.2 Monitor Interval (min)........................................................................................................................C-44
C.8.3 Wavelength Monitor Status................................................................................................................C-45
C.8.4 Configure Band...................................................................................................................................C-45
C.8.5 Configure Working Band Parity.........................................................................................................C-46
C.8.6 Actual Band........................................................................................................................................C-46
C.8.7 Actual Working Band Parity...............................................................................................................C-47
C.9 Variable Optical Attenuator Units (VOAs).................................................................................................C-47
C.9.1 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)............................................................................................C-48
C.9.2 Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)......................................................................................................C-48
C.9.3 Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB).......................................................................................................C-49
C.9.4 Path Use Status...................................................................................................................................C-49
C.9.5 Configure Band...................................................................................................................................C-50
C.9.6 Configure Working Band Parity.........................................................................................................C-50
C.9.7 Actual Band........................................................................................................................................C-51
C.9.8 Actual Working Band Parity...............................................................................................................C-52
C.9.9 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)...............................................................................................C-52
D Quick Reference Table of the Units.....................................................................................D-1
D.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification..............................................................................D-2
D.1.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification on the Client Side........................................D-2
D.1.2 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification on the WDM Side.....................................D-16
D.2 Optical Amplifying Unit Specification.......................................................................................................D-24
D.3 Other Unit Specification..............................................................................................................................D-26
D.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio..............................................................................................................D-28
D.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards ..................................................................D-29
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Contents
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxi
D.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards..............................................................D-32
D.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards ..................................................................D-34
D.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards..................................................D-36
E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards..................................................E-1
F Glossary.......................................................................................................................................F-1
G Acronyms and Abbreviations...............................................................................................G-1
Index.................................................................................................................................................i-1
Contents
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
xxii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figures
Figure 1-1 Appearance of an ETSI 300 mm rear column cabinet........................................................................1-2
Figure 1-2 Front panel of the DC power distribution box....................................................................................1-4
Figure 1-3 Internal cable connection of the DC power distribution box..............................................................1-5
Figure 1-4 Junction box structure.........................................................................................................................1-5
Figure 1-5 Junction box mounting position.........................................................................................................1-6
Figure 2-1 OptiX OSN 6800 subrack structure diagram......................................................................................2-2
Figure 2-2 Slots of the subrack.............................................................................................................................2-5
Figure 2-3 Appearance of a fan area....................................................................................................................2-8
Figure 2-4 Single-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system.....................................................................2-9
Figure 2-5 Multi-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system.......................................................................2-9
Figure 2-6 PIU front panel.................................................................................................................................2-11
Figure 2-7 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack......................................................................................2-12
Figure 2-8 Interfaces in the interface area..........................................................................................................2-13
Figure 2-9 Interfaces on the front panel of the AUX.........................................................................................2-15
Figure 2-10 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector..........................................................................................2-16
Figure 2-11 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector............................................................................................2-16
Figure 3-1 DCM frame in the cabinet..................................................................................................................3-2
Figure 3-2 Appearance of CRPC frame...............................................................................................................3-3
Figure 4-1 Description of the bar code (example 1).............................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-2 Description of the bar code (example 2).............................................................................................4-6
Figure 5-1 Position of the ECOM in the network with the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 900A.................5-4
Figure 5-2 Position of the ECOM in the WDM system.......................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM............................................................................5-6
Figure 5-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM............................................................................5-7
Figure 5-5 ECOM front panel..............................................................................................................................5-9
Figure 5-6 Port diagram of the ECOM...............................................................................................................5-11
Figure 5-7 Cross-connection diagram of the ECOM.........................................................................................5-13
Figure 5-8 Position of the L4G in the WDM system.........................................................................................5-17
Figure 5-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the L4G..............................................................................5-20
Figure 5-10 L4G front panel..............................................................................................................................5-23
Figure 5-11 Port diagram of the L4G.................................................................................................................5-25
Figure 5-12 Cross-connection diagram of the L4G............................................................................................5-27
Figure 5-13 Position of the LDGD in the WDM system...................................................................................5-33
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Figures
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxiii
Figure 5-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD.........................................................................5-35
Figure 5-15 LDGD front panel...........................................................................................................................5-38
Figure 5-16 Port diagram of the LDGD.............................................................................................................5-41
Figure 5-17 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGD........................................................................................5-42
Figure 5-18 Position of the LDGS in the WDM system....................................................................................5-48
Figure 5-19 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS.........................................................................5-50
Figure 5-20 LDGS front panel...........................................................................................................................5-52
Figure 5-21 Port diagram of the LDGS..............................................................................................................5-54
Figure 5-22 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGS........................................................................................5-56
Figure 5-23 Position of the LDM in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving).................................5-63
Figure 5-24 Position of the LDM in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving)...............................5-63
Figure 5-25 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDM...........................................................................5-65
Figure 5-26 LDM front panel.............................................................................................................................5-68
Figure 5-27 Position of the LDMD in the WDM system...................................................................................5-79
Figure 5-28 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMD........................................................................5-81
Figure 5-29 LDMD front panel..........................................................................................................................5-83
Figure 5-30 Position of the LDMS in the WDM system...................................................................................5-93
Figure 5-31 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMS.........................................................................5-95
Figure 5-32 LDMS front panel...........................................................................................................................5-98
Figure 5-33 Position of the LOG in the WDM system.................................................................................... 5-108
Figure 5-34 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG......................................................................... 5-110
Figure 5-35 LOG front panel............................................................................................................................5-112
Figure 5-36 Port diagram of the LOG..............................................................................................................5-115
Figure 5-37 Cross-connection diagram of the LOG.........................................................................................5-116
Figure 5-38 Position of the LOM in the WDM system....................................................................................5-122
Figure 5-39 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOM.........................................................................5-125
Figure 5-40 LOM front panel...........................................................................................................................5-128
Figure 5-41 Position of the LQG in the WDM system.................................................................................... 5-138
Figure 5-42 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQG......................................................................... 5-140
Figure 5-43 LQG front panel............................................................................................................................5-143
Figure 5-44 Port diagram of the LQG..............................................................................................................5-145
Figure 5-45 Cross-connection diagram of the LQG.........................................................................................5-147
Figure 5-46 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving)...............................5-152
Figure 5-47 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving)............................. 5-153
Figure 5-48 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQM.........................................................................5-155
Figure 5-49 LQM front panel...........................................................................................................................5-158
Figure 5-50 Port diagram of the LQM............................................................................................................. 5-160
Figure 5-51 Cross-connection diagram of the LQM........................................................................................5-162
Figure 5-52 Position of the LQMD in the WDM system.................................................................................5-172
Figure 5-53 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD......................................................................5-175
Figure 5-54 LQMD front panel........................................................................................................................5-178
Figure 5-55 Port diagram of the LQMD.......................................................................................................... 5-181
Figures
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
xxiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-56 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMD.....................................................................................5-182
Figure 5-57 Position of the LQMS in the WDM system.................................................................................5-194
Figure 5-58 Position of the LQMS in the WDM system.................................................................................5-194
Figure 5-59 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMS.......................................................................5-197
Figure 5-60 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMS (NS1 Mode).................................................5-198
Figure 5-61 LQMS front panel.........................................................................................................................5-201
Figure 5-62 Port diagram of the LQMS (LQM Mode)....................................................................................5-203
Figure 5-63 Port diagram of the LQMS (NS1 Mode)......................................................................................5-204
Figure 5-64 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS......................................................................................5-205
Figure 5-65 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS......................................................................................5-207
Figure 5-66 Position of the LSX in the WDM system.....................................................................................5-217
Figure 5-67 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSX.................................................................5-219
Figure 5-68 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSX.................................................................5-220
Figure 5-69 LSX front panel............................................................................................................................5-223
Figure 5-70 Position of the LSXL in the WDM system...................................................................................5-231
Figure 5-71 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSXL..............................................................5-233
Figure 5-72 TN11LSXL front panel................................................................................................................5-235
Figure 5-73 Position of the LSXLR in the WDM system................................................................................5-241
Figure 5-74 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR.....................................................................5-242
Figure 5-75 TN11LSXLR front panel..............................................................................................................5-244
Figure 5-76 Position of the LSXR in the WDM system..................................................................................5-249
Figure 5-77 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR.......................................................................5-250
Figure 5-78 LSXR front panel..........................................................................................................................5-252
Figure 5-79 Position of the LWX2 in the WDM system.................................................................................5-258
Figure 5-80 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2.......................................................................5-260
Figure 5-81 LWX2 front panel.........................................................................................................................5-262
Figure 5-82 Position of the LWXD in the WDM system.................................................................................5-272
Figure 5-83 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD......................................................................5-273
Figure 5-84 LWXD front panel........................................................................................................................5-276
Figure 5-85 Position of the LWXS in the WDM system.................................................................................5-286
Figure 5-86 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS......................................................................5-288
Figure 5-87 LWXS front panel........................................................................................................................5-290
Figure 5-88 Position of the TMX in the WDM system....................................................................................5-299
Figure 5-89 Functional modules and signal flow of the TMX.........................................................................5-301
Figure 5-90 TMX front panel...........................................................................................................................5-304
Figure 6-1 Position of the ND2 in the WDM system...........................................................................................6-3
Figure 6-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the ND2................................................................................6-5
Figure 6-3 ND2 front panel..................................................................................................................................6-7
Figure 6-4 Port diagram of the ND2 (cross-connection at the ODU1 level)........................................................6-9
Figure 6-5 Port diagram of the ND2 (cross-connection at the ODU2 level)........................................................6-9
Figure 6-6 Cross-connection diagram of the ND2 (ODU1 level)......................................................................6-11
Figure 6-7 Cross-connection diagram of the ND2 (ODU2 level)......................................................................6-12
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Figures
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxv
Figure 6-8 Position of the NS2 in the WDM system.........................................................................................6-15
Figure 6-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11NS2.....................................................................6-17
Figure 6-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12NS2...................................................................6-18
Figure 6-11 NS2 front panel...............................................................................................................................6-21
Figure 6-12 Port diagram of the TN12NS2 (cross-connection at the ODU1 level)...........................................6-23
Figure 6-13 Port diagram of the TN12NS2 (cross-connection at the ODU2 level)...........................................6-23
Figure 6-14 Cross-connection diagram of the NS2 (cross-connection at the ODU1 level)...............................6-25
Figure 6-15 Cross-connection diagram of the NS2 (cross-connection at the ODU2 level)...............................6-25
Figure 6-16 Position of the TBE in the WDM system.......................................................................................6-31
Figure 6-17 Position of the TBE in the WDM system.......................................................................................6-32
Figure 6-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the TBE............................................................................6-35
Figure 6-19 TBE front panel..............................................................................................................................6-38
Figure 6-20 Port diagram of the TBE.................................................................................................................6-40
Figure 6-21 Cross-connection diagram of the TBE...........................................................................................6-41
Figure 6-22 Position of the TDG in the WDM system......................................................................................6-47
Figure 6-23 Functional modules and signal flow of the TDG...........................................................................6-49
Figure 6-24 TDG front panel..............................................................................................................................6-51
Figure 6-25 Port diagram of the TDG................................................................................................................6-53
Figure 6-26 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG...........................................................................................6-54
Figure 6-27 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG...........................................................................................6-54
Figure 6-28 Position of the TDX in the WDM system......................................................................................6-58
Figure 6-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TDX..................................................................6-60
Figure 6-30 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12TDX..................................................................6-61
Figure 6-31 TDX front panel..............................................................................................................................6-64
Figure 6-32 Port diagram of the TN11TDX.......................................................................................................6-66
Figure 6-33 Port diagram of the TN12TDX.......................................................................................................6-66
Figure 6-34 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TDX.................................................................................6-67
Figure 6-35 Cross-connection diagram of the TN12TDX.................................................................................6-68
Figure 6-36 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (tributary board in alone mode)...................................6-71
Figure 6-37 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (tributary board in connect mode)...............................6-71
Figure 6-38 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (tributary & line board in alone mode).......................6-72
Figure 6-39 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (tributary & line board in connect mode)....................6-72
Figure 6-40 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (tributary & line board in connect mode)....................6-73
Figure 6-41 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (electrical regeneration board)....................................6-73
Figure 6-42 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (tributary board in alone mode)........................6-76
Figure 6-43 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (tributary board in connect mode)....................6-78
Figure 6-44 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (tributary & line board in alone mode).............6-79
Figure 6-45 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (tributary & line board in connect mode).........6-80
Figure 6-46 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (tributary & line board in connect mode).........6-82
Figure 6-47 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (electrical regeneration board).........................6-83
Figure 6-48 TOM front panel.............................................................................................................................6-86
Figure 6-49 Port diagram of the TOM (tributary board in connect mode)........................................................6-88
Figures
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
xxvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 6-50 Port diagram of the TOM (tributary & line in connect mode).......................................................6-88
Figure 6-51 Cross-connection diagram of the TOM..........................................................................................6-90
Figure 6-52 Cross-connection diagram of the TOM..........................................................................................6-91
Figure 6-53 Cross-connection diagram of the TOM..........................................................................................6-92
Figure 6-54 Cross-connection diagram of the TOM..........................................................................................6-93
Figure 6-55 Position of the TQM in the WDM system....................................................................................6-103
Figure 6-56 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQM.........................................................................6-105
Figure 6-57 TQM front panel...........................................................................................................................6-107
Figure 6-58 Port diagram of the TQM.............................................................................................................6-109
Figure 6-59 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM........................................................................................6-111
Figure 6-60 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM........................................................................................6-111
Figure 6-61 Position of the TQS in the WDM system.....................................................................................6-119
Figure 6-62 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQS..........................................................................6-121
Figure 6-63 TQS front panel............................................................................................................................6-123
Figure 6-64 Port diagram of the TQS...............................................................................................................6-125
Figure 6-65 Cross-connection diagram of the TQS.........................................................................................6-126
Figure 6-66 Position of the TQX in the WDM system....................................................................................6-130
Figure 6-67 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQX.........................................................................6-132
Figure 6-68 TQX front panel............................................................................................................................6-134
Figure 6-69 Port diagram of the TQX..............................................................................................................6-136
Figure 6-70 Cross-connection diagram of the TQX.........................................................................................6-137
Figure 6-71 Position of the TSXL in the WDM system...................................................................................6-139
Figure 6-72 Functional modules and signal flow of the TSXL........................................................................6-141
Figure 6-73 TSXL front panel..........................................................................................................................6-143
Figure 6-74 Port diagram of the TSXL............................................................................................................6-145
Figure 6-75 Cross-connection diagram of the TSXL.......................................................................................6-145
Figure 7-1 Position of the XCS in the WDM system...........................................................................................7-3
Figure 7-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCS................................................................................7-4
Figure 7-3 XCS front panel..................................................................................................................................7-5
Figure 8-1 Position of the M40 in the WDM system...........................................................................................8-3
Figure 8-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40................................................................................8-4
Figure 8-3 M40 front panel..................................................................................................................................8-5
Figure 8-4 Position of the M40V in the WDM system......................................................................................8-11
Figure 8-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40V...........................................................................8-13
Figure 8-6 M40V front panel.............................................................................................................................8-14
Figure 8-7 Position of the D40 in the WDM system..........................................................................................8-21
Figure 8-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40...............................................................................8-22
Figure 8-9 D40 front panel.................................................................................................................................8-23
Figure 8-10 Position of the D40V in the WDM system.....................................................................................8-30
Figure 8-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40V..........................................................................8-31
Figure 8-12 D40V front panel............................................................................................................................8-32
Figure 8-13 Position of the FIU in the WDM system........................................................................................8-39
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Figures
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxvii
Figure 8-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the FIU.............................................................................8-40
Figure 8-15 FIU front panel...............................................................................................................................8-41
Figure 8-16 Position of the ITL in the WDM system........................................................................................8-46
Figure 8-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the ITL.............................................................................8-47
Figure 8-18 TN11ITL front panel......................................................................................................................8-49
Figure 8-19 TN12ITL front panel......................................................................................................................8-50
Figure 9-1 Position of the CMR2 in the CWDM system.....................................................................................9-2
Figure 9-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR2.............................................................................9-3
Figure 9-3 CMR2 front panel...............................................................................................................................9-5
Figure 9-4 Position of the CMR4 in the CWDM system...................................................................................9-10
Figure 9-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR4...........................................................................9-11
Figure 9-6 CMR4 front panel.............................................................................................................................9-12
Figure 9-7 Position of the DMR1 in the CWDM system...................................................................................9-17
Figure 9-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the DMR1...........................................................................9-18
Figure 9-9 DMR1 front panel.............................................................................................................................9-20
Figure 9-10 Position of the MR2 in the DWDM system...................................................................................9-24
Figure 9-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR2...........................................................................9-25
Figure 9-12 MR2 front panel..............................................................................................................................9-27
Figure 9-13 Position of the MR4 in the DWDM system...................................................................................9-31
Figure 9-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR4...........................................................................9-32
Figure 9-15 MR4 front panel..............................................................................................................................9-34
Figure 9-16 Position of the MR8 in the DWDM system...................................................................................9-39
Figure 9-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR8...........................................................................9-40
Figure 9-18 MR8 front panel..............................................................................................................................9-41
Figure 9-19 Position of the SBM2 in the CWDM system.................................................................................9-46
Figure 9-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2.........................................................................9-47
Figure 9-21 SBM2 front panel...........................................................................................................................9-49
Figure 10-1 Position of the RMU9 in the DWDM system.................................................................................10-3
Figure 10-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the RMU9.........................................................................10-5
Figure 10-3 RMU9 front panel...........................................................................................................................10-7
Figure 10-4 Position of the ROAM in the DWDM system..............................................................................10-11
Figure 10-5 Functions and features of the ROAM...........................................................................................10-12
Figure 10-6 ROAM front panel........................................................................................................................10-14
Figure 10-7 Position of the WSD9 in the DWDM system...............................................................................10-21
Figure 10-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9.......................................................................10-22
Figure 10-9 WSD9 front panel.........................................................................................................................10-24
Figure 10-10 Position of the WSM9 in the DWDM system............................................................................10-30
Figure 10-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9....................................................................10-31
Figure 10-12 WSM9 front panel......................................................................................................................10-33
Figure 10-13 Position of the WSMD4 in the DWDM system.........................................................................10-38
Figure 10-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4.................................................................10-40
Figure 10-15 WSMD4 front panel...................................................................................................................10-42
Figures
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
xxviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 11-1 Position of the CRPC in the WDM system (backward pump).......................................................11-3
Figure 11-2 Position of the CRPC in the WDM system (forward pump)..........................................................11-3
Figure 11-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC (backward pump)............................................11-5
Figure 11-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC (forward pump)...............................................11-6
Figure 11-5 CRPC front panel............................................................................................................................11-7
Figure 11-6 Jumpers on the CRPC board...........................................................................................................11-9
Figure 11-7 Position of the HBA in the WDM system....................................................................................11-12
Figure 11-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the HBA.........................................................................11-14
Figure 11-9 HBA front panel........................................................................................................................... 11-15
Figure 11-10 Position of the OAU1 in the WDM system................................................................................11-20
Figure 11-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the OAU1.....................................................................11-22
Figure 11-12 OAU1 front panel.......................................................................................................................11-24
Figure 11-13 Position of the OBU1 in the WDM system................................................................................11-32
Figure 11-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the OBU1.....................................................................11-33
Figure 11-15 OBU1 front panel....................................................................................................................... 11-35
Figure 11-16 Position of the OBU2 in the WDM system................................................................................11-40
Figure 11-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the OBU2.....................................................................11-41
Figure 11-18 OBU2 front panel....................................................................................................................... 11-43
Figure 12-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCC............................................................................12-4
Figure 12-2 SCC front panel..............................................................................................................................12-5
Figure 12-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the AUX...........................................................................12-8
Figure 12-4 AUX front panel.............................................................................................................................12-9
Figure 13-1 Position of the SC1 in the WDM system........................................................................................13-3
Figure 13-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC1.............................................................................13-5
Figure 13-3 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead......................................................................13-5
Figure 13-4 SC1 front panel...............................................................................................................................13-7
Figure 13-5 Position of the SC2 in the WDM system......................................................................................13-11
Figure 13-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC2...........................................................................13-13
Figure 13-7 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead.................................................................... 13-13
Figure 13-8 SC2 front panel.............................................................................................................................13-15
Figure 14-1 Position of the DCP in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection).........................................14-3
Figure 14-2 Position of the DCP in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)..........................................14-4
Figure 14-3 Position of the DCP in the WDM system (OWSP protection).......................................................14-4
Figure 14-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCP............................................................................14-6
Figure 14-5 DCP front panel..............................................................................................................................14-8
Figure 14-6 Position of the OLP in the WDM system (optical line protection)..............................................14-14
Figure 14-7 Position of the OLP in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection).......................................14-15
Figure 14-8 Position of the OLP in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)........................................14-15
Figure 14-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the OLP..........................................................................14-17
Figure 14-10 OLP front panel..........................................................................................................................14-19
Figure 14-11 Position of the SCS in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection).......................................14-24
Figure 14-12 Position of the SCS in the WDM system (board-level protection with extended mode)...........14-24
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Figures
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxix
Figure 14-13 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCS.........................................................................14-25
Figure 14-14 SCS front panel...........................................................................................................................14-27
Figure 15-1 Position of the MCA4 in the WDM system...................................................................................15-2
Figure 15-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4.........................................................................15-4
Figure 15-3 MCA4 front panel...........................................................................................................................15-5
Figure 15-4 Position of the MCA8 in the WDM system...................................................................................15-9
Figure 15-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8.......................................................................15-10
Figure 15-6 MCA8 front panel.........................................................................................................................15-11
Figure 15-7 Position of the WMU in the WDM system..................................................................................15-15
Figure 15-8 Functional block diagram of the WMU........................................................................................15-16
Figure 15-9 WMU front panel..........................................................................................................................15-17
Figure 16-1 Position of the VA1 in the WDM system.......................................................................................16-3
Figure 16-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA1............................................................................16-4
Figure 16-3 VA1 front panel..............................................................................................................................16-6
Figure 16-4 Position of the VA4 in the WDM system.....................................................................................16-10
Figure 16-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA4..........................................................................16-11
Figure 16-6 VA4 front panel............................................................................................................................16-13
Figure 17-1 Position of the DCU in the WDM system......................................................................................17-3
Figure 17-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCU...........................................................................17-4
Figure 17-3 DCU front panel.............................................................................................................................17-5
Figure 17-4 Position of the GFU in the WDM system.......................................................................................17-8
Figure 17-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the GFU............................................................................17-9
Figure 17-6 GFU front panel............................................................................................................................17-11
Figure 18-1 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and cabinet BGND grounding cable..........................18-2
Figure 18-2 Structure of the cabinet PGND grounding cable............................................................................18-3
Figure 18-3 Structure of the subrack power cable..............................................................................................18-5
Figure 18-4 LC/PC fiber connector....................................................................................................................18-7
Figure 18-5 FC/PC fiber connector....................................................................................................................18-7
Figure 18-6 SC/PC fiber connector....................................................................................................................18-8
Figure 18-7 LSH/APC fiber connector..............................................................................................................18-8
Figure 18-8 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable................................................................................18-9
Figure 18-9 Structure of the PDU grounding cable.........................................................................................18-10
Figure 18-10 Structure of the cabinet indicator alarm cable............................................................................18-11
Figure 18-11 Alarm interface cable..................................................................................................................18-12
Figure 18-12 Structure of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable...................................18-14
Figure 18-13 Structure of the OAM serial port cable.......................................................................................18-15
Figure B-1 Description of the bar code (example 1)...........................................................................................B-3
Figure B-2 Description of the bar code (example 2)...........................................................................................B-3
Figures
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
xxx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Tables
Table 1-1 Full configuration of cabinets of different heights...............................................................................1-3
Table 1-2 Technical specifications of the cabinet................................................................................................1-3
Table 2-1 Technical specifications of the subrack...............................................................................................2-3
Table 2-2 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly................................................................................2-3
Table 2-3 Power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 6800.....................................................2-3
Table 2-4 Mapping between boards and slots of the OptiX OSN 6800 ..............................................................2-5
Table 2-5 Functions..............................................................................................................................................2-8
Table 2-6 Functions and features of the PIU......................................................................................................2-10
Table 2-7 Performance Indexes of the PIU Board..............................................................................................2-11
Table 2-8 Description of interfaces in the interface area....................................................................................2-13
Table 2-9 Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board.........................................................2-15
Table 2-10 Pin assignment of the COM interface..............................................................................................2-16
Table 2-11 Pin assignment of the ETH3 interface.............................................................................................2-17
Table 2-12 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces..................................................................2-18
Table 2-13 Pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces............................................................2-18
Table 2-14 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface.........................................................................................2-19
Table 2-15 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface...........................................................................................2-19
Table 2-16 Pin assignment of the ALMI2..........................................................................................................2-20
Table 2-17 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces..............................................................2-20
Table 2-18 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface......................................................................................2-20
Table 2-19 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH2 interface......................................................................................2-21
Table 2-20 Pin assignment of the ETH1 interface.............................................................................................2-22
Table 2-21 Pin assignment of the ETH2 interface.............................................................................................2-22
Table 3-1 Mechanical specifications of the CRPC frame....................................................................................3-3
Table 4-1 The board appearance and dimensions.................................................................................................4-2
Table 4-2 Laser levels...........................................................................................................................................4-4
Table 4-3 Board list..............................................................................................................................................4-7
Table 5-1 Functions and features of the ECOM...................................................................................................5-5
Table 5-2 Types and functions of the ECOM interfaces....................................................................................5-10
Table 5-3 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ECOM displayed on the NM................................................5-10
Table 5-4 Meaning of NM port of the ECOM....................................................................................................5-11
Table 5-5 Specifications of optical module at the client side(FE)......................................................................5-13
Table 5-6 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side (FE).............................................5-14
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Tables
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxxi
Table 5-7 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the CWDM side.................................................5-15
Table 5-8 Functions and features of the L4G.....................................................................................................5-18
Table 5-9 Types and functions of the L4G interfaces........................................................................................5-24
Table 5-10 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the L4G displayed on the NM..................................................5-24
Table 5-11 Meaning of NM port of the L4G......................................................................................................5-26
Table 5-12 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side.....................................................................5-28
Table 5-13 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...................................................5-29
Table 5-14 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side.......................................................................5-30
Table 5-15 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side.......................................................................5-31
Table 5-16 Functions and features of the LDGD...............................................................................................5-33
Table 5-17 Types and functions of the LDGD interfaces...................................................................................5-39
Table 5-18 Characteristic code for the LDGD...................................................................................................5-39
Table 5-19 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDGD displayed on the NM..............................................5-40
Table 5-20 Meaning of NM port of the LDGD..................................................................................................5-41
Table 5-21 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side.....................................................................5-42
Table 5-22 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...................................................5-44
Table 5-23 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side.......................................................................5-45
Table 5-24 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side.......................................................................5-46
Table 5-25 Functions and features of the LDGS................................................................................................5-48
Table 5-26 Types and functions of the LDGS interfaces...................................................................................5-53
Table 5-27 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDGS displayed on the NM...............................................5-54
Table 5-28 Meaning of NM port of the LDGS...................................................................................................5-55
Table 5-29 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side.....................................................................5-56
Table 5-30 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...................................................5-58
Table 5-31 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side.......................................................................5-59
Table 5-32 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side.......................................................................5-60
Table 5-33 Type description of the LDM...........................................................................................................5-62
Table 5-34 Functions and features of the LDM.................................................................................................5-63
Table 5-35 Types and functions of the TN12LDM interfaces...........................................................................5-69
Table 5-36 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDM displayed on the NM................................................5-70
Table 5-37 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side..................................................................5-71
Table 5-38 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side.....................................................................5-72
Table 5-39 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...................................................5-74
Table 5-40 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side...................................................5-75
Table 5-41 Functions and features of the LDMD...............................................................................................5-79
Table 5-42 Types and functions of the LDMD interfaces..................................................................................5-84
Table 5-43 Characteristic code for the LDMD...................................................................................................5-85
Table 5-44 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDMD displayed on the NM.............................................5-85
Table 5-45 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side..................................................................5-86
Table 5-46 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side.....................................................................5-88
Table 5-47 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...................................................5-89
Table 5-48 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side...................................................5-90
Tables
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
xxxii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-49 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side.......................................................................5-91
Table 5-50 Functions and features of the LDMS...............................................................................................5-94
Table 5-51 Types and functions of the LDMS interfaces..................................................................................5-99
Table 5-52 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDMS displayed on the NM............................................5-100
Table 5-53 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side................................................................5-101
Table 5-54 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side...................................................................5-102
Table 5-55 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side.................................................5-104
Table 5-56 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side.................................................5-105
Table 5-57 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side.....................................................................5-106
Table 5-58 Functions and features of the LOG................................................................................................5-108
Table 5-59 Types and functions of the LOG interfaces...................................................................................5-113
Table 5-60 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LOG displayed on the NM...............................................5-114
Table 5-61 Meaning of NM port of the LOG...................................................................................................5-115
Table 5-62 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side...................................................................5-116
Table 5-63 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side.................................................5-117
Table 5-64 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side...........................................................5-119
Table 5-65 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side........................................................5-120
Table 5-66 Functions and features of the LOM...............................................................................................5-123
Table 5-67 Types and functions of the LOM interfaces...................................................................................5-129
Table 5-68 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LOM displayed on the NM..............................................5-130
Table 5-69 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side...................................................................5-131
Table 5-70 Specifications of FC optical module at the client side...................................................................5-132
Table 5-71 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side.................................................5-133
Table 5-72 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side...........................................................5-134
Table 5-73 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side........................................................5-135
Table 5-74 Functions and features of the LQG................................................................................................5-138
Table 5-75 Types and functions of the LQG interfaces...................................................................................5-144
Table 5-76 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQG displayed on the NM...............................................5-144
Table 5-77 Meaning of NM port of the LQG...................................................................................................5-146
Table 5-78 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side...................................................................5-147
Table 5-79 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side.................................................5-149
Table 5-80 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side.....................................................................5-150
Table 5-81 Type description of the LQM.........................................................................................................5-152
Table 5-82 Functions and features of the LQM...............................................................................................5-153
Table 5-83 Types and functions of the LQM interfaces...................................................................................5-159
Table 5-84 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQM displayed on the NM..............................................5-160
Table 5-85 Meaning of NM port of the LQM..................................................................................................5-161
Table 5-86 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side................................................................5-164
Table 5-87 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side...................................................................5-165
Table 5-88 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side.................................................5-167
Table 5-89 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side.................................................5-168
Table 5-90 Version description of the LQMD.................................................................................................5-171
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Tables
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxxiii
Table 5-91 Functions and features of the LQMD.............................................................................................5-173
Table 5-92 Types and functions of the LQMD interfaces................................................................................5-179
Table 5-93 Characteristic code for the LQMD.................................................................................................5-179
Table 5-94 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQMD displayed on the NM...........................................5-180
Table 5-95 Meaning of NM port of the LQMD...............................................................................................5-181
Table 5-96 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side................................................................5-184
Table 5-97 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side...................................................................5-185
Table 5-98 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side.................................................5-187
Table 5-99 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side.................................................5-188
Table 5-100 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side...................................................................5-189
Table 5-101 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side...................................................................5-190
Table 5-102 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side...................................................................5-191
Table 5-103 Version description of the LQMS................................................................................................5-193
Table 5-104 Functions and features of the LQMS...........................................................................................5-195
Table 5-105 Types and functions of the LQMS interfaces..............................................................................5-202
Table 5-106 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQMS displayed on the NM..........................................5-203
Table 5-107 Meaning of NM port of the LQMS..............................................................................................5-204
Table 5-108 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side..............................................................5-207
Table 5-109 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side.................................................................5-209
Table 5-110 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...............................................5-210
Table 5-111 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side...............................................5-211
Table 5-112 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side...................................................................5-212
Table 5-113 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side...................................................................5-214
Table 5-114 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side...................................................................5-215
Table 5-115 Version description of the LSX....................................................................................................5-217
Table 5-116 Functions and features of the LSX...............................................................................................5-218
Table 5-117 Types and functions of the LSX interfaces..................................................................................5-224
Table 5-118 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSX displayed on the NM..............................................5-224
Table 5-119 Specifications of optical module at the client side.......................................................................5-225
Table 5-120 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side.........................................................5-227
Table 5-121 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side......................................................5-228
Table 5-122 Functions and features of the LSXL............................................................................................5-231
Table 5-123 Types and functions of the LSXL interfaces................................................................................5-236
Table 5-124 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXL displayed on the NM...........................................5-237
Table 5-125 Specifications of optical module at the client side.......................................................................5-238
Table 5-126 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side...................................................................5-238
Table 5-127 Functions and features of the LSXLR..........................................................................................5-241
Table 5-128 Types and functions of the LSXLR interfaces.............................................................................5-245
Table 5-129 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXLR displayed on the NM........................................5-246
Table 5-130 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side...................................................................5-246
Table 5-131 Functions and features of the LSXR............................................................................................5-249
Table 5-132 Types and functions of the LSXR interfaces...............................................................................5-253
Tables
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
xxxiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-133 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXR displayed on the NM...........................................5-254
Table 5-134 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side.........................................................5-254
Table 5-135 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side......................................................5-255
Table 5-136 Functions and features of the LWX2...........................................................................................5-258
Table 5-137 Types and functions of the LWX2 interfaces...............................................................................5-263
Table 5-138 Characteristic code for the LWX2...............................................................................................5-263
Table 5-139 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWX2 displayed on the NM..........................................5-264
Table 5-140 Specifications of optical module at the client side.......................................................................5-265
Table 5-141 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...............................................5-266
Table 5-142 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side...............................................5-267
Table 5-143 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side...................................................................5-268
Table 5-144 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side...................................................................5-270
Table 5-145 Functions and features of the LWXD..........................................................................................5-272
Table 5-146 Types and functions of the LWXD interfaces..............................................................................5-277
Table 5-147 Characteristic code for the LWXD...............................................................................................5-277
Table 5-148 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWXD displayed on the NM.........................................5-278
Table 5-149 Specifications of optical module at the client side.......................................................................5-279
Table 5-150 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...............................................5-280
Table 5-151 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side...............................................5-281
Table 5-152 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side...................................................................5-282
Table 5-153 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side...................................................................5-283
Table 5-154 Version description of the LWXS................................................................................................5-285
Table 5-155 Functions and features of the LWXS...........................................................................................5-286
Table 5-156 Types and functions of the LWXS interfaces..............................................................................5-291
Table 5-157 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWXS displayed on the NM..........................................5-291
Table 5-158 Specifications of optical module at the client side.......................................................................5-292
Table 5-159 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...............................................5-294
Table 5-160 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side...............................................5-295
Table 5-161 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side...................................................................5-296
Table 5-162 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side...................................................................5-297
Table 5-163 Functions and features of the TMX.............................................................................................5-299
Table 5-164 Types and functions of the TMX interfaces.................................................................................5-305
Table 5-165 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TMX displayed on the NM............................................5-305
Table 5-166 Specifications of optical module at the client side.......................................................................5-306
Table 5-167 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...............................................5-308
Table 5-168 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side...............................................5-309
Table 5-169 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side.........................................................5-309
Table 5-170 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side......................................................5-310
Table 6-1 Functions and features of the ND2.......................................................................................................6-3
Table 6-2 Types and functions of the ND2 interfaces..........................................................................................6-8
Table 6-3 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ND2 displayed on the NM.....................................................6-8
Table 6-4 Meaning of NM port of the ND2.......................................................................................................6-10
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Tables
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxxv
Table 6-5 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side...............................................................6-12
Table 6-6 Version description of the NS2..........................................................................................................6-14
Table 6-7 Functions and features of the NS2.....................................................................................................6-15
Table 6-8 Types and functions of the NS2 interfaces........................................................................................6-22
Table 6-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the NS2 displayed on the NM....................................................6-22
Table 6-10 Meaning of NM port of the NS2......................................................................................................6-24
Table 6-11 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side.............................................................6-26
Table 6-12 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side..........................................................6-27
Table 6-13 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side.............................................................6-28
Table 6-14 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side..........................................................6-29
Table 6-15 Functions and features of the TBE...................................................................................................6-32
Table 6-16 Types and functions of the TBE interfaces......................................................................................6-39
Table 6-17 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TBE displayed on the NM..................................................6-39
Table 6-18 Meaning of NM port of the TBE......................................................................................................6-40
Table 6-19 Specifications of optical module at the client side(FE)....................................................................6-42
Table 6-20 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side.....................................................................6-42
Table 6-21 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...................................................6-44
Table 6-22 Specifications of XFP optical module at the client side..................................................................6-45
Table 6-23 Functions and features of the TDG..................................................................................................6-47
Table 6-24 Types and functions of the TDG interfaces.....................................................................................6-52
Table 6-25 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TDG displayed on the NM.................................................6-52
Table 6-26 Meaning of NM port of the TDG.....................................................................................................6-53
Table 6-27 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side.....................................................................6-55
Table 6-28 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...................................................6-56
Table 6-29 Version description of the TDX.......................................................................................................6-58
Table 6-30 Functions and features of the TDX..................................................................................................6-59
Table 6-31 Types and functions of the TDX interfaces.....................................................................................6-65
Table 6-32 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TDX displayed on the NM.................................................6-65
Table 6-33 Meaning of NM port of the TDX.....................................................................................................6-66
Table 6-34 Specifications of XFP optical module at the client side..................................................................6-68
Table 6-35 Functions and features of the TOM.................................................................................................6-74
Table 6-36 Types and functions of the TOM interfaces.....................................................................................6-87
Table 6-37 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TOM displayed on the NM................................................6-87
Table 6-38 Meaning of NM port of the TOM (connect mode)..........................................................................6-88
Table 6-39 Meaning of NM port of the TOM (alone mode)..............................................................................6-89
Table 6-40 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side..................................................................6-94
Table 6-41 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side.....................................................................6-96
Table 6-42 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...................................................6-97
Table 6-43 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side...................................................6-98
Table 6-44 Version description of the TQM....................................................................................................6-102
Table 6-45 Functions and features of the TQM...............................................................................................6-103
Table 6-46 Types and functions of the TQM interfaces...................................................................................6-108
Tables
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
xxxvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 6-47 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TQM displayed on the NM..............................................6-109
Table 6-48 Meaning of NM port of the TQM..................................................................................................6-110
Table 6-49 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side................................................................6-113
Table 6-50 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side...................................................................6-114
Table 6-51 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side.................................................6-116
Table 6-52 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side.................................................6-117
Table 6-53 Functions and features of the TQS.................................................................................................6-119
Table 6-54 Types and functions of the TQS interfaces....................................................................................6-124
Table 6-55 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TQS displayed on the NM................................................6-124
Table 6-56 Meaning of NM port of the TQS....................................................................................................6-125
Table 6-57 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side................................................................6-126
Table 6-58 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side.................................................6-128
Table 6-59 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side.................................................6-128
Table 6-60 Functions and features of the TQX................................................................................................6-131
Table 6-61 Types and functions of the TQX interfaces...................................................................................6-135
Table 6-62 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TQX displayed on the NM...............................................6-135
Table 6-63 Meaning of NM port of the TQX...................................................................................................6-136
Table 6-64 Specifications of XFP optical module at the client side................................................................6-137
Table 6-65 Functions and features of the TSXL..............................................................................................6-140
Table 6-66 Types and functions of the TSXL interfaces..................................................................................6-144
Table 6-67 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TSXL displayed on the NM.............................................6-144
Table 6-68 Meaning of NM port of the TSXL.................................................................................................6-145
Table 6-69 Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side......................................................................6-146
Table 7-1 Version description of the XCS...........................................................................................................7-2
Table 7-2 Functions and features of the XCS.......................................................................................................7-3
Table 8-1 Type description of the M40................................................................................................................8-2
Table 8-2 Functions and features of the M40.......................................................................................................8-3
Table 8-3 Types and functions of the M40 interfaces..........................................................................................8-6
Table 8-4 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11M4001 board
(C_EVEN).............................................................................................................................................................8-6
Table 8-5 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11M4002 board
(C_ODD)...............................................................................................................................................................8-7
Table 8-6 Characteristic code for the M40...........................................................................................................8-9
Table 8-7 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40 displayed on the NM......................................................8-9
Table 8-8 Optical specifications of the M40......................................................................................................8-10
Table 8-9 Type description of the M40V...........................................................................................................8-11
Table 8-10 Functions and features of the M40V................................................................................................8-12
Table 8-11 Types and functions of the M40V interfaces...................................................................................8-15
Table 8-12 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the M40V board (even)
.............................................................................................................................................................................8-15
Table 8-13 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the M40V board (odd)
.............................................................................................................................................................................8-16
Table 8-14 Characteristic code for the M40V....................................................................................................8-18
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Tables
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxxvii
Table 8-15 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40V displayed on the NM...............................................8-18
Table 8-16 Optical specifications of the M40V.................................................................................................8-19
Table 8-17 Type description of the D40.............................................................................................................8-20
Table 8-18 Functions and features of the D40...................................................................................................8-21
Table 8-19 Types and functions of the D40 interfaces.......................................................................................8-24
Table 8-20 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D4001 board
(C_EVEN)...........................................................................................................................................................8-24
Table 8-21 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D4002 board
(C_ODD).............................................................................................................................................................8-25
Table 8-22 Characteristic code for the D40........................................................................................................8-27
Table 8-23 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40 displayed on the NM..................................................8-27
Table 8-24 Optical specifications of the D40.....................................................................................................8-28
Table 8-25 Type description of the D40V..........................................................................................................8-29
Table 8-26 Functions and features of the D40V.................................................................................................8-30
Table 8-27 Types and functions of the D40V interfaces....................................................................................8-33
Table 8-28 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D40V01 board
(C_EVEN)...........................................................................................................................................................8-33
Table 8-29 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D40V02 board
(C_ODD).............................................................................................................................................................8-34
Table 8-30 Characteristic code for the D40V.....................................................................................................8-36
Table 8-31 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40v displayed on the NM................................................8-36
Table 8-32 Optical specifications of the D40V..................................................................................................8-37
Table 8-33 Version description of the FIU.........................................................................................................8-38
Table 8-34 Functions and features of the FIU....................................................................................................8-39
Table 8-35 Types and functions of the FIU interfaces.......................................................................................8-42
Table 8-36 Characteristic code for the FIU........................................................................................................8-43
Table 8-37 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the FIU displayed on the NM...................................................8-43
Table 8-38 Optical specifications of the FIU.....................................................................................................8-44
Table 8-39 Version description of the ITL.........................................................................................................8-45
Table 8-40 Functions and features of the ITL....................................................................................................8-47
Table 8-41 Types and functions of the ITL interfaces.......................................................................................8-51
Table 8-42 Characteristic code for the ITL........................................................................................................8-52
Table 8-43 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ITL displayed on the NM...................................................8-52
Table 8-44 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL............................................................................................8-53
Table 8-45 Optical specifications of the TN12ITL............................................................................................8-53
Table 9-1 Functions and features of the CMR2...................................................................................................9-3
Table 9-2 Types and functions of the CMR2 interfaces.......................................................................................9-5
Table 9-3 Characteristic code for the CMR2........................................................................................................9-6
Table 9-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR2 displayed on the NM..................................................9-7
Table 9-5 Optical specifications of the CMR2.....................................................................................................9-7
Table 9-6 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the CMR2...........................................................................9-8
Table 9-7 Functions and features of the CMR4.................................................................................................9-10
Table 9-8 Types and functions of the CMR4 interfaces.....................................................................................9-13
Tables
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
xxxviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 9-9 Characteristic code for the CMR4......................................................................................................9-13
Table 9-10 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR4 displayed on the NM..............................................9-14
Table 9-11 Optical specifications of the CMR4.................................................................................................9-15
Table 9-12 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the CMR4.......................................................................9-16
Table 9-13 Functions and features of the DMR1 board.....................................................................................9-17
Table 9-14 Types and functions of the DMR1 interfaces..................................................................................9-20
Table 9-15 Characteristic code for the DMR1...................................................................................................9-21
Table 9-16 Number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the DMR1 board.....................................9-22
Table 9-17 Optical specifications of the DMR1.................................................................................................9-22
Table 9-18 Functions and features of the MR2..................................................................................................9-24
Table 9-19 Types and functions of the MR2 interfaces.....................................................................................9-27
Table 9-20 Characteristic code for the MR2......................................................................................................9-28
Table 9-21 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR2 displayed on the NM.................................................9-29
Table 9-22 Optical specifications of the MR2....................................................................................................9-29
Table 9-23 Functions and features of the MR4..................................................................................................9-32
Table 9-24 Types and functions of the MR4 interfaces.....................................................................................9-34
Table 9-25 Characteristic code for the MR4......................................................................................................9-35
Table 9-26 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR4 displayed on the NM.................................................9-36
Table 9-27 Optical specifications of the MR4....................................................................................................9-37
Table 9-28 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the MR4..........................................................................9-37
Table 9-29 Functions and features of the MR8..................................................................................................9-39
Table 9-30 Types and functions of the MR8 interfaces.....................................................................................9-42
Table 9-31 Characteristic code for the MR8......................................................................................................9-43
Table 9-32 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR8 displayed on the NM.................................................9-43
Table 9-33 Optical specifications of the MR8....................................................................................................9-44
Table 9-34 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8..........................................................................9-45
Table 9-35 Functions and features of the SBM2................................................................................................9-47
Table 9-36 Types and functions of the SBM2 interfaces...................................................................................9-49
Table 9-37 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SBM2 displayed on the NM...............................................9-50
Table 9-38 Optical specifications of the SBM2.................................................................................................9-51
Table 10-1 Type description of the RMU9........................................................................................................10-2
Table 10-2 Functions and features of the RMU9...............................................................................................10-4
Table 10-3 Types and functions of the RMU9 interfaces..................................................................................10-8
Table 10-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RMU9 displayed on the NM..............................................10-9
Table 10-5 Optical specifications of the RMU9.................................................................................................10-9
Table 10-6 Type description of the ROAM......................................................................................................10-11
Table 10-7 Functions and features of the ROAM............................................................................................10-12
Table 10-8 Types and functions of the ROAM interfaces................................................................................10-15
Table 10-9 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM board (even)
...........................................................................................................................................................................10-15
Table 10-10 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM board (odd)
...........................................................................................................................................................................10-16
Table 10-11 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ROAM displayed on the NM.........................................10-17
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Tables
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxxix
Table 10-12 Optical specifications of the ROAM............................................................................................10-18
Table 10-13 Version description of the WSD9................................................................................................10-19
Table 10-14 Type description of the WSD9.....................................................................................................10-20
Table 10-15 Functions and features of the WSD9...........................................................................................10-21
Table 10-16 Types and functions of the WSD9 interfaces...............................................................................10-25
Table 10-17 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSD9 displayed on the NM..........................................10-26
Table 10-18 Optical specifications of the WSD9.............................................................................................10-26
Table 10-19 Version description of the WSM9................................................................................................10-29
Table 10-20 Type description of the WSM9....................................................................................................10-29
Table 10-21 Functions and features of the WSM9...........................................................................................10-30
Table 10-22 Types and functions of the WSM9 interfaces..............................................................................10-34
Table 10-23 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSM9 displayed on the NM..........................................10-35
Table 10-24 Optical specifications of the WSM9............................................................................................10-35
Table 10-25 Version description of the WSMD4.............................................................................................10-38
Table 10-26 Functions and features of the WSMD4........................................................................................10-39
Table 10-27 Types and functions of the WSMD4 interfaces...........................................................................10-43
Table 10-28 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSMD4 displayed on the NM.......................................10-44
Table 10-29 Optical specifications of the WSMD4.........................................................................................10-44
Table 11-1 Type description of the CRPC.........................................................................................................11-3
Table 11-2 Functions and features of the CRPC................................................................................................11-4
Table 11-3 Types and functions of the CRPC interfaces...................................................................................11-8
Table 11-4 Characteristic code for the CRPC....................................................................................................11-9
Table 11-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CRPC displayed on the NM.............................................11-10
Table 11-6 Optical specifications of the CRPC................................................................................................11-10
Table 11-7 Functions and features of the HBA................................................................................................11-13
Table 11-8 Types and functions of the HBA interfaces...................................................................................11-16
Table 11-9 Characteristic code for the HBA....................................................................................................11-17
Table 11-10 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the HBA displayed on the NM.............................................11-17
Table 11-11 Optical specifications of the HBA...............................................................................................11-18
Table 11-12 Type description of the OAU1.....................................................................................................11-20
Table 11-13 Functions and features of the OAU1............................................................................................11-20
Table 11-14 Types and functions of the OAU1 interfaces...............................................................................11-25
Table 11-15 Characteristic code for the OAU1................................................................................................11-25
Table 11-16 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OAU1 displayed on the NM..........................................11-26
Table 11-17 Optical specifications of the OAU101.........................................................................................11-27
Table 11-18 Optical specifications of the OAU102.........................................................................................11-28
Table 11-19 Optical specifications of the OAU103.........................................................................................11-28
Table 11-20 Optical specifications of the OAU105.........................................................................................11-29
Table 11-21 Type description of the OBU1.....................................................................................................11-31
Table 11-22 Functions and features of the OBU1............................................................................................11-32
Table 11-23 Types and functions of the OBU1 interfaces...............................................................................11-36
Table 11-24 Characteristic code for the OBU1................................................................................................11-36
Tables
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
xl Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 11-25 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OBU1 displayed on the NM...........................................11-37
Table 11-26 Optical specifications of the OBU1.............................................................................................11-37
Table 11-27 Functions and features of the OBU2............................................................................................11-40
Table 11-28 Types and functions of the OBU2 interfaces...............................................................................11-44
Table 11-29 Characteristic code for the OBU2................................................................................................11-44
Table 11-30 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OBU2 displayed on the NM...........................................11-45
Table 11-31 Optical specifications of the OBU2.............................................................................................11-45
Table 12-1 Functions and features of the SCC...................................................................................................12-3
Table 12-2 Functions of the SCC buttons..........................................................................................................12-6
Table 12-3 Function of the SCC LED indicator.................................................................................................12-6
Table 12-4 Functions and features of the AUX..................................................................................................12-8
Table 12-5 Types and functions of the AUX interfaces...................................................................................12-10
Table 13-1 Version description of the SC1........................................................................................................13-2
Table 13-2 Functions and features of the SC1...................................................................................................13-4
Table 13-3 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC....................................................................13-6
Table 13-4 Types and functions of the SC1 interfaces.......................................................................................13-8
Table 13-5 Characteristic code for the SC1........................................................................................................13-8
Table 13-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC1 displayed on the NM..................................................13-9
Table 13-7 Optical specifications of the SC1...................................................................................................13-10
Table 13-8 Version description of the SC2......................................................................................................13-11
Table 13-9 Functions and features of the SC2.................................................................................................13-12
Table 13-10 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC................................................................13-14
Table 13-11 Types and functions of the SC2 interfaces...................................................................................13-16
Table 13-12 Characteristic code for the SC2....................................................................................................13-16
Table 13-13 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC2 displayed on the NM..............................................13-17
Table 13-14 Optical specifications of the SC2.................................................................................................13-18
Table 14-1 Version description of the DCP.......................................................................................................14-2
Table 14-2 Type description of the DCP............................................................................................................14-3
Table 14-3 Functions and features of the DCP...................................................................................................14-5
Table 14-4 Types and functions of the DCP interfaces......................................................................................14-9
Table 14-5 Characteristic code for the DCP.....................................................................................................14-11
Table 14-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCP displayed on the NM...............................................14-11
Table 14-7 Optical specifications of the DCP..................................................................................................14-12
Table 14-8 Version description of the OLP......................................................................................................14-14
Table 14-9 Type description of the OLP..........................................................................................................14-14
Table 14-10 Functions and features of the OLP...............................................................................................14-16
Table 14-11 Types and functions of the OLP interfaces..................................................................................14-20
Table 14-12 Characteristic code for the OLP...................................................................................................14-21
Table 14-13 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OLP displayed on the NM..............................................14-21
Table 14-14 Optical specifications of the OLP................................................................................................14-22
Table 14-15 Type description of the SCS........................................................................................................14-23
Table 14-16 Functions and features of the SCS...............................................................................................14-24
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Tables
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xli
Table 14-17 Types and functions of the SCS interfaces..................................................................................14-27
Table 14-18 Characteristic code for the SCS...................................................................................................14-28
Table 14-19 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SCS displayed on the NM..............................................14-29
Table 14-20 Optical specifications of the SCS.................................................................................................14-29
Table 15-1 Functions and features of the MCA4...............................................................................................15-3
Table 15-2 Types and functions of the MCA4 interfaces..................................................................................15-6
Table 15-3 Characteristic code for the MCA4...................................................................................................15-6
Table 15-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA4 displayed on the NM..............................................15-7
Table 15-5 Optical specifications of the MCA4.................................................................................................15-7
Table 15-6 Functions and features of the MCA8...............................................................................................15-9
Table 15-7 Types and functions of the MCA8 interfaces................................................................................15-12
Table 15-8 Characteristic code for the MCA8.................................................................................................15-12
Table 15-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA8 displayed on the NM............................................15-13
Table 15-10 Optical specifications of the MCA8.............................................................................................15-13
Table 15-11 Functions and features of the WMU............................................................................................15-15
Table 15-12 Types and functions of the WMU interfaces...............................................................................15-18
Table 15-13 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WMU displayed on the NM...........................................15-18
Table 15-14 Optical specifications of the WMU..............................................................................................15-19
Table 16-1 Version description of the VA1.......................................................................................................16-2
Table 16-2 Functions and features of the VA1...................................................................................................16-3
Table 16-3 Types and functions of the VA1 interfaces......................................................................................16-7
Table 16-4 Characteristic code for the VA1.......................................................................................................16-7
Table 16-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA1 displayed on the NM.................................................16-7
Table 16-6 Optical specifications of the VA1....................................................................................................16-8
Table 16-7 Version description of the VA4.....................................................................................................16-10
Table 16-8 Functions and features of the VA4.................................................................................................16-10
Table 16-9 Types and functions of the VA4 interfaces ...................................................................................16-14
Table 16-10 Characteristic code for the VA4...................................................................................................16-14
Table 16-11 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA4 displayed on the NM.............................................16-14
Table 16-12 Optical specifications of the VA4................................................................................................16-15
Table 17-1 Functions and features of the DCU..................................................................................................17-3
Table 17-2 Types and functions of the DCU interfaces.....................................................................................17-5
Table 17-3 Characteristic code for the DCU......................................................................................................17-6
Table 17-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCU displayed on the NM.................................................17-6
Table 17-5 Optical specifications of the DCU...................................................................................................17-7
Table 17-6 Functions and features of the GFU..................................................................................................17-9
Table 17-7 Types and functions of the GFU interfaces....................................................................................17-11
Table 17-8 Characteristic code for the GFU....................................................................................................17-12
Table 17-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the GFU displayed on the NM...............................................17-12
Table 17-10 Optical specifications of the GFU................................................................................................17-13
Table 18-1 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables(16 mm
2
).....................................18-3
Table 18-2 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables(25 mm
2
).....................................18-3
Tables
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
xlii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 18-3 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables (35 mm
2
)....................................18-4
Table 18-4 Technical parameters of the cabinet PGND power cables...............................................................18-4
Table 18-5 Pin assignment of the subrack power cables....................................................................................18-5
Table 18-6 Technical parameters of subrack power cables................................................................................18-5
Table 18-7 Classification of optical fiber jumpers.............................................................................................18-6
Table 18-8 Classification of fiber connectors.....................................................................................................18-7
Table 18-9 Technical parameters of the cabinet door grounding cables............................................................18-9
Table 18-10 Technical parameters of the PDU grounding cable.....................................................................18-10
Table 18-11 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable....................................................................18-11
Table 18-12 Technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable..........................................................18-12
Table 18-13 Pin assignment of X1 ..................................................................................................................18-13
Table 18-14 Technical parameters of the alarm interface cable.......................................................................18-13
Table 18-15 Pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable...........................18-14
Table 18-16 Technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable.................18-14
Table 18-17 Pin assignment of the OAM serial port........................................................................................18-15
Table 18-18 Technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable....................................................................18-16
Table A-1 Indicators description of the cabinet...................................................................................................A-2
Table A-2 Indicators description of the subrack..................................................................................................A-2
Table A-3 Indicator description of the boards.....................................................................................................A-3
Table A-4 Indicator description of the SCC board..............................................................................................A-4
Table A-5 Indicator description of the FAN........................................................................................................A-6
Table A-6 Indicators description of the PIU........................................................................................................A-6
Table B-1 Characteristic code for a DWDM OTU..............................................................................................B-4
Table B-2 Types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules..........................................................................B-4
Table B-3 Characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU.............................................................B-6
Table B-4 Types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules............................................................................B-6
Table B-5 Characteristic code for a CWDM OTU..............................................................................................B-7
Table B-6 Characteristic code for the CMR2......................................................................................................B-8
Table B-7 Characteristic code for the CMR4......................................................................................................B-8
Table B-8 Characteristic code for the DMR1......................................................................................................B-9
Table B-9 Characteristic code for the MR2.......................................................................................................B-10
Table B-10 Characteristic code for the MR4.....................................................................................................B-10
Table B-11 Characteristic code for the MR8.....................................................................................................B-11
Table B-12 Characteristic code for the MCA4..................................................................................................B-12
Table B-13 Characteristic code for the MCA8..................................................................................................B-12
Table B-14 Characteristic code for the HBA.....................................................................................................B-13
Table B-15 Characteristic code for the OAU1..................................................................................................B-13
Table B-16 Characteristic code for the OBU1...................................................................................................B-14
Table B-17 Characteristic code for the OBU2...................................................................................................B-15
Table B-18 Characteristic code for the CRPC...................................................................................................B-15
Table B-19 Characteristic code for the D40......................................................................................................B-16
Table B-20 Characteristic code for the D40V...................................................................................................B-17
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Tables
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xliii
Table B-21 Characteristic code for the FIU.......................................................................................................B-17
Table B-22 Characteristic code for the ITL.......................................................................................................B-18
Table B-23 Characteristic code for the M40......................................................................................................B-18
Table B-24 Characteristic code for the M40V...................................................................................................B-19
Table B-25 Characteristic code for the DCP.....................................................................................................B-19
Table B-26 Characteristic code for the OLP......................................................................................................B-20
Table B-27 Characteristic code for the SCS......................................................................................................B-20
Table B-28 Characteristic code for the VA1.....................................................................................................B-21
Table B-29 Characteristic code for the VA4.....................................................................................................B-21
Table B-30 Characteristic code for the DCU.....................................................................................................B-22
Table B-31 Characteristic code for the GFU.....................................................................................................B-22
Table D-1 Quick reference table for client-side specifications of OTU boards..................................................D-2
Table D-2 Quick reference table for DWDM-side specifications of OTU boards............................................D-17
Table D-3 Quick reference table for CWDM-side specifications of OTU boards............................................D-23
Table D-4 Quick reference table for optical amplifying unit............................................................................D-24
Table D-5 Quick reference table for CRPC ......................................................................................................D-25
Table D-6 Quick reference table for HBA.........................................................................................................D-26
Table D-7 Quick reference table for specifications of other boards..................................................................D-26
Table D-8 Ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals of each type of board
............................................................................................................................................................................D-29
Table D-9 Basic functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards.............................................................D-29
Table D-10 Loopback function of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards......................................................D-32
Table D-11 Loop function of the Ethernet boards.............................................................................................D-33
Table D-12 Protection mode of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards..........................................................D-34
Table D-13 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards ........................................D-36
Table E-1 Power consumption, weight and valid slots of the OptiX OSN 6800 boards.....................................E-1
Tables
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
xliv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
About This Document
Purpose
The OptiX OSN 6800 Hardware Description describes the hardware architecture and
composition of the equipment, including boards, interfaces, as well as their functions and
parameters.
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01
OptiX iManager T2000 V200R007C01

Intended Audience
The intended audiences of this document are:
l Network Planning Engineer
l Hardware Installation Engineer
l Installation and Commissioning Engineer
l Field Maintenance Engineer
l Network Monitoring Engineer
l Data Configuration Engineer
l System Maintenance Engineer
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description About This Document
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
Organization
This document describes the cabinet, subrack, overview of boards and the function and the
working principle of all the units.
Chapter Description
Chapter 1 Cabinet This chapter describes the mechanical structure and technical
specifications of the cabinet.
Chapter 2 Subrack This chapter describes the mechanical structure, technical
specifications, and interfaces of the subrack.
Chapter 3 Frame This chapter describes the structure of the DCM frame and
CRPC frame.
Chapter 4 Overview of
Boards
This chapter describes the classification and appearance of
boards.
Chapter 5 Optical
Transponder Unit
This chapter describes the function and the working principle of
optical transponder units.
Chapter 6 Tributary Unit
and Line Unit
This chapter describes the function and the working principle of
tributary units and line unit.
Chapter 7 Cross-Connect
Unit
This chapter describes the function and the working principle of
cross-connect Units.
Chapter 8 Optical
Multiplexer and
Demultiplexer Unit
This chapter describes the function and the working principle of
optical multiplexer and demultiplexer units.
Chapter 9 Optical Add and
Drop Multiplexing Unit
This chapter describes the function and the working principle of
optical add and drop multiplexing units.
Chapter 10
Reconfigurable Optical
Add and Drop
Multiplexing Unit
This chapter describes the function and the working principle of
reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing units.
Chapter 11 Optical
Amplifying Unit
This chapter describes the function and the working principle of
optical amplifier units.
Chapter 12 System
Control and
Communication Unit
This chapter describes the function and the working principle of
system control and communication units.
Chapter 13 Optical
Supervisory Channel Unit
This chapter describes the function and the working principle of
optical supervisory channel units.
Chapter 14 Optical
Protection Unit
This chapter describes the function and the working principle of
optical protection units.
Chapter 15 Spectrum
Analyzer Unit
This chapter describes the function and the working principle of
spectrum analyzer units.
About This Document
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Chapter Description
Chapter 16 Variable
Optical Attenuator Unit
This chapter describes the function and the working principle of
variable optical attenuator units.
Chapter 17 Optical Power
and Dispersion Equalizing
Unit
This chapter describes the function and the working principle of
optical power and dispersion equalizing unit.
Chapter 18 Cables This chapter describes the cables of the OptiX OSN 6800.
Appendix A Indicators This chapter describes the indicators of the OptiX OSN 6800.
Appendix B Bar Code for
Boards
This chapter describes the bar codes of the boards used in the
OptiX OSN 6800.
Appendix C Parameter
Description
This chapter describes the parameters of the boards used in the
OptiX OSN 6800.
Appendix D Quick
Reference Table of the
Units
This chapter describes the basic function of the optical
transponder units and the tributary and line unit and the
specifications of the boards used in the OptiX OSN 6800.
Appendix E Power
Consumption, Weight and
Valid Slots of Boards
This chapter describes the power consumption, weight and slots
of the boards used in the OptiX OSN 6800.
Appendix F Glossary This appendix lists the terms that are used in this document.
Appendix G Acronyms
and Abbreviations
This appendix lists the acronyms and abbreviations that are used
in this document.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows
Symbol Description
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which,
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not
avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description About This Document
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
Symbol Description
TIP
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
you time.
NOTE
Provides additional information to emphasize or
supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For
example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.
Courier New Terminal display is in Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }
*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
About This Document
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles
are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Format Description
Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means
the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Action Description
Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving
the pointer.
Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and
quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.

Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version
contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Based on Product Version V100R004C01
The update of contents is described as follows:
l Some bugs in the manual are fixed.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description About This Document
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
Updates in Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Based on Product Version V100R004C01
The update of contents is described as follows:
l Chapter 5 Optical Transponder Unit:
Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the TN12LDM, TN11LDMD,
TN11LDMS, TN11LQG, TN13LQM, TN12LQMD, TN12LQMS are added.
l Chapter 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit:
Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the TN11ND2, TN12NS2,
TN12TDX, TN11TQX, TN11TOM, TN12TQM are added.
l Chapter 7 Cross-Connect Unit:
Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the TN12XCS are added.
l Chapter 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit:
Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the TN11D08, TN11M08, TN12ITL
are added.
l Chapter 11 Optical Amplifying Unit:
Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the TN11OAU102, TN11OAU105
are added.
l Chapter 13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit:
Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the TN12SC1, TN12SC2 are added.
l Chapter 14 Optical Protection Unit:
Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the TN12DCP, TN12OLP are added.
l Chapter 17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit:
Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the TN11GFU are added.
Updates in Issue 03 (2008-03-08) Based on Product Version V100R003
The update of contents is described as follows:
l Some bugs in the manual are fixed.
Updates in Issue 02 (2008-01-21) Based on Product Version V100R003
The update of contents is described as follows:
l Some bugs in the manual are fixed.
Updates in Issue 01 (2007-12-25) Based on Product Version V100R003
The update of contents is described as follows:
l Chapter 2 Subrack:
Power consumption of the common units is added.
l Chapter 3 Frame:
CRPC frame is added.
l Chapter 5 Optical Transponder Unit:
Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the ECOM, LOG, LOM, LSXL,
LSXLR, TMX boards are added.
l Chapter 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit:
About This Document
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the TBE and TDX boards are added.
l Chapter 8: Optical Mutiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the ITL board are added.
l Chapter 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit:
Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the SBM2 board is added.
l Chapter 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit:
Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the WSMD4 board is added.
l Chapter 11 Optical Amplifying Unit:
Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the OBU2 and HBA boards are added.
l Chapter 15: Spectrum Analyzer Unit
Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the WMU board are added.
l Chapter 16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the TN12VA1 and TN12VA4 boards
are added.
l The structure is adjusted. Appendix "Quick" is added.
Updates in Issue 02 (2007-12-25) Based on Product Version V100R002
The update of contents is described as follows:
l Chapter 2 Subrack:
Power consumption of the common units is added.
l The structure is adjusted. Appendix "Quick" is added.
Updates in Issue 01 (2007-8-20) Based on Product Version V100R002
The update of contents is described as follows:
l Chapter 13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit:
Description of the functions of the EOW interfaces (orderwire phone interfaces) on the SC1
and SC2 boards are added.
Updates in Issue 04 (2007-8-20) Based on Product Version V100R001
The update of contents is described as follows:
l Chapter 2 Subrack:
Description of the appearance and functions of the fan tray assembly are added.
Description of the functions, applications and indexes of the PIU board are added.
l Chapter 5 Optical Transponder Unit:
Description of eSFP optical module indexes are added.
l Chapter 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit:
Description of the functions and principle of the DMR1 board are added.
Updates in Issue 03 (2007-6-29) Based on Product Version V100R001
The update of contents is described as follows:
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description About This Document
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
l Chapter 4 Overview of Boards:
Description of the split ratio of the MON interface are added.
Description of the electrical cross-connect capability of the OTU board and tributary/line
unit are added.
l Chapter 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit:
Rules for wavelength allocation are added.
l Appendix C Parameters:
This chapter is added to describe the parameter settings of each board on the T2000.
Updates in Issue 02 (2007-4-18) Based on Product Version V100R001
The update of contents is described as follows:
l The front panel diagrams of the boards are updated.
l The descriptions of subrack indicators are added.
Updates in Issue 01 (2007-2-14) Based on Product Version V100R001
The first commercial release of the OptiX OSN 6800 V100R001.
About This Document
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
1 Cabinet
About This Chapter
1.1 Cabinet Structure
The OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transmission Platform (OptiX OSN 6800 for short)
has hardware such as cabinet, subrack, DCM frame and board.
1.2 Configuration of the Integrated Cabinet
The ETSI cabinets can be of three heights respectively. Cabinets of different types can be
configured with different quantity of OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.
1.3 Specifications
The specifications of the integrated cabinet include dimensions, weight, maximum power,
voltage, and so on.
1.4 DC Power Distribution Box
A DC power distribution box is mounted at the top part of a cabinet. Its input interface area is
divided into two parts: part A and part B. Each part contains two power input terminals and
two power grounding terminals. That is, on the DC power distribution box, there are eight
terminals in total.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 1 Cabinet
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-1
1.1 Cabinet Structure
The OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transmission Platform (OptiX OSN 6800 for short)
has hardware such as cabinet, subrack, DCM frame and board.
The OptiX OSN 6800 takes subracks as the basic working units. The subrack of the OptiX OSN
6800 has independent power supply and can be installed in ETSI 300 mm rear column
cabinet, standard ETSI 300 mm cabinet, or a 23-inch open rack.
In typical configuration, the OptiX OSN 6800 is installed in ETSI 300 mm rear column cabinet.
The main frame of the ETSI 300 mm rear column cabinet is a rack with a door fixed at the front,
a rear door with air vents fixed at the back and movable side doors at both sides. Figure 1-1
shows the appearance of an OptiX OSN 6800 ETSI 300 mm rear column cabinet.
Figure 1-1 Appearance of an ETSI 300 mm rear column cabinet
W
H
D
1 Cabinet
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
1.2 Configuration of the Integrated Cabinet
The ETSI cabinets can be of three heights respectively. Cabinets of different types can be
configured with different quantity of OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.
Table 1-1 lists the full configuration of cabinets of different heights. When the cabinet is not
fully configured, configure the subracks from bottom to top.
Table 1-1 Full configuration of cabinets of different heights
Item 2.2-m high
cabinet
2.6-m high
cabinet
23-inch
open rack
Quantity of configurable subracks in a ETSI
300 mm middle-column cabinet
4 4 -
Quantity of configurable subracks in a
standard ETSI 300 mm cabinet
3 4 -
Quantity of configurable subracks in a 23-
inch open rack
- - 4

NOTE
Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd. only provides the ETSI 300 mm middle-column cabinet and standard ETSI
300 mm cabinet.
1.3 Specifications
The specifications of the integrated cabinet include dimensions, weight, maximum power,
voltage, and so on.
Table 1-2 lists the technical specifications of the different types of cabinets.
Table 1-2 Technical specifications of the cabinet
Item 2.2-m high cabinet 2.6-m high cabinet
Dimensions 600 mm (W) 300 mm (D)
2200 mm (H)
600 mm (W) 300 mm (D)
2600 mm (H)
Weight 69 kg 80 kg
Maximum power
consumption (full
configuration)
4800 W 4800 W
Normal working voltage -48 V DC/-60 V DC -48 V DC/-60 V DC
Working voltage range -40 V DCto -72 V DC -40 V DC to -72 V DC

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 1 Cabinet
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-3
1.4 DC Power Distribution Box
A DC power distribution box is mounted at the top part of a cabinet. Its input interface area is
divided into two parts: part A and part B. Each part contains two power input terminals and
two power grounding terminals. That is, on the DC power distribution box, there are eight
terminals in total.
Based on the current of the power supply equipment in the equipment room, there are two power
supply modes:
l When the current of each power input is 63 A, four power inputs are required.
l When the current of each power input is 100 A to 128 A inclusive, one power input is
required for part A and part B, respectively. That is, two inputs in total are required. In this
mode, a junction box need be mounted. For details about the junction box, refer to Junction
Box.
The power distribution box consists of part A and part B for mutual backup. Part A and part B
access two -48 V DC power each.
l For the two working inputs, the RTN1(+) and NEG1(-), and the RTN2(+) and NEG2(-) in
part A are connected.
l For the two protection inputs, the RTN1(+) and NEG1(-), and the RTN2(+) and NEG2(-)
in part B are connected.
The PDU provides twelve power output interfaces (For the OptiX OSN 6800, both parts A and
B use only power switches SW2, SW3, SW4 and SW5 which correspond to four subracks
respectively from bottom up.) to supply power to the subracks in the cabinet. Figure 1-2 shows
the front panel of the DC power distribution box.
Figure 1-2 Front panel of the DC power distribution box
NEG2(-)
INPUT
RTN2(+) RTN1(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)
INPUT
RTN2(+) RTN1(+) NEG1(-)
SW1 SW3 SW2 SW4
ON
OFF
SW5 SW6 SW1 SW3 SW2 SW4
ON
OFF
SW5 SW6
OUTPUT
1 2 3 4 5 6
OUTPUT
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3
4 4
2 1 3
1. Output cable terminal 2. Grounding screw
3. Input cable terminal 4. Power switch
l Output cable terminal: There are six output cable terminals in each part, which lead in the
power cables connected to the subracks.
l Grounding screw: It is used to access the protection grounding cable.
1 Cabinet
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
1-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l Input cable terminal: Part A and part B connect to two -48 V DC power cables and two
power grounding cables, respectively. Totally, the input cable terminals lead in four -48 V
DC power cables and four power grounding cables.
l Power switch: There are six power switches matched for the corresponding output cable
terminals in each part so as to control the power supply of each subrack.
Figure 1-3 shows the internal cable connection of the DC power distribution box.
Figure 1-3 Internal cable connection of the DC power distribution box
INPUT
+ +
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OUTPUT
- -
INPUT
+ + - -
OUTPUT
- - - - - -
- - - - - - + + + + + + - - - - - - + + + + + +
l In part A, the input cable terminals RTN1(+) and NEG1(-) are in one group. They supply
power to output cable terminals 1, 2, and 3. The corresponding power switches are
respectively SW1, SW2, and SW3.
l In part A, the input cable terminals RTN2(+) and NEG2(-) are in one group. They supply
power to output cable terminals 4, 5, and 6. The corresponding power switches are
respectively SW4, SW5, and SW6.
l Part B is the same.
Junction Box
When the current of each power input is 100 A to 128 A inclusive, a junction box need be
mounted. One input is required for part A and part B, respectively. That is, two inputs in total
are required. In this case, a power distribution box need be mounted on each part.Figure 1-4
and Figure 1-5 show the structure and mounting position of the junction box.
Figure 1-4 Junction box structure
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 1 Cabinet
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-5
Figure 1-5 Junction box mounting position
1 Cabinet
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
1-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
2 Subrack
About This Chapter
2.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 6800 takes subracks as the basic working units. The subrack of the OptiX OSN
6800 has independent power supply.
2.2 Slot Description
The board area of the subrack has 21 slots, defined as IU1 to IU21 from left to right.
2.3 Fan Area
In the OptiX OSN 6800 system, each subrack has a fan area. A fan area consists of fan tray
assembly and air filter. The air filter can be drawn out and be cleaned.
2.4 PIU
PIU: power interface unit
2.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces
The OptiX OSN 6800 provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment
maintenance.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 2 Subrack
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-1
2.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 6800 takes subracks as the basic working units. The subrack of the OptiX OSN
6800 has independent power supply.
Figure 2-1 shows the structure of the subrack.
Figure 2-1 OptiX OSN 6800 subrack structure diagram
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1. Indicator 2. Board area 3. Fiber cabling area
4. Fan tray assembly 5. Air filter 6. Fiber spool
7. Mounting ear
NOTE
The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel
before you connect cables.
l Indicators: They indicate the running status and alarm status of the subrack.
l Board area: All service boards are in this area. Totally 21 slots are available.
l Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of the boards are routed
to the area before reaching the matched side of the cabinet. The mechanical VOA is also
installed in this area.
l Fan tray assembly: This area contains 10 fans for ventilation and heat dissipation of the
subrack.
l Air filter: It protects the subrack from outside dust in the air. It needs to be taken out and
cleaned periodically.
l Fiber spool: The fiber spool serves to coil the extra fibers. Fixed fiber spools are on two
sides of the subrack. The fibers whose extras are coiled in the fiber spool on the cabinet
side enter another subrack.
l Mounting ears: They fix the subrack in the cabinet.
2 Subrack
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
2-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l Interface area: This area is behind the subrack indicator panel, providing functional
interfaces such as management interface, inter-subrack communication interface, alarm
output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface.
Table 2-1 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack.
Table 2-1 Technical specifications of the subrack
Item Specification
Dimensions 487 mm (W) 295 mm (D) 400 mm (H)
Weight (empty subrack
a
)
13 kg
Maximum power consumption 1200 W
Rated working current 25 A
Nominal working voltage -48 V DC/-60 V DC
Working voltage range -40 V DCto -72 V DC
a: The empty subrack means no board is installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly
and no air filter is installed.

Table 2-2 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800 fan tray assembly.
Table 2-2 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly
Item Specification
Dimensions 493.7 mm (W) 266.6 mm (D) 56.1 mm (H)
Weight 3.6 kg
Power consumption 120 W

Table 2-3 lists the power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 6800.
Table 2-3 Power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 6800
Unit Name Maximum Power
Consumption
a
Remarks
Subrack OTU subrack 640 W It is the power consumption
when the subrack is installed
with seventeen OTU10G
(LSX), one SCC, two PIUs,
one AUX, and one fan tray
assembly.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 2 Subrack
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-3
Unit Name Maximum Power
Consumption
a
Remarks
OTM subrack 520 W It is the power consumption
when the subrack is installed
with one M40V, one D40V,
one OAU, one OBU, eight
OTU10G (LSX), one SCC,
two PIUs, one AUX, and
one fan tray assembly.
OLA subrack 270 W It is the power consumption
when the subrack is installed
with two OBU101, two
OBU103, four VA1, one
SC2, one SCC, two PIUs,
one AUX, and one fan tray
assembly.
OADM subrack 380 W It is the power consumption
when the subrack is installed
with two OAU101, four
VA1, two MR4, four
OTU10G, one SC2, one
SCC, two PIUs, one AUX,
and one fan tray assembly.
Cabinet OTM cabinet
(4010Gbits)
1800 W It is the power consumption
when the cabinet is installed
with two OTU subrack and
one OTM subrack.
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain
configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis
and cabinet is calculation based on the power consumption of each module.

NOTE
The power consumption value in the table is the measured value when the ambient temperature is 25 .
During the starting up of the equipment or in high or low temperature, the power consumption of the
equipment increases. Hence, the actual power consumption of the equipment is 1.2 to 1.5 times of the value
in the table.
2.2 Slot Description
The board area of the subrack has 21 slots, defined as IU1 to IU21 from left to right.
Slots of the subrack is shown in Figure 2-2.
2 Subrack
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
2-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 2-2 Slots of the subrack
I
U
5
I
U
4
I
U
6
I
U
7
I
U
8
X
C
S
X
C
S
I
U
1
2
I
U
1
3
I
U
1
4
I
U
1
5
I
U
1
6
S
C
C
S
C
C
P
I
U
P
I
U
A
U
X
I
U
3
I
U
2
I
U
1
I
U
1
1
I
U
I
U
9
1
0
1
7
1
8
/ /
I
U
I
U
/ / Board area
VOA area
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
IU19
IU20
IU21
l IU1-IU17 are for service boards.
l IU21 is for the AUX.
l IU19 and IU20 are for the PIU.
l IU18 is for the active SCC.
l IU17 is available for the standby SCC or the other service boards.
l IU9 and IU10 are available for the XCS or for the other service boards.
Mapping of Pair Slots
Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the buses
on the backplanes. For the two boards in the paired slots, the inter-board cross-connection can
be directly configured, and the cross-connect grooming of services can be realized without the
cross-connect board. The OptiX OSN 6800 supports eight pair slots, which are IU1 and IU2,
IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU9 and IU10, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15
and IU16. The pairs slots support distributed grooming except IU9 and IU10.
Mapping of Boards and Slots
Table 2-4 shows the mapping between boards and slots of the OptiX OSN 6800.
Table 2-4 Mapping between boards and slots of the OptiX OSN 6800
Board Available slot
TN11AUX IU21
TN11CMR2 IU1-IU17
TN11CMR4 IU1-IU17
TN11D40 IU1-IU15
TN11D40V IU1-IU15
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 2 Subrack
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-5
Board Available slot
TN11DCP/ TN12DCP IU1-IU17
TN11DCU IU1-IU17
TN11DMR1 IU1-IU17
TN11ECOM IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
TN11FIU/ TN12FIU IU1-IU17
TN11GFU IU1-IU17
TN11HBA IU2-IU16
TN11ITL/ TN12ITL IU1-IU17
TN11L4G IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
TN11LDGD IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
TN11LDGS IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
TN12LDM IU1-IU17
TN11LDMD IU1-IU17
TN11LDMS IU1-IU17
TN11LOG IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
TN11LOM IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
TN11LQG IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
TN13LQM IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
TN11LQMS/ TN12LQMS IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
TN11LQMD/ TN12LQMD IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
TN11LSX/ TN12LSX IU1-IU17
TN11LSXL IU1-IU14
TN11LSXLR IU1-IU14
TN11LSXR IU1-IU17
TN11LWX2 IU1-IU17
TN11LWXD IU1-IU17
TN11LWXS/ TN12LWXS IU1-IU17
TN11M40 IU1-IU15
TN11M40V IU1-IU15
TN11MCA4 IU1-IU16
2 Subrack
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
2-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board Available slot
TN11MCA8 IU1-IU16
TN11MR2 IU1-IU17
TN11MR4 IU1-IU17
TN11MR8 IU1-IU16
TN11ND2 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
TN11NS2/ TN12NS2 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
TN11OAU1 IU2-IU17
TN11OBU1 IU1-IU17
TN11OBU2 IU2-IU17
TN11OLP/ TN12OLP IU1-IU17
TN11RMU9 IU1-IU17
TN11ROAM IU1-IU15
TN11SBM2 IU1-IU17
TN11SC1/ TN12SC1 IU1-IU17
TN11SC2/ TN12SC2 IU1-IU17
TN11SCC IU17, IU18
TN11SCS IU1-IU17
TN11TBE IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
TN11TDG IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
TN11TDX/ TN12TDX IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
TN11TOM IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
TN11TMX IU1-IU17
TN11TQM/ TN12TQM IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
TN11TQS IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
TN11TQX IU1, IU4, IU11, IU14
TN11TSXL IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16
TN11VA1/ TN12VA1 IU1-IU17
TN11VA4/ TN12VA4 IU1-IU17
TN11WMU IU1-IU17
TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9 IU1-IU16
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 2 Subrack
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-7
Board Available slot
TN13WSM9 IU1-IU15
TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9 IU1-IU16
TN13WSD9 IU1-IU15
TN11WSMD4 IU1-IU16
TN11XCS/ TN12XCS IU9, IU10

2.3 Fan Area
In the OptiX OSN 6800 system, each subrack has a fan area. A fan area consists of fan tray
assembly and air filter. The air filter can be drawn out and be cleaned.
Appearance
Figure 2-3 shows the appearance of a fan area.
Figure 2-3 Appearance of a fan area
1
2
3
1. Air filter 2. Fan running indicators 3. Fans (ten in total)
Functions and Features
Table 2-5 shows the function of a fan area.
Table 2-5 Functions
Function Describes
Basic function Realizes heat dissipation on an NE, so that the NE is able to work
normally and effectively under the designed temperature.
Commissioning control l Realizes intelligent speed regulating of fans. The speed varies
automatically with the temperature.
l The fan speed can be manually adjusted.

2 Subrack
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
2-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
The fan area realizes heat dissipation on an NE. Hence, the NE is able to work normally and
effectively under the designed temperature. The fan tray assembly is located on the lower part
of the subrack. It adopts blowing method, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards
in the subrack are installed vertically, that is, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design
ensures reliable heat dissipation.
Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN
6800.
Figure 2-4 Single-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Air outlet
Board area
Optical fiber
laying area
Fan tray assembly
Air inlet
Figure 2-5 Multi-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Air outlet
Board area
Optical fiber
laying area
Fan tray assembly
Air inlet
Airduct frame
NOTE
When multiple subracks are used, an airduct frame is required to help in heat dissipation.
2.4 PIU
PIU: power interface unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 2 Subrack
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-9
2.4.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the PIU board is available, that is TN21.
2.4.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 6800 is configured with two PIU boards. The two boards provide power supplies
to the system with 1+1 hot backup.
2.4.3 Functions and Features
The PIU is an power interface unit. It accesses DC power and provides protection and filtering
functions.
2.4.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the board front panel.
2.4.5 Valid Slots
The PIU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the PIU are IU19 and IU20.
2.4.6 Specifications of the PIU
Specifications include performance indexes, dimensions, weight and power consumption.
2.4.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the PIU board is available, that is TN21.
2.4.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 6800 is configured with two PIU boards. The two boards provide power supplies
to the system with 1+1 hot backup.
2.4.3 Functions and Features
The PIU is an power interface unit. It accesses DC power and provides protection and filtering
functions.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 2-6.
Table 2-6 Functions and features of the PIU
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Accesses DC power from -40 V to -72 V for the system. Provides
protection and filtering functions for the accessed power. Provides the
fan tray assembly with a -48 V DC power after voltage reduction.

2.4.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the board front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 2-6 shows the PIU front panel.
2 Subrack
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
2-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 2-6 PIU front panel
RUN
N
E
G
(
-
)
R
T
N
(
+
)
PIU
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l Running status indicator (RUN) - green
Interface
There is only one power interface on the front panel of the PIU board. The interface is used to
access the DC power from -40 V to -72 V.
2.4.5 Valid Slots
The PIU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the PIU are IU19 and IU20.
2.4.6 Specifications of the PIU
Specifications include performance indexes, dimensions, weight and power consumption.
Performance Indexes
Table 2-7 Performance Indexes of the PIU Board
Item Unit Value
Number of DC input power supplies - 1
Input DC power voltage range V DC -40 to -72
Input DC power current A 30

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of front panel: 65 mm (H) x 28 mm (W) (2.6 in. (H) x 1.1 in. (W))
l Weight: 1.10 lb.(0.5 kg)
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 2 Subrack
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-11
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 35 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 37 W
2.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance
Interfaces
The OptiX OSN 6800 provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment
maintenance.
These interfaces are located in the interface area of the subrack and on the front panel of the
AUX, as shown in Figure 2-7.
Figure 2-7 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack
Fan
ETH3 COM ALM02 ALM01 ALM03 ALM04 ALMI2 ALMI1 LAMP1 ALMP2 SERIAL
SCC
SCC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PWRA
PWRB
PWRC
ALMC
RESET
LAMP TEST
ALM CUT
SubRACK_ID
RUN
N
E
G
(
-
)
R
T
N
(
+
)
PIU
AUX
STAT
PROG
N
M
_
E
T
H
1
N
M
_
E
T
H
2
E
T
H
1
E
T
H
2
xcs
xcs
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
NOTE
The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel
before you connect cables.
2.5.1 Interfaces in the Interface Area
The interface area provides functional interfaces such as management interface, inter-subrack
communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface.
2.5.2 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board
2 Subrack
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
2-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
The AUX board provides NM interface, NM cascading interface, inter-subrack normal and
emergent communication interface.
2.5.3 PIN Assignment of Interfaces
The interfaces of the OptiX OSN 6800 used for data communication and equipment maintenance
use the RJ-45 and the DB9 connectors. The pin assignment figures and the functions of the pins
are given in this section.
2.5.1 Interfaces in the Interface Area
The interface area provides functional interfaces such as management interface, inter-subrack
communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface.
The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Figure 2-8
shows the front panel.
Figure 2-8 Interfaces in the interface area
ETH3 COM ALM02 ALM01 ALM03 ALM04 ALMI2 ALMI1 LAMP1 LAMP2
SERIAL
Description of interfaces in the interface area is list in Table 2-8.
Table 2-8 Description of interfaces in the interface area
Interface Silk-screen Connector Function
Commissioning
interface
COM RJ-45 It is for the commissioning.
Inter-subrack
communication
interface
ETH3 RJ-45 Connects the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3
interface on one subrack through a
network cable to such interfaces on
the other subracks to achieve the
communication between the master
subrack and slave subracks.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 2 Subrack
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-13
Interface Silk-screen Connector Function
Alarm output
and cascading
interface
ALMO1
ALMO2
ALMO3
ALMO4
RJ-45 The definitions for the pins of the
ALM01 and ALM02 interfaces are
the same. The two interfaces are
used for output/cascading,
respectively. The definitions for the
pins of the ALM03 and ALM04
interfaces are the same. The two
interfaces are used for output/
cascading, respectively.
Alarm outputs are sent to the DC
power distribution cabinet through
the output interface and the
cascading interface. You can
configure it to be the other outputs
to realize integrated display of
alarms. The OptiX OSN 6800
provides eight alarm outputs.
Defaults of the first three are critical
alarm, major alarm, and minor
alarm. The other five are reserved.
Alarm outputs can be cascaded.
OAM interface SERIAL DB9 The OAM interface is a serial NM
interface, providing functions of
serial NM and supporting X.25
protocol. When this interface is a
COA management interface, it can
manage external equipment such as
COA, TDA, and DCU. The
interface rate is 9.6 kbit/s.
Alarm input
interface
ALMI1 ALMI2 RJ-45 External alarm signal input function
is designed for requirements when
the alarm signals of the external
systems (such as the environment
monitory) need remote monitoring.
The OptiX OSN 6800 provides
eight alarm inputs. The name of the
eight alarms can be configured to
cooperate with the external system
to realize remote monitoring of
external alarms.
Subrack alarm
output and
cascading
interface
LAMP1
LAMP2
RJ-45 This interface drives the running
indicators and alarm indicators of
the cabinet that holds the subrack.

2 Subrack
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
2-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
2.5.2 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board
The AUX board provides NM interface, NM cascading interface, inter-subrack normal and
emergent communication interface.
Figure 2-9 shows the front panel of the AUX. The AUX is inserted in slot IU21.
Figure 2-9 Interfaces on the front panel of the AUX
AUX
STAT
PROG
N
M
_
E
T
H
1
N
M
_
E
T
H
2
E
T
H
1
E
T
H
2
Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board is list in Table 2-9.
Table 2-9 Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board
Interface Silk-screen Connector Function
NE
management
interface
NM_ETH1/
NM_ETH2
RJ-45 l Connects the network interface
on the OptiX OSN 6800 through
a network cable to that on the
T2000 server to achieve the
management of the T2000 over
the OptiX OSN 6800.
l Connects the NM_ETH1/
NM_ETH2 network interface on
one NE through a network cable
to that on another NE to achieve
communication between NEs.
Inter-subrack
communication
interface
ETH1/ETH2 RJ-45 Connects the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3
interface on one subrack through a
network cable to such interfaces on
the other subracks to achieve the
communication between the master
subrack and slave subracks.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 2 Subrack
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-15
2.5.3 PIN Assignment of Interfaces
The interfaces of the OptiX OSN 6800 used for data communication and equipment maintenance
use the RJ-45 and the DB9 connectors. The pin assignment figures and the functions of the pins
are given in this section.
Pin assignment of the RJ-45 Connector
Figure 2-10 shows the pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector.
Figure 2-10 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector
. 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
Pin Assignment of the DB9 Connector
Figure 2-11 shows the pin assignment of the DB9 connector.
Figure 2-11 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Pin Assignment of the COM Interface
For the pin assignment of the COM interface, refer to Table 2-10 .
Table 2-10 Pin assignment of the COM interface
Pin Signal Function
1 ETNTX_P_1 Transmits the data positive
2 ETNTX_N_1 Transmits the data negative
2 Subrack
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
2-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Pin Signal Function
3 ETNRX_P_1 Receives the data positive
4 NC Not connected
5 NC Not connected
6 ETNRX_N_1 Receives data negative
7 NC Not connected
8 NC Not connected

Pin Assignment of the ETH3 Interface
For the pin assignment of the ETH3 interface, refer to Table 2-11.
Table 2-11 Pin assignment of the ETH3 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 ETH3_TXP Transmits the data positive for
inter-subrack ordinary
communications
2 ETH3_TXN Transmits the data negative for
inter-subrack ordinary
communications
3 ETH3_RXP Receives the data positive for inter-
subrack ordinary communications
4 ETH3_CRIT_TXP Transmits the data positive for
inter-subrack emergent
communications
5 ETH3_CRIT_TXN Transmits the data negative for
inter-subrack emergent
communications
6 ETH3_RXN Receives the data negative for inter-
subrack ordinary communications
7 ETH3_CRIT_RXP Receives the data positive for inter-
subrack emergent communications
8 ETH3_CRIT_RXN Receives the data negative for inter-
subrack emergent communications

Pin Assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 Interfaces
For the pin assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 interfaces, refer to Table 2-12.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 2 Subrack
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-17
Table 2-12 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces
Pin Signal Function
1 CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP Outputs the critical alarm signal
positive
2 CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN Outputs the critical alarm signal
negative
3 MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP Outputs the major alarm signal
positive
4 ALM_SWITCH_OUT1P Outputs the minor alarm signal
positive
5 ALM_SWITCH_OUT1N Outputs the minor alarm signal
negative
6 MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN Outputs the major alarm signal
negative
7 ALM_SWITCH_OUT2P Alarm signal output 1 positive
8 ALM_SWITCH_OUT2N Alarm signal output 1 negative

Pin Assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 Interfaces
For the pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces, refer to Table 2-13.
Table 2-13 Pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces
Pin Signal Function
1 ALM_SWITCH_OUT3P Alarm signal output 2 positive
2 ALM_SWITCH_OUT3N Alarm signal output 2 negative
3 ALM_SWITCH_OUT4P Alarm signal output 3 positive
4 ALM_SWITCH_OUT5P Alarm signal output 4 positive
5 ALM_SWITCH_OUT5N Alarm signal output 4 negative
6 ALM_SWITCH_OUT4N Alarm signal output 3 negative
7 ALM_SWITCH_OUT6P Alarm signal output 5 positive
8 ALM_SWITCH_OUT6N Alarm signal output 5 negative

Pin Assignment of the SERIAL Interface
For the pin assignment of the SERIAL interface, refer to Table 2-14.
2 Subrack
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
2-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 2-14 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface
Pin Signal Function
1 N.C Not defined
2 RXD Receive end of data
3 TXD Transmit end of data
4 DTR Data terminal equipment ready
5 GND Ground
6 F_RS232RX F&f receive end of data
7 F_RS232TX F&f transmit end of data
8 GND GND
9 5VOADM Power supply for OADM

Pin Assignment of the ALMI1 Interface
For the pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface, refer to Table 2-15.
Table 2-15 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 SWITCHI_IN1 Alarm input 1
2 GND Ground
3 SWITCHI_IN2 Alarm input 2
4 SWITCHI_IN3 Alarm input 3
5 GND Ground
6 GND Ground
7 SWITCHI_IN4 Alarm input 4
8 GND Ground

Pin Assignment of the ALMI2 Interface
For the pin assignment of the ALMI2 interface, refer to Table 2-16.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 2 Subrack
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-19
Table 2-16 Pin assignment of the ALMI2
Pin Signal Function
1 SWITCHI_IN5 Alarm input 5
2 GND Ground
3 SWITCHI_IN6 Alarm input 6
4 SWITCHI_IN7 Alarm input 7
5 GND Ground
6 GND Ground
7 SWITCHI_IN8 Alarm input 8
8 GND Ground

Pin Assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 Interfaces
For the pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces, refer to Table 2-17.
Table 2-17 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces
Pin Signal Function
1 CRIT_ALMP Critical alarm signal positive
2 CRIT_ALMN Critical alarm signal negative
3 MAJ_ALMP Major alarm signal positive
4 RUNP Power indicating signal positive
5 RUNN Power indicating signal negative
6 MAJ_ALMN Major alarm signal positive
7 MIN_ALMP Minor alarm signal positive
8 MIN_ALMN Minor alarm signal negative

Pin Assignment of the NM-ETH1 Interface
For the pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface, refer to Table 2-18.
Table 2-18 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 NM_ETNTXP NM communications, transmits the
data positive
2 Subrack
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
2-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Pin Signal Function
2 NM_ETNTXN NM communications, transmits the
data negative
3 NM_ETNRXP NM communications, receives the
data positive
4 N C Not connected.
5 N C Not connected.
6 NM_ETNRXN NM communications, receives the
data negative
7 N C Not connected.
8 N C Not connected.

Pin Assignment of the NM-ETH2 Interface
For the pin assignment of the NM-ETH2 interface, refer to Table 2-19.
Table 2-19 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH2 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 NMJL_ETNTXP Transmits the concatenated data
positive for NM communications
2 NMJL_ETNTXN Transmits the concatenated data
negative for NM communications
3 NMJL_ETNRXP Receives the concatenated data
positive for NM communications
4 N C Not connected
5 N C Not connected
6 NMJL_ETNRXN Receives the concatenated data
negative for NM communications
7 N C Not connected
8 N C Not connected

Pin Assignment of the ETH1 Interface
For the pin assignment of the ETH1 interface, refer to Table 2-20.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 2 Subrack
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-21
Table 2-20 Pin assignment of the ETH1 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 ETH1_TXP Transmits the data positive for
inter-subrack ordinary
communications
2 ETH1_TXN Transmits the data negative for
inter-subrack ordinary
communications
3 ETH1_RXP Receives the data positive for inter-
subrack ordinary communications
4 ETH1_CRIT_TXP Transmits the data positive for
inter-subrack emergent
communications
5 ETH1_CRIT_TXN Transmits the data negative for
inter-subrack emergent
communications
6 ETH1_RXN Receives the data negative for inter-
subrack ordinary communications
7 ETH1_CRIT_RXP Receives the data positive for inter-
subrack emergent communications
8 ETH1_CRIT_RXN Receives the data negative for inter-
subrack emergent communications

Pin Assignment of the ETH2 Interface
For the pin assignment of the ETH2 interface, refer to Table 2-21.
Table 2-21 Pin assignment of the ETH2 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 ETH2_TXP Transmits the data positive for
inter-subrack ordinary
communications
2 ETH2_TXN Transmits the data negative for
inter-subrack ordinary
communications
3 ETH2_RXP Receives the data positive for inter-
subrack ordinary communications
4 ETH2_CRIT_TXP Transmits the data positive for
inter-subrack emergent
communications
2 Subrack
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
2-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Pin Signal Function
5 ETH2_CRIT_TXN Transmits the data negative for
inter-subrack emergent
communications
6 ETH2_RXN Receives the data negative for inter-
subrack ordinary communications
7 ETH2_CRIT_RXP Receives the data positive for inter-
subrack emergent communications
8 ETH2_CRIT_RXN Receives the data negative for inter-
subrack emergent communications

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 2 Subrack
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-23
3 Frame
About This Chapter
3.1 DCM Frame
The DCM frame can be used to hold DCM modules which compensate the positive dispersion
of transmitting fiber, so as to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.
3.2 CRPC Frame
CRPC frame is used to place CRPC board, fan tray assembly and power supply box. The frame
is installed into the cabinet.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 3 Frame
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-1
3.1 DCM Frame
The DCM frame can be used to hold DCM modules which compensate the positive dispersion
of transmitting fiber, so as to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.
The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight types of DCMs of eight compensation distance
specifications: 5 km (3.1 mi.), 10 km (6.2 mi.), 20 km (12.4 mi.), 40 km (24.8 mi.), 60 km (37.3
mi.), 80 km (49.7 mi.), 100 km (62.1 mi.) and 120 km (74.6 mi.).
Each DCM frame can hold two DCMs at most. The DCM frame is fixed onto the columns of
the cabinet by mounting brackets and screws, as shown in Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1 DCM frame in the cabinet
2
1
1. DCM frame 2. DCMs
3.2 CRPC Frame
CRPC frame is used to place CRPC board, fan tray assembly and power supply box. The frame
is installed into the cabinet.
Figure 3-2 shows the appearance of a CRPC frame. In the middle of the frame, the one with the
front panel is the CRPC board. The fan tray assembly is at the left of the board. At the right are
two power supplies as mutual backup.
3 Frame
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
3-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 3-2 Appearance of CRPC frame
1
2
3
1: Fan tray assembly 2: CRPC board 3: Power distribution box
Table 3-1 Mechanical specifications of the CRPC frame
Item Value
Mechanical Specifications 535 mm (W) 257 mm (D) 86 mm (H) (21.1 in.
(W) 10.1 in. (D) 3.4 in. (H))
Weight 6.6 lb.(3 kg)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 3 Frame
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-3
4 Overview of Boards
About This Chapter
4.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions
The board appearance and dimensions include the board appearance, imensions and the laser
safety label.
4.2 Bar Code for Boards
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the
board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name,
and board characteristic code.
4.3 Board Category
The OptiX OSN 6800 has 14 kinds of boards.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 4 Overview of Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-1
4.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions
The board appearance and dimensions include the board appearance, imensions and the laser
safety label.
4.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions
This section describes the appearance and dimensions of the board.
4.1.2 Laser Safety Label
Lasers are of four safety levels according to the value of the output power.
4.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions
This section describes the appearance and dimensions of the board.
CAUTION
Always wear an ESD wrist strap when holding the board, and make sure the ESD wrist strap is
well grounded, thus to prevent the static from damaging the board.
Table 4-1 shows the board appearance and dimensions of the OptiX OSN 6800.
Table 4-1 The board appearance and dimensions
Board appearance Board
name
Number
of slots
occupied
Height
(mm)
Width
(mm)
Depth
(mm)
L4G 1 264.6 25.4 220.0
4 Overview of Boards
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
4-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board appearance Board
name
Number
of slots
occupied
Height
(mm)
Width
(mm)
Depth
(mm)
OAU1 2 264.6 50.8 220.0
M40 3 264.6 76.2 220.0
AUX 1 107.6 25.4 220.0
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 4 Overview of Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-3
Board appearance Board
name
Number
of slots
occupied
Height
(mm)
Width
(mm)
Depth
(mm)
LSXL 4 264.6 101.6 220.0

4.1.2 Laser Safety Label
Lasers are of four safety levels according to the value of the output power.
WARNING
It is strictly forbidden to stare into the optical interface during the installation and maintenance
of the fiber, because the laser beam inside the optical fiber would hurt your eyes.
Table 4-2 shows the laser levels of the unit.
Table 4-2 Laser levels
Laser Level Label Reference Power Range
Class 1
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
<10.00 dBm (<10.00 mW)
Class 1M
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
10.00 dBm - 22.15 dBm
(10.00 mW - 164 mW)
4 Overview of Boards
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
4-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Laser Level Label Reference Power Range
Class 3B
CLASS 3B LASER
PRODUCT
AVOID EXPOSURE
TO BEAM
LASER
RADIATION
22.15 dBm - 27.00 dBm
(164.00 mW - 500.00 mW)
Class 4
LASER
RADIATION
AVOID EYE OR SKIN
EXPOSURE TO DIRECT OR
SCATTERED RADIATION
CLASS 4 LASER
PRODUCT
>27.00 dBm (>500.00 mW)

4.2 Bar Code for Boards
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the
board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name,
and board characteristic code.
4.2.1 Overview
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the
board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name,
and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code.
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
4.2.2 Characteristic Code
For the detailed description of the board characteristic code, refer to Appendix B.
4.2.1 Overview
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the
board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name,
and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code.
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
The information of a bar code includes can be queried on the T2000, for details refer to
Supporting Tasks.
NOTE
Such information as frequency of signals queried on the T2000 is a commissioning value, different from
that on the bar code.
Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2 show a bar code.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 4 Overview of Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-5
Figure 4-1 Description of the bar code (example 1)
21023132421059000003 19210PA
BOM
Delivery
information
Board version
(TN11)
Board
name
Characteristic
code
TN1M1L4G
Y 01
Board model
number
Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
Figure 4-2 Description of the bar code (example 2)
030FBQ1073000001 -94509520
Last four numbers of
the BOM
TN11MR4 N 01
Environmental
friendliness flag
Delivery
information
Board name
Board version
Characteristic
code
Board model
number
(N: Environmentally
unfriendly)
4.2.2 Characteristic Code
For the detailed description of the board characteristic code, refer to Appendix B.
4.3 Board Category
The OptiX OSN 6800 has 14 kinds of boards.
l Optical transponder unit
l Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit
l Optical add and drop multiplexing unit
l Reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit
l Tributary unit
l Line unit
l Cross-connect unit
l Optical amplifier unit
l Optical supervisory channel unit
l System control and communication unit
4 Overview of Boards
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
4-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l Optical protection unit
l Spectrum analyzer unit
l Variable optical attenuator unit
l Optical power and dispersion slope equalizing unit
Table 4-3 shows the board list.
Table 4-3 Board list
Board Category Board
Name
Board Description
Optical transponder unit ECOM Enhanced communication interface unit
L4G Line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x
Gigabit Ethernet line capacity
LDGS 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single
receiving
LDGD 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and
selective receiving
LDM 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s)
wavelength conversion board
LDMD 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s)
wavelength conversion board, dual fed and
selective receiving
LDMS 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s)
wavelength conversion board, single fed and
single receiving
LOG 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
LOM 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical
wavelength conversion board (AFEC)
LQG 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength
conversion board
LQM 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s)
wavelength conversion unit
LQMS 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s)
wavelength conversion unit, single fed and
single receiving
LQMD 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s)
wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and
selective receiving
LSX 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
LSXL 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 4 Overview of Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-7
Board Category Board
Name
Board Description
LSXLR 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit
LSXR 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit
LWXS Arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s)
wavelength conversion board (single
transmit)
LWXD Arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s)
wavelength conversion board (double
transmit)
LWX2 Arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-
wavelength conversion board
TMX 4 channels STM-16/OTU1 asynchronism
mux OTU-2 wavelength conversion board
Optical multiplexer and
demultiplexer unit
M40 40-channel multiplexing unit
D40 40-channel demultiplexing unit
M40V 40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA
D40V 40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA
FIU Fiber interface unit
ITL interleaver board
Optical add and drop
multiplexing unit
MR2 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
MR4 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
MR8 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
CMR2 CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop
multiplexing unit
CMR4 CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop
multiplexing unit
DMR1 CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/
drop multiplexing unit
SBM2 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bi-directional
add/drop board
Reconfigurable optical add
and drop multiplexing unit
RMU9 9-port ROADM multiplexing board
ROAM reconfigurable optical adding board
WSD9 9-port wavelength selective switching
demultiplexing board
4 Overview of Boards
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
4-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board Category Board
Name
Board Description
WSM9 9-port wavelength selective switching
multiplexing board
WSMD4 4-port wavelength selective switching
multiplexer and demultiplexer board
Tributary unit TBE 10 Gigabit ethernet tributary board
TDG 2 x GE tributary service processing board
TDX 2 x 10G Tributary service processing board
TOM 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board
TQM 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing
board
TQS 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service
processing board
TQX 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing
board
TSXL 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
Line unit ND2 2 x (4 x ODU1 multiplexing OTU2)
opticalinterface board
NS2 4 x ODU1 multiplexing OTU2 optical
interface board
Cross-connect unit XCS cross-connect and clock unit
Optical amplifier unit HBA high-power booster amplifier board
OAU1 optical amplifying unit
OBU1 optical booster unit
OBU2 optical booster unit
CRPC case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C-
band
Optical supervisory channel
unit
SC1 unidirectional optical supervisory channel
unit
SC2 bi-directional optical supervisory channel
unit
System control and
communication unit
SCC system control and communication Unit
AUX system auxiliary interface unit
Optical protection unit DCP 2-channel optical path protection unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 4 Overview of Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-9
Board Category Board
Name
Board Description
OLP optical line protection unit
SCS sync optical channel separator unit
Spectrum analyzer unit MCA4 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit
MCA8 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit
WMU wavelength monitored unit
Variable optical attenuator
unit
VA1 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit
VA4 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit
Optical power and dispersion
equalizing unit
DCU dispersion compensation board
GFU gain flatness unit

4 Overview of Boards
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
4-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
5 Optical Transponder Unit
About This Chapter
5.1 ECOM
ECOM: enhanced communication interface unit
5.2 L4G
L4G: line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit Ethernet line capacity
5.3 LDGD
LDGD: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving
5.4 LDGS
LDGS: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving
5.5 LDM
LDM: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board
5.6 LDMD
LDMD: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and
selective receiving
5.7 LDMS
LDMS: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and
single receiving
5.8 LOG
LOG: 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
5.9 LOM
LOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board (AFEC)
5.10 LQG
LQG: 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board
5.11 LQM
LQM: 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board
5.12 LQMD
LQMD: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and
selective receiving
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-1
5.13 LQMS
LQMS: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and
single receiving
5.14 LSX
LSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
5.15 LSXL
LSXL: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
5.16 LSXLR
LSXLR: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit
5.17 LSXR
LSXR: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit
5.18 LWX2
LWX2: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board
5.19 LWXD
LWXD: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit)
5.20 LWXS
LWXS: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)
5.21 TMX
TMX: 4-channel STM-16/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU2 wavelength conversion board
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
5.1 ECOM
ECOM: enhanced communication interface unit
5.1.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the ECOM board is available, that is TN11.
5.1.2 Application
The ECOM board is used to achieve the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800
and the OptiX OSN 900A, and to converge/deconverge 8xFE services to/from 1xGE service.
5.1.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the ECOM are cross-connection at the electrical
layer and wavelength tunable.
5.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The ECOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2
switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply
module.
5.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ECOM front panel.
5.1.6 Valid Slots
The ECOM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the ECOM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
5.1.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.1.8 Specifications of the ECOM
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5.1.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the ECOM board is available, that is TN11.
5.1.2 Application
The ECOM board is used to achieve the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800
and the OptiX OSN 900A, and to converge/deconverge 8xFE services to/from 1xGE service.
Application Scenario 1: Achieving DCN Communication between the OptiX OSN
6800 and the OptiX OSN 900A
The management signal and service signal of the OptiX OSN 900A are together transmitted to
the OptiX OSN 6800 over the line. The FIU board of the OptiX OSN 6800 separates the signal
received into management signal and service signal. The service signal is processed by the OTU
board. The management signal is accessed by the ECOM board through the FE port and then is
transmitted to the SCC board through the backplane.
For the position of the ECOM in the network with the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 900A,
see Figure 5-1.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-3
Figure 5-1 Position of the ECOM in the network with the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN
900A
ECOM
OptiX OSN
900A
Service signal
OTU
OTU
6800
SCC
ETH
8
OptiX OSN
900A
OptiX OSN
8
F
I
U
F
I
U
signal
Management
Service signal
signal
Management
NOTE
Each FIU board of the OptiX OSN 6800 accesses the signals from only one OptiX OSN 900A.
Application Scenario 2: Converging/Deconverging 8xFE Services to/from 1xGE
Service
When used for convergence or deconvergence, the ECOM board can be used only in the CWDM
system. For the position of the ECOM in the WDM system, see Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2 Position of the ECOM in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
ECOM ECOM
1
8
1
8
FE
Client side
GE GE
FE
GE GE
Client side
DMUX
MUX
NOTE
The MUX and DMUX boards shown in the figure are the OADM boards used in the CWDM system.
5.1.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the ECOM are cross-connection at the electrical
layer and wavelength tunable.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-1.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-1 Functions and features of the ECOM
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Achieves the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800
and the OptiX OSN 900A.
l Converges/deconverges 8xFE services to/from 1xGE service.
Client-side service
type
FE
WDM
specification
Supports the CWDM specifications.
Cross-connect
capabilities
Supports the transmission of one GE signal each to working/protection
cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports
the transmission of one GE signal to the paired slots through the
backplane.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Not Supported
Alarms and
performance
events monitoring
l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
l Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to
report the alarms and performance events of the board.
ALS function Not Supported
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on
the client side.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Not Supported
Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

5.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The ECOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2
switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply
module.
Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-4 show the functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-5
Figure 5-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM
Client side
SCC
WDM side
WDM-side
optical
module
Client-side
optical
module
L2 switching
module
Cross-connect
module
OUT
IN
RX1
RX2
RX8
TX8
TX1
TX2
FE Backplane(management signal transmission)
O/E
E/O O/E
E/O
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal FlowAchieving DCN Communication between the OptiX OSN 6800 and
the OptiX OSN 900A
The client side of the ECOM board accesses FE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the ECOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ECOM to the SCC board,
and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives one channel of FE signals (management signals)
from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module, and
groomed by the backplane to the SCC board through the ETH interface.
l Receive direction
The L2 switching module receives FE signals from the SCC board, and then sends them to
the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the FE electrical signals,
and then outputs the optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM
Client side
SCC
WDM side
WDM-side
optical
module
Client-side
optical
module
L2 switching
module
Cross-connect
module
OUT
IN
RX1
RX2
RX8
TX8
TX1
TX2
GE Backplane(service cross-connection)
O/E
E/O O/E
E/O
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow (Converging/Deconverging 8xFE Services to/from 1xGE Service)
The client side of the ECOM board accesses FE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the ECOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ECOM to the WDM side
of the ECOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives eight channels of optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching
module. The module performs operations such as converging eight channels of FE signals
into one channel of GE signals. Then, the module outputs one channel of GE signals to the
cross-connect module.
The cross-connect module performs operations such as the service cross-connection of the
GE signals.
The GE signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
wavelengths GE optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant GE optical signals
at CWDM standard wavelengths from the WDM side through the IN optical interface.
Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-7
After the O/E conversion, the GE signals are sent to the cross-connect module. The module
performs operations such as the service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs one
channel of GE signals.
The L2 switching module deconverges the GE signals and sends a maximum of eight
channels of FE signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the eight channels of
electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the
TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of eight channels of FE optical
signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from eight channels of internal
electrical signals to FE optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of GE optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to GE optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l L2 switching module
Realizes the forwarding of the service signals.
Realizes the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals.
l Cross-connect module
Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the client-side signals and the
WDM-side signals of the board.
Grooms the electrical signals between the ECOM and the board in the paired slot or the
cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE
signals.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
5.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ECOM front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-5 shows the ECOM front panel.
Figure 5-5 ECOM front panel
ECOM
ECOM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
T
X
2
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
5
R
X
5
T
X
6
R
X
6
T
X
1
R
X
1
I
N
O
U
T
T
X
7
R
X
7
T
X
8
R
X
8
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-9
Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the ECOM front panel. Table 5-2 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 5-2 Types and functions of the ECOM interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX8 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX8 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.1.6 Valid Slots
The ECOM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the ECOM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
5.1.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-3.
Table 5-3 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ECOM displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
TX4/RX4 6
TX5/RX5 7
TX6/RX6 8
TX7/RX7 9
TX8/RX8 10

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Laser Status
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
Board Mode
Port Description
Figure 5-6 shows the NM ports of the ECOM board. Table 5-4 describes the meaning of each
port.
Figure 5-6 Port diagram of the ECOM
PORT10
PORT3
PORT4
PORT5
PORT6
PORT7
PORT8
PORT9
1(IN/OUT)-1
Client side WDM side
VCTRUNK1
101( AP1/AP1)-1
WDM-side optical
module
L2 switching module
Cross-connect
module
Table 5-4 Meaning of NM port of the ECOM
Port Name Meaning
PORT3-PORT10 Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces RX1/
TX1-RX8/TX8.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-11
Port Name Meaning
VCTRUNK1 Internal virtual port.
AP1 Internal convergence port.
IN/OUT Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the ECOM board is used to transmit services, set Board Mode in Configuration > WDM
interfaces on the T2000. The valid values of the board mode field are Service Mode and HUB
Mode.
NOTE
If the HUB mode need be configured, there must be one-to-one connection between ports, which need not
be set on the T2000.
If the service mode need be configured, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l During creation of the Ethernet services on the T2000, create the cross-connection between
the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The cross-connect convergence between the eight
channels of FE optical signals and one channel of GE electrical signals accessed from the
client-side ports is realized through the L2 switching module.
l Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-to-
one port connections, which need not be set on the T2000.
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the cross-
connection between the AP of the ECOM board and AP port of other boards (The GE
services accessed from the client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the client
side of other boards for the inter-board services deconvergence), as shown (1) in Figure
5-7.
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the cross-
connection between the AP of the ECOM board and LP port of other boards (The GE
services accessed from the client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the WDM
side of other boards for the inter-board services convergence), as shown (2) in Figure
5-7.
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the cross-
connections of GE level between the AP port and the IN/OUT port of the ECOM, realizing
the cross-connect grooming of GE services.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-7 Cross-connection diagram of the ECOM
Client side
WDM side
Client side
WDM side
101(AP1/AP1)-1
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Other board
ECOM board
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4 104(AP4/AP4)-1
101(AP1/AP1)-1
102(AP2/AP2)-1
103(AP3/AP3)-1
The client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the client side of
other boards
The client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
2
1
2
1
5.1.8 Specifications of the ECOM
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side
Table 5-5 Specifications of optical module at the client side(FE)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
100BASE-FX
1310 nm-40 km
100BASE-FX
1310 nm-2 km
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 40 2
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 0 -14
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -5 -19
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 10 10
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1310 1310
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-13
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
100BASE-FX
1310 nm-40 km
100BASE-FX
1310 nm-2 km
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-
compliant
IEEE802.3z-
compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN PIN
Receiver sensitivity
(EOL)
dBm -30 -30
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -10 -14

Table 5-6 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side (FE)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
1.25Gbit/s Multi-
rate (eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-
rate (eSFP CWDM)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 9 8.2
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-
compliant
G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
1.25Gbit/s Multi-
rate (eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-
rate (eSFP CWDM)
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side
Table 5-7 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the CWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-15
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.4 lb. (1.0 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 19.6 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 21.6 W
5.2 L4G
L4G: line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit Ethernet line capacity
5.2.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the L4G board is available, that is TN11.
5.2.2 Application
The L4G is a type of optical transponder unit. The L4G realizes the conversion between six GE
signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
5.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the L4G are tunable wavelength, cross-connection
at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
5.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The L4G board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2
switching module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
5.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the L4G front panel.
5.2.6 Valid Slots
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
The L4G occupies one slot. The valid slots for the L4G are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
5.2.7 Characteristic Code for the L4G
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
5.2.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.2.9 Specifications of the L4G
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5.2.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the L4G board is available, that is TN11.
5.2.2 Application
The L4G is a type of optical transponder unit. The L4G realizes the conversion between six GE
signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
For the position of the L4G in the WDM system, see Figure 5-8.
Figure 5-8 Position of the L4G in the WDM system
Client side WDM side
MUX
DMUX
L4G
DMUX
MUX
L4G
1
6
1
6
G.694.1/
G.694.2
GE GE
WDM side Client side
G.694.1/
G.694.2
NOTE
The client-side six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.
5.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the L4G are tunable wavelength, cross-connection
at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-8.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-17
Table 5-8 Functions and features of the L4G
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Converges up to six non-full bandwidth GE service signals into four GE
service signals and multiplexes these four signals into an OTU 5G/FEC 5G
signal. Converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelength compliant with
ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.
694.2. The reverse process is similar.
Client-side
service type
GE
Cross-
connect
capabilities
Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/
protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane.
Supports the transmission of four GE signals to the paired slots through the
backplane.
OTN
function
l Up to four channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and
multiplexed into OTU5G signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than
5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-
T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU5G and ODU5G.
l Supports TCM function for ODU5G.
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM and CWDM specifications.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module,
the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range
of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.
ESC
function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
FEC
encoding
Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate
the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current
and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.
ALS
function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut
down if no signals are received.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Function
and Feature
Description
Protection
scheme
l Supports the SW SNCP.
l Supports the VLAN SNCP.
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
l Supports the MS SNCP protection.
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Client side MAC Supported
PHY Supported

5.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The L4G board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2
switching module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 5-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the L4G.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-19
Figure 5-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the L4G
SCC
WDM side Client side
WDM-side
optical
module
Client-side
optical
module
L2
switching
module
4GE
4GE
OUT
IN
RX1
RX2
RX6
TX6
TX1
TX2
6GE
6GE
Backplane(service cross-connection)
GE
GE
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Cross-
connect
module
Signal processing module
OTN
processing
module
O/E
E/O
E/O
O/E
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
The client side of the L4G board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the L4G board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the L4G to the WDM side
of the L4G, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives a maximum of six channels of flat-rate GE optical
signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX6 interfaces, and performs the O/E
conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the six channels of electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching
module. The module performs operations such as convergence. Then, the module outputs
a maximum of four channels of GE signals to the signal processing module.
The signal processing module performs operations such as the service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the
module outputs one channel of OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals.
The OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing
the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU 5G/
FEC 5G optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU 5G/
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
FEC 5G optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the
module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals are sent to the signal processing
module. The module performs operations such as OTU 5G/FEC 5G in frame, decoding of
FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module
outputs four channels of GE signals.
The L2 switching module deconverges the GE signals and sends six channels of the signals
with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the six channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs six channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX6
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of six channels of GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from six channels of internal
electrical signals to GE optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l L2 switching module
Realizes the forwarding of the service signals.
Realizes the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module,
and OTN processing module.
Cross-connect module
Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the client-side signals and the
WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the
L4G and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the
backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.
GE encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU 5G/
FEC 5G payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the GE
performance monitoring function.
OTN processing module
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-21
Realizes the framing of OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals, processes the overheads of the OTU
5G/FEC 5G signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the L4G front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-10 shows the L4G front panel.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-10 L4G front panel
L4G
L4G
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
T
X
2
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
5
R
X
5
T
X
6
R
X
6
O
U
T
I
N
T
X
1
R
X
1
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces on the L4G front panel. Table 5-9 lists the type and function of
each interface.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-23
Table 5-9 Types and functions of the L4G interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX6 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX6 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.2.6 Valid Slots
The L4G occupies one slot. The valid slots for the L4G are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
5.2.7 Characteristic Code for the L4G
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.
5.2.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-10.
Table 5-10 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the L4G displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
TX5/RX5 7
TX6/RX6 8

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Service Mode
FEC Working State
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
LPT Enabled
SD Trigger Condition
Port Description
Figure 5-11 describes the NM ports of the L4G board. Table 5-11 describes the meaning of
each port.
Figure 5-11 Port diagram of the L4G
PORT3
PORT4
PORT5
PORT6
PORT7
PORT8
Client side WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-1
VCTRUNK1
101(AP1/AP1)-1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK3
VCTRUNK4
102(AP2/AP2)-1
103(AP3/AP3)-1
104(AP4/AP4)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
WDM-side optical
module
L2 swithing module
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
Cross-connect
module
Service processing
module
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-25
Table 5-11 Meaning of NM port of the L4G
Port Name Meaning
PORT3-PORT8 Respectively corresponding to the client-side
optical interfaces RX1/TX1-RX6/TX6.
VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK4 Internal virtual port.
AP1-AP4 Internal convergence port.
LP Internal logic port. The optical paths are
numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.
IN/OUT Corresponding to the WDM-side optical
interfaces.

If the L4G board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l During creation of the Ethernet services on the T2000, create the cross-connection between
the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The cross-connect convergence between the six channels
of GE optical signals and the four channels of GE electrical signals accessed from the client-
side ports is realized through the L2 switching module.
NOTE
One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports.
The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 1.25 Gbit/s.
l Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-to-
one port connections, which need not be set on the T2000.
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the cross-
connection between the AP and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is
realized through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be
realized:
Create the cross-connection between the internal AP and LP ports of the L4G board
(Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown (1)
and (2) in Figure 5-12.
Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the L4G board and the LP port of
other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the L4G board are cross-
connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service
convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 5-12.
Create the cross-connection between the AP port or RX/TX port of other boards and
the LP port of the L4G board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other
boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the L4G board for protection and the
inter-board service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 5-12.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-12 Cross-connection diagram of the L4G
Client side
WDM side
Client side
WDM side
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the L4G board
The straight-through of the board
The internal cross-connection of the board
The client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
3
4
1
2
6
The client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards
Other board
L4G board
1
2
3 4
104(AP4/AP4)-1
101(AP1/AP1)-1
102(AP2/AP2)-1
103(AP3/AP3)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
104(AP4/AP4)-1/6(RX4/TX4)-1
101(AP1/AP1)-1/3(RX1/TX1)-1
102(AP2/AP2)-1/4(RX2/TX2)-1
103(AP3/AP3)-1/5(RX3/TX3)-1
5
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
6
5
The WDM side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
l Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the L4G board and the LP port of other
board (It is used to realize the passing-through of the broadcast services), as shown (5) in
Figure 5-12.
l Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the L4G board and the AP port of other
boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the L4G board are cross-connected
to the client side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service deconvergence),
as shown (6) in Figure 5-12.
l The four paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the
IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the T2000.
5.2.9 Specifications of the L4G
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-27
Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side
Table 5-12 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
distance
km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -19 -20 -22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
Table 5-13 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-40km
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-80km
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-29
Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 5-14 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module Type
3400 ps/nm 6400 ps/nm 3400 ps/nm-
tunable
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 2 -1 4
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -2 -5 0
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10 10
Central
frequency
THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central
frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 3400 6400 3400
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD APD APD
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -25 -25 -25
Minimum
receiver overload
dBm -9 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27

5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side
Table 5-15 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 5G CWDM
Line code format - NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 2.5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 5
Central wavelength nm 1271 to 1451
Central wavelength deviation nm 6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 400
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm -25
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 3.1 lb. (1.4 kg)
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-31
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module
Type
The maximum
power
consumption at
25 (77)
The maximum
power
consumption at
55 (131)
TN11L4G NRZ-fixed(D)(5G)
(3400 ps/nm
6400 ps/nm)
50.0 55.0
NRZ-fixed(C)(5G)
(3400 ps/nm)
45.0 50.0
NRZ-tunable(5G)
(3400 ps/nm)
53.0 58.0

5.3 LDGD
LDGD: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving
5.3.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LDGD board is available, that is TN11.
5.3.2 Application
The LDGD is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDGD realizes the conversion between
two GE signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals, and the dual fed and
selective receiving function on the WDM side.
5.3.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LDGD are tunable wavelength, cross-
connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
5.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LDGD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
5.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDGD front panel.
5.3.6 Valid Slots
The LDGD occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDGD are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
5.3.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD
The characteristic code for the LDGD consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the
frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side.
5.3.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.3.9 Specifications of the LDGD
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
5.3.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LDGD board is available, that is TN11.
5.3.2 Application
The LDGD is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDGD realizes the conversion between
two GE signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals, and the dual fed and
selective receiving function on the WDM side.
For the position of the LDGD in the WDM system, see Figure 5-13.
Figure 5-13 Position of the LDGD in the WDM system
LDGD
DMUX
MUX
LDGD
1
2
1
2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
GE GE
DMUX
MUX
DMUX
MUX
Client side Client side
DMUX
MUX
WDM side WDM side
5.3.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LDGD are tunable wavelength, cross-
connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-16.
Table 5-16 Functions and features of the LDGD
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Multiplexes two GE optical signals into one OTU1/STM-16 signal and
converts the signal into standard DWDM wavelength compliant with
ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with
ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar.
l Realizes the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM
side.
Client-side
service type
GE
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-33
Function and
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
capabilities
l Supports the grooming of two channels of GE services each to
working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the
backplane.
l Supports the transmission of two GE signals to the paired slots through
the backplane.
OTN function l Provides the OTU1 interface on WDM-side.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring
to the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU1 signals. The mapping
process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this
module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side
within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing
of 100 GHz.
ESC function Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
FEC encoding Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to
locate the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias
current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the
OTN.
ALS function The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically
shut down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the SW SNCP.
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Function and
Feature
Description
Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

5.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LDGD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD.
Figure 5-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD
Client side
SCC
WDM side
OUT1
IN1
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
OUT2
IN2
Backplane(service cross-connection) GE
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
GE
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Cross-
connect
module
OTN
processing
module
Signal processing module
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
O/E
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDGD board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the LDGD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDGD to the WDM side
of the LDGD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-35
The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the
module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals.
The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1
optical signals. The optical signals are splited into two channels of identical optical signals,
and then are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical
interfaces. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 in frame, decoding
of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the
module outputs two channels of GE signals.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal
electrical signals to GE optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OTU1 optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module,
and OTN processing module.
Cross-connect module
Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the client-side signals and the
WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
LDGD and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the
backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.
GE encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU1
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the GE performance
monitoring function.
OTN processing module
Realizes the framing of OTU1 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU1 signals,
and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDGD front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-15 shows the LDGD front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-37
Figure 5-15 LDGD front panel
LDGD
LDGD
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
O
U
T
1
I
N
1
O
U
T
2
I
N
2
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the LDGD front panel. Table 5-17 lists the type and function
of each interface.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-17 Types and functions of the LDGD interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN1-IN2 LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2 LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX2 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.3.6 Valid Slots
The LDGD occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDGD are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
5.3.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD
The characteristic code for the LDGD consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the
frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 5-18.
Table 5-18 Characteristic code for the LDGD
Code Meaning Description
The first four digits The frequency of forth
optical signal
The last four digits of the
frequency value of the first
channel of signals on the
WDM side.
The last four digits The frequency of forth
optical signal
The last four digits of the
frequency value of the second
channel of signals on the
WDM side.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LDGD is 92109220.
l "9210" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is
192.10 THz.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-39
l "9220" indicates the frequency of the second channel of optical signals on the WDM side
is 192.20 THz.
5.3.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-19.
Table 5-19 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDGD displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Service Mode
FEC Working State
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
Maximum Packet Length
Ethernet Working Mode
LPT Enabled
SD Trigger Condition
Port Description
Figure 5-16 shows the NM ports of the LDGD board. Table 5-20 describes the meaning of each
port.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-16 Port diagram of the LDGD
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
2(IN2/OUT2)-1
WDM-si de
opti cal modul e
Cross-connect
modul e
Servi ce
processi ng
modul e
Table 5-20 Meaning of NM port of the LDGD
Port Name Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2 Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical
interfaces.
LP Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1 and
2.
IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2 Respectively corresponding to the WDM-side optical
interfaces.

If the LDGD board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
T2000:
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the GE cross-
connection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services
is realized through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can
be realized.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LDGD
board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
(1) and (2) in Figure 5-17.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LDGD board and the LP
port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LDGD board
are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board
service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 5-17.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port
of the LDGD board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are
cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGD board for protection and the inter-board
service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 5-17.
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the LP port.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-41
Figure 5-17 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGD
Client side
WDM side
Client side
WDM side
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Other board
LDGD board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
1
2
3 4
5
3
4
1
2
5
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the
LDGD board
The straight-through of the board
The internal cross-connection of the board
The client side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
The WDM side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
l Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LDGD board and the LP port of
other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LDGD board are cross-
connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services),
as shown (5) in Figure 5-17.
l The two paths of the LP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2
ports. There is no need for configuration on the T2000.
5.3.9 Specifications of the LDGD
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side
Table 5-21 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Target
distance
km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -19 -20 -22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-43
Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
Table 5-22 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-40km
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-80km
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 5-23 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
12800 ps/
nm- PIN
12800 ps/
nm-APD
6500 ps/
nm- PIN
3200 ps/
nm-
2mW-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-
tunable
6400 ps/
nm-four
channels-
tunable
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -4 -4 0 0 0 0
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -8 -8 -5 -5 -5 -5
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10 8.2
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.5
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB 35 35 30 30 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800 6400
Eye pattern mask - G.957 - compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD PIN APD APD APD
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to
1575
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -28 -18 -28 -28 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 0 -9 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-45
Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side
Table 5-24 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-4mW
Line code format - NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 2
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm -0.5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Central wavelength nm 1271 to 1611
Central wavelength deviation nm 6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 1600
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 3.1 lb. (1.4 kg)
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module
Type
The maximum
power
consumption at
25 (77)
The maximum
power
consumption at
55 (131)
TN11LDGD Fixed(2.5G) 12800
ps/nm-PIN
12800 ps/nm-APD
6500 ps/nm-PIN
3200 ps/nm-2mW-
APD
1600 ps/nm-4mW)
34.0 37.4
Tunable(2.5G)
(12800 ps/nm
6400 ps/nm)
38.0 41.8

5.4 LDGS
LDGS: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving
5.4.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LDGS board is available, that is TN11.
5.4.2 Application
The LDGS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDGS realizes the conversion between two
GE signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
5.4.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LDGS are tunable wavelength, cross-
connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
5.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LDGS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
5.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDGS front panel.
5.4.6 Valid Slots
The LDGS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDGS are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
5.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
5.4.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.4.9 Specifications of the LDGS
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-47
5.4.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LDGS board is available, that is TN11.
5.4.2 Application
The LDGS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDGS realizes the conversion between two
GE signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
For the position of the LDGS in the WDM system, see Figure 5-18.
Figure 5-18 Position of the LDGS in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
LDGS
DMUX
MUX
LDGS
1
2
1
2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
GE GE
Client side Client side WDM side WDM side
5.4.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LDGS are tunable wavelength, cross-
connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-25.
Table 5-25 Functions and features of the LDGS
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Multiplexes two GE optical signals into one 2.5 Gbit/s OTU1/STM-16 signal
and converts the signal into standard DWDM wavelength compliant with
ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.
694.2. The reverse process is similar.
Cross-
connect
capabilities
l Supports the grooming of two channels of GE services each to working/
protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane.
l Supports the transmission of two GE signals to the paired slots through the
backplane.
OTN
function
l Provides the OTU1 interface on WDM-side.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU1 signals. The mapping
process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Function
and Feature
Description
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module,
the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range
of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.
ESC
function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
FEC
encoding
Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate
the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current
and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.
ALS
function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut
down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the SW SNCP.
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

5.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LDGS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-19 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-49
Figure 5-19 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS
Client side
SCC
WDM side
WDM-side
optical
module
Client-side
optical
module
OUT
IN
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
Backplane(service cross-connection) GE
O/E
E/O
E/O
O/E
GE
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Cross-
connect
module
OTN
processing
module
Signal processing module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDGS board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the LDGS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDGS to the WDM side
of the LDGS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the
module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals.
The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1
optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface.
Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as OTU1 in frame, decoding of FEC, demapping,
decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs two
channels of GE signals.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal
electrical signals to GE optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OTU1 optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module,
and OTN processing module.
Cross-connect module
Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the client-side signals and the
WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the
LDGS and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the
backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.
GE encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU1
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the GE performance
monitoring function.
OTN processing module
Realizes the framing of OTU1 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU1 signals,
and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-51
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDGS front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-20 shows the LDGS front panel.
Figure 5-20 LDGS front panel
LDGS
LDGS
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2
O
U
T
I
N
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the LDGD front panel. Table 5-26 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 5-26 Types and functions of the LDGS interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX2 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.4.6 Valid Slots
The LDGS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDGS are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
5.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.
5.4.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-53
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-27.
Table 5-27 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDGS displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Service Mode
FEC Working State
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
Maximum Packet Length
Ethernet Working Mode
LPT Enabled
SD Trigger Condition
Port Description
Figure 5-21 shows the NM ports of the LDGS board. Table 5-28 describes the meaning of each
port.
Figure 5-21 Port diagram of the LDGS
1(IN/OUT)-1
WDM side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-1
Client side
WDM-side
optical module
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-28 Meaning of NM port of the LDGS
Port Name Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2 Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical
interfaces.
LP Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1 and
2.
IN/OUT Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the LDGS board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the GE cross-
connection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services
is realized through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can
be realized.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LDGS
board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
(1) and (2) in Figure 5-22.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LDGS board and the LP
port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LDGS board
are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board
service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 5-22.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port
of the LDGS board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are
cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGS board for protection and the inter-board
service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 5-22.
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the LP port.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-55
Figure 5-22 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGS
Client side
WDM side
Client side
WDM side
Cross-connect
module
Other board
LDGS board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
Cross-connect
module
1
2
3 4
5
3
4
1
2
5
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the
LDGS board
The straight-through of the board
The internal cross-connection of the board
The client side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
The WDM side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
l Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LDGS board and the LP port of
other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LDGS board are cross-
connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services),
as shown (5) in Figure 5-22.
l The two paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/
OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the T2000
5.4.9 Specifications of the LDGS
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side
Table 5-29 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-56 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Target
distance
km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -19 -20 -22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-57
Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
Table 5-30 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-40km
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-80km
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-58 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 5-31 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module Type
12800 ps/
nm- PIN
12800 ps/
nm-APD
6500 ps/
nm- PIN
3200 ps/
nm-
2mW-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-
tunable
6400 ps/
nm- four
channels-
tunable
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1 -1 3 3 3 3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -5 -5 -2 -2 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10 8.2
Central
frequency
THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central
frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.5
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 30 30 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800 6400
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD PIN APD APD APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to
1575
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -28 -18 -28 -28 -28
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-59
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module Type
12800 ps/
nm- PIN
12800 ps/
nm-APD
6500 ps/
nm- PIN
3200 ps/
nm-
2mW-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-
tunable
6400 ps/
nm- four
channels-
tunable
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 0 -9 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side
Table 5-32 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-4mW
Line code format - NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 2.5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Central wavelength nm 1271 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 1600
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-60 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-4mW
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.6 lb. (1.2 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module
Type
The maximum
power
consumption at
25 (77)
The maximum
power
consumption at
55 (131)
TN11LDGS Fixed(2.5G) 12800
ps/nm-PIN
12800 ps/nm-APD
6500 ps/nm-PIN
3200 ps/nm-2mW-
APD
1600 ps/nm-4mW)
32.0 35.2
Tunable(2.5G)
(12800 ps/nm
6400 ps/nm)
36.0 39.6

5.5 LDM
LDM: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board
5.5.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LDM board is available, that is TN12.
5.5.2 Application
The LDM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDM realizes the conversion between signals
at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
5.5.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LDM are OTN interfaces and ESC.
5.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-61
The LDM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
5.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDM front panel.
5.5.6 Valid Slots
The LDM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDM are IU1-IU17.
5.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LDM
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
5.5.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.5.9 Specifications of the LDM
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5.5.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LDM board is available, that is TN12.
Type
The system provides two types of the LDM: One has a pair of input and output optical interfaces,
and the other has two pairs of input and output optical interfaces. Table 5-33 lists the types of
the LDM.
Table 5-33 Type description of the LDM
Board Type Description
LDM One type is the single transmitting and
single receiving board.
The WDM-side interfaces are
IN1/OUT1.
Other type is the dual-fed selectively
receiving board.
The WDM-side interfaces are
IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2.

NOTE
The WDM-side interfaces of LDM board are dynamic optical interfaces. Before configuring dual fed and
selective receiving, make sure the optical interfaces have been uploaded manually on the T2000.
5.5.2 Application
The LDM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDM realizes the conversion between signals
at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
For the position of the LDM in the WDM system, see Figure 5-23 and Figure 5-24.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-62 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-23 Position of the LDM in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving)
LDM LDM
1
2
1
2
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
Client side WDM side Client side WDM side
DMUX
MUX
Figure 5-24 Position of the LDM in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving)
LDM LDM
1
2
1
2
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
MUX
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
MUX
Client side WDM side Client side WDM side
NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
5.5.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LDM are OTN interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-34.
Table 5-34 Functions and features of the LDM
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
l Multiplexes two optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/
s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM
wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM
wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar.
l Realizes the dual fed and selective receiving function or single fed and
single receiving function on the WDM side according to the application
scenario.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-63
Function
and Feature
Description
Client-side
service type
OTU1, STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC100, FC200,
FICON, FICON Express, HDTV, GE, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, ESCON, FE,
FDDI
OTN
function
l Up to two channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and
multiplexed into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than
2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-
T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications.
ESC
function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
FEC
encoding
Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate
the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current
and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.
ALS
function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut
down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
WDM side.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
5.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LDM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-25 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDM.
Figure 5-25 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDM
Client side
WDM side
OUT1
IN1
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
OUT2
IN2
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Signal processing
module
OTN
processing
module
O/E
E/O
E/O
O/E
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 5.5.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LDM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDM to the WDM side
of the LDM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-65
processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of
OTU1 signals.
The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1
optical signals. The optical signals are splited into two channels of identical optical signals,
and then are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical
interfaces. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 in frame, decoding
of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels
of Any signals.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2
optical interfaces.
NOTE
Only one pair of WDM-side optical interfaces is used, the board realizes the single fed and single receiving
function on the WDM side.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical
signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal
electrical signals to Any optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OTU1 optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN
processing module.
Service encapsulation and mapping module
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-66 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any
performance monitoring function.
OTN processing module
Realizes the framing of OTU1 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU1 signals,
and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDM front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-26 shows the LDM front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-67
Figure 5-26 LDM front panel
LDM
LDM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
O
U
T
1
I
N
1
O
U
T
2
I
N
2
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the LDM front panel. Table 5-35 lists the type and function
of each interface.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-68 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-35 Types and functions of the TN12LDM interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN1-IN2 LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2 LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX2 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.5.6 Valid Slots
The LDM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDM are IU1-IU17.
5.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LDM
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.
5.5.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-36
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-69
Table 5-36 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDM displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Service Type
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
FEC Working State
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
Maximum Packet Length
Ethernet Working Mode
LPT Enabled
5.5.9 Specifications of the LDM
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of SDH Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200,
FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely
apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed
signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-70 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-37 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
distance
km 2 15 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm NA 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB NA 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-71
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

Specifications of GE Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used
to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above
completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the
accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Table 5-38 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
distance
km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-72 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -19 -20 -22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE,
DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be
slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE,
DVB-ASI.
NOTE
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16
signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are
OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-73
Table 5-39 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16
signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are
OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-74 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-40 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
Target distance km 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz 12.5
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 3
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 2400
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for
the eye pattern of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm NA
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
nimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-75
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Target distance km 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Operating wavelength range nm 1471 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Eye pattern mask - G.957 - compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP DWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
Target distance km 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 3
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-76 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP DWDM)
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.5
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency deviation nm 12.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 2400
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant (5% margin
are required for the eye pattern
of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength range nm NA
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.4 lb. (1.1 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 22.6 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 24.8 W
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-77
5.6 LDMD
LDMD: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and
selective receiving
5.6.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LDMD board is available, that is TN11.
5.6.2 Application
The LDMD is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDMD realizes the conversion between
signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM
signals, and dual fed and selective receiving on the WDM side.
5.6.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LDMD are tunable wavelength, OTN
interfaces and ESC.
5.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LDMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
5.6.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDMD front panel.
5.6.6 Valid Slots
The LDMD occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDMD are IU1-IU17.
5.6.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMD
The characteristic code for the LDMD consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the
frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side.
5.6.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.6.9 Specifications of the LDMD
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5.6.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LDMD board is available, that is TN11.
5.6.2 Application
The LDMD is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDMD realizes the conversion between
signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM
signals, and dual fed and selective receiving on the WDM side.
For the position of the LDMD in the WDM system, see Figure 5-27.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-78 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-27 Position of the LDMD in the WDM system
LDMD LDMD
1
2
1
2
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
MUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
MUX
Client side WDM side Client side WDM side
NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
5.6.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LDMD are tunable wavelength, OTN
interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-41.
Table 5-41 Functions and features of the LDMD
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
l Multiplexes two optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/
s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM
wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
l Realizes the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
Client-side
service type
OTU1, STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC100, FC200,
FICON, FICON Express, HDTV, GE, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, ESCON, FE,
FDDI
OTN
function
l Up to two channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and
multiplexed into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than
2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-
T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM specifications.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-79
Function
and Feature
Description
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module,
the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range
of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.
ESC
function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
FEC
encoding
Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate
the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current
and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.
ALS
function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut
down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

5.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LDMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-28 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDMD.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-80 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-28 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMD
Client side
WDM side
OUT1
IN1
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
OUT2
IN2
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Signal processing
module
OTN
processing
module
O/E
E/O
E/O
O/E
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDMD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 5.6.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LDMD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDMD to the WDM side
of the LDMD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping
processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of
OTU1 signals.
The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals. The optical signals are splited into two channels of
identical optical signals, and then are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-81
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-
IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 in frame, decoding
of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels
of Any signals.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical
signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal
electrical signals to Any optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OTU1 optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN
processing module.
Service encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any
performance monitoring function.
OTN processing module
Realizes the framing of OTU1 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU1 signals,
and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-82 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5.6.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDMD front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-29 shows the LDMD front panel.
Figure 5-29 LDMD front panel
LDMD
LDMD
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
O
U
T
1
I
N
1
O
U
T
2
I
N
2
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-83
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the LDMD front panel. Table 5-42 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 5-42 Types and functions of the LDMD interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN1-IN2 LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2 LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX2 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.6.6 Valid Slots
The LDMD occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDMD are IU1-IU17.
5.6.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMD
The characteristic code for the LDMD consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the
frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 5-43.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-84 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-43 Characteristic code for the LDMD
Code Meaning Description
The first four digits The frequency of forth
optical signal
The last four digits of the
frequency value of the first
channel of signals on the
WDM side.
The last four digits The frequency of forth
optical signal
The last four digits of the
frequency value of the second
channel of signals on the
WDM side.

For example, the characteristic code for the LDMD is 92109220.
l "9210" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is
192.10 THz.
l "9220" indicates the frequency of the second channel of optical signals on the WDM side
is 192.20 THz.
5.6.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-44.
Table 5-44 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDMD displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-85
Optical Interface Loopback
Service Type
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
FEC Working State
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
Maximum Packet Length
Ethernet Working Mode
LPT Enabled
5.6.9 Specifications of the LDMD
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of SDH Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200,
FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely
apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed
signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 5-45 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
distance
km 2 15 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-86 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm NA 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB NA 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

Specifications of GE Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-87
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used
to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above
completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the
accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Table 5-46 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
distance
km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -19 -20 -22
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-88 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE,
DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be
slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE,
DVB-ASI.
NOTE
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16
signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are
OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 5-47 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-89
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16
signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are
OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 5-48 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
Target distance km 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz 12.5
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 3
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.5
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-90 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 2400
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for
the eye pattern of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm NA
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
nimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 5-49 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
12800 ps/nm-
APD
12800 ps/nm-
tunable
6400ps/nm-
four channels-
tunable
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -4 0 0
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -8 -5 -5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 10 10 8.2
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 10
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-91
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
12800 ps/nm-
APD
12800 ps/nm-
tunable
6400ps/nm-
four channels-
tunable
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.2 0.2 0.5
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 12800 12800 6400
Eye pattern mask - G.957 - compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD APD APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to 1575
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28 -28 -28
nimum receiver
overload
dBm -9 -9 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.7 lb. (1.2 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 26.9 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 29.6 W
5.7 LDMS
LDMS: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and
single receiving
5.7.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LDMS board is available, that is TN11.
5.7.2 Application
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-92 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
The LDMS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDMS realizes the conversion between
signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM
signals.
5.7.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LDMS are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces
and ESC.
5.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LDMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
5.7.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDMS front panel.
5.7.6 Valid Slots
The LDMS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDMS are IU1-IU17.
5.7.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMS
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
5.7.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.7.9 Specifications of the LDMS
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5.7.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LDMS board is available, that is TN11.
5.7.2 Application
The LDMS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDMS realizes the conversion between
signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM
signals.
For the position of the LDMS in the WDM system, see Figure 5-30.
Figure 5-30 Position of the LDMS in the WDM system
LDMS LDMS
1
2
1
2
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1
G.694.1
Client side WDM side Client side WDM side
DMUX
MUX
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-93
NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
5.7.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LDMS are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces
and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-50.
Table 5-50 Functions and features of the LDMS
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Multiplexes two optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/
s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM
wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
Client-side
service type
OTU1, STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC100, FC200,
FICON, FICON Express, HDTV, GE, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, ESCON, FE,
FDDI
OTN
function
l Up to two channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and
multiplexed into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than
2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-
T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM specifications.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module,
the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range
of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.
ESC
function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
FEC
encoding
Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate
the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current
and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.
ALS
function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut
down if no signals are received.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-94 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Function
and Feature
Description
Protection
scheme
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

5.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LDMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-31 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDMS.
Figure 5-31 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMS
Client side
WDM side
OUT
IN
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Signal processing
module
OTN
processing
module
O/E
E/O
E/O
O/E
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-95
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDMS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 5.7.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LDMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDMS to the WDM side
of the LDMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping
processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of
OTU1 signals.
The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN
optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as OTU1 in frame, decoding of FEC, demapping, and
decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical
signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal
electrical signals to Any optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-96 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OTU1 optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN
processing module.
Service encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any
performance monitoring function.
OTN processing module
Realizes the framing of OTU1 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU1 signals,
and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5.7.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDMS front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-32 shows the LDMS front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-97
Figure 5-32 LDMS front panel
LDMS
LDMS
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2
O
U
T
I
N
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the LDMS front panel. Table 5-51 lists the type and function
of each interface.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-98 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-51 Types and functions of the LDMS interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX2 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.7.6 Valid Slots
The LDMS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDMS are IU1-IU17.
5.7.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMS
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.
5.7.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-52.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-99
Table 5-52 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDMS displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Service Type
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
FEC Working State
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
Maximum Packet Length
Ethernet Working Mode
LPT Enabled
5.7.9 Specifications of the LDMS
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of SDH Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200,
FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely
apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed
signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-100 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-53 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
distance
km 2 15 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm NA 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB NA 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-101
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

Specifications of GE Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used
to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above
completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the
accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Table 5-54 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
distance
km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-102 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -19 -20 -22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE,
DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be
slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE,
DVB-ASI.
NOTE
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16
signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are
OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-103
Table 5-55 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16
signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are
OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-104 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-56 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
Target distance km 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz 12.5
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 3
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 2400
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for
the eye pattern of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm NA
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
nimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-105
Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 5-57 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
12800 ps/nm-
APD
12800 ps/nm-
tunable
6400ps/nm-
four channels-
tunable
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1 3 3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -5 -2 -2
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 10 10 8.2
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.2 0.2 0.5
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 12800 12800 6400
Eye pattern mask - G.957 - compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD APD APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to 1575
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28 -28 -28
nimum receiver
overload
dBm -9 -9 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-106 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.4 lb. (1.1 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 26.9 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 29.6 W
5.8 LOG
LOG: 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
5.8.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LOG board is available, that is TN11.
5.8.2 Application
The LOG is a type of optical transponder unit. It is applied for conversion between eight channels
of GE service optical signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant OTU2 optical signals.
5.8.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LOG are tunable wavelength, cross-connection
at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
5.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LOG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
5.8.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LOG front panel.
5.8.6 Valid Slots
The LOG occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LOG are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
5.8.7 Characteristic Code for the LOG
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
5.8.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.8.9 Specifications of the LOG
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5.8.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LOG board is available, that is TN11.
5.8.2 Application
The LOG is a type of optical transponder unit. It is applied for conversion between eight channels
of GE service optical signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant OTU2 optical signals.
For the position of the LOG in the WDM system, see Figure 5-33.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-107
Figure 5-33 Position of the LOG in the WDM system
Client side WDM side
MUX
DMUX
LOG
DMUX
MUX
LOG
1
8
1
8
G.694.1
G.694.1
WDM side Client side
GE
GE
5.8.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LOG are tunable wavelength, cross-connection
at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-58.
Table 5-58 Functions and features of the LOG
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Multiplexes eight channels of GE service optical signals into one channel
of OTU2 optical signals and converse them to DWDM standard
wavelength that comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.694.1. The
reverse process is similar.
Client-side
service type
GE
Cross-connect
capabilities
Supports the grooming of eight channels of GE services each to working/
protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane.
Supports the transmission of eight GE signals to the paired slots through
the backplane.
OTN function l Provides the OTU2 interface on WDM-side.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring
to the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU2/OTU2v signals. The
encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.7041
and ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2.
l Supports TCM function for ODU2.
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM specification.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-108 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Function and
Feature
Description
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this
module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side
within the range of:
l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz
l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
ESC function Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
FEC encoding Adopts FEC encoding and AFEC encoding.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to
locate the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias
current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the
OTN.
ALS function The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically
shut down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the SW SNCP.
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
l Supports the MS SNCP protection.
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on
the client side.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

5.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LOG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-34 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LOG.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-109
Figure 5-34 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG
SCC
WDM side
IN
OUT
Backplane(service cross-connection)
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX8
TX8
TX1
TX2
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
GE
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Cross-
connect
module
OTN
processing
module
Signal processing module
GE
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
O/E
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
8
Signal Flow
The client side of the LOG board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the LOG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOG to the WDM side
of the LOG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then,
the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals.
The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths OTU2 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN
optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as OTU2 in frame, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping,
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-110 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs eight
channels of GE signals.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the eight channels of
electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the
TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of eight channels of GE optical
signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from eight channels of the internal
electrical signals to GE optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OTU2 optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module,
and OTN processing module.
Cross-connect module
Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the client-side signals and the
WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the
LOG and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the
backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.
GE encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU2
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the GE performance
monitoring function.
OTN processing module
Realizes the framing of OTU2 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU2 signals,
and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-111
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5.8.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LOG front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-35 shows the LOG front panel.
Figure 5-35 LOG front panel
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
2
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
5
R
X
5
T
X
6
R
X
6
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
7
R
X
7
T
X
8
R
X
8
O
U
T
I
N
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
LOG
LOG
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-112 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the LOG front panel.Table 5-59 lists the type and function of
each interface.
Table 5-59 Types and functions of the LOG interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX8 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX8 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.8.6 Valid Slots
The LOG occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LOG are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
5.8.7 Characteristic Code for the LOG
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.
5.8.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-113
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-60.
Table 5-60 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LOG displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
TX5/RX5 7
TX6/RX6 8
TX7/RX7 9
TX8/RX8 10

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
FEC Working State
FEC Type
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
Maximum Packet Length
Ethernet Working Mode
LPT Enabled
SD Trigger Condition
Port Description
Figure 5-36 shows the NM ports of the LOG board. Table 5-61 describes the meaning of each
port.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-114 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-36 Port diagram of the LOG
10(RX8/TX8)
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
Client side WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
WDM-side
opticalmodule
201(LP/LP)-1
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
9(RX7/TX7)
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-4
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-7
201(LP/LP)-8
201(LP/LP)-6
201(LP/LP)-5
Table 5-61 Meaning of NM port of the LOG
Port Name Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical
interfaces.
LP Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 6, 7 and 8.
IN/OUT Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the LOG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the GE cross-
connection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services
is realized through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can
be realized.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LOG board
(Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown (1)
and (2) in Figure 5-37.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LOG board and the LP port
of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LOG board are
cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board
service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 5-37.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port
of the LOG board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are
cross-connected to the WDM side of the LOG board for protection and the inter-board
service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 5-37.
NOTE
One optical path of the LP port can be created with a connection to only one RX/TX port.
There should be no more than eight cross-connections between the RX/TX ports of the local
board or other boards and the LP port of the local board.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-115
Figure 5-37 Cross-connection diagram of the LOG
Client side
WDM side
Client side
WDM side
Cross-connect
module
Other board
LOG board
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-4
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-7
201(LP/LP)-8
201(LP/LP)-6
201(LP/LP)-5
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-4
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-7
201(LP/LP)-8
201(LP/LP)-6
201(LP/LP)-5
10(TX8/RX8)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
3
4
1
2
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the
LOG board
The straight-through of the board
The internal cross-connection of the board
The client side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
2
3 4
1
5
Cross-connect
module
The WDM side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
5
l Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LOG board and the LP port of other
boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LOG board are cross-
connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services),
as shown (5) in Figure 5-37.
l The eight paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the
IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the T2000.
5.8.9 Specifications of the LOG
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of optical module at the client side
Table 5-62 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125G
Multirate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
distance
km 0.5 10 40 80
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-116 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125G
Multirate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -19 -20 -22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

Table 5-63 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-40km
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-80km
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-117
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-40km
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-80km
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-118 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side
Table 5-64 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm 800 ps/nm
Line code format - NRZ- 40
channels fixed
(odd & even
wavelengths)
NRZ- 40
channels fixed
NRZ- 80
channels fixed
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 2 4 2
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -3 0 -3
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 10 9 10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.00 192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 10 10 5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 800 1600 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity
(FEC on) EOL
dBm -16 -26 -16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 0
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27 -27

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-119
Table 5-65 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
1200 ps/nm
- tunable-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm -
tunable-
APD
4800 ps/nm
-ODB-
tunable
800 ps/nm-
DRZ-
tunable
Line code format - NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
ODB- 80
channels
tunable
DRZ- 80
channels
tunable
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 2 2 2 2
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -3 -3 -3 -3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10
NA
a
10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 5 5 5 5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB 35 35 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 1200 1200 4800 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD APD PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity (FEC
on) EOL
dBm -16 -26 -26 -16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 -9 0
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27
a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.

5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-120 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 3.5 lb. (1.6 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module
Type
The maximum
power
consumption at
25 (77)
The maximum
power
consumption at
55 (131)
TN11LOG NRZ-fixed(10G)
(800 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
1600 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80
channels fixed)
49.5 54.5
NRZ-tunable(10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
50.0 55.0
DRZ-tunable(10G)
(800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
51.2 56.1
ODB-tunable(10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
55.0 60.5

5.9 LOM
LOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board (AFEC)
5.9.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LOM board is available, that is TN11.
5.9.2 Application
The LOM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LOM multiplexes a maximum of eight GE/
FC100/FICON/ISC 1G, four FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G, or two FC400 signals into one
OTU2 signal. It also realizes conversion between these signals and ITU-T Recommendation-
compliant WDM signals. The LOM board supports FC extension and ensures that the signal
width does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services.
5.9.3 Functions and Features
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-121
The main functions and features supported by the LOM are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces
and ESC.
5.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
5.9.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the LOM front panel.
5.9.6 Valid Slots
The LOM occupies two slots. The valid slots for the LOM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16 in the
subrack.
5.9.7 Characteristic Code for the LOM
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
5.9.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.9.9 Specifications of the LOM
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5.9.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LOM board is available, that is TN11.
5.9.2 Application
The LOM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LOM multiplexes a maximum of eight GE/
FC100/FICON/ISC 1G, four FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G, or two FC400 signals into one
OTU2 signal. It also realizes conversion between these signals and ITU-T Recommendation-
compliant WDM signals. The LOM board supports FC extension and ensures that the signal
width does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services.
For the position of the LOM in the WDM system, see Figure 5-38.
Figure 5-38 Position of the LOM in the WDM system
Client side WDM side
MUX
DMUX
LOM
DMUX
MUX
LOM
1
8
1
8
G.694.1
G.694.1
WDM side Client side
GE/
FC100/
FC200/
FC400/
FICON/
FICON Express
ISC 2G/
ISC 1G/
GE/
FC100/
FC200/
FC400/
FICON/
FICON Express
ISC 2G/
ISC 1G/
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-122 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
NOTE
For ISC 1G, GE, FC100, and FICON services, the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the client side are all
available.
For FICON Express and FC200 services, though any optical interface can access the ISC 2G, FICON
Express or FC200 services, only any two of the first and last four optical interfaces can access the FICON
Express or FC200 services at the same time.
For FC400 services, the client-side TX1/RX1 and TX5/RX5 are available.
5.9.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LOM are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces
and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-66.
Table 5-66 Functions and features of the LOM
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Multiplexes eight channels of GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G services,
four FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G services, or two FC400 services
into one channel of OTU2 optical signals and converse them to
DWDM standard wavelength that comply with ITU-T
Recommendation G.694.1. It can also perform the reverse process.
l Supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above. The
overall bandwidth of the first and last four optical interfaces should be
equal to or less than 4 Gbit/s, respectively.
l The LOM board supports FC extension and ensures that the data width
does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services. For
FC100/FC200/FC400 services, the maximum transmission distance
of the WDM side is 3000 km.
Client-side
service type
GE electric signal, GE optical signal, FC100, FC200, FC400, FICON,
FICON Express, ISC 1G, ISC 2G
OTN function l Supports the mapping of up to eight channels of client-side signals into
OTU2/OTU2v signals. The encapsulation and mapping process is
compliant with GDPS, ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2.
l Supports TCM function for ODU2.
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM specification.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this
module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side
within the range of:
l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz
l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-123
Function and
Feature
Description
ESC function Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
FEC encoding Adopts FEC encoding and AFEC encoding.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to report
the alarms and performance events of the board.
ALS function The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically
shut down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on
the client side.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

5.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-39 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LOM.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-124 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-39 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOM
SCC
WDM side
IN
OUT
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX8
TX8
TX1
TX2
GE
encapsulation and
mapping module
FC
encapsulation and
mapping module
FICON
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
O/E
OTN
processing
module
Signal processing module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
ISC
encapsulation and
mapping module
Signal Flow
The client side of the LOM board can access the following signals:
l GE optical signals
l GE electrical signals
l ISC 1G optical signals
l ISC 2G optical signals
l FC100 optical signals
l FC200 optical signals
l FC400 optical signals
l FICON optical signals
l FICON Express optical signals
NOTE
l For ISC 1G, GE, FC100, and FICON services, the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the client side
are all available.
l For FICON Express and FC200 services, though any optical interface can access the ISC 2G, FICON
Express or FC200 services, only any two of the first and last four optical interfaces can access the
FICON Express or FC200 services at the same time.
l For FC400 services, the client-side TX1/RX1 and TX5/RX5 are available.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-125
NOTE
l The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the
corresponding electrical signals.
l Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
l The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals
is considered as an example.
In the signal flow of the LOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOM to the WDM side
of the LOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives eight (eight channels of GE/FC100/FICON/ISC
1G service signals) or four (four channels of FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G service
signals) or two (two channels of FC400 service signals) channels of the optical signals from
client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding
encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as
encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then,
the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals.
The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths OTU2/OTU2v optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2/OTU2v optical signals from the WDM side through
the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2v in frame, decoding of FEC/AFEC,
demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs eight (eight channels
of GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G service signals) or four (four channels of FC200/FICON
Express/ISC 2G service signals) or two (two channels of FC400 service signals) channels
of the electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the eight (eight channels of
GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G service signals) or four (four channels of FC200/FICON
Express/ISC 2G service signals) or two (two channels of FC400 service signals) channels
of the electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of eight channels of GE/FC100/
FICON/ISC 1G optical signals or four channels of FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G
optical signals or two channels of FC400 optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from eight or four or two channels
of the internal electrical signals to the corresponding optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-126 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2v optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OTU2/OTU2v optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the GE encapsulation and mapping module, ISC encapsulation and
mapping module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, FICON encapsulation and
mapping module, and OTN processing module.
GE encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU2
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the GE performance
monitoring function.
ISC encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of ISC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the ISC
performance monitoring function.
FC encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2v
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance
monitoring function.
FICON encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of FICON signals and maps the signals into the OTU2
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FICON
performance monitoring function.
OTN processing module
Realizes the framing of OTU2/OTU2v signals, processes the overheads of the OTU2/
OTU2v signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5.9.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the LOM front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-127
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-40 shows the LOM front panel.
Figure 5-40 LOM front panel
WSD9
WSD9
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D
M
1
D
M
2
D
M
3
D
M
4
E
X
P
O
I
N
D
M
5
D
M
6
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
D
M
7
D
M
8
WSD9
WSD9
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D
M
1
D
M
2
D
M
3
D
M
4
E
X
P
O
I
N
D
M
5
D
M
6
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
D
M
7
D
M
8
WSD9
WSD9
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D
M
1
D
M
2
D
M
3
D
M
4
E
X
P
O
I
N
D
M
5
D
M
6
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
D
M
7
D
M
8
WSD9
WSD9
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D
M
1
D
M
2
D
M
3
D
M
4
E
X
P
O
I
N
D
M
5
D
M
6
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
D
M
7
D
M
8
WSD9
WSD9
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D
M
1
D
M
2
D
M
3
D
M
4
E
X
P
O
I
N
D
M
5
D
M
6
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
D
M
7
D
M
8
WSD9
WSD9
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D
M
1
D
M
2
D
M
3
D
M
4
E
X
P
O
I
N
D
M
5
D
M
6
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
D
M
7
D
M
8
LOM
LOM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
T
X
5
R
X
5
T
X
6
R
X
6
T
X
7
R
X
7
T
X
8
R
X
8
LINK/ACT1
LINK/ACT2
LINK/ACT3
LINK/ACT4
LINK/ACT5
LINK/ACT6
LINK/ACT7
LINK/ACT8
O
U
T
I
N
Indicators
There are twelve indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
l Data port connection/data transceive indicator (LINK/ACTn) - green
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-128 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the LOM front panel. Table 5-67 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 5-67 Types and functions of the LOM interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX8 LC Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side
equipment when the optical module is used.
Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side
equipment when the electrical module is used.
RX1-RX8 LC Receives the optical service signal from the client-side
equipment when the optical module is used.
Receives the electrical service signal from the client-
side equipment when the electrical module is used.

NOTE
For ISC 1G, GE, FC100, and FICON services, the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the client side are all
available.
For FICON Express and FC200 services, though any optical interface can access the ISC 2G, FICON
Express or FC200 services, only any two of the first and last four optical interfaces can access the FICON
Express or FC200 services at the same time.
For FC400 services, the client-side TX1/RX1 and TX5/RX5 are available.
Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.9.6 Valid Slots
The LOM occupies two slots. The valid slots for the LOM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16 in the
subrack.
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two
occupied slots in the subrack, so the slot number of the LOM board displayed on the NM is the
number of the left slot.
For example, if the LOM occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the LOM displayed on
the NM is IU1.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-129
5.9.7 Characteristic Code for the LOM
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.
5.9.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-68.
Table 5-68 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LOM displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
TX5/RX5 7
TX6/RX6 8
TX7/RX7 9
TX8/RX8 10

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Service Type
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
FEC Working State
FEC Type
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-130 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
Maximum Packet Length
Ethernet Working Mode
FC Distance Extension
LPT Enabled
SD Trigger Condition
5.9.9 Specifications of the LOM
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of optical module at the client side
Table 5-69 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125G
Multirate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
distance
km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-131
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125G
Multirate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -19 -20 -22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

Table 5-70 Specifications of FC optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
FC400 Module FC100/FC200/FICON/
FICON Express module
Multimode Single mode Multimode Single mode
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
distance
km 0.3 10 0.5 2
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Transmitter
parameter
specifications
at point S
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 830 to 860 1266 to 1360
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -1 -2 -2.5 -3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9 -8 -9.5 -10
Eye pattern
mask
- Compliant with Fiber Channelphysical interface (FC-PI-2)
parameter template
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-132 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
FC400 Module FC100/FC200/FICON/
FICON Express module
Multimode Single mode Multimode Single mode
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1260 to 1600 770 to 860 1270 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -14 -16 -17 -18
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 0 0 0
Maximum
reflectance
dB -12 -12 -12 -27

Table 5-71 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-40km
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-80km
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1 1
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-133
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-40km
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-80km
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 5-72 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm 800 ps/nm
Line code format - NRZ- 40
channels fixed
(odd & even
wavelengths)
NRZ- 40
channels fixed
NRZ- 80
channels fixed
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 2 4 2
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -3 0 -3
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 10 9 10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.00 192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 10 10 5
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-134 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm 800 ps/nm
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 800 1600 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity
(FEC on) EOL
dBm -16 -26 -16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 0
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27 -27

Table 5-73 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
1200 ps/nm
- tunable-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm -
tunable-
APD
4800 ps/nm
-ODB-
tunable
800 ps/nm-
DRZ-
tunable
Line code format - NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
ODB- 80
channels
tunable
DRZ- 80
channels
tunable
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 2 2 2 2
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -3 -3 -3 -3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10
NA
a
10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 5 5 5 5
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-135
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
1200 ps/nm
- tunable-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm -
tunable-
APD
4800 ps/nm
-ODB-
tunable
800 ps/nm-
DRZ-
tunable
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB 35 35 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 1200 1200 4800 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD APD PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity (FEC
on) EOL
dBm -16 -26 -26 -16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 -9 0
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27
a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 5.1 lb. (2.3 kg)
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-136 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module
Type
The maximum
power
consumption at
25 (77)
The maximum
power
consumption at
55 (131)
LOM NRZ-fixed(10G)
(800 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
1600 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80
channels fixed)
92.7 101.7
NRZ-tunable(10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
92.9 101.9
DRZ-tunable(10G)
(800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
93.4 102.7
ODB-tunable(10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
98.2 108.0

5.10 LQG
LQG: 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board
5.10.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LQG board is available, that is TN11.
5.10.2 Application
The LQG is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQG realizes the conversion between four
GE signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
5.10.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LQG are tunable wavelength, cross-connection
at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
5.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LQG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
5.10.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LQG front panel.
5.10.6 Valid Slots
The LQG occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LQG are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-137
5.10.7 Characteristic Code for the LQG
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
5.10.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.10.9 Specifications of the LQG
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5.10.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LQG board is available, that is TN11.
5.10.2 Application
The LQG is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQG realizes the conversion between four
GE signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
For the position of the LQG in the WDM system, see Figure 5-41.
Figure 5-41 Position of the LQG in the WDM system
Clinet side Client side WDMside WDMside
MUX
DMUX
LQG
LQG
1
4
1
4
G.694.1 G.694.1 GE GE
DMUX
MUX
5.10.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LQG are tunable wavelength, cross-connection
at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-74.
Table 5-74 Functions and features of the LQG
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Multiplexes four channels of GE service optical signals into one channel of
OTU1 optical signals and converse them to DWDM standard wavelength
that comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.694.1. The reverse process is
similar.
Client-side
service type
GE
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-138 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Function
and Feature
Description
Cross-
connect
capabilities
Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/
protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane.
Supports the transmission of four GE signals to the paired slots through the
backplane.
OTN function l Up to four channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and
multiplexed into OTU5G signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less
than 5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with
ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU5G and ODU5G.
l Supports TCM function for ODU5G.
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM specification.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module,
the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the
range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.
ESC function Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
FEC
encoding
Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate
the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current
and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.
ALS function The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut
down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the SW SNCP.
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
l Supports the MS SNCP protection.
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Client side Inloop Supported
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-139
Function
and Feature
Description
Outloop Supported

5.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LQG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-42 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LQG.
Figure 5-42 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQG
SCC
IN
OUT
Backplane (service corss-connection)
Client side
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
GE
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Cross-
connect
module
OTN
processing
module
Signal processing
module
GE
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
O/E
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
RX3
TX3
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
WDM side
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQG board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the LQG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQG to the WDM side
of the LQG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four channels of GE optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-140 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the
module outputs one channel of OTU5G/FEC5G signals.
The OTU5G/FEC5G signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing
the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals from the WDM side through
the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the OTU5G/FEC5G signals are sent to the signal processing
module. The module performs operations such as OTU5G/FEC5G in frame, decoding of
FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module
outputs four channels of GE signals.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the four channels of
electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the
TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of four channels of GE optical
signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal
electrical signals to GE optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module,
and OTN processing module.
Cross-connect module
Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the client-side signals and the
WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the
LQG and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the
backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.
GE encapsulation and mapping module
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-141
Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU5G/
FEC5G payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the GE
performance monitoring function.
OTN processing module
Realizes the framing of OTU5G/FEC5G signals, processes the overheads of the
OTU5G/FEC5G signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5.10.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LQG front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-43 shows the LQG front panel.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-142 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-43 LQG front panel
LQG
LQG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
O
U
T
I
N
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the LQG front panel. Table 5-75 lists the type and function
of each interface.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-143
Table 5-75 Types and functions of the LQG interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX4 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX4 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.10.6 Valid Slots
The LQG occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LQG are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
5.10.7 Characteristic Code for the LQG
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.
5.10.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-76.
Table 5-76 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQG displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-144 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Service Mode
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
FEC Working State
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
Maximum Packet Length
Ethernet Working Mode
LPT Enabled
Port Description
Figure 5-44 shows the NM ports of the LQG board. Table 5-77 describes the meaning of each
port.
Figure 5-44 Port diagram of the LQG
4(RX2/TX2)-1
Client side
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
WDM-side
optical
module
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
3(RX1/TX1)-1
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-145
Table 5-77 Meaning of NM port of the LQG
Port Name Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical
interfaces.
LP Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3
and 4.
IN/OUT Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the LQG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the GE cross-
connection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services
is realized through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can
be realized.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LQG board
(Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown (1)
and (2) in Figure 5-45.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQG board and the LP port
of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LQG board are
cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board
service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 5-45.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port
of the LQG board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are
cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQG board for protection and the inter-board
service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 5-45.
NOTE
One optical path of the LP port can be created with a connection to only one RX/TX port.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-146 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-45 Cross-connection diagram of the LQG
Cross-connect
module
Other board
LQG board
3
4
1
2
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-4
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
Cross-connect
module
2
3 4
1
5
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-4
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
5
Client side
WDM side
Client side
WDM side
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the
LQG board
The straight-through of the board
The internal cross-connection of the board
The client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
The WDM side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
l Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LQG board and the LP port of other
boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LQG board are cross-
connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services),
as shown (5) in Figure 5-45.
l The four paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the
IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the T2000.
5.10.9 Specifications of the LQG
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side
Table 5-78 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-147
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Target
distance
km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -19 -20 -22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-148 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
Table 5-79 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-40km
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-80km
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-149
Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 5-80 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
3400 ps/
nm
6400 ps/
nm
3400 ps/
nm-
tunable
6400 ps/
nm-ODB
tunable
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ ODB
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 2 -1 4 2
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -2 -5 0 -3
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 10 10 10 9
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 35 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 3400 6400 3400 6400
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD APD APD APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm -25 -25 -25 -25
nimum receiver
overload
dBm -9 -9 -9 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27 -27 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-150 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l Weight: 2.9 lb. (1.3 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module
Type
The maximum
power
consumption at
25 (77) (W)
The maximum
power
consumption at
55 (131) (W)
TN11LQG NRZ-fixed (5G)
(3400 ps/nm
6400 ps/nm)
30.0 33.0
NRZ-tunable (5G)
(3400 ps/nm)
31.0 34.4
ODB-tunable (5G)
(6400 ps/nm)
36.0 40.0

5.11 LQM
LQM: 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board
5.11.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LQM board is available, that is TN13.
5.11.2 Application
The LQM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQM realizes the conversion between signals
at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
5.11.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LQM are tunable wavelength, cross-
connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
5.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LQM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
5.11.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LQM front panel.
5.11.6 Valid Slots
The LQM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LQM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
5.11.7 Characteristic Code for the LQM
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
5.11.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.11.9 Specifications of the LQM
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-151
5.11.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LQM board is available, that is TN13.
Type
The system provides two types of the LQM: One has a pair of input and output optical interfaces,
and the other has two pairs of input and output optical interfaces. Table 5-81 lists the types of
the LQM.
Table 5-81 Type description of the LQM
Board Type Description
LQM One type is the single transmitting and
single receiving board.
The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/
OUT1.
Other type is the dual-fed selectively
receiving board.
The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/
OUT1 and IN2/OUT2.

NOTE
The WDM-side interfaces of LQM board are dynamic optical interfaces. Before configuring dual fed and
selective receiving, make sure the optical interfaces have been uploaded manually on the T2000.
5.11.2 Application
The LQM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQM realizes the conversion between signals
at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
For the position of the LQM in the WDM system, see Figure 5-46 and Figure 5-47.
Figure 5-46 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving)
LQM LQM
1
4
1
4
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
Client side WDM side Client side WDM side
DMUX
MUX
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-152 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-47 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving)
LQM LQM
1
4
1
4
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
MUX
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
MUX
Client side WDM side Client side WDM side
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
5.11.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LQM are tunable wavelength, cross-
connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-82.
Table 5-82 Functions and features of the LQM
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
l Multiplexes four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5
Gbit/s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard
DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard
CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process
is similar.
l With this board, many services, such as the data services (Ethernet
services), SAN services (ESCON, FC/FICON), video services (DVB), and
voice services (SDH/SONET), can be transmitted by the same wavelength.
l Realizes the dual fed and selective receiving function or single fed and
single receiving function on the WDM side according to the application
scenario.
Client-side
service type
STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100, GE, FE,
ESCON, DVB-ASI, FICON, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV, DVB-SDI,
FDDI
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-153
Function
and Feature
Description
Cross-
connect
capabilities
l Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services or one channel of
OTU1 services each to working/protection cross-connection boards
respectively through the backplane.
l Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s
and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane.
OTN
function
l Up to four channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and
multiplexed into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than
2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-
T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications.
ESC
function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
FEC
encoding
Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate
the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current
and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.
ALS
function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut
down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the SW SNCP.
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
l Supports the MS SNCP protection.
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
WDM side.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Client side Inloop Supported
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-154 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Function
and Feature
Description
Outloop Supported

5.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LQM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-48 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LQM.
Figure 5-48 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQM
SCC
WDM side
IN1
OUT2
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
Backplane(service cross-connection)
RX3
TX3
OUT1
IN2
100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
O/E
Cross-
connect
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Signal processing
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 5.11.3 Functions and Features.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-155
In the signal flow of the LQM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQM to the WDM side
of the LQM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the
module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals.
The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1
optical signals. The optical signals are splited into two channels of identical optical signals,
and then are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical
interfaces. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 in frame, decoding
of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the
module outputs four channels of Any signals.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the four channels of
electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the
TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
NOTE
Only one pair of WDM-side optical interfaces is used, the board realizes the single fed and single receiving
function on the WDM side.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical
signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal
electrical signals to Any optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OTU1 optical signals.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-156 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping
module, and OTN processing module.
Cross-connect module
Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the client-side signals and the
WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the
LQM and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the
backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals.
Service encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any
performance monitoring function.
OTN processing module
Realizes the framing of OTU1 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU1 signals,
and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5.11.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LQM front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-49 shows the LQM front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-157
Figure 5-49 LQM front panel
LQM
LQM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
T
X
2
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
O
U
T
1
I
N
1
O
U
T
2
I
N
2
T
X
1
R
X
1
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the LQM front panel. Table 5-83 lists the type and function
of each interface.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-158 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-83 Types and functions of the LQM interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN1-IN2 LC Receives the single-channel signal from the
optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and
drop multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2 LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX4 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX4 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.11.6 Valid Slots
The LQM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LQM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
5.11.7 Characteristic Code for the LQM
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.
5.11.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-84
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-159
Table 5-84 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQM displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Service Type
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
FEC Working State
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
Maximum Packet Length
Ethernet Working Mode
LPT Enabled
Port Description
Figure 5-50 shows the NM ports of the LQM board. Table 5-85 describes the meaning of each
port.
Figure 5-50 Port diagram of the LQM
Client side WDM side
Cross-connect
module
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
2(IN2/OUT2)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
Service
processing
module
WDM-side
optical
module
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-160 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-85 Meaning of NM port of the LQM
Port Name Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical
interfaces.
ClientLP Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3
and 4.
IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2 Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the LQM board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the cross-
connection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level
(GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services
is realized through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can
be realized.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the LQM
board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
(1) and (2) in Figure 5-51.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQM board and the
ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client
side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for
protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 5-51.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP
port of the LQM board (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of
other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQM board for protection and
the inter-board service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 5-51.
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port.
Only the first optical path of ClientLP ports supports OTU1 services.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-161
Figure 5-51 Cross-connection diagram of the LQM
3
4
1
2
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
2
3 4
1
5
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3
Client side
WDM side
Client side
WDM side
Cross-connect
module
Other board
LQM board
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the
LQM board
The straight-through of the board
The internal cross-connection of the board
The client side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
Cross-connect
module
The WDM side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
5
l Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQM board and the ClientLP
port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side of the
LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the
WDM-side services), as shown (5) in Figure 5-51.
l The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/
OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the T2000.
l According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and
receive timeslots.
Configuration Principle
l The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a
timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services.
l In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of
the transmit end.
l For each LQM board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed
16.
l For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1 and HDTV services, timeslots can
be configured only in channel 1 of the LQM board.
l Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required
by each type of service is listed below.
Service Type Number of Timeslots
GE 7
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-162 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Service Type Number of Timeslots
FE 1
OTU1 16
STM-1 1
STM-4 4
STM-16 16
OC-3 1
OC-12 4
OC-48 16
FC100 6
FC200 12
FICON 6
FICON Express 12
HDTV 11
DVBASI 2
DVBSDI 3
ESCON 2
FDDI 1

5.11.9 Specifications of the LQM
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of SDH Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1,
OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-163
Table 5-86 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
distance
km 2 15 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm NA 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB NA 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-164 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

Specifications of GE Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used
to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications
when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Table 5-87 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
distance
km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-165
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -19 -20 -22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual
values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12,
ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely
apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when
the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE
signals.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-166 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-88 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely
apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when
the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE
signals.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-167
Table 5-89 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
Target distance km 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz 12.5
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 3
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 2400
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for
the eye pattern of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm NA
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
nimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-168 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Target distance km 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Operating wavelength range nm 1471 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Eye pattern mask - G.957 - compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP DWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
Target distance km 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 3
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-169
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP DWDM)
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.5
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency deviation nm 12.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 2400
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant (5% margin
are required for the eye pattern
of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength range nm NA
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.4 lb. (1.1 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 32.6 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 35.9 W
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-170 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
5.12 LQMD
LQMD: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and
selective receiving
5.12.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the LQMD board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main
differences between the two versions lie in whether the board of different versions supports the
function of processing OTU1/HDTV/DVB-SDI/FDDI services and CWDM specifications.
5.12.2 Application
The LQMD is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQMD realizes the conversion between
signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM
signals, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
5.12.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LQMD are tunable wavelength, cross-
connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
5.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LQMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
5.12.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LQMD front panel.
5.12.6 Valid Slots
The LQMD occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LQMD are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
5.12.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMD
The characteristic code for the LQMD consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the
frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side.
5.12.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.12.9 Specifications of the LQMD
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5.12.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the LQMD board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main
differences between the two versions lie in whether the board of different versions supports the
function of processing OTU1/HDTV/DVB-SDI/FDDI services and CWDM specifications.
Table 5-90 lists the version description of the LQMD.
Table 5-90 Version description of the LQMD
Item Description
Functional
version
Two functional versions of the LQMD board are available: TN11 and
TN12.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-171
Item Description
Similarity The TN12LQMD works in the same way as the TN11LQMD.
Difference TN12LQMD board supports the function of processing OTU1/HDTV/
DVB-SDI/FDDI services.
TN12LQMD supports the DWDM specifications.
TN11LQMD supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications.
Replacement In the DWDM system, the TN12LQMD board can replace the
TN11LQMD board, but after the replacement, the SCC software need be
upgraded.
The TN11LQMD board, however, cannot replace the TN12LQMD board.

5.12.2 Application
The LQMD is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQMD realizes the conversion between
signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM
signals, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
For the position of the LQMD in the WDM system, see Figure 5-52.
Figure 5-52 Position of the LQMD in the WDM system
LQMD LQMD
1
4
1
4
100Mbit/s
-2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s
-2.5Gbit/s
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
DMUX
MUX
DMUX
MUX
Client side WDM side WDM side Client side
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
TN12LQMD supports the DWDM specifications only.
5.12.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LQMD are tunable wavelength, cross-
connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-91.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-172 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-91 Functions and features of the LQMD
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
l Multiplexes four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5
Gbit/s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard
DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard
CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process
is similar.
l With this board, many services, such as the data services (Ethernet
services), SAN services (ESCON, FC/FICON), video services (DVB), and
voice services (SDH/SONET), can be transmitted by the same wavelength.
l Realizes the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
Client-side
service type
TN11LQMD: STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200,
FC100, GE, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, FICON, FICON Express
TN12LQMD: STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200,
FC100, GE, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, FICON, FICON Express, OTU1,
HDTV, DVB-SDI, FDDI
Cross-
connect
capabilities
l Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services or one channel of
OTU1 services each to working/protection cross-connection boards
respectively through the backplane.
l Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s
and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane.
OTN
function
l Up to four channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and
multiplexed into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than
2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-
T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
WDM
specification
TN11LQMD: Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications.
TN12LQMD: Supports the DWDM specification.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module,
the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range
of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.
ESC
function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
FEC
encoding
Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate
the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current
and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-173
Function
and Feature
Description
ALS
function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut
down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the SW SNCP.
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
l Supports the MS SNCP protection.
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

5.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LQMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-53 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-174 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-53 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD
SCC
WDM side
IN1
OUT2
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
Backplane(service cross-connection)
RX3
TX3
OUT1
IN2
100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
O/E
Cross-
connect
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Signal processing
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQMD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 5.12.3 Functions and Features.
TN12LQMD supports the DWDM specifications only.
In the signal flow of the LQMD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMD to the WDM side
of the LQMD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the
module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals.
The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-175
wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1
optical signals. The optical signals are splited into two channels of identical optical signals,
and then are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical
interfaces. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 in frame, decoding
of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the
module outputs four channels of Any signals.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the four channels of
electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the
TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical
signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal
electrical signals to Any optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OTU1 optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping
module, and OTN processing module.
Cross-connect module
Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the client-side signals and the
WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the
LQMD and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the
backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals.
Service encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any
performance monitoring function.
OTN processing module
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-176 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Realizes the framing of OTU1 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU1 signals,
and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5.12.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LQMD front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-54 shows the LQMD front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-177
Figure 5-54 LQMD front panel
LQMD
LQMD
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
T
X
2
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
O
U
T
1
I
N
1
O
U
T
2
I
N
2
T
X
1
R
X
1
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the LQMD front panel. Table 5-92 lists the type and function
of each interface.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-178 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-92 Types and functions of the LQMD interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN1-IN2 LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2 LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX4 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX4 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.12.6 Valid Slots
The LQMD occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LQMD are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
5.12.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMD
The characteristic code for the LQMD consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the
frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 5-93.
Table 5-93 Characteristic code for the LQMD
Code Meaning Description
The first four digits The frequency of forth
optical signal
The last four digits of the
frequency value of the first
channel of signals on the
WDM side.
The last four digits The frequency of forth
optical signal
The last four digits of the
frequency value of the second
channel of signals on the
WDM side.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-179
For example, the characteristic code for the LQMD is 92109220.
l "9210" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is
192.10 THz.
l "9220" indicates the frequency of the second channel of optical signals on the WDM side
is 192.20 THz.
5.12.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-94.
Table 5-94 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQMD displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Service Type
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
FEC Working State
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
Maximum Packet Length
Ethernet Working Mode
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-180 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
LPT Enabled
Port Description
Figure 5-55 shows the NM ports of the LQMD board. Table 5-95 describes the meaning of
each port.
Figure 5-55 Port diagram of the LQMD
Client side WDM side
Cross-connect
module
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
2(IN2/OUT2)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
Service
processing
module
WDM-side
optical
module
NOTE
TN11LQMD: The optical paths of internal logic port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4.
TN12LQMD: The optical paths of internal logic port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/
ClientLP)-4.
Table 5-95 Meaning of NM port of the LQMD
Port Name Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical
interfaces.
ClientLP Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3
and 4.
IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2 Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the LQMD board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
T2000:
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the cross-
connection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level
(GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services
is realized through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can
be realized.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the
LQMD board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board),
as shown (1) and (2) in Figure 5-56.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQMD board and the
ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client
side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for
protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 5-56.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the
ClientLP port of the LQMD board (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-181
client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMD board
for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 5-56.
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port.
Only the first optical path of ClientLP port supports OTU1 services.
Figure 5-56 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMD
3
4
1
2
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
2
3 4
1
5
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3
Client side
WDM side
Client side
WDM side
Cross-connect
module
Other board
LQMD board
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the
LQMD board
The straight-through of the board
The internal cross-connection of the board
The client side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
Cross-connect
module
The WDM side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
5
l Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQMD board and the
ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side
of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming
of the WDM-side services), as shown (5) in Figure 5-55.
l The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/
OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the T2000.
l According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and
receive timeslots.
Configuration Principle
l The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a
timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services.
l In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of
the transmit end.
l For each LQMD board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed
16.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-182 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, HDTV services, timeslots can be
configured only in channel 1 of the LQMD board.
l Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required
by each type of service is listed below.
Service Type Number of Timeslots
GE 7
FE 1
OTU1 16
STM-1 1
STM-4 4
STM-16 16
OC-3 1
OC-12 4
OC-48 16
FC100 6
FC200 12
FICON 6
FICON Express 12
HDTV 11
DVBASI 2
DVBSDI 3
ESCON 2
FDDI 1

5.12.9 Specifications of the LQMD
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of SDH Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1,
OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-183
Table 5-96 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
distance
km 2 15 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm NA 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB NA 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-184 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

Specifications of GE Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used
to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications
when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Table 5-97 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
distance
km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-185
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -19 -20 -22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual
values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12,
ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely
apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when
the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE
signals.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-186 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-98 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

TN12LQMD: Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely
apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when
the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-187
Table 5-99 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
Target distance km 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz 12.5
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 3
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 2400
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for
the eye pattern of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm NA
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
nimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-188 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
TN11LQMD: Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 5-100 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
12800 ps/
nm- PIN
12800 ps/
nm-APD
6500 ps/
nm- PIN
3200 ps/
nm-
2mW-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-
tunable
6400 ps/
nm-four
channels-
tunable
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -4 -4 0 0 0 0
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -8 -8 -5 -5 -5 -5
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10 8.2
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.5
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB 35 35 30 30 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800 6400
Eye pattern mask - G.957 - compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD PIN APD APD APD
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to
1575
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -28 -18 -28 -28 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 0 -9 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-189
TN12LQMD: Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 5-101 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
12800 ps/nm-
APD
12800 ps/nm-
tunable
6400ps/nm-
four channels-
tunable
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -4 0 0
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -8 -5 -5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 10 10 8.2
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.2 0.2 0.5
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 12800 12800 6400
Eye pattern mask - G.957 - compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD APD APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to 1575
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28 -28 -28
nimum receiver
overload
dBm -9 -9 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27 -27

5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-190 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
TN11LQMD: Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side
Table 5-102 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-4mW
Line code format - NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 2
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm -0.5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Central wavelength nm 1271 to 1611
Central wavelength deviation nm 6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 1600
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 3.1 lb. (1.4 kg)
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-191
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module
Type
The maximum
power
consumption at
25 (77)
The maximum
power
consumption at
55 (131)
TN11LQMD Fixed(2.5G) (12800
ps/nm-PIN
12800 ps/nm-APD
6500 ps/nm-PIN
3200 ps/nm-2mW-
APD
1600 ps/nm-4mW)
54.9 60.4
Tunable(2.5G)
(12800 ps/nm
6400 ps/nm)
59.1 65.1
TN12LQMD - 32.1 35.3

5.13 LQMS
LQMS: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and
single receiving
5.13.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the LQMS board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference
between the two versions lies in the types of services that the board of different versions supports.
5.13.2 Application
The LQMS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQMS realizes the conversion between
signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM
signals or realizes the conversion between ODU1 signals from the cross-connet board and ITU-
T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
5.13.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LQMS are tunable wavelength, cross-
connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
5.13.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LQMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
5.13.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LQMS front panel.
5.13.6 Valid Slots
The LQMS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LQMS are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
5.13.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMS
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-192 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
5.13.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.13.9 Specifications of the LQMS
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5.13.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the LQMS board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference
between the two versions lies in the types of services that the board of different versions supports.
Table 5-103 lists the version description of the LQMS.
Table 5-103 Version description of the LQMS
Item Description
Functional
version
Two functional versions of the LQMS board are available: TN11 and
TN12.
Similarity As a service convergence board, the TN12LQMS works in the same way
as the TN11LQMS.
Difference TN12LQMS supports the function of processing OTU1/HDTV/DVB-SDI/
FDDI services.
TN12LQMS supports the NS1 Mode: realizes the conversion between
ODU1 electrical signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM
signals.
TN12LQMS supports the DWDM specifications.
TN11LQMS supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications.
Replacement In the DWDM system, as a service convergence board, the TN12LQMS
board can replace the TN11LQMS board, but after the replacement, the
SCC software need be upgraded.
The TN11LQMDS board, however, cannot replace the TN12LQMS board.

5.13.2 Application
The LQMS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQMS realizes the conversion between
signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM
signals or realizes the conversion between ODU1 signals from the cross-connet board and ITU-
T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
Application Scenario 1: Realizes the Conversion between Signals at the Rate
between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM
Signals
For the position of the LQMS in the WDM system, see Figure 5-57.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-193
Figure 5-57 Position of the LQMS in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
LQMS
DMUX
MUX
LQMS
1
4
1
4
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
100Mbit/s
-2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s
-2.5Gbit/s
Client side WDM side WDM side Client side
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
TN12LQMS supports the DWDM specifications only.
Application Scenario 2: Realizes the Conversion between ODU1 Electrical Signals
and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals
For the position of the LQMS in the WDM system, see Figure 5-58.
Figure 5-58 Position of the LQMS in the WDM system
WDM side
DMUX
MUX
LQMS
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
LQMS
WDM side
5.13.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LQMS are tunable wavelength, cross-
connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-104.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-194 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-104 Functions and features of the LQMS
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
l Multiplexes four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5
Gbit/s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard
DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard
CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process
is similar.
l With this board, many services, such as the data services (Ethernet
services), SAN services (ESCON, FC/FICON), video services (DVB), and
voice services (SDH/SONET), can be transmitted by the same wavelength.
l Maps ODU1 signal into OTU1 optical signal and converts it into the
standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse
process is similar.
Client-side
service type
TN11LQMS: STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200,
FC100, GE, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, FICON, FICON Express
TN12LQMS: STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200,
FC100, GE, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, FICON, FICON Express, OTU1,
HDTV, DVB-SDI, FDDI
Cross-
connect
capabilities
l Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services or one channel of
OTU1 services each to working/protection cross-connection boards
respectively through the backplane.
l Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s
and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane.
l Supports the cross-connection of one ODU1 signal between the LQMS and
the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slots through the
backplane.
OTN
function
l Up to four channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and
multiplexed into one channel of OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth
must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is
compliant with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
WDM
specification
TN11LQMS: Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications.
TN12LQMS: Supports the DWDM specification.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module,
the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range
of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.
ESC
function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
FEC
encoding
Supports FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-195
Function
and Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate
the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current
and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.
ALS
function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut
down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the SW SNCP.
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
l Supports the MS SNCP protection.
l Supports the tibutary SNCP protection (NS1 Mode).
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

5.13.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LQMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-59 and Figure 5-60 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LQMS.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-196 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-59 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMS
WDM side
IN
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
Backplane(service cross-connection)
RX3
TX3
OUT
100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
O/E
Cross-
connect
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Signal processing module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQMS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 5.13.3 Functions and Features.
TN12LQMS supports the DWDM specifications only.
In the signal flow of the LQMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMS to the WDM side
of the LQMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the
module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals.
The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-197
wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1
optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface.
Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as OTU1 in frame, decoding of FEC, demapping,
decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four
channels of Any signals.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the four channels of
electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the
TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Figure 5-60 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMS (NS1 Mode)
IN
OUT
Cross-
connect
module
Signal processing module
OTN
processing
module
ODU1
E/O
O/E
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
WDM side
Backplane(service cross-connection)
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal Flow (NS1 Mode)
The client side of the LQMS board accesses ODU1 electrical signals.
In the signal flow of the LQMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMS to the backplane
of the LQMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-198 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l Transmit direction
The signal processing module receives ODU1 electrical signals sent from the backplane.
The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the
module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals.
The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN
optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as OTU1 in frame, decoding of FEC. Then, the module
sends out one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical
signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal
electrical signals to Any optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OTU1 optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping
module, and OTN processing module.
Cross-connect module
Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the client-side signals and the
WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the
LQMS and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the
backplane. The grooming service signals are Any/ODU1 signals.
Service encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any
performance monitoring function.
OTN processing module
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-199
Realizes the framing of OTU1 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU1 signals,
and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5.13.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LQMS front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-61 shows the LQMS front panel.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-200 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-61 LQMS front panel
LQMS
LQMS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
O
U
T
I
N
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the LQMS front panel. Table 5-105 lists the type and function
of each interface.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-201
Table 5-105 Types and functions of the LQMS interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX4 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX4 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.13.6 Valid Slots
The LQMS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LQMS are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
5.13.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMS
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.
5.13.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-106.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-202 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-106 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQMS displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Service Type
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
FEC Working State
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
Maximum Packet Length
Ethernet Working Mode
LPT Enabled
Board Mode
Port Description
Figure 5-62 and Figure 5-63 show the NM ports of the LQMS board. Table 5-107 describes
the meaning of each port.
Figure 5-62 Port diagram of the LQMS (LQM Mode)
Client side WDM side
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
WDM-side
optical module
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-203
NOTE
TN11LQMS: The optical paths of internal logic port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4.
TN12LQMS (LQM Mode): The optical paths of internal logic port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201
(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4.
Figure 5-63 Port diagram of the LQMS (NS1 Mode)
WDM side
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
WDM-side
optical module
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
Table 5-107 Meaning of NM port of the LQMS
Port Name Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical
interfaces.
ClientLP Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical
interfaces.
ODU1LP Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3
and 4.
IN/OUT Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the LQMS board is used to transmit services, set Board Mode in Configuration > WDM
interfaces on the T2000. The valid values of the board mode field are LQM Mode and NS1
Mode.
NOTE
The TN11LQMS board does not require the configuration of the board mode. The electrical cross-connect
services of the TN11LQMS are created in the same way as the electrical cross-connect services of the
TN12LQMS in the LQM mode.
LQM Mode:
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the cross-
connection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level
(GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services
is realized through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can
be realized.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the
LQMS board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board),
as shown (1) and (2) in Figure 5-64.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQMS board and the
ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-204 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for
protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 5-64.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP
port of the LQMS board (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of
other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMS board for protection
and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 5-64.
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port.
Only the first optical path of ClientLP ports supports OTU1 services.
Figure 5-64 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS
3
4
1
2
2
3 4
1
5
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
5
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3
Client side
WDM side
Client side
WDM side
Cross-connect
module
Other board
LQMS board
Cross-connect
module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the
LQMS board
The straight-through of the board
The internal cross-connection of the board
The client side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
The WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
l Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQMS board and the ClientLP
port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side of the
LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the
WDM-side services), as shown (5) in Figure 5-64.
l The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN/OUT ports. There
is no need for configuration on the T2000.
l According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and
receive timeslots.
Configuration Principle
l The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a
timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-205
l In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of
the transmit end.
l For each LQMS board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed
16.
l For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, HDTV services, timeslots can be
configured only in channel 1 of the LQMS board.
l Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required
by each type of service is listed below.
Service Type Number of Timeslots
GE 7
FE 1
OTU1 16
STM-1 1
STM-4 4
STM-16 16
OC-3 1
OC-12 4
OC-48 16
FC100 6
FC200 12
FICON 6
FICON Express 12
HDTV 11
DVBASI 2
DVBSDI 3
ESCON 2
FDDI 1

NS1 Mode:
l Create the cross-connection between the ODU1LP port of the LQMS board and the
ClientLP port of other boards (For regeneration) shown in Figure 5-65.
l The four paths of the ODU1LP port are respectively connected to the IN/OUT ports. There
is no need for configuration on the T2000.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-206 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-65 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Cross-connect
module
Other board
LQMS board
Cross-connect
module
5.13.9 Specifications of the LQMS
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of SDH Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1,
OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 5-108 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
distance
km 2 15 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-207
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm NA 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB NA 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-208 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Specifications of GE Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used
to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications
when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Table 5-109 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
distance
km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-209
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -19 -20 -22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12,
ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply
to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the
accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely
apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when
the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE
signals.
Table 5-110 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-210 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

TN12LQMS: Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely
apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when
the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 5-111 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
Target distance km 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz 12.5
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 3
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-211
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 2400
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for
the eye pattern of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm NA
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
nimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

TN11LQMS: Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 5-112 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module Type
12800 ps/
nm- PIN
12800 ps/
nm-APD
6500 ps/
nm- PIN
3200 ps/
nm-
2mW-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-
tunable
6400 ps/
nm- four
channels-
tunable
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1 -1 3 3 3 3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -5 -5 -2 -2 -2 -2
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-212 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module Type
12800 ps/
nm- PIN
12800 ps/
nm-APD
6500 ps/
nm- PIN
3200 ps/
nm-
2mW-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-
tunable
6400 ps/
nm- four
channels-
tunable
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10 8.2
Central
frequency
THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central
frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.5
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 30 30 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800 6400
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD PIN APD APD APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to
1575
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -28 -18 -28 -28 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 0 -9 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-213
TN12LQMS: Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 5-113 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
12800 ps/nm-
APD
12800 ps/nm-
tunable
6400ps/nm-
four channels-
tunable
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1 3 3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -5 -2 -2
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 10 10 8.2
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.2 0.2 0.5
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 12800 12800 6400
Eye pattern mask - G.957 - compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD APD APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to 1575
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28 -28 -28
nimum receiver
overload
dBm -9 -9 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27 -27

5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-214 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
TN11LQMS: Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side
Table 5-114 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-4mW
Line code format - NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 2.5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Central wavelength nm 1271 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 1600
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.9 lb. (1.3 kg)
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-215
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module
Type
The maximum
power
consumption at
25 (77)
The maximum
power
consumption at
55 (131)
TN11LQMS Fixed(2.5G) (12800
ps/nm-PIN
12800 ps/nm-APD
6500 ps/nm-PIN
3200 ps/nm-2mW-
APD
1600 ps/nm-4mW)
53.2 58.5
Tunable(2.5G)
(12800 ps/nm
6400 ps/nm)
57.8 63.6
TN12LQMS - 32.1 35.3

5.14 LSX
LSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
5.14.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the LSX board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference
between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the FC1200
service.
5.14.2 Application
The LSX is a type of optical transponder unit, serving to map one channel of 10 Gbit/s service
signals into OTU2 or OTU2v signals and realizing the conversion between the 10 Gbit/s service
signal and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant.
5.14.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LSX are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces
and ESC.
5.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LSX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
5.14.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LSX front panel.
5.14.6 Valid Slots
The LSX occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LSX are IU1-IU17.
5.14.7 Characteristic Code for the LSX
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
5.14.8 NM Configuration Reference
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-216 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.14.9 Specifications of the LSX
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5.14.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the LSX board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference
between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the FC1200
service.
Table 5-115 lists the version description of the LSX.
Table 5-115 Version description of the LSX
Item Description
Functional
version
Two functional versions of the LSX board are available: TN11 and TN12.
Similarity Supports to process the STM-64, OC-192, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN and
OTU2 services.
Difference The TN12LSX board supports the function of processing FC1200 service.
Replacement The TN12LSX board can replace the TN11LSX board, but after the
replacement, the SCC software need be upgraded.
The TN11LSX board, however, cannot replace the TN12LSX board.

5.14.2 Application
The LSX is a type of optical transponder unit, serving to map one channel of 10 Gbit/s service
signals into OTU2 or OTU2v signals and realizing the conversion between the 10 Gbit/s service
signal and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant.
For the position of the LSX in the WDM system, see Figure 5-66.
Figure 5-66 Position of the LSX in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
LSX
DMUX
MUX
LSX G.694.1
G.694.1
10GE LAN /
10GE WAN /
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
Client side WDM side WDM side Client side
10GE LAN /
10GE WAN /
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
FC1200 FC1200
NOTE
l Client-side service type of the TN11LSX are 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192 and OTU2.
l Client-side service type of the TN12LSX are 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2
and FC1200.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-217
5.14.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LSX are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces
and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-116.
Table 5-116 Functions and features of the LSX
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Serving to map one channel of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2v
signals and realizing the conversion between the 10 Gbit/s service signal and
the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant
Client-side
service type
TN11LSX: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2
TN12LSX: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2, FC1200
OTN
function
l Provides the OTU2 interface on WDM-side.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the mapping of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/
OTU2 into OTU2/OTU2v signals, and the transparence mapping of 10GE
LAN into OTU2v signals.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2.
l Supports TCM function for ODU2.
l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2.
WDM
specification
Supports DWDM specification.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module,
the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range
of:
l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz
l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
ESC
function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
FEC
encoding
Adopts FEC encoding and AFEC encoding.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to report the
alarms and performance events of the board.
ALS
function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut
down if no signals are received.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-218 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Function
and Feature
Description
Protection
scheme
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
XFP Supports the 10 Gbit/s small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

5.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LSX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-67 and Figure 5-68 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LSX.
Figure 5-67 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSX
WDM side
OUT
Client side
RX
TX IN
O/E
E/O
E/O
O/E
10GE LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Signal processing module
Client-side OTN
processing module
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
OTN
processing
module
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-219
Figure 5-68 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSX
WDM side
OUT
Client side
RX
TX IN
O/E
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
10GE LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
FC
encapsulation and
mapping module
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Signal processing module
Client-side OTN
processing module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
OTN
processing
module
Signal Flow
The client side of the LSX board can access the following optical signals:
TN11LSX:
l OC-192 optical signals
l STM-64 optical signals
l 10GE LAN optical signals
l 10GE WAN optical signals
l OTU2 optical signals
TN12LSX:
l OC-192 optical signals
l STM-64 optical signals
l 10GE LAN optical signals
l 10GE WAN optical signals
l OTU2 optical signals
l FC1200 optical signals
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-220 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
In the signal flow of the LSX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSX to the WDM side
of the LSX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client
equipment through the RX optical interface, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module.
OTU2 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance
monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules
for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/
AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2/
OTU2v electrical signals.
The OTU2/OTU2v signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the
E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths OTU2/OTU2v optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2/OTU2v optical signals from the WDM side through
the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2v signals are sent to the signal processing
module. The module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2v in frame, decoding of
FEC/AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one
channel of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/FC1200 electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE
LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical
signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/OTU2/FC1200 optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/FC1200 optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2v optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OTU2/OTU2v optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Signal processing module
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-221
The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN
encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, FC encapsulation
and mapping module, and OTN processing module.
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET
performance monitoring function.
10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates one channel of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/
OTU2v payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE
LAN performance monitoring function.
FC encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates one channel of FC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2v payload
area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance
monitoring function.
Client-side OTN processing module
Realizes the OTN performance monitoring function.
OTN processing module
Realizes the framing of OTU2/OTU2v signals, processes the overheads of the OTU2/
OTU2v signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5.14.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LSX front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-69 shows the LSX front panel.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-222 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-69 LSX front panel
LSX
LSX
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
I
N
T
X
R
X
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the LSX front panel. Table 5-117 lists the type and function
of each interface.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-223
Table 5-117 Types and functions of the LSX interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.14.6 Valid Slots
The LSX occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LSX are IU1-IU17.
5.14.7 Characteristic Code for the LSX
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.
5.14.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-118.
Table 5-118 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSX displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN/OUT 1
TX/RX 3

5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-224 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Service Type
Port Mapping
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
FEC Working State
FEC Type
PAUSE Frame Flow Control
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
LPT Enabled
SD Trigger Condition
5.14.9 Specifications of the LSX
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
10 Gbit/s Multi-rate -10km module and 10 Gbit/s Multi-rate -40km module can be used to access OC-192,
STM-64, 10GE, and OTU2 signals. The specifications listed following completely apply to OTU2 signals.
The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OC-192,
STM-64, or 10GE signals.
Table 5-119 Specifications of optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate
-10km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate
-40km
10Gbit/s
Multirate
-80km
10Gbit/s
Single rate
-0.3km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- SLM SLM SLM MLM
Target
distance
km 10 40 80 0.3
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-225
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate
-10km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate
-40km
10Gbit/s
Multirate
-80km
10Gbit/s
Single rate
-0.3km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -1 2 4 -1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -6 -1 0 -7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 6 8.2 9 3
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm NA NA NA NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB 30 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.691-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1270 to 1600 840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0.5 -1 -7 -1
Maximum
reflectance
dB NA NA NA NA

5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-226 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 5-120 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm 800 ps/nm
Line code format - NRZ- 40
channels fixed
(odd & even
wavelengths)
NRZ- 40
channels fixed
NRZ- 80
channels fixed
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 2 4 2
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -3 0 -3
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 10 9 10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.00 192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 10 10 5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 800 1600 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity
(FEC on) EOL
dBm -16 -26 -16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 0
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27 -27

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-227
Table 5-121 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
1200 ps/nm
- tunable-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm -
tunable-
APD
4800 ps/nm
-ODB-
tunable
800 ps/nm-
DRZ-
tunable
Line code format - NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
ODB- 80
channels
tunable
DRZ- 80
channels
tunable
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 2 2 2 2
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -3 -3 -3 -3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10
NA
a
10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 5 5 5 5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB 35 35 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 1200 1200 4800 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD APD PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity (FEC
on) EOL
dBm -16 -26 -26 -16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 -9 0
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27
a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.

5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-228 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.9 lb. (1.3 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module
Type
The maximum
power
consumption at
25 (77) (W)
The maximum
power
consumption at
55 (131) (W)
TN11LSX NRZ-fixed(10G)
(800 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
1600 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80
channels fixed)
47.7 52.3
NRZ-tunable(10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
47.9 52.5
DRZ-tunable(10G)
(800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
49.7 52.7
ODB-tunable(10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
52.7 55.7
TN12LSX NRZ-fixed(10G)
(800 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
1600 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80
channels fixed)
32.0 38.4
NRZ-tunable(10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
32.2 38.6
DRZ-tunable(10G)
(800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
34.0 40.8
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-229
Board Optical Module
Type
The maximum
power
consumption at
25 (77) (W)
The maximum
power
consumption at
55 (131) (W)
ODB-tunable(10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
36.0 43.2

5.15 LSXL
LSXL: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
5.15.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LSXL board is available, that is TN11.
5.15.2 Application
The LSXL is a type of optical transponder unit. The LSXL realizes the conversion between one
STM-256/OC-768 signal and ITU-T G.694.1 Recommendation-compliant OTU3 signal.
5.15.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LSXL are tunable wavelength function, OTN
interfaces and ESC function.
5.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LSXL board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
5.15.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LSXL front panel.
5.15.6 Valid Slots
The TN11LSXL occupies four slots. The valid slots for the TN11LSXL are IU1-IU14 in the
subrack.
5.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXL
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
5.15.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.15.9 Specifications of the LSXL
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5.15.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LSXL board is available, that is TN11.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-230 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
5.15.2 Application
The LSXL is a type of optical transponder unit. The LSXL realizes the conversion between one
STM-256/OC-768 signal and ITU-T G.694.1 Recommendation-compliant OTU3 signal.
For the position of the LSXL in the WDM system, see Figure 5-70.
Figure 5-70 Position of the LSXL in the WDM system
Client side WDM side
MUX
DMUX
LSXL
DMUX
MUX
LSXL
G.694.1 G.694.1
STM-256/
OC-768
STM-256/
OC-768
Client side WDM side
5.15.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LSXL are tunable wavelength function, OTN
interfaces and ESC function.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-122.
Table 5-122 Functions and features of the LSXL
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Maps one STM-256/OC-768 signal into one OTU3 optical signal and
converts the signal into ITU-T G.694.1-compliant standard DWDM
wavelength. It also performs the reverse process.
Client-side
service type
TN11LSXL: STM-256, OC-768
OTN function l Provides the OTU3 interface on WDM-side.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring
to the ITU-T G.709.
l Up to one channel of client-side service signals can be mapped into
OTU3/OTU3e signals.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU3 and ODU3.
l Supports TCM function for ODU3.
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM specification.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-231
Function and
Feature
Description
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this
module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side
within the range of:
l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz
l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
ESC function Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
FEC encoding Adopts FEC encoding and AFEC encoding.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to
locate the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current
and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the
OTN.
ALS function The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically
shut down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
Loopback Client side Inloop Not supported
Outloop Not supported
WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

5.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LSXL board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-71 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXL.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-232 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-71 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSXL
WDM side
Client-side
optical
module
OUT
Client side
RX
TX IN
WDM-side
optical
module
SDH/SONET
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Signal processing module
O/E
E/O
E/O
O/E
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
SCC
OTN
processing
module
Signal Flow
The client side of the LSXL board can access the following optical signals:
TN11LSXL:
l STM-256 optical signals
l OC-768 optical signals
In the signal flow of the LSXL board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSXL to the WDM side
of the LSXL, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client
equipment through the RX interface, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module.
OTU3 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance
monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules
for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/
AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU3
electrical signals.
The OTU3 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths OTU3 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-233
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU3 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN
optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the OTU3 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as OTU3 in frame, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping,
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of STM-256/OC-768
electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the one channel of electrical
signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical
interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of STM-256/OC-768 optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to STM-256/OC-768 optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU3 optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OTU3 optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module and OTN
processing module.
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU3
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET
performance monitoring function.
OTN processing module
Realizes the framing of OTU3 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU3 signals,
and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-234 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5.15.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LSXL front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-72 shows the LSXL front panel.
Figure 5-72 TN11LSXL front panel
LSXL
LSXL
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
R
X
O
U
T
I
N
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-235
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 4 optical interfaces on the LSXL front panel. Table 5-123 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 5-123 Types and functions of the LSXL interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.15.6 Valid Slots
The TN11LSXL occupies four slots. The valid slots for the TN11LSXL are IU1-IU14 in the
subrack.
The back connector of the TN11LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the
subrack, so the slot number of the TN11LSXL displayed on the NM is the number of the left
one of the four occupied slots.
For example, if the TN11LSXL occupies slots IU1, IU2, IU3 and IU4, the slot number of the
TN11LSXL displayed on the NM is IU1.
5.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXL
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-236 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
5.15.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-124.
Table 5-124 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXL displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN/OUT 1
TX/RX 3

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Service Type
FEC Working State
FEC Type
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
SD Trigger Condition
5.15.9 Specifications of the LSXL
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-237
Specifications of Optical Module at the client Side
Table 5-125 Specifications of optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type Transponder
Line code format - NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength range nm 1530 to 1565
Maximum mean launched power dBm 3
Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 40
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 1290 to 1570
Receiver sensitivity dBm -6
Minimum receiver overload dBm 3
Maximum reflectance dB -27

TN11LSXL: Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 5-126 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type Transponder
Line code format - ODB Tunable DRZ Tunable
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating frequency range THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.00
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm -5 -5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 8.2
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-238 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type Transponder
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 2.5 5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 0.6 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 550 400
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN PIN
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1529 to 1567 1529 to 1567
Receiver sensitivity (FEC
on) EOL
dBm -16 -16
Minimum receiver
overload (FEC on)
dBm 0 0
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

Mechanical Specifications
The TN11LSXL consists of three main boards: board A, board B and board C. The mechanical
dimension of each main board is provided below:
l Board A: 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2.2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Board B: 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Board C: 73.5 mm (H) x 72 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (2.9 in. (H) x 2.8 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
TN11LSXL
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 101.6 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 4.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 11.0 lb. (5.0 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module
Type
The maximum
power
consumption at
25 (77) (W)
The maximum
power
consumption at
55 (131) (W)
TN11LSXL DRZ-tunable(40G)
(Transponder)
103.0 110.0
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-239
Board Optical Module
Type
The maximum
power
consumption at
25 (77) (W)
The maximum
power
consumption at
55 (131) (W)
ODB-tunable(40G)
(Transponder)
98.0 105.0

5.16 LSXLR
LSXLR: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit
5.16.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LSXLR board is available, that is TN11.
5.16.2 Application
The LSXLR is a type of optical transponder unit. Used in an electrical REG station in the system,
the LSXLR realizes the electrical regeneration of the corresponding optical signal.
5.16.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LSXLR are tunable wavelength function, OTN
interfaces and ESC.
5.16.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LSXLR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
5.16.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LSXLR front panel.
5.16.6 Valid Slots
The TN11LSXLR occupies four slots. The valid slots for the TN11LSXLR are IU1-IU14 in the
subrack.
5.16.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXLR
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
5.16.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.16.9 Specifications of the LSXLR
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5.16.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LSXLR board is available, that is TN11.
5.16.2 Application
The LSXLR is a type of optical transponder unit. Used in an electrical REG station in the system,
the LSXLR realizes the electrical regeneration of the corresponding optical signal.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-240 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
For the position of the LSXLR in the WDM system, see Figure 5-73.
Figure 5-73 Position of the LSXLR in the WDM system
WDM side
DMUX
MUX
LSXLR
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
LSXLR
WDM side
5.16.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LSXLR are tunable wavelength function, OTN
interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-127.
Table 5-127 Functions and features of the LSXLR
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system, realizing
the electrical regeneration of corresponding optical signals.
Regenerating rate TN11LSXLR: OTU3
OTN function l Provides the OTU3 interface on WDM-side.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by
referring to the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU3 and ODU3.
l Supports TCM function for ODU3.
l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU3.
WDM specification Supports the DWDM specification.
Tunable wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this
module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side
within the range of:
l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz
l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
ESC function Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within
the service signal.
FEC encoding Adopts FEC encoding and AFEC encoding.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-241
Function and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to
locate the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias
current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of
the OTN.
ALS function Not supported
Protection scheme Not supported
Loopback Not supported

5.16.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LSXLR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-74 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR.
Figure 5-74 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR
WDM side
Optical
receiving
module
IN OUT
Optical
transmitting
module
O/E E/O
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal processing module
Decoding
module
Encoding
module
Overhead
module
WDM side
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-242 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Signal Flow
The LSXLR board realizes the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals. The
wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU3 optical signals.
The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN
interface, and performs the O/E conversion.
The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals.
During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are
performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames.
After being encoded, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing
the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths OTU3 signals .
The optical signals are output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l Optical receiving module
Performs the O/E conversion of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths OTU3 optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Optical transmitting module
Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to the ITU-T G.694.1-
compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU3 optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l The signal processing module
The module consists of the decoding module, overhead module, and encoding module.
Decoding module
Performs the FEC/AFEC decoding of OTU3 signals, and monitors the performance of
WDM-side services.
Encoding module
Performs the FEC/AFEC encoding of OTU3 signals.
Overhead module
Performs overhead processing of OTU3 signals, and monitors the performance of
WDM-side services.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-243
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5.16.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LSXLR front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-75 shows the LSXLR front panel.
Figure 5-75 TN11LSXLR front panel
LSXLR
LSXLR
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
I
N
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-244 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 2 optical interfaces on the LSXLR front panel. Table 5-128 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 5-128 Types and functions of the LSXLR interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.16.6 Valid Slots
The TN11LSXLR occupies four slots. The valid slots for the TN11LSXLR are IU1-IU14 in the
subrack.
The back connector of the TN11LSXLR is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the
subrack, so the slot number of the TN11LSXLR displayed on the NM is the number of the left
one of the four occupied slots.
For example, if the TN11LSXLR occupies slots IU1, IU2, IU3 and IU4, the slot number of the
TN11LSXLR displayed on the NM is IU1.
5.16.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXLR
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.
5.16.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-245
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-129.
Table 5-129 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXLR displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN/OUT 1

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Laser Status
FEC Working State
FEC Type
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
5.16.9 Specifications of the LSXLR
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
TN11LSXLR: Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 5-130 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type Transponder
Line code format - ODB Tunable DRZ Tunable
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating frequency range THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.00
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm -5 -5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 8.2
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-246 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type Transponder
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 2.5 5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 0.6 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 550 400
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN PIN
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1529 to 1567 1529 to 1567
Receiver sensitivity (FEC
on) EOL
dBm -16 -16
Minimum receiver
overload (FEC on)
dBm 0 0
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

Mechanical Specifications
The TN11LSXLR consists of three main boards: board A, board B and board C. The mechanical
dimension of each main board is provided below:
l Board A: 235.0 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2.2 mm (T) (9.3 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Board B: 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Board C: 73.5 mm (H) x 72 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (2.9 in. (H) x 2.8 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
TN11LSXLR
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 101.6 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 4.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 6.7 lb. (3.1 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module
Type
The maximum
power
consumption at
25 (77) (W)
The maximum
power
consumption at
55 (131) (W)
TN11LSXLR DRZ-tunable(40G)
(Transponder)
87.0 90.0
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-247
Board Optical Module
Type
The maximum
power
consumption at
25 (77) (W)
The maximum
power
consumption at
55 (131) (W)
ODB-tunable(40G)
(Transponder)
82.0 85.0

5.17 LSXR
LSXR: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit
5.17.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LSXR board is available, that is TN11.
5.17.2 Application
The LSXR is a type of optical transponder unit. Used in an electrical REG station in the system,
the LSXR realizes the electrical regeneration of the corresponding optical signal.
5.17.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LSXR are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces
and ESC.
5.17.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LSXR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
5.17.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LSXR front panel.
5.17.6 Valid Slots
The LSXR occupies one slot. Valid slots for the LSXR are IU1-IU17.
5.17.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
5.17.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.17.9 Specifications of the LSXR
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5.17.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LSXR board is available, that is TN11.
5.17.2 Application
The LSXR is a type of optical transponder unit. Used in an electrical REG station in the system,
the LSXR realizes the electrical regeneration of the corresponding optical signal.
For the position of the LSXR in the WDM system, see Figure 5-76.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-248 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 5-76 Position of the LSXR in the WDM system
DMUX
MUX
LSXR
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
LSXR
WDM side WDM side
5.17.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LSXR are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces
and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-131.
Table 5-131 Functions and features of the LSXR
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system, realizing
the electrical regeneration of corresponding optical signals.
Regenerating rate OTU2/OTU2v
OTN function l Provides the OTU2 interface on WDM-side.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by
referring to the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2.
l Supports TCM function for ODU2.
l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2.
WDM specification Supports DWDM specifications.
Tunable wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this
module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side
within the range of:
l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz
l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
ESC function Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within
the service signal.
FEC encoding Supports FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975 and AFEC
encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.1.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-249
Function and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to
locate the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias
current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of
the OTN.
ALS function Not supported
Protection scheme Not supported
Loopback Not supported

5.17.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LSXR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-77 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR.
Figure 5-77 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR
WDM side
Optical
receiving
module
IN OUT
WDM side
Optical
transmitting
module
O/E E/O
Signal processing module
Decoding
module
Encoding
module
Overhead
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-250 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Signal Flow
The LSXR board realizes the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals. The
wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2/OTU2v optical signals.
The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN
interface, and performs the O/E conversion.
The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals.
During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are
performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames.
After being encoded, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing
the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths OTU2/OTU2v signals .
The optical signals are output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l Optical receiving module
Performs the O/E conversion of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths OTU2/OTU2v optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Optical transmitting module
Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to the ITU-T G.694.1-
compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2/OTU2v optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l The signal processing module
The module consists of the decoding module, overhead module, and encoding module.
Decoding module
Performs the FEC/AFEC decoding of OTU2/OTU2v signals, and monitors the
performance of WDM-side services.
Encoding module
Performs the FEC/AFEC encoding of OTU2/OTU2v signals.
Overhead module
Performs overhead processing of OTU2/OTU2v signals, and monitors the performance
of WDM-side services.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-251
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5.17.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LSXR front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-78 shows the LSXR front panel.
Figure 5-78 LSXR front panel
LSXR
LSXR
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
I
N
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-252 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the LSXR front panel. Table 5-132 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 5-132 Types and functions of the LSXR interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.17.6 Valid Slots
The LSXR occupies one slot. Valid slots for the LSXR are IU1-IU17.
5.17.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.
5.17.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-133.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-253
Table 5-133 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXR displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN/OUT 1

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Laser Status
FEC Working State
FEC Type
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
5.17.9 Specifications of the LSXR
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 5-134 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm 800 ps/nm
Line code format - NRZ- 40
channels fixed
(odd & even
wavelengths)
NRZ- 40
channels fixed
NRZ- 80
channels fixed
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 2 4 2
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -3 0 -3
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 10 9 10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.00 192.10 to 196.05
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-254 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm 800 ps/nm
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 10 10 5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 800 1600 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity
(FEC on) EOL
dBm -16 -26 -16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 0
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27 -27

Table 5-135 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
1200 ps/nm
- tunable-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm -
tunable-
APD
4800 ps/nm
-ODB-
tunable
800 ps/nm-
DRZ-
tunable
Line code format - NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
ODB- 80
channels
tunable
DRZ- 80
channels
tunable
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 2 2 2 2
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -3 -3 -3 -3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10
NA
a
10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-255
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
1200 ps/nm
- tunable-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm -
tunable-
APD
4800 ps/nm
-ODB-
tunable
800 ps/nm-
DRZ-
tunable
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 5 5 5 5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB 35 35 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 1200 1200 4800 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD APD PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity (FEC
on) EOL
dBm -16 -26 -26 -16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 -9 0
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27
a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.6 lb. (1.2 kg)
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-256 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module
Type
The maximum
power
consumption at
25 (77) (W)
The maximum
power
consumption at
55 (131) (W)
TN11LSXR NRZ-fixed(10G)
(800 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
1600 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80
channels fixed)
34.8 38.3
NRZ-tunable(10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
35.0 38.5
DRZ-tunable(10G)
(800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
36.8 40.3
ODB-tunable(10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
39.8 43.3

5.18 LWX2
LWX2: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board
5.18.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LWX2 board is available, that is TN11.
5.18.2 Application
The LWX2 is a type of optical transponder unit. The LWX2 realizes the conversion between
two optical signals at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and the ITU-T Recommendation-
compliant WDM signals.
5.18.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LWX2 are tunable wavelength and ESC.
5.18.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LWX2 board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
5.18.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LWX2 front panel.
5.18.6 Valid Slots
The LWX2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LWX2 are IU1-IU17.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-257
5.18.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2
The characteristic code for the LWX2 consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the
frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side.
5.18.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.18.9 Specifications of the LWX2
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5.18.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LWX2 board is available, that is TN11.
5.18.2 Application
The LWX2 is a type of optical transponder unit. The LWX2 realizes the conversion between
two optical signals at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and the ITU-T Recommendation-
compliant WDM signals.
For the position of the LWX2 in the WDM system, see Figure 5-79.
Figure 5-79 Position of the LWX2 in the WDM system
16Mbit/s -
2.7Gbit/s
LWX2 LWX2
1
2
1
2
16Mbit/s -
2.7Gbit/s
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
Client side WDMside WDMside Client side
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
5.18.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LWX2 are tunable wavelength and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-136.
Table 5-136 Functions and features of the LWX2
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Receives two optical signals at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and
converts them into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with the ITU-
T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelengths compliant with the ITU-T G.
694.2. The reverse process is similar.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-258 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Function
and Feature
Description
Client-side
service type
STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100, GE, FE,
FDDI, ESCON, DVB-ASI/SDI, FICON, FICON Express, HDTV
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM and CWDM specifications.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. In the case of configuring
four-wavelength tunable optical module, configure every four continuous
wavelengths (first group started with the 1st wavelength) in the C band with
100 GHz channel spacing as one group. In this way, the optical signal output
on the WDM side are tunable within the four wavelengths of every group.
ESC
function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate
the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current
and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
ALS
function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut
down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

5.18.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LWX2 board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-80 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-259
Figure 5-80 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2
WDM side
IN1
OUT1
Client side
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
Service processing module
OUT2
IN2
O/E
E/O O/E
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
The client side of the LWX2 board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s).
NOTE
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 5.18.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LWX2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWX2 to the WDM side
of the LWX2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the service
processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any
signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module sends
the signals to the WDM-side optical module.
After performing the E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out two
channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T
G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals through the
OUT1-OTU2 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-260 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical
interfaces. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing
module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the
performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module outputs two channels
of Any signals.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical
signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal
electrical signals to Any optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of Any optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to Any optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Service processing module
Regenerates Any signals in two directions.
Monitors the performance of SDH and GE signals in two directions.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5.18.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LWX2 front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-261
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-81 shows the LWX2 front panel.
Figure 5-81 LWX2 front panel
LWX2
LWX2
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2
O
U
T
1
I
N
1
O
U
T
2
I
N
2
NOTE
The WDM-side optical modules must be inserted in the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 interfaces in an
ascending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-262 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Interfaces
There are 8 optical interfaces on the LWX2 front panel. Table 5-137 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 5-137 Types and functions of the LWX2 interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN1-IN2 LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2 LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX2 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.18.6 Valid Slots
The LWX2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LWX2 are IU1-IU17.
5.18.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2
The characteristic code for the LWX2 consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the
frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 5-138.
Table 5-138 Characteristic code for the LWX2
Code Meaning Description
The first four digits The frequency of forth
optical signal
The last four digits of the
frequency value of the first
channel of signals on the
WDM side.
The last four digits The frequency of forth
optical signal
The last four digits of the
frequency value of the second
channel of signals on the
WDM side.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-263
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LWX2 is 92109220.
l "9210" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is
192.10 THz.
l "9220" indicates the frequency of the second channel of optical signals on the WDM side
is 192.20 THz.
5.18.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-139.
Table 5-139 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWX2 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 3
TX1/RX1 5
TX2/RX2 6

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Service Type
Client Service Bearer Rate (M)
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Current Bearer Rate (M)
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
SD Trigger Condition
5.18.9 Specifications of the LWX2
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-264 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100,
GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to
STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals
are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals. The specifications listed
above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications
when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
Table 5-140 Specifications of optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM MLM SLM SLM
Target
distance
km 0.5 2 15 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -10 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm NA NA 1 1
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-265
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB NA NA 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-
compliant
G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -18 -18 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 0 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB NA -27 -27 -27

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE,
DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be
slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE,
DVB-ASI.
NOTE
2.5Gbit/sMulti-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4,
ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals.
The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200,
FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 5-141 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-266 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

Table 5-142 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP
DWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
Target distance km 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-267
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP
DWDM)
Operating frequency range THz 192.1 to 196.0
Maximum mean launched power dBm 3
Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.5
Central frequency deviation GHz 12.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 1
Minimum side mode suppression
ratio
dB 30
Eye pattern mask - 5% margin are required for the eye
pattern of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services.
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 5-143 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module Type
12800ps/
nm-PIN
a
12800ps/
nm-APD
a
6500 ps/nm -
PIN
3200 ps/nm
-2mW-APD
6400 ps/nm -
four
channels-
tunable
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1 -1 3 3 3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -5 -5 -2 -2 -2
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-268 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module Type
12800ps/
nm-PIN
a
12800ps/
nm-APD
a
6500 ps/nm -
PIN
3200 ps/nm
-2mW-APD
6400 ps/nm -
four
channels-
tunable
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 8.2
Central
frequency
THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central
frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.5
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 30 30 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 6400
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD PIN APD APD
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to 1575
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -28 -18 -26 -28
Minimum
receiver overload
dBm 0 -9 0 -10 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27
a: The 12800ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-269
Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side
Table 5-144 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-4mW
Line code format - NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 2.5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Central wavelength nm 1271 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 1600
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.9 lb. (1.3 kg)
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-270 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 38.5 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 42.4 W
5.19 LWXD
LWXD: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit)
5.19.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LWXD board is available, that is TN11.
5.19.2 Application
The LWXD is a type of optical transponder unit. The LWXD realizes the conversion between
the optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and the ITU-T Recommendation-
compliant WDM signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
5.19.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LWXD are tunable wavelength and ESC.
5.19.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LWXD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
5.19.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LWXD front panel.
5.19.6 Valid Slots
The LWXD occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LWXD are IU1-IU17.
5.19.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD
The characteristic code for the LWXD consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the
frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side.
5.19.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.19.9 Specifications of the LWXD
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5.19.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the LWXD board is available, that is TN11.
5.19.2 Application
The LWXD is a type of optical transponder unit. The LWXD realizes the conversion between
the optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and the ITU-T Recommendation-
compliant WDM signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
For the position of the LWXD in the WDM system, see Figure 5-82.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-271
Figure 5-82 Position of the LWXD in the WDM system
LWXD LWXD
16Mbit/s
-2.7Gbit/s
16Mbit/s
-2.7Gbit/s
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
DMUX
MUX
DMUX
MUX
Client side WDM side WDM side Client side
5.19.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LWXD are tunable wavelength and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-145.
Table 5-145 Functions and features of the LWXD
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
l Receives a signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and converts
the signal into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-
T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T
G.694.2. The reverse process is similar.
l Realizes the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
Client-side
service type
STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100, GE, FE,
FDDI, ESCON, DVB-ASI/SDI, FICON, FICON Express, HDTV
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM and CWDM specifications.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module,
the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range
of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.
ESC
function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate
the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current
and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
ALS
function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut
down if no signals are received.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-272 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Function
and Feature
Description
Protection
scheme
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

5.19.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LWXD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-83 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD.
Figure 5-83 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD
WDM side
IN1
OUT1
Client side
RX
TX
Service processing module
OUT2
IN2
O/E
E/O O/E
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-273
Signal Flow
The client side of the LWXD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s).
NOTE
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 5.19.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LWXD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWXD to the WDM side
of the LWXD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client
equipment through the RX interface, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the service processing module.
The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the
performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the
WDM-side optical module.
After performing the E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out the ITU-T
G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at
CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals. The optical signals are splited into two
channels of identical optical signals, and then are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical
interfaces.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical
interfaces. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing
module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, the regeneration
of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module
outputs one channel of Any signals.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the electrical signals, and
then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of Any optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to Any optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of Any optical signals.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-274 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to Any optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Service processing module
Regenerates Any signals in two directions.
Monitors the performance of SDH and GE signals in two directions.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5.19.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LWXD front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-84 shows the LWXD front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-275
Figure 5-84 LWXD front panel
LWXD
LWXD
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
1
R
X
1
O
U
T
1
I
N
1
O
U
T
2
I
N
2
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the LWXD front panel. Table 5-146 lists the type and function
of each interface.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-276 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-146 Types and functions of the LWXD interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN1-IN2 LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2 LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.19.6 Valid Slots
The LWXD occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LWXD are IU1-IU17.
5.19.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD
The characteristic code for the LWXD consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the
frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 5-147.
Table 5-147 Characteristic code for the LWXD
Code Meaning Description
The first four digits The frequency of forth
optical signal
The last four digits of the
frequency value of the first
channel of signals on the
WDM side.
The last four digits The frequency of forth
optical signal
The last four digits of the
frequency value of the second
channel of signals on the
WDM side.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LWX2 is 92109220.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-277
l "9210" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is
192.10 THz.
l "9220" indicates the frequency of the second channel of optical signals on the WDM side
is 192.20 THz.
5.19.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-148.
Table 5-148 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWXD displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2
TX/RX 3

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Service Type
Client Service Bearer Rate (M)
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Current Bearer Rate (M)
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
SD Trigger Condition
5.19.9 Specifications of the LWXD
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-278 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Specifications of optical module at the client side
NOTE
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100,
GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to
STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals
are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals. The specifications listed
above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications
when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
Table 5-149 Specifications of optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM MLM SLM SLM
Target
distance
km 0.5 2 15 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -10 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm NA NA 1 1
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-279
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB NA NA 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-
compliant
G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -18 -18 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 0 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB NA -27 -27 -27

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE,
DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be
slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE,
DVB-ASI.
NOTE
2.5Gbit/sMulti-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4,
ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals.
The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200,
FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 5-150 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-280 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

Table 5-151 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP
DWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
Target distance km 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-281
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP
DWDM)
Operating frequency range THz 192.1 to 196.0
Maximum mean launched power dBm 3
Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.5
Central frequency deviation GHz 12.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 1
Minimum side mode suppression
ratio
dB 30
Eye pattern mask - 5% margin are required for the eye
pattern of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services.
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 5-152 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
12800ps/
nm-PIN
a
12800ps/
nm-APD
a
6500 ps/
nm -PIN
3200 ps/
nm
-2mW-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-
tunable
6400 ps/
nm-four
channels-
tunable
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -4 -4 0 0 0 0
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -8 -8 -5 -5 -5 -5
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-282 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
12800ps/
nm-PIN
a
12800ps/
nm-APD
a
6500 ps/
nm -PIN
3200 ps/
nm
-2mW-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-
tunable
6400 ps/
nm-four
channels-
tunable
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10 8.2
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.5
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB 35 35 30 30 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800 6400
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD PIN APD APD APD
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to
1575
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -28 -18 -26 -28 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 0 -10 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27
a: The 12800ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.

Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side
Table 5-153 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-4mW
Line code format - NRZ
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-283
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-4mW
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 2
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm -0.5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Central wavelength nm 1271 to 1611
Central wavelength deviation nm 6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 1600
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.6 lb. (1.2 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 35.8 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 39.4 W
5.20 LWXS
LWXS: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-284 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
5.20.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the LWXS board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference
between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the ISC 1G/
ISC 2G/ETR/CLO services.
5.20.2 Application
The LWXS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LWXS realizes the conversion between
the optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and the ITU-T Recommendation-
compliant WDM signal.
5.20.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LWXS are tunable wavelength and ESC.
5.20.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LWXS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
5.20.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LWXS front panel.
5.20.6 Valid Slots
The LWXS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LWXS are IU1-IU17.
5.20.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
5.20.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.20.9 Specifications of the LWXS
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5.20.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the LWXS board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference
between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the ISC 1G/
ISC 2G/ETR/CLO services.
Table 5-154 lists the version description of the LWXS.
Table 5-154 Version description of the LWXS
Item Description
Functional
version
Two functional versions of the LWXS board are available: TN11 and
TN12.
Similarity The TN12LWXS works in the same way as the TN11LWXS.
Difference The TN12LWXS board supports the function of processing ISC 1G/ISC
2G/ETR/CLO services.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-285
Item Description
Replacement The TN12LWXS board can replace the TN11LWXS board, but after the
replacement, the SCC software need be upgraded.
The TN11LWXS board, however, cannot replace the TN12LWXS board.

5.20.2 Application
The LWXS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LWXS realizes the conversion between
the optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and the ITU-T Recommendation-
compliant WDM signal.
For the position of the LWXS in the WDM system, see Figure 5-85.
Figure 5-85 Position of the LWXS in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
LWXS
DMUX
MUX
LWXS
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
16Mbit/s
-2.7Gbit/s
16Mbit/s
-2.7Gbit/s
Client side WDM side Client side WDM side
5.20.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the LWXS are tunable wavelength and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-155.
Table 5-155 Functions and features of the LWXS
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Receives a signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and converts
the signal into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T G.
694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T G.
694.2. The reverse process is similar.
Client-side
service type
TN11LWXS: STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200,
FC100, GE, FE, FDDI, ESCON, DVB-ASI/SDI, FICON, FICON Express,
HDTV
TN12LWXS: STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200,
FC100, GE, FE, FDDI, ESCON, DVB-ASI/SDI, FICON, FICON Express,
HDTV, ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM and CWDM specifications.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-286 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Function
and Feature
Description
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module,
the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range
of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.
ESC
function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate
the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current
and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
ALS
function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut
down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

5.20.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The LWXS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-86 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-287
Figure 5-86 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS
WDM side
OUT
Client side
RX
TX
Service processing module
IN
O/E
E/O O/E
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
The client side of the LWXS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s).
NOTE
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 5.20.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LWXS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWXS to the WDM side
of the LWXS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client
equipment through the RX interface, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the service processing module.
The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the
performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the
WDM-side optical module.
After performing the E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out the ITU-T
G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at
CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-288 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then,
the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing
module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the
performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module outputs one channel of
Any electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the electrical signals, and
then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of Any optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to Any optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of Any optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to Any optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Service processing module
Regenerates Any signals in two directions.
Monitors the performance of SDH and GE signals in two directions.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5.20.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LWXS front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-87 shows the LWXS front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-289
Figure 5-87 LWXS front panel
LWXS
LWXS
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
I
N
T
X
1
R
X
1
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the LWXS front panel. Table 5-156 lists the type and function
of each interface.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-290 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-156 Types and functions of the LWXS interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.20.6 Valid Slots
The LWXS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LWXS are IU1-IU17.
5.20.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.
5.20.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-157.
Table 5-157 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWXS displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN/OUT 1
TX/RX 3

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-291
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Service Type
Client Service Bearer Rate (M)
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Current Bearer Rate (M)
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
SD Trigger Condition
5.20.9 Specifications of the LWXS
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, and L-16.2 can be used to access ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12,
ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals. The specifications listed
above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications
when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
Table 5-158 Specifications of optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM MLM SLM SLM
Target
distance
km 0.5 2 15 80
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-292 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -10 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm NA NA 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB NA NA 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-
compliant
G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -18 -18 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 0 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB NA -27 -27 -27
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-293

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO, GE, FC100,
STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply
to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals
are ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
2.5Gbit/sMulti-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed
above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12,
ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 5-159 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-294 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
Table 5-160 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP
DWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
Target distance km 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating frequency range THz 192.1 to 196.0
Maximum mean launched power dBm 3
Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.5
Central frequency deviation GHz 12.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 1
Minimum side mode suppression
ratio
dB 30
Eye pattern mask - 5% margin are required for the eye
pattern of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services.
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-295
Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 5-161 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module Type
12800ps/
nm-PIN
a
12800ps/
nm-APD
a
6500 ps/
nm -PIN
3200 ps/
nm
-2mW-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-
tunable
6400 ps/
nm- four
channels-
tunable
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm -1 -1 3 3 3 3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -5 -5 -2 -2 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10 8.2
Central
frequency
THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central
frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.5
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB 35 35 30 30 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800 6400
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD PIN APD APD APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to
1575
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-296 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module Type
12800ps/
nm-PIN
a
12800ps/
nm-APD
a
6500 ps/
nm -PIN
3200 ps/
nm
-2mW-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-
tunable
6400 ps/
nm- four
channels-
tunable
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -28 -18 -26 -28 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 0 -10 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27
a: The 12800ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.

Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side
Table 5-162 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-4mW
Line code format - NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 2.5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Central wavelength nm 1271 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 1600
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-297
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-4mW
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.4 lb. (1.1 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 33.9 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 37.3 W
5.21 TMX
TMX: 4-channel STM-16/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU2 wavelength conversion board
5.21.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the TMX board is available, that is TN11.
5.21.2 Application
The TMX is a type of optical transponder unit. The TMX multiplexes four STM-16/OC-48/
OTU1 service signals into one OTU2 signal. It also realizes conversion between these signals
and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
5.21.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the TMX are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces
and ESC.
5.21.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The TMX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
5.21.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TMX front panel.
5.21.6 Valid Slots
The TMX occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TMX are IU1-IU17.
5.21.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-298 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
5.21.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
5.21.9 Specifications of the TMX
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5.21.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the TMX board is available, that is TN11.
5.21.2 Application
The TMX is a type of optical transponder unit. The TMX multiplexes four STM-16/OC-48/
OTU1 service signals into one OTU2 signal. It also realizes conversion between these signals
and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
For the position of the TMX in the WDM system, see Figure 5-88.
Figure 5-88 Position of the TMX in the WDM system
Client side WDM side
MUX
DMUX
TMX
DMUX
MUX
TMX
1
4
1
4
G.694.1
G.694.1
Client side
STM-16/
OC-48/
OTU1
STM-16/
OC-48/
OTU1
WDM side
5.21.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the TMX are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces
and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-163.
Table 5-163 Functions and features of the TMX
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Multiplexes four channels of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 service optical
signals into one channel of OTU2 optical signals and converse them to
DWDM standard wavelength that comply with ITU-T Recommendation
G.694.1. It can also perform the reverse process.
Client-side
service type
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 (without FEC)
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-299
Function and
Feature
Description
OTN function l Provides the OTU2/OTU2v interface on WDM-side.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring
to the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports 4ODU1 asynchronous multiplexing into ODU2.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1.
l Supports SM functions for OTU2.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1.
l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2.
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM specifications.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this
module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side
within the range of:
l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz
l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
ESC function Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
FEC encoding Supports FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975 and AFEC
encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.1.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to
locate the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias
current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the
OTN.
ALS function The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically
shut down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on
the client side.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Client side Inloop Supported
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-300 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Function and
Feature
Description
Outloop Supported

5.21.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The TMX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-89 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TMX.
Figure 5-89 Functional modules and signal flow of the TMX
WDM side
IN
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
RX3
TX3
OUT O/E
E/O O/E
E/O
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side OTN
processing module
Signal processing module
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
OTN
processing
module
Signal Flow
The client side of the TMX board can access the following optical signals:
l STM-16 optical signals
l OC-48 optical signals
l OTU1 (without FEC) optical signals
In the signal flow of the TMX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TMX to the WDM side
of the TMX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-301
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. OTU1 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for
performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to the SDH/SONET encapsulation
and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the
OTN framing and FEC/AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module
outputs one channel of OTU2 electrical signals.
The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths OTU2 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN
optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as OTU2 in frame, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping,
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of STM-16/OC-48/
OTU1 electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical
interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of four channels of STM-16/OC-48/
OTU1 optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal
electrical signals to STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OTU2 optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, client-side
OTN processing module, and OTN processing module.
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-302 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Encapsulates multiples channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the
OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
SONET performance monitoring function.
Client-side OTN processing module
Realizes the OTN performance monitoring function.
OTN processing module
Realizes the framing of OTU2 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU2 signals,
and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
5.21.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TMX front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 5-90 shows the TMX front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-303
Figure 5-90 TMX front panel
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
O
U
T
I
N
TMX
TMX
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the TMX front panel.Table 5-164 lists the type and function
of each interface.
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-304 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-164 Types and functions of the TMX interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX4 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX4 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
5.21.6 Valid Slots
The TMX occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TMX are IU1-IU17.
5.21.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.
5.21.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 5-165.
Table 5-165 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TMX displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-305
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Service Type
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
FEC Working State
FEC Type
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
5.21.9 Specifications of the TMX
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of optical module at the client side
Table 5-166 Specifications of optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
distance
km 2 15 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-306 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral width
nm NA 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB NA 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN PIN APD APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-307
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Remark - These modules access STM-16 and OTU1 services. The indexes
listed in the table above are applicable for the STM-16 services.
When the module accesses OTU1 services, the indexes are slightly
different.

Table 5-167 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP
CWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
Target distance km 80
Operating wavelength range nm 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean launched power dBm 5
Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Central wavelength deviation nm 6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 1
Minimum side mode suppression
ratio
dB 30
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-308 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 5-168 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP
DWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
Target distance km 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating frequency range THz 192.1 to 196.0
Maximum mean launched power dBm 3
Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.5
Central frequency deviation GHz 12.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 1
Minimum side mode suppression
ratio
dB 30
Eye pattern mask - 5% margin are required for the eye
pattern of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services.
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side
Table 5-169 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm 800 ps/nm
Line code format - NRZ- 40
channels fixed
(odd & even
wavelengths)
NRZ- 40
channels fixed
NRZ- 80
channels fixed
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-309
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm 800 ps/nm
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 2 4 2
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -3 0 -3
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 10 9 10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.00 192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 10 10 5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 800 1600 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity
(FEC on) EOL
dBm -16 -26 -16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 0
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27 -27

Table 5-170 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
1200 ps/nm
- tunable-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm -
tunable-
APD
4800 ps/nm
-ODB-
tunable
800 ps/nm-
DRZ-
tunable
Line code format - NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
ODB- 80
channels
tunable
DRZ- 80
channels
tunable
5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-310 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
1200 ps/nm
- tunable-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm -
tunable-
APD
4800 ps/nm
-ODB-
tunable
800 ps/nm-
DRZ-
tunable
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 2 2 2 2
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -3 -3 -3 -3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10
NA
a
10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 5 5 5 5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB 35 35 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 1200 1200 4800 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD APD PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity (FEC
on) EOL
dBm -16 -26 -26 -16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 -9 0
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27
a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 Optical Transponder Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-311
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 3.1 lb. (1.4 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module
Type
The maximum
power consumption
at 25 (77) (W)
The maximum
power consumption
at 55 (131) (W)
TN11TMX NRZ-fixed(10G)(800
ps/nm-40 channels
fixed
1600 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80 channels
fixed)
40.3 44.3
NRZ-tunable(10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
42.1 46.4
DRZ-tunable(10G)
(800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
42.4 46.6
ODB-tunable(10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
46.5 51.2

5 Optical Transponder Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
5-312 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
About This Chapter
6.1 ND2
ND2: 2 x (4 x ODU1 multiplexing OTU2) optical interface board
6.2 NS2
NS2: 4 x ODU1 multiplexing OTU2 optical interface board
6.3 TBE
TBE: 10 Gigabit Ethernet tributary board
6.4 TDG
TDG: 2 x GE tributary service processing board
6.5 TDX
TDX: 2 x 10G tributary service processing board
6.6 TOM
TOM: 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board
6.7 TQM
TQM: 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board
6.8 TQS
TQS: 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board
6.9 TQX
TQX: 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
6.10 TSXL
TSXL: 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-1
6.1 ND2
ND2: 2 x (4 x ODU1 multiplexing OTU2) optical interface board
6.1.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the ND2 board is available, that is TN11.
6.1.2 Application
The ND2 is a type of line board. The ND2 realizes the conversion between eight cross-connect
ODU1 signals or two cross-connect ODU2 signals and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant
WDM OTU2 signals.
6.1.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the ND2 are cross-connection at the electrical
layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
6.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The ND2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, OTN processing module, control and
communication module, and power supply module.
6.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ND2 front panel.
6.1.6 Valid Slots
The ND2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the ND2 are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
6.1.7 Characteristic Code for the ND2
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
6.1.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
6.1.9 Specifications of the ND2
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
6.1.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the ND2 board is available, that is TN11.
6.1.2 Application
The ND2 is a type of line board. The ND2 realizes the conversion between eight cross-connect
ODU1 signals or two cross-connect ODU2 signals and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant
WDM OTU2 signals.
For the position of the ND2 in the WDM system, see Figure 6-1.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 6-1 Position of the ND2 in the WDM system
Client side Client side WDM side WDM side
ND2 TDX ND2 TDX
1
8
1
8 DMUX
DMUX
MUX
MUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
NOTE
In the application scenario with TN11TDX, the ND2 accesses eight channels of ODU1 signals.
In the application scenario with TN12TDX, the ND2 accesses two channels of ODU2 signals.
6.1.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the ND2 are cross-connection at the electrical
layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 Functions and features of the ND2
Function
and feature
Description
Basic
function
Maps double channels of 4 x ODU1 electrical signals or double channels of
ODU2 electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board into two OTU2
signals and converts the signal into standard DWDM signals compliant with
ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
Cross-
connect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of double channels of 4 x ODU1 electrical
signals or double channels of ODU2 electrical signals between the ND2 and
the cross-connect board.
OTN
function
l Supports 4 x ODU1 asynchronous multiplexing into ODU2.
l Supports ODU2 mapping into OTU2.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1 and ODU2.
l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1.
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM specification.
ESC
function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-3
Function
and feature
Description
FEC
encoding
Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975 and AFEC encoding
compliant with the ITU-T G.975.1.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate
the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current
and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.
ALS
function
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports the ODUk SNCP.
l Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
l Supports the ODUk SPRing protection.
l Supports the tributary SNCP protection.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Client side Not supported
Path Loopback Supported

6.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The ND2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, OTN processing module, control and
communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 6-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ND2.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 6-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the ND2
WDM side
IN1
OTN
processing
module
OUT1
8 X ODU1/ 2 X ODU2
E/O
O/E
IN2
OUT2
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane (service corss-connection)
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal Flow
The client side of the ND2 board can access the following optical signals:
l ODU1 electrical signals
l ODU2 electrical signals
In the signal flow of the ND2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the ND2 to the WDM side
of the ND2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The OTN processing module receives double channels of 4 x ODU1 electrical signals or
double channels of ODU2 electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through
the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of
FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs two channels of OTU2 signals.
The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths OTU2 optical signals through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-
IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-5
After the O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the OTN processing module. The
module performs operations such as OTU2 in frame, decoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the
module sends out double channels of 4 x ODU1 electrical signals or double channels of
ODU2 electrical signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.
Module Function
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OTU2 optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l OTN processing module
Realizes the framing of OTU2 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU2 signals, and
performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
6.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ND2 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 6-3 shows the ND2 front panel.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 6-3 ND2 front panel
ND2
ND2
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
2
I
N
2
O
U
T
1
I
N
1
NOTE
The WDM-side optical modules must be inserted in the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 interfaces in an
ascending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 4 optical interfaces on the ND2 front panel. Table 6-2 lists the type and function of
each interface.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-7
Table 6-2 Types and functions of the ND2 interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN1-IN2 LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2 LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
6.1.6 Valid Slots
The ND2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the ND2 are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
6.1.7 Characteristic Code for the ND2
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic
Code for Line Unit.
6.1.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 6-3.
Table 6-3 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ND2 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Laser Status
Service Mode
FEC Working State
FEC Type
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
Path Loopback
Line Rate
Port Description
Figure 6-4 and Figure 6-5 shows the NM ports of the ND2 board. Table 6-4 describes the
meaning of each port.
Figure 6-4 Port diagram of the ND2 (cross-connection at the ODU1 level)
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-2
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-3
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-4
Fixed
cross-connection
Service processing
module
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
2(IN2/OUT2)-1
Figure 6-5 Port diagram of the ND2 (cross-connection at the ODU2 level)
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
Fixed
cross-connection
Service processing
module
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
2(IN2/OUT2)-1
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-9
Table 6-4 Meaning of NM port of the ND2
Port Name Meaning
ODU1LP1-ODU1LP2 Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3
and 4.
ODU2LP1-ODU2LP2 Internal logic ports.
IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2 Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the ND2 board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU1
cross-connection between the ODU1LP port of the ND2 board and the optical channels of
the ClientLP port or LP port on other boards to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU1
services, as shown (1) in Figure 6-6.
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU1
cross-connections between the ODU1LP port of the ND2 board and the optical channels
of the ODU1LP port on other TN12NS2/TN11ND2 boards (or IN/OUT port on TN11NS2
board) to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services (For regeneration or service
passthrough), as shown (2) in Figure 6-6.
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU2
cross-connection between the ODU2LP port of the ND2 board and the optical channels of
the ClientLP port or LP port on other boards to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU2
services, as shown (1) in Figure 6-7.
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU2
cross-connections between the ODU2LP port of the ND2 board and ODU2LP port of other
TN12NS2/TN11ND2 boards to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU2 services (For
regeneration or service passthrough), as shown (2) in Figure 6-7.
l The paths of the ODU1LP/ODU2LP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1-IN2/
OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the T2000.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 6-6 Cross-connection diagram of the ND2 (ODU1 level)
1
2
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3
1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-2
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-3
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-4
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-2
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-3
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-4
2
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the
ND2 board
The WDM side of the ND2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other ND2 boards
WDM side
Fixed
cross-connection
ND2 board
WDM side
Fixed
cross-connection
Other ND2 board
Client side WDM side
Cross-connect
module
Other board
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-11
Figure 6-7 Cross-connection diagram of the ND2 (ODU2 level)
1
2
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
2
1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the
ND2 board
The WDM side of the ND2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other ND2 boards
WDM side
Fixed
cross-connection
ND2 board
WDM side
Fixed
cross-connection
Other ND2 board
Client side
Cross-connect
module
Other board
6.1.9 Specifications of the ND2
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 6-5 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 800ps/nm- NRZ-fixed
Line code format - NRZ- 40 channels fixed (odd & even
wavelengths)
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 2
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm -3
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency deviation GHz 10
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 800ps/nm- NRZ-fixed
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity (FEC
on) EOL
dBm -16
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2.2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 3.5 lb. (1.6 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 68.0 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 74.8 W
6.2 NS2
NS2: 4 x ODU1 multiplexing OTU2 optical interface board
6.2.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the NS2 board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference
between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the grooming
of the ODU2 service.
6.2.2 Application
The NS2 is a type of line board. The NS2 realizes the conversion between four cross-connect
ODU1 signals or a ODU2 electrical signal and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM
OTU2 signals.
6.2.3 Functions and Features
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-13
The main functions and features supported by the NS2 are cross-connection at the electrical
layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
6.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The NS2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
6.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the NS2 front panel.
6.2.6 Valid Slots
The NS2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the NS2 are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
6.2.7 Characteristic Code for the NS2
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
6.2.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
6.2.9 Specifications of the NS2
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
6.2.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the NS2 board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference
between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the grooming
of the ODU2 service.
Table 6-6 lists the version description of the NS2.
Table 6-6 Version description of the NS2
Item Description
Functional
version
Two functional versions of the NS2 board are available: TN11 and TN12.
Similarity Both supports the grooming of the ODU1 service.
Difference The TN12NS2 board supports the grooming of the ODU2 service.
Replacement TN11NS2 and TN12NS2 can not be replaced with each other.

6.2.2 Application
The NS2 is a type of line board. The NS2 realizes the conversion between four cross-connect
ODU1 signals or a ODU2 electrical signal and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM
OTU2 signals.
For the position of the NS2 in the WDM system, see Figure 6-8.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 6-8 Position of the NS2 in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
NS2
DMUX
MUX
1
4
1
4
G.694.1 G.694.1
TQS NS2 TQS
1
4
1
4
Client side Client side WDM side WDM side
6.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the NS2 are cross-connection at the electrical
layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-7.
Table 6-7 Functions and features of the NS2
Function
and feature
Description
Basic
function
l TN11NS2: Maps four ODU1 signals sent from the cross-connection board
or a board in the paired slot into an OTU2 signal and converts the signal
into a standard DWDM signal compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse
process is similar.
l TN12NS2: Maps four ODU1 signals or an ODU2 signal sent from the
cross-connection board into an OTU2 signal and converts the signal into
standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse
process is similar.
Cross-
connect
capabilities
TN11NS2: Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the
NS2 and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot.
TN12NS2: Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals or an ODU2
signal between the NS2 and the cross-connect board.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-15
Function
and feature
Description
OTN
function
TN11NS2:
l Supports 4ODU1 asynchronous multiplexing into ODU2.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1 and ODU2.
l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1.
TN12NS2:
l Supports 4ODU1 asynchronous multiplexing into ODU2.
l Supports ODU2 mapping into OTU2.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1 and ODU2.
l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1.
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM specification.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module,
the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range
of:
l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz
l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
ESC
function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
FEC
encoding
Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975 and AFEC encoding
compliant with the ITU-T G.975.1.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate
the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current
and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.
ALS
function
Not supported
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Function
and feature
Description
Protection
scheme
l Supports the ODUk SNCP.
l Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
l Supports the ODUk SPRing protection.
l Supports the tributary SNCP protection.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Client side Not supported
Path Loopback Supported

6.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The NS2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 6-9 and Figure 6-10 show the functional modules and signal flow of the NS2.
Figure 6-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11NS2
WDM side
IN
Signal processing
module
OTN
processing
module
OUT
Cross-connect
module
ODU1
E/O
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane (service corss-connection)
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-17
Signal Flow of TN11NS2
The signal processing module of the NS2 board accesses ODU1 electrical signals.
In the signal flow of the TN11NS2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined.
The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the TN11NS2 to the
WDM side of the TN11NS2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The signal processing module receives four channels of ODU1 electrical signals sent from
the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane. The module
performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module
outputs one channel of OTU2 signals.
The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths OTU2 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN
optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as OTU2 in frame, decoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the
module sends out four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane for service cross-
connection.
Figure 6-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12NS2
WDM side
IN
Backplane (service corss-connection)
Signal processing module
OTN
processing
module
OUT E/O
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
4 X ODU1/ 1 X ODU2
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Signal Flow of TN12NS2
The client side of the NS2 board can access the following optical signals:
l ODU1 electrical signals
l ODU2 electrical signals
In the signal flow of the NS2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NS2 to the WDM side
of the NS2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The OTN processing module receives four channels of ODU1 electrical signals or one
channel of ODU2 electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the
backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/
AFEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals.
The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths OTU2 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN
optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the OTN processing module. The
module performs operations such as OTU2 in frame, decoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the
module sends out four channels of ODU1 electrical signals or one channel of ODU2
electrical signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.
Module Function
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OTU2 optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the cross-connect module and OTN processing module.
Cross-connect module
Realizes the grooming of electrical signals between the NS2 and the board in the paired
slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals
are ODU1 signals.
NOTE
The signal processing module of the TN12NS2 does not contain a cross-connect unit. This board,
however, is fixedly connected to the cross-connect board.
OTN processing module
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-19
Realizes the framing of OTU2 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU2 signals,
and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
6.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the NS2 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 6-11 shows the NS2 front panel.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 6-11 NS2 front panel
NS2
NS2
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
I
N
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the NS2 front panel. Table 6-8 lists the type and function of
each interface.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-21
Table 6-8 Types and functions of the NS2 interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical
multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
6.2.6 Valid Slots
The NS2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the NS2 are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
6.2.7 Characteristic Code for the NS2
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic
Code for Line Unit.
6.2.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 6-9.
Table 6-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the NS2 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN/OUT 1

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Laser Status
Service Mode
FEC Working State
FEC Type
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
Path Loopback
SD Trigger Condition
Line Rate
Port Description
Figure 6-12 andFigure 6-13 show the NM ports of the NS2 board. Table 6-10 describes the
meaning of each port.
Figure 6-12 Port diagram of the TN12NS2 (cross-connection at the ODU1 level)
1(IN/OUT)-1
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4
WDM side
Fixed
cross-connection
Service processing
module
NOTE
TN11NS2: The optical paths of internal logic port are 1(IN/OUT)-1 to 1(IN/OUT)-4.
TN12NS2 (ODU1 level): The optical paths of internal logic port are 51 (ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1 to 51
(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4.
Figure 6-13 Port diagram of the TN12NS2 (cross-connection at the ODU2 level)
1(IN/OUT)-1
71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)-1
WDM side
Fixed
cross-connection
Service processing
module
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-23
Table 6-10 Meaning of NM port of the NS2
Port Name Meaning
ODU1LP Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3
and 4.
ODU2LP Internal logic port.
IN/OUT Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the NS2 board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l .During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU1
cross-connection between the ODU1LP port of the NS2 board and the optical channels of
the ClientLP or LP port on other boards to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU1
services, as shown (1) in Figure 6-14.
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU1
cross-connections between the ODU1LP port of the TN12NS2 board and the optical
channels of the ODU1LP port on other TN12NS2/TN11ND2 boards (or IN/OUT port on
TN11NS2 board) to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services (For
regeneration or service passthrough), as shown (2) in Figure 6-14.
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU2
cross-connection between the ODU2LP port of the NS2 board and the optical channels of
the ClientLP port or LP port on other boards to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU2
services, as shown (1) in Figure 6-15.
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU2
cross-connections between the ODU2LP port of the TN12NS2 board and ODU2LP port
of other TN12NS2/TN11ND2 boards to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU2
services (For regeneration or service passthrough), as shown (2) in Figure 6-15.
l The paths of the ODU1LP/ODU2LP port are respectively connected to the IN/OUT ports.
There is no need for configuration on the T2000.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 6-14 Cross-connection diagram of the NS2 (cross-connection at the ODU1 level)
1
2
1
2
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the
NS2 board
The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other NS2 boards
WDM side
Fixed
cross-connection
NS2 board
WDM side
Fixed
cross-connection
Other NS2 board
Client side Other board
Cross-connect
module
Figure 6-15 Cross-connection diagram of the NS2 (cross-connection at the ODU2 level)
1
2
1
2
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)-1
71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)-1
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the
NS2 board
The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other NS2 boards
WDM side
Fixed
cross-connection
NS2 board
WDM side
Fixed
cross-connection
Other NS2 board
Client side Other board
Cross-connect
module
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-25
6.2.9 Specifications of the NS2
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
TN11NS2: Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 6-11 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm 800 ps/nm
Line code format - NRZ- 40
channels fixed
(odd & even
wavelengths)
NRZ- 40
channels fixed
NRZ- 80
channels fixed
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 2 4 2
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -3 0 -3
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 10 9 10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.00 192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 10 10 5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 800 1600 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity
(FEC on) EOL
dBm -16 -26 -16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 0
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27 -27

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 6-12 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
1200 ps/nm
- tunable-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm -
tunable-
APD
4800 ps/nm
-ODB-
tunable
800 ps/nm-
DRZ-
tunable
Line code format - NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
ODB- 80
channels
tunable
DRZ- 80
channels
tunable
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 2 2 2 2
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -3 -3 -3 -3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10
NA
a
10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 5 5 5 5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB 35 35 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 1200 1200 4800 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD APD PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity (FEC
on) EOL
dBm -16 -26 -26 -16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 -9 0
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27
a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-27
TN12NS2: Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Table 6-13 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 800ps/nm- NRZ-fixed
Line code format - NRZ- 40 channels fixed (odd & even
wavelengths)
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 2
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm -3
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency deviation GHz 10
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity (FEC
on) EOL
dBm -16
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0
Maximum reflectance dB -27

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 6-14 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1200 ps/
nm -
tunable-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm -
tunable
-APD
4800 ps/
nm -
ODB-
tunable
800ps/nm-
DRZ-
tunable
Line code format - NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
ODB- 80
channels
tunable
DRZ- 80
channels
tunable
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 2 2 2 2
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm -3 -3 -3 -3
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10
NA
a
10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz 5 5 5 5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 35 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 1200 1200 4800 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD APD PIN
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity (FEC
on) EOL
dBm -16 -26 -26 -16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 -9 0
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27 -27 -27
a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-29
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.64 lb (1.2 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module
Type
The maximum
power
consumption at
25 (77) (W)
The maximum
power
consumption at
55 (131) (W)
TN11NS2 NRZ-fixed(10G)
(800 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
1600 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80
channels fixed)
38.0 41.8
NRZ-tunable(10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
39.0 42.9
DRZ-tunable(10G)
(800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
41.0 45.1
ODB-tunable(10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
44.0 48.4
TN12NS2 - 39.5 47.4

6.3 TBE
TBE: 10 Gigabit Ethernet tributary board
6.3.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the TBE board is available, that is TN11.
6.3.2 Application
The TBE is a type of tributary board. Converges eight GE services and a maximum of 16 cross-
connect GE services into one 10GE service and deconverges one 10GE service into multiple
GE services; converges multiple flat-rate GE services into one full-rate GE service; realizes
transparent transmission of GE-GE services.
6.3.3 Functions and Features
The main function and feature supported by the TBE is cross-connection at the electrical layer
and ALS.
6.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
The TBE board consists of the client-side GE optical module, client-side 10GE optical module,
L2 switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
6.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TBE front panel.
6.3.6 Valid Slots
The TBE occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TBE are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
6.3.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
6.3.8 Specifications of the TBE
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
6.3.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the TBE board is available, that is TN11.
6.3.2 Application
The TBE is a type of tributary board. Converges eight GE services and a maximum of 16 cross-
connect GE services into one 10GE service and deconverges one 10GE service into multiple
GE services; converges multiple flat-rate GE services into one full-rate GE service; realizes
transparent transmission of GE-GE services.
Application Scenario 1: Converging/Deconverging 8xGE Services and a Maximum
of 16 Cross-Connect GE Services to/from One 10GE Services
For the position of the TBE in the WDM system, see Figure 6-16.
Figure 6-16 Position of the TBE in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
G.694.1
10GE
TBE
L4G
WDM side Client side
L4G
G.694.1
TBE
L4G
L4G
8GE
Local
client
side
8GE
10GE
4
GE GE
4 4
4
Local
client
side
Client side WDM side
4 4
Application Scenario 2: Transparent Transmission of GE-GE Services
For the position of the TBE in the WDM system, see Figure 6-17.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-31
Figure 6-17 Position of the TBE in the WDM system
4
G.694.1
GE
TBE
L4G
L4G
GE
G.694.1
GE
TBE
L4G
L4G
GE
8
1
8
1
1
GE GE
Client side
WDM side
WDM side Client side
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
4
1
4
1
4
1
6.3.3 Functions and Features
The main function and feature supported by the TBE is cross-connection at the electrical layer
and ALS.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-15.
Table 6-15 Functions and features of the TBE
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Converges eight GE services and a maximum of 16 cross-connect GE
services into one 10GE service and deconverges one 10GE service
into multiple GE services.
l Converges multiple flat-rate GE services into one full-rate GE service.
l Realizes transparent transmission of GE-GE services.
The reverse process is similar.
Client-side
service type
FE optical signal, FE electric signal, GE optical signal, GE electric signal,
10GE LAN, 10GE WAN
Cross-connect
capabilities
Supports cross-connecting 16 GE signals to the central working/
protection cross-connect board.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the FE,
GE, 10GE WAN and 10GE LAN.
ALS function The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically
shut down if no signals are received.
QinQ Supports Stacking VLAN.
QoS (Quality of
Service)
Supports CAR (Committed Access Rate) and CoS (Class of Service).
ETH OAM Supports IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah-compliant ETH OAM
protocol.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Function and
Feature
Description
LAG (Link
Aggregation
Group)
Supports the aggregation group protocol to aggregate services from IP
port to Trunk port; supports manual and static link aggregation; supports
payload equalization and non-payload equalization.
VLAN broadcast Supports VLAN-based service group broadcast.
CVLAN group
port
Supports a group of CVLAN to be used as one VLAN.
Layer 2 switching Supports the MAC address learning and aging.
Flow control Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and
flow control termination.
EPL (Ethernet
Private Line)
Provides point-to-point EPL dedicated line.
EVPL (Ethernet
Virtual Private
Line)
Provides point-to-multipoint EVPL dedicated line and supports VLAN-
based switching.
Port working
mode
10GE optical interface: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN
GE optical interface: 1000MFULL, auto-negotiation
GE electric interface: auto-negotiation
FE optical interface: 100MFULL
FE electric interface: 10MHALF, 10MFULL, 100MHALF, 100MFULL,
auto-negotiation
Protection
scheme
l Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection.
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the SW SNCP.
l Supports the VLAN SNCP.
l 10GE optical interface /GE optical interface /FE optical interface:
Supports the board-level protection.
l Supports the DBPS protection.
l Supports the DLAG protection.
l Supports the MS SNCP protection.
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on
the client side.
XFP Supports the 10 Gbit/s small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Loopback 10GE
optical
interface
MAC Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
PHY Inloop Supported
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-33
Function and
Feature
Description
Outloop Supported
GE optical
interface
MAC Inloop Supported
Outloop Not supported
PHY Inloop Supported
Outloop Not supported
GE electric
interface
MAC Inloop Supported
Outloop Not supported
PHY Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
FE optical
interface
MAC Inloop Supported
Outloop Not supported
PHY Inloop Supported
Outloop Not supported
FE electric
interface
MAC Inloop Supported
Outloop Not supported
PHY Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

6.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The TBE board consists of the client-side GE optical module, client-side 10GE optical module,
L2 switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 6-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TBE.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 6-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the TBE
Client side
L2
switching
module
Cross-connect
module
RX1
RX2
RX8
TX8
TX1
TX2
GE
Backplane(service cross-connection)
Client-side
GE optical
module
Client-side
10GE optical
module
RX
TX
8
8
16
16
O/E
E/O
O/E
E/O
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
16
Signal Flow
The client side of the TBE board accesses the following signals:
l GE optical signals
l 10GE LAN optical signals
l 10GE WAN optical signals
l FE optical signals
l FE electrical signals
l GE electrical signals
NOTE
l The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the
corresponding electrical signals.
l Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
l The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals
is considered as an example.
Convergence of Multiple GE Services into 10GE Services
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-35
l Positive process:
The client-side GE optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from
client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the L2
switching module. The eight channels of GE electrical signals are converged with a
maximum of sixteen channels of GE electrical signals groomed from the cross-connect
module into one channel of 10GE electrical signals.
The 10GE electrical signals are sent to the client-side 10GE optical module. After
performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out 10GE optical signals through the
TX optical interface.
l Negative process:
The client-side 10GE optical module receives 10GE optical signals from client
equipment through the RX interface, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, 10GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module.
This module deconverges the one channel of 10GE electrical signals into multiple
channels of GE electrical signals.
A maximum of eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the client-side GE
optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out GE optical
signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
A maximum of sixteen channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the cross-connection
board by the cross-connect module through the backplane.
Convergence or Transparent Transmission of GE-to-GE Services
l Positive process:
The client-side GE optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from
client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the L2
switching module. Based on the service requirement, the L2 switching module either
transparently transmits the received GE signals or converges the received multiple
channels of flat-rate GE signals into one channel of GE signals.
The GE signals are sent to the cross-connection board by the cross-connect module
through the backplane.
l Negative process:
The cross-connect module receives the GE electrical signals groomed from the cross-
connection board through the backplane.
GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The L2 switching module
either transparently transmits the received GE signals or deconverges the received GE
signals into multiple channels of flat-rate GE signals.
The client-side GE optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals,
and then outputs the optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of GE/10GE optical signals.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to GE/10GE optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l L2 switching module
Realizes the forwarding of the service signals.
Realizes the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals.
l Cross-connect module
Grooms the electrical signals between the TBE and the cross-connection board through
the backplane.
The grooming service signals are GE signals.
Realizes cross-connecting eight GE signals to the central working/protection cross-
connect board through the backplane.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
6.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TBE front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 6-19 shows the TBE front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-37
Figure 6-19 TBE front panel
TBE
TBE
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
6
T
X
7
R
X
7
T
X
8
R
X
8
T
X
5
R
X
5
T
X
6
T
X
R
X
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eighteen optical interfaces on the TBE front panel. Table 6-16 lists the type and
function of each interface.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 6-16 Types and functions of the TBE interfaces
Interface Type Function
TX1-TX8 LC Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side
equipment when the optical module is used.
Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side
equipment when the electrical module is used.
TX LC Transmits the 10 GE service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX8 LC Receives the optical service signal from the client-side
equipment when the optical module is used.
Receives the electrical service signal from the client-
side equipment when the electrical module is used.
RX LC Receives the 10 GE service signal from the client-side
equipment.

NOTE
Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
6.3.6 Valid Slots
The TBE occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TBE are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
6.3.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 6-17.
Table 6-17 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TBE displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
TX/RX 3
TX1/RX1 4
TX2/RX2 5
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-39
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
TX3/RX3 6
TX4/RX4 7
TX5/RX5 8
TX6/RX6 9
TX7/RX7 10
TX8/RX8 11

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
LPT Enabled
Port Description
Figure 6-20 describes the NM ports of the TBE board. Table 6-18 describes the meaning of
each port.
Figure 6-20 Port diagram of the TBE
Client side
VCTRUNK1
101(AP1/AP1)-1
VCTRUNK16
L2 swiching module
Cross-connect
module
PORT4
116(AP16/AP16)-1
PORT3
PORT11
VCTRUNK2 102(AP2/AP2)-1
Table 6-18 Meaning of NM port of the TBE
Port Name Meaning
PORT3 Corresponding to the client side optical interface RX/TX.
PORT4-PORT11 Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical
interfaces RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8.
VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK16
Internal virtual port.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Port Name Meaning
AP1-AP16 Internal convergence port.

If the TBE board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l During creation of the Ethernet services on the T2000, create the cross-connection between
the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The deconvergence of the 10GE services that are accessed
from the client-side PORT3 port is realized through the L2 switching module.
l Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-to-
one port connections, which need not be set on the T2000.
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the cross-
connection between the AP port of the TBE board and the AP port of other boards (The
GE services accessed from the client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the client
side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service deconvergence), as shown
(1) in Figure 6-21.
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the cross-
connection between the AP port of the TBE board and the LP port of other boards (The GE
services accessed from the client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the WDM
side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (2)
in Figure 6-21.
Figure 6-21 Cross-connection diagram of the TBE
Client side
WDM side
Client side
101(AP1/AP1)-1
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Other board
TBE board
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4 104(AP4/AP4)-1
101(AP1/AP1)-1
102(AP2/AP2)-1
103(AP3/AP3)-1
1
2
1
2
102(AP2/AP2)-1
103(AP3/AP3)-1
116(AP16/AP16)-1
The client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
The client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the client side of
other boards
6.3.8 Specifications of the TBE
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-41
Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side
Table 6-19 Specifications of optical module at the client side(FE)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module
Type
100BASE-FX
1310 nm-40 km
100BASE-FX
1310 nm-2 km
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 40 2
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 0 -14
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -5 -19
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 10 10
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1310 1310
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-
compliant
IEEE802.3z-
compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN PIN
Receiver sensitivity
(EOL)
dBm -30 -30
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -10 -14

Table 6-20 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125G
Multirate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
distance
km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125G
Multirate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -19 -20 -22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

NOTE
When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE
Std 802.3.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-43
Table 6-21 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-40km
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-80km
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 6-22 Specifications of XFP optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
10Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10Gbit/s
Multirate-4
0km
10Gbit/s
Multirate-8
0km
10Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
3km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- SLM SLM SLM MLM
Target
distance
km 10 40 80 0.3
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -1 2 4 -1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -6 -1 0 -7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 6 8.2 9 3
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm NA NA NA NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB 30 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.691-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD PIN
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-45
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
10Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10Gbit/s
Multirate-4
0km
10Gbit/s
Multirate-8
0km
10Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
3km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1270 to 1600 840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0.5 -1 -7 -1
Maximum
reflectance
dB NA NA NA NA

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.9 lb. (1.3 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 40.7 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 44.8 W
6.4 TDG
TDG: 2 x GE tributary service processing board
6.4.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the TDG board is available, that is TN11.
6.4.2 Application
The TDG is a type of tributary board. The TDG realizes the conversion between two GE optical
signals and two GE electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal through cross-connection.
6.4.3 Functions and Features
The main function and feature supported by the TDG is cross-connection at the electrical layer.
6.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The TDG board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
6.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TDG front panel.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
6.4.6 Valid Slots
The TDG occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TDG are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
6.4.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
6.4.8 Specifications of the TDG
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
6.4.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the TDG board is available, that is TN11.
6.4.2 Application
The TDG is a type of tributary board. The TDG realizes the conversion between two GE optical
signals and two GE electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal through cross-connection.
For the position of the TDG in the WDM system, see Figure 6-22.
Figure 6-22 Position of the TDG in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
NS2
DMUX
MUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
GE
TDG NS2 TDG
Client side WDM side WDM side Client side
GE
6.4.3 Functions and Features
The main function and feature supported by the TDG is cross-connection at the electrical layer.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-23.
Table 6-23 Functions and features of the TDG
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Realizes the conversion between two GE optical signals and two GE electrical
signals or one ODU1 electrical signal through the cross-connect board or with
the board in the paired slot.
Client-side
service type
GE
Cross-
connect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of an ODU1 signal and two GE signals between
the TDG and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot through
the backplane.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-47
Function
and Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate
the failures of the line.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.
ALS
function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut
down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the SW SNCP.
l Supports the ODUk SNCP.
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the MS SNCP protection.
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Loopback WDM side Not supported
Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

6.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The TDG board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 6-23 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TDG.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 6-23 Functional modules and signal flow of the TDG
Client side
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
O/E
E/O
GE
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Cross-connect
module
OTN
processing
module
Signal processing module
Client-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
2 X GE/ 1 X ODU1 Backplane (service corss-connection)
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the TDG board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the TDX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TDG to the backplane,
and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out two
channels of GE signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the cross-connection
board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane. Then,
If the signals are GE signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module.
If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 in frame,
demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out two channels of
GE signals to the client-side optical module.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-49
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and
then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical
interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal
electrical signals to GE optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module,
and OTN processing module.
Cross-connect module
Realizes the grooming of electrical signals between the TDG and the board in the paired
slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals
are GE and ODU1 signals.
GE encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the ODU1
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the GE performance
monitoring function.
OTN processing module
Realizes the framing of ODU1 signals and processes the overheads of the ODU1 signals.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
6.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TDG front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 6-24 shows the TDG front panel.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 6-24 TDG front panel
TDG
TDG
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the TDG front panel. Table 6-24 lists the type and function
of each interface.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-51
Table 6-24 Types and functions of the TDG interfaces
Interface Type Function
TX1-TX2 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX2 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
6.4.6 Valid Slots
The TDG occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TDG are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
6.4.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 6-25.
Table 6-25 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TDG displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Maximum Packet Length
Ethernet Working Mode
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
LPT Enabled
SD Trigger Condition
Port Description
Figure 6-25 describes the NM ports of the TDG board. Table 6-26 describes the meaning of
each port.
Figure 6-25 Port diagram of the TDG
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-1
Cross-connect
module
Service processing
module
Table 6-26 Meaning of NM port of the TDG
Port Name Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2 Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical
interfaces.
LP Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1and 2.

If the TDG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the GE cross-
connection between the RX/TX and LP ports to realize the cross-connect grooming of GE
services. The following three cross-connections can be realized.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the TDG board
(Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown (1)
and (2) in Figure 6-26.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TDG board and the LP port
of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TDG board are
cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board
service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 6-26.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port
of the TDG board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are
cross-connected to the client side of the TDG board for protection and the inter-board
service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 6-26.
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the LP port.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-53
Figure 6-26 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG
Client side
WDM side
Client side
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Other board
TDG board
1
2 3
4
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
3
4
1
2
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the
TDG board
The straight-through of the board
The internal cross-connection of the board
The client side of the TDG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU1
cross-connection between the LP port and IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2 board (or
ODU1LP port of TN12NS2/TN11ND2 boards) to realize the cross-connect grooming of
ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 6-27.
Figure 6-27 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG
Client side
Cross-connect
module
WDM side
Cross-connect
module
NS2 board
TDG board
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
1(IN/OUT)-1
1(IN/OUT)-2
1(IN/OUT)-3
1(IN/OUT)-4
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
6.4.8 Specifications of the TDG
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side
Table 6-27 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
distance
km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -19 -20 -22
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-55
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
Table 6-28 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-40km
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-80km
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-56 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-40km
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP
CWDM)-80km
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.4 lb. (1.1 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 29.7 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 32.7 W
6.5 TDX
TDX: 2 x 10G tributary service processing board
6.5.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the TDX board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference
between the two versions lies in the types of the output electrical signals through O/E conversion.
6.5.2 Application
The TDX is a type of tributary board. The TDX realizes the conversion between two 10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals and eight 2.5Gbit/s ODU1 virtual concatenation
electrical signals /two 10Gbit/s ODU2 electrical signals through cross-connection.
6.5.3 Functions and Features
The main function and feature supported by the TDX is cross-connection at the electrical layer.
6.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The TDX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
6.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TDX front panel.
6.5.6 Valid Slots
The TDX occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TDX are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
6.5.7 NM Configuration Reference
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-57
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
6.5.8 Specifications of the TDX
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
6.5.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the TDX board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference
between the two versions lies in the types of the output electrical signals through O/E conversion.
Table 6-29 lists the version description of the TDX.
Table 6-29 Version description of the TDX
Item Description
Functional
version
Two functional versions of the TDX board are available: TN11 and TN12.
Similarity The TN12TDX works in the same way as the TN11TDX.
Difference TN11TDX supports the conversion between the client-side signals and
ODU1 electrical signals.
TN12TDX supports the conversion between the client-side signals and
ODU2 electrical signals.
Replacement TN11TDX and TN12TDX can not be replaced with each other.

6.5.2 Application
The TDX is a type of tributary board. The TDX realizes the conversion between two 10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals and eight 2.5Gbit/s ODU1 virtual concatenation
electrical signals /two 10Gbit/s ODU2 electrical signals through cross-connection.
For the position of the TDX in the WDM system, see Figure 6-28.
Figure 6-28 Position of the TDX in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
NS2
G.694.1 G.694.1
TDX TDX
NS2
NS2
NS2
4
4
4
4
Client side WDM side Client side WDM side
MUX
DMUX
STM-64
10GE LAN
OC-192
10GE WAN
STM-64
10GE LAN
OC-192
10GE WAN
NOTE
TN12TDX supports the conversion between two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals
and two 10Gbit/s ODU2 electrical signals. In this application scenario, two NS2 boards respectively access
one channel of ODU2 signals.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-58 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
6.5.3 Functions and Features
The main function and feature supported by the TDX is cross-connection at the electrical layer.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-30.
Table 6-30 Functions and features of the TDX
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Realizes the conversion between two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/
OC-192 optical signals and eight ODU1 virtual concatenation electrical
signals/two 10Gbit/s ODU2 electrical signals.
Client-side
service type
10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192
Cross-connect
capabilities
TN11TDX: Supports the cross-connection of eight ODU1 signals
between the TDX and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired
slot through the backplane.
TN12TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two ODU2 signals between
the TDX and the cross-connect board through the backplane.
OTN function TN12TDX:
l Supports mapping each channel of 10G signals into the ODU2 signals
at the ODU2 interface of the backplane.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring
to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.
709 and G.Sup43.
l Supports PM functions for ODU2.
ALS function The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically
shut down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the ODUk SNCP.
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the tributary SNCP protection (TN12TDX).
XFP Supports the 10 Gbit/s small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Loopback WDM side Not supported
Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

6.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The TDX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-59
Figure 6-29 and Figure 6-30 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TDX.
Figure 6-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TDX
Client side
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
Signal processing module
OTN
processing
module
Backplane(service cross-connection) ODU1
Cross-
connect
module
8
O/E
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
Signal Flow of TN11TDX
The client side of the TDX board can access the following optical signals:
l 10GE LAN optical signals
l 10GE WAN optical signals
l STM-64 optical signals
l OC-192 optical signals
In the signal flow of the TDX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TDX to the backplane,
and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding
encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as
encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out
eight channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane for grooming.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-60 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives ODU1 electrical signals sent from the cross-
connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane. The module performs
operations such as ODU1 in frame, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the
module sends out two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 signals to the
client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/
STM-64/OC-192 electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical
signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.
Figure 6-30 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12TDX
Client side
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
Signal processing module
OTN
processing
module
Backplane(service cross-connection) ODU2
O/E
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
Signal Flow of TN12TDX
The client side of the TDX board can access the following optical signals:
l 10GE LAN optical signals
l 10GE WAN optical signals
l STM-64 optical signals
l OC-192 optical signals
In the signal flow of the TDX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TDX to the backplane,
and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-61
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding
encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as
encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out two
channels of ODU2 signals to the backplane for grooming.
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives ODU2 electrical signals sent from the cross-
connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU2
in frame, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out two
channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 signals to the client-side optical
module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/
STM-64/OC-192 electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical
signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal
electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and
mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing
module.
NOTE
The signal processing module of the TN12TDX does not contain a cross-connect unit. This board,
however, is fixedly connected to the cross-connect board.
Cross-connect module
Realizes the grooming of electrical signals between the TDX and the board in the paired
slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals
are ODU1 signals.
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the
ODU1/ODU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the
SDH/SONET performance monitoring function.
10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the
ODU1/ODU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the
10GE LAN performance monitoring function.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-62 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
OTN processing module
Realizes the framing of ODU1/ODU2 signals and processes the overheads of the
ODU1/ODU2 signals.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
6.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TDX front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 6-31 shows the TDX front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-63
Figure 6-31 TDX front panel
TDX
TDX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
TDX
TDX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
TN11TDX TN12TDX
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the TDX front panel.Table 6-31 lists the type and function
of each interface.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 6-31 Types and functions of the TDX interfaces
Interface Type Function
TX1-TX2 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX2 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
6.5.6 Valid Slots
The TDX occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TDX are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
6.5.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 6-32.
Table 6-32 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TDX displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Service Type
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
PAUSE Frame Flow Control
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-65
Maximum Packet Length
SD Trigger Condition
LPT Enabled
Port Description
Figure 6-32 and Figure 6-33 shows the NM ports of the TDX board. Table 6-33 describes the
meaning of each port.
Figure 6-32 Port diagram of the TN11TDX
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
Client side
151(imp1/imp1)-1
151(imp1/imp1)-2
151(imp1/imp1)-3
151(imp1/imp1)-4
152(imp2/imp2)-1
152(imp2/imp2)-4
152(imp2/imp2)-3
152(imp2/imp2)-2
Cross-connect
module
Service
proccessing
module
Figure 6-33 Port diagram of the TN12TDX
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
Client side
Fixed
cross-connection
Service
proccessing
module
Table 6-33 Meaning of NM port of the TDX
Port Name Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2 Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical
interfaces.
imp1-imp2 The internal mapping port. The optical channels are numbered
1, 2, 3 and 4.
ClientLP1-ClientLP2 The internal mapping port.

If the TN11TDX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
T2000:
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, configure the
bandwidth binding of the imp port.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-66 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
NOTE
The bandwidth of each imp port that accesses 10GE can be bound with 1-4 ODU1s.
For bandwidth binding, each 10GE signal must be bound with the first ODU1, and must be bound
in order.
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the cross-
connections of ODU1 level between the imp port and the IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2
board (or the ODU1LP port of the TN12NS2/TN11ND2), realizing the cross-connect
grooming of ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 6-34.
Figure 6-34 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TDX
151(imp1/imp1)-1
151(imp1/imp1)-2
151(imp1/imp1)-3
151(imp1/imp1)-4
152(imp2/imp2)-1
152(imp2/imp2)-4
152(imp2/imp2)-3
152(imp2/imp2)-2
1(IN/OUT)-1
1(IN/OUT)-2
1(IN/OUT)-3
1(IN/OUT)-4
Client side
Cross-connect
module
WDM side
Cross-connect
module
NS2 board
TDX board
If the TN12TDX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
T2000:
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the cross-
connections of ODU2 level between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port of the
TN12NS2/TN11ND2 board, as shown in Figure 6-35.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-67
Figure 6-35 Cross-connection diagram of the TN12TDX
Client side
WDM side
Fixed cross-connection
ND2 board
TDX board
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
Fixed cross-connection
6.5.8 Specifications of the TDX
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side
Table 6-34 Specifications of XFP optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
10Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10Gbit/s
Multirate-4
0km
10Gbit/s
Multirate-8
0km
10Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
3km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- SLM SLM SLM MLM
Target
distance
km 10 40 80 0.3
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -1 2 4 -1.3
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-68 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
10Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10Gbit/s
Multirate-4
0km
10Gbit/s
Multirate-8
0km
10Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
3km
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -6 -1 0 -7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 6 8.2 9 3
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm NA NA NA NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB 30 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.691-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1270 to 1600 840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0.5 -1 -7 -1
Maximum
reflectance
dB NA NA NA NA

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
Weight
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-69
l TN11TDX: 2.8 lb. (1.3 kg)
l TN12TDX: 3.1 lb. (1.4 kg)
Power Consumption
Board The maximum power
consumption at 25
(77) (W)
The maximum power
consumption at 55
(131) (W)
TN11TDX 78.0 80.0
TN12TDX 40.0 44.0

6.6 TOM
TOM: 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board
6.6.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the TOM board is available, that is TN11.
6.6.2 Application
The TOM can be used in six different application scenarios. In different application scenarios,
eight pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side
interfaces. The maximum access capacity of the TOM at the client side is 10 Gbit/s.
6.6.3 Function and Feature
The main functions and features supported by the TOM are cross-connection at the electrical
layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
6.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The TOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
6.6.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TOM front panel.
6.6.6 Valid Slots
The TOM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TOM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
6.6.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
6.6.8 Specifications of the TOM
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
6.6.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the TOM board is available, that is TN11.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-70 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
6.6.2 Application
The TOM can be used in six different application scenarios. In different application scenarios,
eight pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side
interfaces. The maximum access capacity of the TOM at the client side is 10 Gbit/s.
Application Scenario 1: Realizes the Conversion between Eight Optical Signals at
the Rate between 100 Mbit/s - 2.5 Gbit/s and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals
For the position of the TOM in the WDM system, see Figure 6-36.
Figure 6-36 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (tributary board in alone mode)
MUX
DMUX
NS2
DMUX
MUX
1
8
1
8
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
TOM NS2 TOM 100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
1
4
1
4
G.694.1 G.694.1
Client side WDM side Client side WDM side
NOTE
In this application scenario, the client-side interfaces are divided into four groups: RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2,
RX3/TX3-RX4/TX4, RX5/TX5-RX6/TX6, and RX7/TX7-RX8/TX8. For the client services at a rate of
greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express, HDTV), any group of these
optical interfaces can access up to only one channel.
The client-side eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.
Application Scenario 2: Realizes the Conversion between Eight Optical Signals at
the Rate between 100 Mbit/s - 2.5 Gbit/s and One ODU1 Electrical Signals
For the position of the TOM in the WDM system, see Figure 6-37.
Figure 6-37 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (tributary board in connect mode)
NS2
1
8
1
8
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
TOM NS2 TOM 100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
G.694.1 G.694.1
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
Client side WDM side Client side WDM side
NOTE
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express,
HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
The client-side eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-71
Application Scenario 3: Realizes the Conversion between Four Optical Signals at
the Rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and Four ITU-T Recommendation-
compliant WDM Signals
For the position of the TOM in the WDM system, see Figure 6-38.
Figure 6-38 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (tributary & line board in alone mode)
TOM TOM
1
4
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
1
4
1
4
1
4
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
Client side WDM side Client side WDM side
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as you like.
Application Scenario 4: Realizes the Conversion between Seven Optical Signals at
the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant
WDM Signals
For the position of the TOM in the WDM system, see Figure 6-39.
Figure 6-39 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (tributary & line board in connect mode)
TOM TOM
1
7
1
7
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
Client side WDM side Client side WDM side
NOTE
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express,
HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
The client-side seven pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
In connect mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-72 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Application Scenario 5: Realizes the Conversion between Six Optical Signals at the
rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM
Signals, and the Dual Fed and Selective Receiving Function on the WDM Side
For the position of the TOM in the WDM system, see Figure 6-40.
Figure 6-40 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (tributary & line board in connect mode)
TOM
TOM
1
6
1
6
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
Client side WDM side Client side WDM side
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
NOTE
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express,
HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
The client-side six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
In connect mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
Application Scenario 6: Realizes the Electrical Regeneration of One/Four OTU1
Optical Signals
For the position of the TOM in the WDM system, see Figure 6-41.
NOTE
In the connect mode, the TOM realizes the electrical regeneration of one OTU1 signals.
In the alone mode, the TOM realizes the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 signals
Figure 6-41 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (electrical regeneration board)
WDM side
TOM
G.694.1 G.694.1
TOM
WDM side
4 4
4 4
MUX
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-73
6.6.3 Function and Feature
The main functions and features supported by the TOM are cross-connection at the electrical
layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-35.
Table 6-35 Functions and features of the TOM
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
l Realizes the conversion between eight optical signals at the rate between
100 Mbit/s - 2.5 Gbit/s and four ODU1 electrical signals.
l Realizes the conversion between eight optical signals at the rate between
100 Mbit/s - 2.5 Gbit/s and one ODU1 electrical signals.
l Realizes the conversion between four optical signals at the rate between
100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and four ITU-T recommendation-compliant WDM
signals.
l Realizes the conversion between seven optical signals at the rate between
100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T recommendation-compliant WDM
signals.
l Realizes the conversion between six optical signals at the rate between 100
Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals,
and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
l Realizes the electrical regeneration of one/four OTU1 optical signals.
Client-side
service type
OC-3, STM-1, OC-12, STM-4, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FE, GE, ESCON,
FC100, FC200, FICON, FICON Express, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, HDTV,
FDDI
Cross-
connect
capabilities
Supports the grooming of one/four channels of ODU1 services each to
working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the
backplane. Supports the transmission of one/four ODU1 signals to the paired
slots through the backplane.
Supports the grooming of eight channels of GE services or one channel of
OTU1 services each to working/protection cross-connection boards
respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of eight GE
signals to the paired slots through the backplane.
Supports the transmission of eight signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and
2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-74 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Function
and Feature
Description
OTN
function
l Supports the mapping up to eight client-side services into up four ODU1
signals from the backplane side.
l Supports mapping up to seven client-side services into up to four OTU1
signals from the WDM side. The maximum number of optical interfaces
at the client side and WDM side is eight.
l The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709.
Supports the frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-
T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM and CWDM specifications.
ESC
function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
FEC
encoding
Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate
the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current
and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.
ALS
function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut
down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the SW SNCP.
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection.
l Supports the OWSP protection.
l Supports the ODUk SNCP.
l Supports the tributary SNCP protection.
l Supports the MS SNCP protection.
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
WDM side.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Client side Inloop Supported
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-75
Function
and Feature
Description
Outloop Supported

6.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The TOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
The signal flow of the board and the functional modules over which the signals travel vary with
the application scenarios. Figure 6-42 to Figure 6-47 show the block diagram of the functions
of the TOM board.
Figure 6-42 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (tributary board in alone mode)
Client side
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Cross-
connect
module
Signal processing module
OTN
processing
module
O/E
E/O
RX1
RX2
RX8
TX8
TX1
TX2
8 X 100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s / 4 X ODU1 Backplane (service cross-connection)
8
8
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
SCC
Client-side
optical
module
Signal Flow (tributary board in alone mode)
Realizes the conversion between eight optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s - 2.5 Gbit/
s and four ODU1 electrical signals.
The client side of the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-76 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
NOTE
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 6.6.3 Function and Feature.
In this application scenario, the client-side interfaces are divided into four groups: RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2,
RX3/TX3-RX4/TX4, RX5/TX5-RX6/TX6, and RX7/TX7-RX8/TX8. For the client services at a rate of
greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express, HDTV), any group of these
optical interfaces can access up to only one channel.
The client-side eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.
In the signal flow of the TOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane
of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives eight channels of Any optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out
eight channels of Any signals or four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the cross-connection
board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane. Then,
If the signals are Any signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module.
If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 in frame,
demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels
of Any signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and
then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical
interfaces.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-77
Figure 6-43 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (tributary board in connect mode)
Client side
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Cross-
connect
module
Signal processing module
OTN
processing
module
O/E
E/O
RX1
RX2
RX8
TX8
TX1
TX2
8
8
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
SCC
Client-side
optical
module
Backplane (service cross-connection)
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
8 X 100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s / 1X ODU1
Signal Flow (tributary board in connect mode)
Realizes the conversion between eight optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s - 2.5 Gbit/
s and one ODU1 electrical signals.
The client side of the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 6.6.3 Function and Feature.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express,
HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
The client-side eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
In the signal flow of the TOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane
of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives eight channels of Any optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out
eight channels of Any signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
l Receive direction
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-78 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the cross-connection
board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane. Then,
If the signals are Any signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module.
If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 in frame,
demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels
of Any signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and
then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical
interfaces.
Figure 6-44 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (tributary & line board in alone
mode)
WDM side
O/E
E/O O/E
E/O
RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
RX3
TX3
RX8
RX7
RX5
TX5
TX8
TX7
RX6
TX6
Signal processing module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Cross-
connect
module
100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s
Client side
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Backplane (service cross-connection)
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal Flow (tributary & line board in alone mode)
Realizes the conversion between four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s
and four ITU-T recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
The client side of the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 6.6.3 Function and Feature.
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as you like.
In the signal flow of the TOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the WDM side
of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-79
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection,
regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and Any signals.
Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module.
After performing the E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out four
channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T
G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals through the TX5-
TX8 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives four channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the RX5-RX8 optical
interfaces. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing
module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals,
performance monitoring of SDH and Any signals and service cross-connection. Then, the
module outputs four channels of Any signals.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the four channels of
electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the
TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Figure 6-45 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (tributary & line board in connect
mode)
RX8
TX8
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Signal processing module
OTN
processing
module
RX1
RX2
RX7
TX7
TX1
TX2
O/E
E/O
E/O
O/E
Cross-
connect
module
7
100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s
WDM side Client side
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Backplane (service cross-connection)
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-80 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Signal Flow (tributary & line board in connect mode)
Realizes the conversion between seven optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/
s and ITU-T recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
The client side of the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 6.6.3 Function and Feature.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express,
HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channels.
The client-side seven pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
In connect mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
In the signal flow of the TOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the WDM side
of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives seven channels of the Any optical signals from
client equipment through the RX1-RX7 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the seven channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the
module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals.
The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1
optical signals through the TX8 optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the RX8 optical interface.
Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as OTU1 in frame, decoding of FEC, demapping,
decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs seven
channels of Any signals.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the seven channels of
electrical signals, and then outputs seven channels of client-side optical signals through the
TX1-TX7 optical interfaces.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-81
Figure 6-46 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (tributary & line board in connect
mode)
TX7
E/O
O/E
RX8
TX8
RX7
6
100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Signal processing module
OTN
processing
module
RX1
RX2
RX6
TX6
TX1
TX2
O/E
E/O
Cross-
connect
module
WDM side Client side
Client-side
optical
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Backplane (service cross-connection)
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal Flow (tributary & line board in connect mode)
Realizes the conversion between six optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s
and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals, and the dual fed and selective receiving
function on the WDM side.
The client side of the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 6.6.3 Function and Feature.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express,
HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channels.
The client-side six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
In connect mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
In the signal flow of the TOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the WDM side
of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives six channels of the Any optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX6 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the six channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the
module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-82 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1
optical signals. The optical signals are splited into two channels of identical optical signals,
and then are output through the TX7-TX8 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the RX7-RX8 optical
interfaces. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 in frame, decoding
of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the
module outputs six channels of Any signals.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the six channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs six channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX6
optical interfaces.
Figure 6-47 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (electrical regeneration board)
WDM side
Signal processing module
Service
regeneration
module
O/E E/O
WDM side
Cross-
connect
module
ODU1
RX2
RX3
RX4
RX1 TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
Optical
receiving
module
Optical
transmitting
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Backplane (service cross-connection)
Signal Flow (electrical regeneration board)
Realizes the electrical regeneration of one/four OTU1 optical signals.
The TOM board realizes the regeneration of one/four channels of unidirectional optical signals.
The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant
at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-83
The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the RX1-
RX4 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
The signal processing module performs service cross-connection, decoding, overhead
processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming
based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames.
After being encoded, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing
the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths OTU1 signals .
The optical signals are output through the TX1-TX4 interfaces.
NOTE
In connect mode, realizes the electrical regeneration of one OTU1 optical signals. Only RX7/TX7 or RX8/
TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
In alone mode, realizes the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals. Four pairs of RX1/TX1-
RX8/TX8 can be chosen as the WDM-side optical interfaces as you like.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of the standard optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to standard optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of standard optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to standard optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping
module, OTN processing module, service processing module, and service regeneration
module.
Cross-connect module
Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the client-side signals and the
WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the
TOM and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the
backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1/Any signals.
Service encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any
performance monitoring function.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-84 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
OTN processing module
Realizes the framing of OTU1 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU1 signals,
and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.
Service processing module
Realizes the regeneration of Any signals and performance monitoring of SDH and Any
signals in two directions.
Service regeneration module
Realizes the FEC decoding/encoding and overhead processing of OTU1 signals.
Monitors the performance of WDM-side services.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
6.6.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TOM front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 6-48 shows the TOM front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-85
Figure 6-48 TOM front panel
TOM
TOM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
6
T
X
7
R
X
7
T
X
8
R
X
8
T
X
5
R
X
5
T
X
6
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are sixteen optical interfaces on the TOM front panel. Table 6-36 lists the type and
function of each interface.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-86 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 6-36 Types and functions of the TOM interfaces
Interface Type Function
TX1-TX8 LC Transmits the service signal.
RX1-RX8 LC Receives the service signal.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
6.6.6 Valid Slots
The TOM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TOM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
6.6.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 6-37.
Table 6-37 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TOM displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
TX5/RX5 7
TX6/RX6 8
TX7/RX7 9
TX8/RX8 10

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-87
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Service Type
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
FEC Working State
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type
Maximum Packet Length
Ethernet Working Mode
LPT Enabled
Board Mode
Description of NM ports
Figure 6-49 and Figure 6-50 show the NM ports of the TOM board. Table 6-38 and Table
6-39 describe the meaning of each port.
Figure 6-49 Port diagram of the TOM (tributary board in connect mode)
10(RX8/TX8)
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
Cross-connect
module
9(RX7/TX7)
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5
Service processing
module
Figure 6-50 Port diagram of the TOM (tributary & line in connect mode)
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
Client side
9(RX7/TX7)
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5
51(ODU1LP1/
ODU1LP1)-1
10(RX8/TX8)
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
Service
processing
module
WDM-side
optical module
WDM side
NOTE
In connect mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
Table 6-38 Meaning of NM port of the TOM (connect mode)
Port Name Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
a
Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical
interfaces.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-88 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Port Name Meaning
ClientLP1 Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 8.
ODU1LP1 Internal logic port.
a: In different application scenarios, eight pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used
as client-side interfaces or WDM-side interfaces.

Table 6-39 Meaning of NM port of the TOM (alone mode)
Port Name Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
a
Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical
interfaces.
ClientLP1, ClientLP3 Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 4.
ClientLP2, ClientLP4 Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 2.
ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4 Internal logic port.
a: In different application scenarios, eight pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used
as client-side interfaces or WDM-side interfaces.

NOTE
Only the display of NM port in connect mode is different from that in alone mode. The configuration in
connect mode is similar to the configuration in alone mode. This section describes the configuration in
connect mode only.
The configurations of application scenario 1 and 2 are similar. This section describes the configuration of
application scenario 2 only.
The configurations of application scenario 3, 4, 5 and 6 are similar. This section describes the configuration
of application scenario 4 only.
If the TOM board is used to transmit services, set Board Mode in Configuration > WDM
interfaces on the T2000. The valid values of the board mode field are Connect Mode and Alone
Mode.
Connect Mode (tributary board):
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the GE/Any/
OTU1 cross-connection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. The cross-connect
grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is realized through the cross-connect module. The
following three cross-connections can be realized.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM
board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
(1) and (2) in Figure 6-51.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TOM board and the
ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client
side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for
protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 6-51.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-89
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP
port of the TOM board (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the Client side of
other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the TOM board for protection and
the inter-board service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 6-51.
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port.
Figure 6-51 Cross-connection diagram of the TOM
3
4
1
2
10(TX8/RX8)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
2
3 4
1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5
Client side
WDM side
Client side
Cross-connect
module
Other board
TOM board
The Client side of other boards are cross-connected to the Clinet side of the
TOM board
The straight-through of the board
The internal cross-connection of the board
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
Cross-connect
module
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU1
cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and ODU1LP port of the
TN12NS2/TN11ND2 boards (or IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2 board) to realize the cross-
connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 6-52.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-90 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 6-52 Cross-connection diagram of the TOM
Client side
Cross-connect
module
WDM side
Fixed cross-connection NS2 board
TOM board
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
l According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and
receive timeslots.
Connect Mode (tributary & line board):
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the GE/Any/
OTU1 cross-connection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. The cross-connect
grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is realized through the cross-connect module. The
following three cross-connections can be realized.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM
board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
(1) and (2) in Figure 6-53.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TOM board and the
ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client
side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for
protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 6-53.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP
port of the TOM board (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of
other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TOM board for protection and
the inter-board service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 6-53.
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClinetLP port.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-91
Figure 6-53 Cross-connection diagram of the TOM
3
4
1
2
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
2
3 4
1
5
5
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5
Client side
WDM side
Client side
WDM side
Cross-connect
module
Other board
TOM board
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the
TOM board
The straight-through of the board
The internal cross-connection of the board
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
Cross-connect
module
The WDM side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
l Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and the ClientLP
port of other boards (The OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side of the TOM board
are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side
services), as shown (5) in Figure 6-53.
l Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ClientLP port and ODU1LP port of the
TOM board to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown (1) in
Figure 6-54.
NOTE
Be as the electrical regeneration board, the TOM supports creating the ODU1 cross-connection
between the ClientLP port of other boards and ODU1LP port of the TOM board.
l Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU1LP port and RX8/TX8 port of the
TOM board to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown (2) in
Figure 6-54.
l According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and
receive timeslots.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-92 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 6-54 Cross-connection diagram of the TOM
2
1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
Client side
Cross-connect
module
WDM side
Cross-connect
module
TOM board
TOM board
The ClientLP port of the TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP port.
The ODU1LP port is cross-connected to the WDM side of the TOM board.
1
2
Configuration Principle
l The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a
timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services.
l In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of
the transmit end.
l For each TOM board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed
64.
l For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, HDTV services, in the application
scenario 2, 4 and 5, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the TOM board.
l Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required
by each type of service is listed below.
Service Type Number of Timeslots
GE 7
FE 1
OTU1 16
STM-1 1
STM-4 4
STM-16 16
OC-3 1
OC-12 4
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-93
Service Type Number of Timeslots
OC-48 16
FC100 6
FC200 12
FICON 6
FICON Express 12
HDTV 11
DVBASI 2
DVBSDI 3
ESCON 2
FDDI 1

6.6.8 Specifications of the TOM
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of SDH Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1,
OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 6-40 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
distance
km 2 15 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-94 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm NA 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB NA 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-95
Specifications of GE Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used
to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications
when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Table 6-41 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
distance
km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-96 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -19 -20 -22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual
values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12,
ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely
apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when
the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE
signals.
Table 6-42 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-97
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely
apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when
the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE
signals.
Table 6-43 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
Target distance km 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz 12.5
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-98 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 3
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 2400
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for
the eye pattern of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm NA
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
nimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
Target distance km 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-99
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Operating wavelength range nm 1471 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Eye pattern mask - G.957 - compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP DWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
Target distance km 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 3
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.5
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency deviation nm 12.5
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-100 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP DWDM)
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 2400
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant (5% margin
are required for the eye pattern
of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength range nm NA
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.4 lb. (1.1 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 55.0 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 60.0 W
6.7 TQM
TQM: 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board
6.7.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the TQM board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference
between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the function
of processing OTU1/HDTV/DVB-SDI/FDDI services.
6.7.2 Application
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-101
The TQM is a type of tributary board. The TQM realizes the conversion between four optical
signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and four client-side electrical signals or
one ODU1 electrical signal through cross-connection.
6.7.3 Functions and Features
The main function and feature supported by the TQM is cross-connection at the electrical layer.
6.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The TQM board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
6.7.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TQM front panel.
6.7.6 Valid Slots
The TQM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TQM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
6.7.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
6.7.8 Specifications of the TQM
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
6.7.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the TQM board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference
between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the function
of processing OTU1/HDTV/DVB-SDI/FDDI services.
Table 6-44 lists the version description of the TQM.
Table 6-44 Version description of the TQM
Item Description
Functional
version
Two functional versions of the TQM board are available: TN11 and TN12.
Similarity The TN12TQM works in the same way as the TN11TQM.
Difference The TN12TQM board supports the function of processing OTU1/HDTV/
DVB-SDI/FDDI services.
Replacement The TN12TQM board can replace the TN11TQM board, but after the
replacement, the SCC software need be upgraded.
The TN11TQM board, however, cannot replace the TN12TQM board.

6.7.2 Application
The TQM is a type of tributary board. The TQM realizes the conversion between four optical
signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and four client-side electrical signals or
one ODU1 electrical signal through cross-connection.
For the position of the TQM in the WDM system, see Figure 6-55.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-102 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 6-55 Position of the TQM in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
NS2
DMUX
MUX
1
4
1
4
G.694.1 G.694.1
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
TQM NS2 TQM
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
Client side WDM side WDM side Client side
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
6.7.3 Functions and Features
The main function and feature supported by the TQM is cross-connection at the electrical layer.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-45.
Table 6-45 Functions and features of the TQM
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Converts four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s
into four client-side electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal and sends
the signals to the backplane for further cross-connection.
Client-side
service type
TN11TQM: STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100,
GE electrical signals, GE optical signals, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, FICON,
FICON Express
TN12TQM: STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100,
GE electrical signals, GE optical signals, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, FICON,
FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV, DVB-SDI, FDDI
Cross-
connect
capabilities
l Supports the cross-connection of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/
s and 2.5 Gbit/s between the boards in paired slots.
l Supports the cross-connection of one ODU1 signal or four GE signals or
one OTU1 signal between the TQM and the cross-connect board or the
board in the paired slot.
OTN
function
l Up to four channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and
multiplexed into ODU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than
2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-
T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-103
Function
and Feature
Description
ALS
function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut
down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the SW SNCP.
l Supports the ODUk SNCP.
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the MS SNCP protection.
l Supports the Tributary SNCP protection (TN12TQM).
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Loopback WDM side Not supported
Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

6.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The TQM board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 6-56 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQM.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-104 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 6-56 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQM
RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
Service
encapsulation and
mapping module
Cross-connect
module
Signal processing module
OTN
processing
module
RX3
TX3
O/E
E/O
Client side
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
Client-side
optical
module
4 X 100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s / 1X ODU1 Backplane (service cross-connection)
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the TQM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and GE electrical signals.
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 6.7.3 Functions and Features.
NOTE
The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding
electrical signals.
Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals
is considered as an example.
In the signal flow of the TQM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQM to the backplane,
and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-105
After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four
channels of Any signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the cross-connection
board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane. Then,
If the signals are Any signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module.
If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 in frame,
demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of
Any signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and
then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical
interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical
signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal
electrical signals to Any optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping
module, and OTN processing module.
Cross-connect module
Realizes the grooming of electrical signals between the TQM and the board in the paired
slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals
are Any and ODU1 signals.
Service encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU1
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any
performance monitoring function.
OTN processing module
Realizes the framing of ODU1 signals and processes the overheads of the ODU1 signals.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-106 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
6.7.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TQM front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 6-57 shows the TQM front panel.
Figure 6-57 TQM front panel
TQM
TQM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-107
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the TQM front panel. Table 6-46 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 6-46 Types and functions of the TQM interfaces
Interface Type Function
TX1-TX4 LC Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side
equipment when the optical module is used.
Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side
equipment when the electrical module is used.
RX1-RX4 LC Receives the optical service signal from the client-side
equipment when the optical module is used.
Receives the electrical service signal from the client-
side equipment when the electrical module is used.

NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
6.7.6 Valid Slots
The TQM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TQM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
6.7.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 6-47.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-108 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 6-47 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TQM displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Service Type
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Maximum Packet Length
Ethernet Working Mode
LPT Enabled
SD Trigger Condition
Port Description
Figure 6-58 shows the NM ports of the TQM board. Table 6-48 describes the meaning of each
port.
Figure 6-58 Port diagram of the TQM
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
Client side
Cross-connect
module
Service processing
module
NOTE
TN11TQM: The optical paths of internal logic port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4.
TN12TQM: The optical paths of internal logic port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/
ClientLP)-4.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-109
Table 6-48 Meaning of NM port of the TQM
Port Name Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 Respectively corresponding to the client-side
optical interfaces.
ClientLP Internal logic port. The optical paths are
numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.

If the TQM board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the cross-
connection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level
(GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services
is realized through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can
be realized.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TQM
board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
(1) and (2) in Figure 6-59.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TQM board and the
ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client
side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for
protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 6-59..
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the
ClientLP port of the TQM board (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client
side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the TQM board for
protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 6-59.
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port.
Only the first optical path of ClientLP port supports OTU1 services.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-110 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 6-59 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
2
3
4
1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3
Client side
WDM side
Client side
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Other board
TQM board
3
4
1
2
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the
TQM board
The straight-through of the board
The internal cross-connection of the board
The client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU1
cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the board and IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2
board (or ODU1LP port of TN12NS2/TN11ND2 boards) to realize the cross-connect
grooming of ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 6-60.
Figure 6-60 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM
Client side
Cross-connect module
WDM side
Fixed cross-connection NS2 board
TQM board
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-111
l According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and
receive timeslots.
Configuration Principle
l The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a
timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services.
l In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of
the transmit end.
l For each TQM board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed
16.
l For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, HDTV services, timeslots can be
configured only in channel 1 of the TQM board.
l Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required
by each type of service is listed below.
Service Type Number of Timeslots
GE 7
FE 1
OTU1 16
STM-1 1
STM-4 4
STM-16 16
OC-3 1
OC-12 4
OC-48 16
FC100 6
FC200 12
FICON 6
FICON Express 12
HDTV 11
DVBASI 2
DVBSDI 3
ESCON 2
FDDI 1

6.7.8 Specifications of the TQM
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-112 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side
NOTE
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1,
OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 6-49 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
distance
km 2 15 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm NA 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB NA 30 30 30
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-113
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

Specifications of GE Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
2.125Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used
to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications
when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Table 6-50 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
distance
km 0.5 10 40 80
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-114 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multi-rate
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -19 -20 -22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual
values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12,
ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-115
NOTE
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE,
STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply
to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the
accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 6-51 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-116 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely
apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when
the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 6-52 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
Target distance km 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz 12.5
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 3
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 2400
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for
the eye pattern of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength
range
nm NA
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
nimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-117
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
Weight
l TN11TQM: 2.64 lb (1.2 kg)
l TN12TQM: 2.43 lb (1.1 kg)
Power Consumption
Board The maximum power
consumption at 25
(77) (W)
The maximum power
consumption at 55
(131) (W)
TN11TQM 50.3 57.6
TN12TQM 25.0 27.5

6.8 TQS
TQS: 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board
6.8.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the TQS board is available, that is TN11.
6.8.2 Application
The TQS is a type of tributary board. The TQS realizes the conversion between four STM-16/
OC-48/OTU1 optical signals and four ODU1 electrical signals.
6.8.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the TQS are cross-connection at the electrical
layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
6.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The TQS board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and
communication module, and power supply module.
6.8.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TQS front panel.
6.8.6 Valid Slots
The TQS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TQS are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
6.8.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
6.8.8 Specifications of the TQS
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-118 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
6.8.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the TQS board is available, that is TN11.
6.8.2 Application
The TQS is a type of tributary board. The TQS realizes the conversion between four STM-16/
OC-48/OTU1 optical signals and four ODU1 electrical signals.
For the position of the TQS in the WDM system, see Figure 6-61.
Figure 6-61 Position of the TQS in the WDM system
STM-16/
OC-48/
OTU1
MUX
DMUX
NS2
DMUX
MUX
1
4
1
4
G.694.1 G.694.1
TQS NS2 TQS
1
4
1
4
Client side WDM side WDM side Client side
STM-16/
OC-48/
OTU1
6.8.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the TQS are cross-connection at the electrical
layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-53.
Table 6-53 Functions and features of the TQS
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Converts four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals into four ODU1 signals
and sends the signals to the backplane for further cross-connection. The
reverse process is similar.
Client-side
service type
STM-16, OC-48, OTU1
Cross-
connect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the TQS and
the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot.
OTN
function
l Supports mapping each channel of 2.5G signals into the ODU1 signals at
the ODU1 interface of the backplane.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to
the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM functions for ODU1.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-119
Function
and Feature
Description
ESC
function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
FEC
encoding
Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate
the failures of the line.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.
ALS
function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut
down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the ODUk SNCP.
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the tributary SNCP protection.
eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Loopback WDM side Not supported
Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

6.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The TQS board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and
communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 6-62 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQS.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-120 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 6-62 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQS
RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
ODU1
Signal processing module
RX3
TX3
Cross-connect
module
O/E
E/O
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side OTN
procssing module
OTN
processing
module
Client side
Client-side
optical
module
Backplane(service cross-connection)
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
The client side of the TQS board can access the following optical signals:
l STM-16 optical signals
l OC-48 optical signals
l OTU1 optical signals
In the signal flow of the TQS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQS to the backplane,
and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module.
The module performs operations such as OTU1 in frame and FEC decoding with OTU1
signals, and performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN
framing with STM-16/OC-48 signals. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU1
signals to the backplane for grooming.
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives ODU1 electrical signals sent from the cross-
connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane. The module performs
operations such as ODU1 in frame, framing of OTU1 signals, encoding of FEC, demapping,
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-121
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of STM-16/
OC-48/OTU1 signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the
TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of four channels of STM-16/OC-48/
OTU1 optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal
electrical signals to STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and
mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN processing module.
Cross-connect module
Realizes the grooming of electrical signals between the TQS and the board in the paired
slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals
are ODU1 signals.
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the
ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
SONET performance monitoring function.
Client-side OTN processing module
Realizes the OTN performance monitoring function.
OTN processing module
Realizes the framing of ODU1/OTU1 signals, processes the overheads of the ODU1/
OTU1 signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding of the OTU1 signals.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
6.8.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TQS front panel.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-122 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 6-63 shows the TQS front panel.
Figure 6-63 TQS front panel
TQS
TQS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the TQS front panel. Table 6-54 lists the type and function
of each interface.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-123
Table 6-54 Types and functions of the TQS interfaces
Interface Type Function
TX1-TX4 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX4 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
6.8.6 Valid Slots
The TQS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TQS are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
6.8.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 6-55.
Table 6-55 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TQS displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Service Type
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-124 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
FEC Working State
Port Description
Figure 6-64 shows the NM ports of the TQS board. Table 6-56 describes the meaning of each
port.
Figure 6-64 Port diagram of the TQS
201(LP1/LP1)-1
202(LP2/LP2)-1
203(LP3/LP3)-1
204(LP4/LP4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
Service
processing
module
Cross-connect
module
Client side
Table 6-56 Meaning of NM port of the TQS
Port Name Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical
interfaces.
LP1-LP4 Respectively corresponding to the internal logic ports. All
optical paths are numbered 1.

If the TQS board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l The corresponding channels of the four LP ports are respectively connected to the RX1/
TX1-RX4/TX4. There is no need for configuration on the T2000.
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU1
cross-connection between the LP port of the TQS board and the optical channels of the IN/
OUT port on the NS2 board (or ODU1LP port of TN12NS2/TN11ND2 boards) to realize
the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown Figure 6-65.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-125
Figure 6-65 Cross-connection diagram of the TQS
Client side
Cross-connect
module
WDM side
Cross-connect
module
NS2 board
TQS board
201(LP1/LP1)-1
202(LP2/LP2)-1
203(LP3/LP3)-1
204(LP4/LP4)-1
1(IN/OUT)-1
1(IN/OUT)-2
1(IN/OUT)-3
1(IN/OUT)-4
6.8.8 Specifications of the TQS
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of SDH Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
This module is used to access STM-16 and OTU1 signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to
STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals
are OTU1 signals.
Table 6-57 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
distance
km 2 15 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-126 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm NA 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB NA 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-127
Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, OC-48, OTU1 signals. The
specifications listed above completely apply to OTU1 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from
these specifications when the accessed signals are STM-16, OC-48.
Table 6-58 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP
CWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
Target distance km 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength range nm 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean launched power dBm 5
Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Central wavelength deviation nm 6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 1.0
Minimum side mode suppression
ratio
dB 30
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Table 6-59 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP
DWDM)
Line code format - NRZ
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-128 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP
DWDM)
Target distance km 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating frequency range THz 192.1 to 196.0
Maximum mean launched power dBm 3
Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.5
Central frequency deviation GHz 12.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 1
Minimum side mode suppression
ratio
dB 30
Eye pattern mask - 5% margin are required for the eye
pattern of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services.
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - APD
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.6 lb. (1.2 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 43.0 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 47.3 W
6.9 TQX
TQX: 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-129
6.9.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the TQX board is available, that is TN11.
6.9.2 Application
The TQX is a type of tributary board. The TQX realizes the conversion between four 10GE
LAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals and four ODU2 electrical signals through cross-
connection.
6.9.3 Functions and Features
The main function and feature supported by the TQX is cross-connection at the electrical layer.
6.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The TQX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
6.9.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TQX front panel.
6.9.6 Valid Slots
The TQX occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TQX are IU1, IU4, IU11 and IU14.
6.9.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
6.9.8 Specifications of the TQX
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
6.9.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the TQX board is available, that is TN11.
6.9.2 Application
The TQX is a type of tributary board. The TQX realizes the conversion between four 10GE
LAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals and four ODU2 electrical signals through cross-
connection.
For the position of the TQX in the WDM system, see Figure 6-66.
Figure 6-66 Position of the TQX in the WDM system
1
4
1
4
ND2
TQX TQX
ND2
2 2
2
ND2
ND2
G.694.1 G.694.1
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
Client side
WDM side
WDM side Client side
2
STM-64
10GE LAN
OC-192
10GE WAN
STM-64
10GE LAN
OC-192
10GE WAN
6.9.3 Functions and Features
The main function and feature supported by the TQX is cross-connection at the electrical layer.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-60.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-130 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 6-60 Functions and features of the TQX
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Converts four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals into
four ODU2 electrical signals. The reverse process is similar.
Client-side
service type
10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192
Cross-
connect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of four ODU2 signals between the TQX and
the cross-connect board through the backplane.
OTN
function
l Supports mapping each channel of 10G signals into the ODU2 signals at
the ODU2 interface of the backplane.
l Supports overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The
mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709 and G.Sup43.
l Supports TCM function for ODU2.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate
the failures of the line.
l Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current
and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
ALS
function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut
down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the ODUk SNCP.
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the tributary SNCP protection.
XFP Supports the 10 Gbit/s small form-factor pluggable optical module on the
client side.
Loopback WDM side Not supported
Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

6.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The TQX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 6-67 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQX.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-131
Figure 6-67 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQX
ODU2
RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
RX3
TX3
Signal processing module
OTN
processing
module
O/E
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
SCC
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and mapping
module
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and mapping
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Client side
Backplane (service cross-connection)
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the TQX board can access the following optical signals:
l 10GE LAN optical signals
l 10GE WAN optical signals
l STM-64 optical signals
l OC-192 optical signals
In the signal flow of the TQX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQX to the backplane,
and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding
encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as
encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four
channels of ODU2 signals to the backplane for grooming.
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives ODU2 electrical signals sent from the cross-
connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU2
in frame, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-132 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 signals to the client-side optical
module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/
STM-64/OC-192 electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical
signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal
electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN
encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the
ODU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
SONET performance monitoring function.
10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the
ODU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE
LAN performance monitoring function.
OTN processing module
Realizes the framing of ODU2 signals and processes the overheads of the ODU2 signals.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
6.9.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TQX front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 6-68 shows the TQX front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-133
Figure 6-68 TQX front panel
TQX
TQX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the TQX front panel. Table 6-61 lists the type and function
of each interface.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-134 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 6-61 Types and functions of the TQX interfaces
Interface Type Function
TX1-TX4 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX4 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
6.9.6 Valid Slots
The TQX occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TQX are IU1, IU4, IU11 and IU14.
6.9.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 6-62.
Table 6-62 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TQX displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Service Type
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-135
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Maximum Packet Length
LPT Enabled
Description of NM ports
Figure 6-69 shows the NM ports of the TQX board. Table 6-63 describes the meaning of each
port.
Figure 6-69 Port diagram of the TQX
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
Client side
Fixed
cross-connection
Service processing
module
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
Table 6-63 Meaning of NM port of the TQX
Port Name Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical
interfaces.
ClientLP1-ClientLP4 Internal logic port.

If the TQX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the cross-
connections of ODU2 level between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port of the
TN12NS2/TN11ND2 boards, realizing the cross-connect grooming of ODU2 services, as
shown Figure 6-70.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-136 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 6-70 Cross-connection diagram of the TQX
Client side
Fixed cross-connection
WDM side
Fixed cross-connection
ND2 board
TQX board
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
6.9.8 Specifications of the TQX
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side
Table 6-64 Specifications of XFP optical module at the client side
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
10Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10Gbit/s
Multirate-4
0km
10Gbit/s
Multirate-8
0km
10Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
3km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- SLM SLM SLM MLM
Target
distance
km 10 40 80 0.3
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -1 2 4 -1.3
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-137
Item Unit Value
Optical
Module
Type
10Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10Gbit/s
Multirate-4
0km
10Gbit/s
Multirate-8
0km
10Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
3km
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -6 -1 0 -7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 6 8.2 9 3
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm NA NA NA NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB 30 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.691-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1270 to 1600 840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0.5 -1 -7 -1
Maximum
reflectance
dB NA NA NA NA

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 3.3 lb. (1.5 kg)
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-138 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 65.0 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 71.2 W
6.10 TSXL
TSXL: 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
6.10.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the TSXL board is available, that is TN11.
6.10.2 Application
The TSXL is a type of tributary board. The TSXL realizes the conversion between one STM-256/
OC-768 optical signals and four ODU2 electrical signals through cross-connection.
6.10.3 Functions and Features
The main function and feature supported by the TSXL is cross-connection at the electrical layer.
6.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The TSXL consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and
communication module, and power supply module.
6.10.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TSXL front panel.
6.10.6 Valid Slots
The TSXL occupies two slots. The valid slots for the TSXL are IU2-IU8 and IU12-IU16.
6.10.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
6.10.8 Specifications of the TSXL
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
6.10.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the TSXL board is available, that is TN11.
6.10.2 Application
The TSXL is a type of tributary board. The TSXL realizes the conversion between one STM-256/
OC-768 optical signals and four ODU2 electrical signals through cross-connection.
For the position of the TSXL in the WDM system, see Figure 6-71.
Figure 6-71 Position of the TSXL in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
NS2
G.694.1 G.694.1
STM-256
TSXL TSXL
NS2
NS2
NS2
OC-768
Client side WDM side Client side WDM side
MUX
DMUX
4 4
4 4
4
4
STM-256
OC-768
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-139
6.10.3 Functions and Features
The main function and feature supported by the TSXL is cross-connection at the electrical layer.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-65.
Table 6-65 Functions and features of the TSXL
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Maps one STM-256/OC-768 on the client side into four ODU2 signals.
l Realizes the transparent transmission of 40 Gbit/s services in a 10 Gbit/
s WDM network.
l Realizes the transparent transmission of client-side SDH/SONET
service clock and alarms.
Client-side
service type
STM-256, OC-768
Cross-connect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of four ODU2 signals between the TSXL
and the cross-connect board.
OTN function l Supports inversely multiplexing 40 Gbit/s signals into four channels
of ODU2 services.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring
to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.
709.
l Supports PM functions for ODU2.
ALS function The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically
shut down if no signals are received.
Protection
scheme
l Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the ODUk SNCP.
l Supports the tributary SNCP protection.
Loopback WDM side Not supported
Client side Inloop Supported
OutlooP Supported

6.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The TSXL consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and
communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 6-72 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TSXL.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-140 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 6-72 Functional modules and signal flow of the TSXL
SCC
Client-side
optical
module
RX
TX
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Fuse
Required
voltage
Signal processing module
OTN
processing
module
ODU2
4
O/E
E/O
Client side
Backplane(service cross-connection)
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Signal Flow
The client side of the TSXL board can access the following optical signals:
l STM-256 optical signals
l OC-768 optical signals
In the signal flow of the TSXL board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TSXL to the backplane,
and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives one 40 Gbit/s service signal through the RX
interface, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the electrical signals is sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN
framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU2 signals to the backplane for
grooming.
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives ODU2 electrical signals sent from the cross-
connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU2
virtual concatenation, demapping processing. Then, the module sends out one channel of
40 Gbit/s service signal to the client-side optical module.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-141
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of one 40 Gbit/s service signal,
and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signal through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of one channel of STM-256/OC-768
optical signal.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion of one channel of STM-256/
OC-768 optical signal.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module and OTN
processing module.
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the
ODU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
SONET performance monitoring function.
OTN processing module
Realizes the framing of ODU2 signals.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
6.10.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TSXL front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 6-73 shows the TSXL front panel.
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-142 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 6-73 TSXL front panel
TSXL
TSXL
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
R
X
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the TSXL front panel.Table 6-66 lists the type and function
of each interface.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-143
Table 6-66 Types and functions of the TSXL interfaces
Interface Type Function
RX LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.
TX LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
6.10.6 Valid Slots
The TSXL occupies two slots. The valid slots for the TSXL are IU2-IU8 and IU12-IU16.
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack,
so the slot number of the TSXL board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the
two occupied slots.
For example, if the TSXL occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the TSXL displayed
on the NM is IU3.
6.10.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 6-67.
Table 6-67 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TSXL displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
RX/TX 3

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status
Optical Interface Loopback
Service Type
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-144 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Port Description
Figure 6-74 shows the NM ports of the TSXL board. Table 6-68 describes the meaning of each
port.
Figure 6-74 Port diagram of the TSXL
3(RX1/TX1)-1
Client side
151(imp/imp)-1
151(imp/imp)-2
151(imp/imp)-3
151(imp/imp)-4
Fixed
cross-connection
Service
proccessing module
Table 6-68 Meaning of NM port of the TSXL
Port Name Meaning
RX/TX Corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces.
imp The internal mapping port. The optical channels are numbered
1, 2, 3 and 4.

If the TSXL board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the cross-
connections of ODU2 level between the imp port and the ODU2LP port of the TN12NS2/
TN11ND2 boards, realizing the cross-connect grooming of ODU2 services, as shown in
Figure 6-75.
Figure 6-75 Cross-connection diagram of the TSXL
Client side
Fixed cross-connection
WDM side
Fixed cross-connection
ND2 board
TSXL board
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
151(imp/imp)-1
151(imp/imp)-2
151(imp/imp)-3
151(imp/imp)-4
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-145
6.10.8 Specifications of the TSXL
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side
Table 6-69 Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side
Parameters Unit Specifications
Optical Interface type - 40G Transponder
Line code format - NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength range nm 1530 to 1565
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 3
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Maximum -20 dB spectrum
width
nm 1
Minimum side-mode
suppression ratio (SMSR)
dB 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 40
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 1290 to 1570
Receiver sensitivity dBm -6
Receiver overload dBm 3
Maximum reflectance dB -27

Mechanical Specifications
The TSXL consists of three main boards: board A, board B and board C. The mechanical
dimension of each main board is provided below:
l Board A: 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Board B: 245.1 mm (H) x 55 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 2.2 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Board C: 59 mm (H) x 48.3 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (2.3 in. (H) x 1.9 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
6-146 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 101.6 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 4.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 5.5 lb. (2.5 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 90.5 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 95.4 W
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-147
7 Cross-connect Unit
About This Chapter
7.1 XCS
XCS: cross-connect and clock unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 7 Cross-connect Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-1
7.1 XCS
XCS: cross-connect and clock unit
7.1.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the XCS board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference
between the two versions lies in the cross-connect and grooming capacity.
7.1.2 Application
The XCS is a type of cross-connect unit. The XCS realizes the cross-connection of services.
7.1.3 Functions and Features
The main function and feature of the XCS is the cross-connection at the electrical layer.
7.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The XCS board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
power supply module.
7.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the XCS front panel.
7.1.6 Valid Slots
The XCS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the XCS are IU9 and IU10.
7.1.7 Specifications of the XCS
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
7.1.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the XCS board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference
between the two versions lies in the cross-connect and grooming capacity.
Table 7-1 lists the version description of the XCS.
Table 7-1 Version description of the XCS
Item Description
Functional
version
Two functional versions of the XCS board are available: TN11 and TN12.
Similarity The TN12XCS works in the same way as the TN11XCS.
Difference TN11XCS: Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of
320 Gbit/s for ODU1 signals. Supports a maximum cross-connect and
grooming capacity of 160 Gbit/s for GE services.
TN12XCS: Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of
360 Gbit/s for ODU1 signals. Supports a maximum cross-connect and
grooming capacity of 180 Gbit/s for GE services.
Replacement The TN12XCS board can replace the TN11XCS board, but after the
replacement, the SCC software need be upgraded.
The TN11XCS board, however, cannot replace the TN12XCS board.

7 Cross-connect Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
7-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
7.1.2 Application
The XCS is a type of cross-connect unit. The XCS realizes the cross-connection of services.
For the position of the XCS in the WDM system, see Figure 7-1.
Figure 7-1 Position of the XCS in the WDM system
OTU
OA
OA
OTU
M40
D40
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
D40
M40
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
1
1
40
1
40
1
40
XCS
XCS
XCS
40
XCS
7.1.3 Functions and Features
The main function and feature of the XCS is the cross-connection at the electrical layer.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 7-2.
Table 7-2 Functions and features of the XCS
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Grooms services.
Cross-connect
function
l Supports the integrated grooming of ODU1 signals or GE services.
l Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 320
Gbit/s for ODU1 signals. Supports a maximum cross-connect and
grooming capacity of 160 Gbit/s for GE services.
TN11XCS:
l Supports the integrated grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2
signals or GE services or OTU1 services.
l Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 320
Gbit/s for ODU1 signals or ODU2 signals. Supports a maximum
cross-connect and grooming capacity of 160 Gbit/s for GE
services.
TN12XCS:
l Supports the integrated grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2
signals or GE services or OTU1 services.
l Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 360
Gbit/s for ODU1 signals. Supports a maximum cross-connect and
grooming capacity of 180 Gbit/s for GE services.
Active/standby
backup
Provides the 1+1 hot backup.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 7 Cross-connect Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-3
Function and
Feature
Description
Protection scheme Supports cross-connect board 1+1 protection.
Switching mode Supports the manual switching and auto switching.
Supports the non-revertive switching.

7.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The XCS board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
power supply module.
Figure 7-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCS.
Figure 7-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCS
SCC
Cross-connect module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane(service cross-connection)
Module Function
l Cross-connect module
Receives the data of each service board from the backplane. It performs the grooming of
ODU1 signals or ODU2 signals at the electrical layer, then sends the signals to each service
board and implements the cross-connection.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
7 Cross-connect Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
7-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
7.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the XCS front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 7-3 shows the XCS front panel.
Figure 7-3 XCS front panel
XCS
XCS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 7 Cross-connect Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-5
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
The XCS does not provide external interfaces.
7.1.6 Valid Slots
The XCS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the XCS are IU9 and IU10.
7.1.7 Specifications of the XCS
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
Weight
l TN11XCS: 2.20 lb (1.0 kg)
l TN12XCS: 2.65 lb (1.2 kg)
Power Consumption
Board The maximum power
consumption at 25
(77) (W)
The maximum power
consumption at 55
(131) (W)
TN11XCS 20.0 22.0
TN12XCS 25.0 27.5

7 Cross-connect Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
7-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
About This Chapter
8.1 M40
M40: 40-channel multiplexing unit
8.2 M40V
M40V: 40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA
8.3 D40
D40: 40-channel demultiplexing unit
8.4 D40V
D40V: 40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA
8.5 FIU
FIU: fiber interface unit
8.6 ITL
ITL: interleaver board
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-1
8.1 M40
M40: 40-channel multiplexing unit
8.1.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the M40 board is available, that is TN11.
8.1.2 Application
The M40 is a type of optical multiplexer unit. The M40 realizes the multiplexing of a maximum
of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals into one fiber.
8.1.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the M40 are multiplexing, online optical
performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring.
8.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The M40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
8.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the M40 front panel.
8.1.6 Valid Slots
The M40 occupies three slots. The valid slots for the M40 are IU1-IU15 in the subrack.
8.1.7 Characteristic Code for the M40
The characteristic code for the M40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other
indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd
or even wavelengths.
8.1.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
8.1.9 Specifications of the M40
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
8.1.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the M40 board is available, that is TN11.
Type
Table 8-1 lists the types of the TN11M40.
Table 8-1 Type description of the M40
Unit Type Description
TN11M4
0
01 Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.
02 Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
8.1.2 Application
The M40 is a type of optical multiplexer unit. The M40 realizes the multiplexing of a maximum
of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals into one fiber.
For the position of the M40 in the WDM system, see Figure 8-1.
Figure 8-1 Position of the M40 in the WDM system
OTU
OA
OA
OTU
M40
D40
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
D40
M40
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
1
40
1
40
1
40
1
40
8.1.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the M40 are multiplexing, online optical
performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 8-2.
Table 8-2 Functions and features of the M40
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels into one fiber.
l Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.
l Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical
signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer
unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the
services.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to
report the alarms and performance events of the board.

8.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The M40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 8-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the M40.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-3
Figure 8-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40
OUT
M01
Detection and temperature control module
Temperature
control
Temperature
detection
MON
PIN
Optical module
M02
M40
Multiplexer
SCC
Splitter
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(Controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
Each of the M01-M40 optical interfaces receives one channel of single-wavelength optical
signals, and sends the signals to the multiplexer. The multiplexer multiplexes the 40 channels
of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals, and then
output them through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module
Multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of
multiplexed optical signals.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to
the MON interface for detection.
l Detection and temperature control module
Monitors and controls in real time the multiplexer operating temperature.
Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
8.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the M40 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 8-3 shows the M40 front panel.
Figure 8-3 M40 front panel
M40
M40
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
M01
M02
M03
M04
M05
M06
M07
M08
M09
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26
M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
M39
M40
196.00
195.90
195.80
195.70
195.60
195.50
195.40
195.30
195.20
195.10
195.00
194.90
194.80
194.70
194.60
194.50
194.20
194.10
194.40
194.30
194.00
193.90
193.80
193.70
193.60
193.50
193.20
193.10
193.40
193.30
193.00
192.90
192.80
192.70
192.60
192.50
192.20
192.10
192.40
192.30
M
1
5
M
1
6
M
1
7
M
1
8
M
1
9
M
2
0
M
2
1
M
2
2
M
2
3
M
2
4
M
1
3
M
2
5
M
2
6
M
1
4
M
0
1
M
0
2
M
0
3
M
0
4
M
0
5
M
0
6
M
0
7
M
0
8
M
0
9
M
1
0
M
O
N
M
1
1
M
1
2
O
U
T
M
2
9
M
3
0
M
3
1
M
3
2
M
3
3
M
3
4
M
3
5
M
3
6
M
3
7
M
3
8
M
2
8
M
3
9
M
4
0
M
2
7
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-5
NOTE
There is a table indicating the mapping relationship between interfaces and frequencies pasted onto the
front panel.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the M40 front panel. Table 8-3 lists the type and function of
each interface.
Table 8-3 Types and functions of the M40 interfaces
Interface Type Function
M01-M40 LC Connected to the "OUT" interface of the OTUs, receive
the signals to be multiplexed.
OUT LC Connected to an optical amplifying board or ITL,
transmits multiplexed signals.
MON LC Connected to the input interface of the MCA4 or
MCA8, accomplishes online monitoring of optical
spectrum.
The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite
signal at the OUT port (10dB lower than the actual
signal power).

There are 40 output interfaces on the M40 front panel. Table 8-4 and Table 8-5 show the
mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the M40 board.
Table 8-4 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the
TN11M4001 board (C_EVEN)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01 196.00 1529.55 M21 194.00 1545.32
M02 195.90 1530.33 M22 193.90 1546.12
M03 195.80 1531.12 M23 193.80 1546.92
M04 195.70 1531.90 M24 193.70 1547.72
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M05 195.60 1532.68 M25 193.60 1548.51
M06 195.50 1533.47 M26 193.50 1549.32
M07 195.40 1534.25 M27 193.40 1550.12
M08 195.30 1535.04 M28 193.30 1550.92
M09 195.20 1535.82 M29 193.20 1551.72
M10 195.10 1536.61 M30 193.10 1552.52
M11 195.00 1537.40 M31 193.00 1553.33
M12 194.90 1538.19 M32 192.90 1554.13
M13 194.80 1538.98 M33 192.80 1554.94
M14 194.70 1539.77 M34 192.70 1555.75
M15 194.60 1540.56 M35 192.60 1556.55
M16 194.50 1541.35 M36 192.50 1557.36
M17 194.40 1542.14 M37 192.40 1558.17
M18 194.30 1542.94 M38 192.30 1558.98
M19 194.20 1543.73 M39 192.20 1559.79
M20 194.10 1544.53 M40 192.10 1560.61

Table 8-5 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the
TN11M4002 board (C_ODD)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01 196.05 1529.16 M21 194.05 1544.92
M02 195.95 1529.94 M22 193.95 1545.72
M03 195.85 1530.72 M23 193.85 1546.52
M04 195.75 1531.51 M24 193.75 1547.32
M05 195.65 1532.29 M25 193.65 1548.11
M06 195.55 1533.07 M26 193.55 1548.91
M07 195.45 1533.86 M27 193.45 1549.72
M08 195.35 1534.64 M28 193.35 1550.52
M09 195.25 1535.43 M29 193.25 1551.32
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-7
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M10 195.15 1536.22 M30 193.15 1552.12
M11 195.05 1537.00 M31 193.05 1552.93
M12 194.95 1537.79 M32 192.95 1553.73
M13 194.85 1538.58 M33 192.85 1554.54
M14 194.75 1539.37 M34 192.75 1555.34
M15 194.65 1540.16 M35 192.65 1556.15
M16 194.55 1540.95 M36 192.55 1556.96
M17 194.45 1541.75 M37 192.45 1557.77
M18 194.35 1542.54 M38 192.35 1558.58
M19 194.25 1543.33 M39 192.25 1559.39
M20 194.15 1544.13 M40 192.15 1560.20

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
8.1.6 Valid Slots
The M40 occupies three slots. The valid slots for the M40 are IU1-IU15 in the subrack.
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack,
so the slot number of the M40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the
three occupied slots.
For example, if the M40 occupies slots IU1, IU2, and IU3, the slot number of the M40 displayed
on the NM is IU1.
8.1.7 Characteristic Code for the M40
The characteristic code for the M40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other
indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd
or even wavelengths.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 8-6.
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 8-6 Characteristic code for the M40
Code Meaning Description
The first character Band Indicates the band of the
optical signals processed by
the board. The value C
represents C band; the value L
represents L band.
The second character Odd/Even wavelengths Indicates whether the
wavelengths that bear signals
are odd or even wavelengths.
The value E represents even
wavelengths; the value O
represents odd wavelengths.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40 is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
8.1.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 8-7.
Table 8-7 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
OUT 1
M01-M40 2-41
MON 42

Configuration Parameters
Configure Band
Configure Working Band Parity
Actual Band
Actual Working Band Parity
8.1.9 Specifications of the M40
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-9
Optical Specifications
Table 8-8 lists the optical specifications of the M40.
Table 8-8 Optical specifications of the M40
Item Unit Value
Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100
Insertion loss dB 6.5
Optical return loss dB >40
Operating wavelength range nm 1529.16-1560.61
Adjacent channel isolation dB >22
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB >25
Polarization dependence loss dB 0.5
Temperature characteristics nm/ 0.002
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB 3

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 4.8 lb. (2.2 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 20.0 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 22.0 W
8.2 M40V
M40V: 40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA
8.2.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the M40V board is available, that is TN11.
8.2.2 Application
The M40V is a type of optical multiplexer unit. The M40V realizes the multiplexing of a
maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals into one fiber and adjusts
the input optical power of each channel.
8.2.3 Functions and Features
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
The main functions and features supported by the M40V are multiplexing, online optical
performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring and optical power
adjustment.
8.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The M40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module,
control and communication module, and power supply module.
8.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the M40V front panel.
8.2.6 Valid Slots
The M40V occupies three slots. The valid slots for the M40V are IU1-IU15 in the subrack.
8.2.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V
The characteristic code for the M40V consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The
other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are
odd or even wavelengths.
8.2.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
8.2.9 Specifications of the M40V
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
8.2.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the M40V board is available, that is TN11.
Type
Table 8-9 lists the types of the TN11M40V.
Table 8-9 Type description of the M40V
Unit Type Description
TN11M4
0V
01 Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.
02 Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.

8.2.2 Application
The M40V is a type of optical multiplexer unit. The M40V realizes the multiplexing of a
maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals into one fiber and adjusts
the input optical power of each channel.
For the position of the M40V in the WDM system, see Figure 8-4.
Figure 8-4 Position of the M40V in the WDM system
OTU
OA
OA
OTU
M40V
D40
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
D40
M40V
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
1
40
1
40
1
40
1
40
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-11
8.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the M40V are multiplexing, online optical
performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring and optical power
adjustment.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 8-10.
Table 8-10 Functions and features of the M40V
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Multiplexes a maximum of 40 signals into one fiber and adjusts the
input optical power of each channel.
l Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.
l Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical
signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer
unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the
services.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to
report the alarms and performance events of the board.
Optical power
adjustment
Adjusts the optical power of each signal before multiplexing.

8.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The M40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module,
control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 8-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the M40V.
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 8-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40V
OUT
M01
Temperature
control
Temperature
detection
MON
PIN
Optical module
M02
M40
Multiplexer
Splitter
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
control
Detection and temperature control module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(Controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
Each of the M01-M40 optical interfaces receives one channel of single-wavelength optical
signals, and sends the signals to the multiplexer after the optical power adjustment by VOA. The
multiplexer multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel
of multiplexed optical signals, and then output them through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module
Adjusts the optical power of the single-wavelength optical signals before multiplexing.
Multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of
multiplexed optical signals.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to
the MON interface for detection.
l Detection and temperature control module
Monitors and controls in real time the multiplexer operating temperature.
Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-13
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
8.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the M40V front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 8-6 shows the M40V front panel.
Figure 8-6 M40V front panel
M40V
M40V
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
M01
M02
M03
M04
M05
M06
M07
M08
M09
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26
M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
M39
M40
196.00
195.90
195.80
195.70
195.60
195.50
195.40
195.30
195.20
195.10
195.00
194.90
194.80
194.70
194.60
194.50
194.20
194.10
194.40
194.30
194.00
193.90
193.80
193.70
193.60
193.50
193.20
193.10
193.40
193.30
193.00
192.90
192.80
192.70
192.60
192.50
192.20
192.10
192.40
192.30
M
1
5
M
1
6
M
1
7
M
1
8
M
1
9
M
2
0
M
2
1
M
2
2
M
2
3
M
2
4
M
1
3
M
2
5
M
2
6
M
1
4
M
0
1
M
0
2
M
0
3
M
0
4
M
0
5
M
0
6
M
0
7
M
0
8
M
0
9
M
1
0
M
O
N
M
1
1
M
1
2
O
U
T
M
2
9
M
3
0
M
3
1
M
3
2
M
3
3
M
3
4
M
3
5
M
3
6
M
3
7
M
3
8
M
2
8
M
3
9
M
4
0
M
2
7
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
NOTE
There is a table indicating the mapping relationship between interfaces and frequencies pasted onto the
front panel.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the M40V front panel.Table 8-11 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 8-11 Types and functions of the M40V interfaces
Interface Type Function
M01-M40 LC Connected to the "OUT" interface of the OTUs,
receives the signals to be multiplexed.
OUT LC Connected to an optical amplifier or ITL, transmits the
multiplexed signals.
MON LC Connected to the input interface of the MCA4 or
MCA8, accomplishes online monitoring of optical
spectrum.
The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite
signal at the OUT port (10dB lower than the actual
signal power).

There are 40 output interfaces on the M40V front panel. Table 8-12 and Table 8-13 show the
mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the M40V board.
Table 8-12 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the M40V
board (even)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01 196.00 1529.55 M21 194.00 1545.32
M02 195.90 1530.33 M22 193.90 1546.12
M03 195.80 1531.12 M23 193.80 1546.92
M04 195.70 1531.90 M24 193.70 1547.72
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-15
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M05 195.60 1532.68 M25 193.60 1548.51
M06 195.50 1533.47 M26 193.50 1549.32
M07 195.40 1534.25 M27 193.40 1550.12
M08 195.30 1535.04 M28 193.30 1550.92
M09 195.20 1535.82 M29 193.20 1551.72
M10 195.10 1536.61 M30 193.10 1552.52
M11 195.00 1537.40 M31 193.00 1553.33
M12 194.90 1538.19 M32 192.90 1554.13
M13 194.80 1538.98 M33 192.80 1554.94
M14 194.70 1539.77 M34 192.70 1555.75
M15 194.60 1540.56 M35 192.60 1556.55
M16 194.50 1541.35 M36 192.50 1557.36
M17 194.40 1542.14 M37 192.40 1558.17
M18 194.30 1542.94 M38 192.30 1558.98
M19 194.20 1543.73 M39 192.20 1559.79
M20 194.10 1544.53 M40 192.10 1560.61

Table 8-13 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the M40V
board (odd)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01 196.05 1529.16 M21 194.05 1544.92
M02 195.95 1529.94 M22 193.95 1545.72
M03 195.85 1530.72 M23 193.85 1546.52
M04 195.75 1531.51 M24 193.75 1547.32
M05 195.65 1532.29 M25 193.65 1548.11
M06 195.55 1533.07 M26 193.55 1548.91
M07 195.45 1533.86 M27 193.45 1549.72
M08 195.35 1534.64 M28 193.35 1550.52
M09 195.25 1535.43 M29 193.25 1551.32
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M10 195.15 1536.22 M30 193.15 1552.12
M11 195.05 1537.00 M31 193.05 1552.93
M12 194.95 1537.79 M32 192.95 1553.73
M13 194.85 1538.58 M33 192.85 1554.54
M14 194.75 1539.37 M34 192.75 1555.34
M15 194.65 1540.16 M35 192.65 1556.15
M16 194.55 1540.95 M36 192.55 1556.96
M17 194.45 1541.75 M37 192.45 1557.77
M18 194.35 1542.54 M38 192.35 1558.58
M19 194.25 1543.33 M39 192.25 1559.39
M20 194.15 1544.13 M40 192.15 1560.20

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
8.2.6 Valid Slots
The M40V occupies three slots. The valid slots for the M40V are IU1-IU15 in the subrack.
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack,
so the slot number of the M40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the
three occupied slots.
For example, if the M40V occupies slots IU1, IU2, and IU3, the slot number of the M40V
displayed on the NM is IU1.
8.2.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V
The characteristic code for the M40V consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The
other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are
odd or even wavelengths.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 8-14.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-17
Table 8-14 Characteristic code for the M40V
Code Meaning Description
The first character Band Indicates the band of the
optical signals processed by
the board. The value C
represents C band; the value L
represents L band.
The second character Odd/Even wavelengths Indicates whether the
wavelengths that bear signals
are odd or even wavelengths.
The value E represents even
wavelengths; the value O
represents odd wavelengths.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40V is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
8.2.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 8-15.
Table 8-15 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40V displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
OUT 1
M01-M40 2-41
MON 42

Configuration Parameters
Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Configure Band
Configure Working Band Parity
Actual Band
Actual Working Band Parity
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
8.2.9 Specifications of the M40V
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 8-16 lists the optical specifications of the M40V.
Table 8-16 Optical specifications of the M40V
Item Unit Value
Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100
Insertion loss dB
8
a
Optical return loss dB >40
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561
Adjacent channel isolation dB >22
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB >25
Attenuation range dB 0-15
Loss accuracy dB 0.5 ( 0 to 10 )
1 ( >10dB )
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.5
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB 3
NOTE
a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 5.1 lb. (2.3 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 38.5 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 42.3 W
8.3 D40
D40: 40-channel demultiplexing unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-19
8.3.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the D40 board is available, that is TN11.
8.3.2 Application
The D40 is a type of optical demultiplexer unit. The D40 realizes the demultiplexing of one
optical signal into a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
8.3.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the D40 are demultiplexing, online optical
performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring.
8.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The D40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
8.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the D40 front panel.
8.3.6 Valid Slots
The D40 occupies three slots. The valid slots for the D40 are IU1-IU15 in the subrack.
8.3.7 Characteristic Code for the D40
The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other
indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd
or even wavelengths.
8.3.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
8.3.9 Specifications of the D40
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight and power consumption.
8.3.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the D40 board is available, that is TN11.
Type
Table 8-17 lists the types of the TN11D40.
Table 8-17 Type description of the D40
Unit Type Description
TN11D40 01 Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.
02 Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.

8.3.2 Application
The D40 is a type of optical demultiplexer unit. The D40 realizes the demultiplexing of one
optical signal into a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
For the position of the D40 in the WDM system, see Figure 8-7.
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 8-7 Position of the D40 in the WDM system
OTU
OA
OA
OTU
M40
D40
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
D40
M40
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
1
40
1
40
1
40
1
40
8.3.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the D40 are demultiplexing, online optical
performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 8-18.
Table 8-18 Functions and features of the D40
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Demultiplexes main path signal to a maximum of 40 channels of
service.
l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.
l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical
signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer
unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the
services.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to
report the alarms and performance events of the board.

8.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The D40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 8-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the D40.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-21
Figure 8-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40
Detection and temperature control module
SCC
IN
D01
Temperature
control
Temperature
detection
MON
PIN
Optical module
D02
D40
Demultiplexer
Splitter
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Signal Flow
The IN optical interface receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals and sends the signals
to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical
signals into 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals, and then outputs them through the
D01-D40 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Optical module
Demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of single-
wavelength optical signals.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to
the MON interface for detection.
l Detection and temperature control module
Monitors and controls in real time the demultiplexer operating temperature.
Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
8.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the D40 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 8-9 shows the D40 front panel.
Figure 8-9 D40 front panel
D40
D40
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
D01
D02
D03
D04
D05
D06
D07
D08
D09
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
D25
D26
D27
D28
D29
D30
D31
D32
D33
D34
D35
D36
D37
D38
D39
D40
196.00
195.90
195.80
195.70
195.60
195.50
195.40
195.30
195.20
195.10
195.00
194.90
194.80
194.70
194.60
194.50
194.20
194.10
194.40
194.30
194.00
193.90
193.80
193.70
193.60
193.50
193.20
193.10
193.40
193.30
193.00
192.90
192.80
192.70
192.60
192.50
192.20
192.10
192.40
192.30
D
1
5
D
1
6
D
1
7
D
1
8
D
1
9
D
2
0
D
2
1
D
2
2
D
2
3
D
2
4
D
1
3
D
2
5
D
2
6
D
1
4
D
0
1
D
0
2
D
0
3
D
0
4
D
0
5
D
0
6
D
0
7
D
0
8
D
0
9
D
1
0
M
O
N
D
1
1
D
1
2
I
N
D
2
9
D
3
0
D
3
1
D
3
2
D
3
3
D
3
4
D
3
5
D
3
6
D
3
7
D
3
8
D
2
8
D
3
9
D
4
0
D
2
7
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-23
NOTE
There is a table indicating the mapping relationship between interfaces and frequencies pasted onto the
front panel.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the D40 front panel. Table 8-19 lists the type and function of
each interface.
Table 8-19 Types and functions of the D40 interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Connected to an optical amplifier or ITL, receives the
signals to be demultiplexed.
D01-D40 LC Transmit demultiplexed signals to the connected "IN"
interface of the OTUs.
MON LC Connected to the input interface of the MCA4 or
MCA8, accomplishes online monitoring of optical
spectrum.
The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite
signal at the IN port (10dB lower than the actual signal
power).

There are 40 output interfaces on the D40 front panel. Table 8-20, Table 8-21 show the mapping
between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the D40 board.
Table 8-20 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the
TN11D4001 board (C_EVEN)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D01 196.00 1529.55 D21 194.00 1545.32
D02 195.90 1530.33 D22 193.90 1546.12
D03 195.80 1531.12 D23 193.80 1546.92
D04 195.70 1531.90 D24 193.70 1547.72
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D05 195.60 1532.68 D25 193.60 1548.51
D06 195.50 1533.47 D26 193.50 1549.32
D07 195.40 1534.25 D27 193.40 1550.12
D08 195.30 1535.04 D28 193.30 1550.92
D09 195.20 1535.82 D29 193.20 1551.72
D10 195.10 1536.61 D30 193.10 1552.52
D11 195.00 1537.40 D31 193.00 1553.33
D12 194.90 1538.19 D32 192.90 1554.13
D13 194.80 1538.98 D33 192.80 1554.94
D14 194.70 1539.77 D34 192.70 1555.75
D15 194.60 1540.56 D35 192.60 1556.55
D16 194.50 1541.35 D36 192.50 1557.36
D17 194.40 1542.14 D37 192.40 1558.17
D18 194.30 1542.94 D38 192.30 1558.98
D19 194.20 1543.73 D39 192.20 1559.79
D20 194.10 1544.53 D40 192.10 1560.61

Table 8-21 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the
TN11D4002 board (C_ODD)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D01 196.05 1529.16 D21 194.05 1544.92
D02 195.95 1529.94 D22 193.95 1545.72
D03 195.85 1530.72 D23 193.85 1546.52
D04 195.75 1531.51 D24 193.75 1547.32
D05 195.65 1532.29 D25 193.65 1548.11
D06 195.55 1533.07 D26 193.55 1548.91
D07 195.45 1533.86 D27 193.45 1549.72
D08 195.35 1534.64 D28 193.35 1550.52
D09 195.25 1535.43 D29 193.25 1551.32
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-25
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D10 195.15 1536.22 D30 193.15 1552.12
D11 195.05 1537.00 D31 193.05 1552.93
D12 194.95 1537.79 D32 192.95 1553.73
D13 194.85 1538.58 D33 192.85 1554.54
D14 194.75 1539.37 D34 192.75 1555.34
D15 194.65 1540.16 D35 192.65 1556.15
D16 194.55 1540.95 D36 192.55 1556.96
D17 194.45 1541.75 D37 192.45 1557.77
D18 194.35 1542.54 D38 192.35 1558.58
D19 194.25 1543.33 D39 192.25 1559.39
D20 194.15 1544.13 D40 192.15 1560.20

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
8.3.6 Valid Slots
The D40 occupies three slots. The valid slots for the D40 are IU1-IU15 in the subrack.
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack,
so the slot number of the D40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the
three occupied slots.
For example, if the D40 occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the D40 displayed
on the NM is IU1.
8.3.7 Characteristic Code for the D40
The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other
indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd
or even wavelengths.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 8-22.
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 8-22 Characteristic code for the D40
Code Meaning Description
The first character Band Indicates the band of the
optical signals processed by
the board. The value C
represents C band; the value L
represents L band.
The second character Odd/Even wavelengths Indicates whether the
wavelengths that bear signals
are odd or even wavelengths.
The value E represents even
wavelengths; the value O
represents odd wavelengths.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40 is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 6800 products now support only even wavelengths in C band.
8.3.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 8-23.
Table 8-23 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN 1
D01-D40 2-41
MON 42

Configuration Parameters
Configure Band
Configure Working Band Parity
Actual Band
Actual Working Band Parity
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-27
8.3.9 Specifications of the D40
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 8-24 lists the optical specifications of the D40.
Table 8-24 Optical specifications of the D40
Item Unit Value
Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100
Insertion loss dB 6.5
Optical return loss dB >40
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561
Adjacent channel isolation dB >25
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB >30
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.5
Temperature characteristics nm/ <0.002
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB 3
-0.5 dB bandwidth nm >0.2
-1 dB bandwidth nm >0.4
-20 dB bandwidth nm <1.4

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 4.8 lb. (2.2 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 20.0 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 22.0 W
8.4 D40V
D40V: 40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA
8.4.1 Version Description
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Only one functional version of the D40V board is available, that is TN11.
8.4.2 Application
The D40V is a type of optical demultiplexer unit. The D40V realizes the demultiplexing of one
signal into a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals and adjusts the
output optical power of each channel.
8.4.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the D40V are demultiplexing, online optical
performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring and optical power
adjustment.
8.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The D40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module,
control and communication module, and power supply module.
8.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the D40V front panel.
8.4.6 Valid Slots
The D40V occupies three slots. The valid slots for the D40V are IU1-IU15 in the subrack.
8.4.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V
The characteristic code for the D40V consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The
other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are
odd or even wavelengths.
8.4.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
8.4.9 Specifications of the D40V
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
8.4.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the D40V board is available, that is TN11.
Type
Table 8-25 lists the types of the TN11D40V.
Table 8-25 Type description of the D40V
Unit Type Description
TN11D40V 01 Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.
02 Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.

8.4.2 Application
The D40V is a type of optical demultiplexer unit. The D40V realizes the demultiplexing of one
signal into a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals and adjusts the
output optical power of each channel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-29
For the position of the D40V in the WDM system, see Figure 8-10.
Figure 8-10 Position of the D40V in the WDM system
OTU
OA
OA
OTU
M40
D40V
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
D40V
M40
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
1
40
1
40
1
40
1
40
8.4.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the D40V are demultiplexing, online optical
performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring and optical power
adjustment.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 8-26.
Table 8-26 Functions and features of the D40V
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Demultiplexes one signal into a maximum of 40 signals and adjusts
the input optical power of each channel.
l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.
l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical
signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer
unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the
services.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to
report the alarms and performance events of the board.
Optical power
adjustment
Adjusts the optical power of each signal after demultiplexing.

8.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The D40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module,
control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 8-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the D40V.
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 8-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40V
Detection and temperature control module
SCC
IN
D01
Temperature
control
Temperature
detection
MON
PIN
Optical module
D02
D40
Demultiplexer
Splitter
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
control
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
The IN optical interface receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals and sends the signals
to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical
signals into 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals, and then outputs them through the
D01-D40 optical interfaces after the optical power adjustment by VOA.
Module Function
l Optical module
Demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of single-
wavelength optical signals.
Adjusts the optical power of the single-wavelength optical signals after demultiplexing.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to
the MON interface for detection.
l Detection and temperature control module
Monitors and controls in real time the demultiplexer operating temperature.
Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-31
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
8.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the D40V front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 8-12 shows the D40V front panel.
Figure 8-12 D40V front panel
D40V
D40V
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
D01
D02
D03
D04
D05
D06
D07
D08
D09
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
D25
D26
D27
D28
D29
D30
D31
D32
D33
D34
D35
D36
D37
D38
D39
D40
196.00
195.90
195.80
195.70
195.60
195.50
195.40
195.30
195.20
195.10
195.00
194.90
194.80
194.70
194.60
194.50
194.20
194.10
194.40
194.30
194.00
193.90
193.80
193.70
193.60
193.50
193.20
193.10
193.40
193.30
193.00
192.90
192.80
192.70
192.60
192.50
192.20
192.10
192.40
192.30
D
1
5
D
1
6
D
1
7
D
1
8
D
1
9
D
2
0
D
2
1
D
2
2
D
2
3
D
2
4
D
1
3
D
2
5
D
2
6
D
1
4
D
0
1
D
0
2
D
0
3
D
0
4
D
0
5
D
0
6
D
0
7
D
0
8
D
0
9
D
1
0
M
O
N
D
1
1
D
1
2
I
N
D
2
9
D
3
0
D
3
1
D
3
2
D
3
3
D
3
4
D
3
5
D
3
6
D
3
7
D
3
8
D
2
8
D
3
9
D
4
0
D
2
7
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
NOTE
There is a table indicating the mapping relationship between interfaces and frequencies pasted onto the
front panel.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the D40V front panel. Table 8-27 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 8-27 Types and functions of the D40V interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Connected to an optical amplifier or ITL, receives the
signals to be demultiplexed.
D01-D40 LC Connected to the "IN" interface of the OTUs, transmit
demultiplexed signals.
MON LC Connected to the input interface of the MCA4 or
MCA8, accomplishes online monitoring of optical
spectrum.
The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite
signal at the IN port (10dB lower than the actual signal
power).

There are 40 output interfaces on the D40V front panel. Table 8-28, Table 8-29 show the
mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D40V board.
Table 8-28 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the
TN11D40V01 board (C_EVEN)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D01 196.00 1529.55 D21 194.00 1545.32
D02 195.90 1530.33 D22 193.90 1546.12
D03 195.80 1531.12 D23 193.80 1546.92
D04 195.70 1531.90 D24 193.70 1547.72
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-33
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D05 195.60 1532.68 D25 193.60 1548.51
D06 195.50 1533.47 D26 193.50 1549.32
D07 195.40 1534.25 D27 193.40 1550.12
D08 195.30 1535.04 D28 193.30 1550.92
D09 195.20 1535.82 D29 193.20 1551.72
D10 195.10 1536.61 D30 193.10 1552.52
D11 195.00 1537.40 D31 193.00 1553.33
D12 194.90 1538.19 D32 192.90 1554.13
D13 194.80 1538.98 D33 192.80 1554.94
D14 194.70 1539.77 D34 192.70 1555.75
D15 194.60 1540.56 D35 192.60 1556.55
D16 194.50 1541.35 D36 192.50 1557.36
D17 194.40 1542.14 D37 192.40 1558.17
D18 194.30 1542.94 D38 192.30 1558.98
D19 194.20 1543.73 D39 192.20 1559.79
D20 194.10 1544.53 D40 192.10 1560.61

Table 8-29 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the
TN11D40V02 board (C_ODD)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D01 196.05 1529.16 D21 194.05 1544.92
D02 195.95 1529.94 D22 193.95 1545.72
D03 195.85 1530.72 D23 193.85 1546.52
D04 195.75 1531.51 D24 193.75 1547.32
D05 195.65 1532.29 D25 193.65 1548.11
D06 195.55 1533.07 D26 193.55 1548.91
D07 195.45 1533.86 D27 193.45 1549.72
D08 195.35 1534.64 D28 193.35 1550.52
D09 195.25 1535.43 D29 193.25 1551.32
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D10 195.15 1536.22 D30 193.15 1552.12
D11 195.05 1537.00 D31 193.05 1552.93
D12 194.95 1537.79 D32 192.95 1553.73
D13 194.85 1538.58 D33 192.85 1554.54
D14 194.75 1539.37 D34 192.75 1555.34
D15 194.65 1540.16 D35 192.65 1556.15
D16 194.55 1540.95 D36 192.55 1556.96
D17 194.45 1541.75 D37 192.45 1557.77
D18 194.35 1542.54 D38 192.35 1558.58
D19 194.25 1543.33 D39 192.25 1559.39
D20 194.15 1544.13 D40 192.15 1560.20

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
8.4.6 Valid Slots
The D40V occupies three slots. The valid slots for the D40V are IU1-IU15 in the subrack.
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack,
so the slot number of the D40v board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the
three occupied slots.
For example, if the D40v occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the D40 displayed
on the NM is IU1.
8.4.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V
The characteristic code for the D40V consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The
other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are
odd or even wavelengths.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 8-30.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-35
Table 8-30 Characteristic code for the D40V
Code Meaning Description
The first character Band Indicates the band of the
optical signals processed by
the board. The value C
represents C band; the value L
represents L band.
The second character Odd/Even wavelengths Indicates whether the
wavelengths that bear signals
are odd or even wavelengths.
The value E represents even
wavelengths; the value O
represents odd wavelengths.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40V is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
8.4.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 8-31.
Table 8-31 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40v displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN 1
D01-D40 2-41
MON 42

Configuration Parameters
Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
Configure Band
Configure Working Band Parity
Actual Band
Actual Working Band Parity
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
8.4.9 Specifications of the D40V
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 8-32 lists the optical specifications of the D40V.
Table 8-32 Optical specifications of the D40V
Item Unit Value
Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100
Insertion loss dB
8
a
Optical return loss dB >40
Operating wavelength range nm 1529.16-1560.61
Adjacent channel isolation dB >25
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB >30
Attenuation range dB 0-15
Loss accuracy dB 1
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.5
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB 3
NOTE
a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 5.1 lb. (2.3 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 38.5 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 42.3 W
8.5 FIU
FIU: fiber interface unit
8.5.1 Version Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-37
Two functional versions of the FIU board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference
between the two versions in terms of functionality.
8.5.2 Application
The FIU is a type of optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. The FIU realizes the multiplexing
and demultiplexing of the signals transmitted by the main optical path and the optical supervisory
channel.
8.5.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the FIU are multiplexing, demultiplexing and
online optical performance monitoring.
8.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The FIU board consists of the optical module, optical power detection module, control and
communication module, and power supply module.
8.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the FIU front panel.
8.5.6 Valid Slots
The FIU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the FIU are IU1-IU17.
8.5.7 Characteristic Code for the FIU
The characteristic code for the FIU consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the
board.
8.5.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
8.5.9 Specifications of the FIU
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
8.5.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the FIU board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference
between the two versions in terms of functionality.
Table 8-33 lists the version description of the FIU.
Table 8-33 Version description of the FIU
Item Description
Functional
version
Two functional versions of the FIU board are available: TN11 and TN12.
Similarity The TN12FIU works in the same way as the TN11FIU.
Difference None
Replacement The TN11FIU and TN12FIU boards share the same functionality and can
be replaced with each other. But after the TN11FIU board is replaced with
the TN12FIU board, the SCC software need be upgraded.

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
8.5.2 Application
The FIU is a type of optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. The FIU realizes the multiplexing
and demultiplexing of the signals transmitted by the main optical path and the optical supervisory
channel.
For the position of the FIU in the WDM system, see Figure 8-13.
Figure 8-13 Position of the FIU in the WDM system
OTU
OA
OA
OTU
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
SC1
FIU FIU
SC1
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
8.5.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the FIU are multiplexing, demultiplexing and
online optical performance monitoring.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 8-34.
Table 8-34 Functions and features of the FIU
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Realizes the multiplexing and demultiplexing of signals transmitted
by the main path and the optical supervisory channel.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical
signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer
unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the
services.

8.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The FIU board consists of the optical module, optical power detection module, control and
communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 8-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the FIU.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-39
Figure 8-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the FIU
Multiplexer OUT
IN
Optical power detection module
Demultiplexer
RC
PIN
Splitter
MON
Optical module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
RM
TC
TM
Signal Flow
l The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the RC optical
interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the RM optical interface
into one channel of optical signals, and then outputs the multiplexed signals through the
OUT optical interface.
l The IN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the
demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the line optical signals into the main path
optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the TC and
TM optical interfaces
Module Function
l Optical module
Performs the multiplexing and demultiplexing of main path signals and supervisory
channel signals.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the line optical signals and provides them
to the MON interface for detection.
l Optical power detection module
Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
8.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the FIU front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 8-15 shows the FIU front panel.
Figure 8-15 FIU front panel
FIU
FIU
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
M
O
N
O
U
T
I
N
T
C
R
C
T
M
R
M
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-41
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are seven optical interfaces on the FIU front panel. Table 8-35 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 8-35 Types and functions of the FIU interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the line signal.
OUT LC Transmits the line signal.
TC LC Transmits the main path signal.
RC LC Receives the main path signal.
TM LC Transmits the 1510nm optical supervisory channel
signal.
RM LC Receives the 1510nm optical supervisory channel
signal.
MON LC Connected to the input interface of the MCA4 or
MCA8, accomplishes online monitoring of optical
spectrum.
The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal
at the OUT port (20dB lower than the actual signal
power).

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).
8.5.6 Valid Slots
The FIU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the FIU are IU1-IU17.
8.5.7 Characteristic Code for the FIU
The characteristic code for the FIU consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the
board.
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 8-36.
Table 8-36 Characteristic code for the FIU
Code Meaning Description
The first character Band Indicates the multiplexing
solution adopted by the board.
The value C represents C
band; the value L represents L
band.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11FIU is C, indicating that the optical signals
are in C band.
8.5.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 8-37.
Table 8-37 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the FIU displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN/OUT 1
RM/TM 2
RC/TC 3
MON 4

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
Configure Band
Configure Working Band Parity
Actual Band
Actual Working Band Parity
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-43
8.5.9 Specifications of the FIU
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 8-38 Optical specifications of the FIU
Interface Item Unit Value
- Operating wavelength
range
nm 1529-1561
- Operating wavelength
range of optical
supervisory channel
nm 1500-1520
- Optical return loss dB >40
IN-TM
RM-OUT
Insertion loss dB 1.5
IN-TC
RC-OUT
Insertion loss dB 1
IN-TM Isolation dB >40
IN-TC Isolation dB >12

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.2 lb. (1.0 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 4.2 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 4.6 W
8.6 ITL
ITL: interleaver board
8.6.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the ITL board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference
between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports VOA mode.
8.6.2 Application
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
The ITL is a type of optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. It multiplexes/demultiplexes
optical signals between the ones with the channel spacing of 100 GHz and the other ones with
the channel spacing of 50 GHz.
8.6.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the ITL are multiplexing, demultiplexing and
detection of the online spectrum.
8.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The ITL board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
8.6.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ITL front panel.
8.6.6 Valid Slots
The ITL occupies one slot. The valid slots for the ITL are IU1-IU17.
8.6.7 Characteristic Code for the ITL
The characteristic code for the FIU consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the
board.
8.6.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
8.6.9 Specifications of the ITL
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
8.6.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the ITL board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference
between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports VOA mode.
Table 8-39 lists the version description of the ITL.
Table 8-39 Version description of the ITL
Item Description
Functional
version
Two functional versions of the ITL board are available: TN11 and TN12.
Similarity Supports multiplexing /demultiplexing optical signals between the ones
with the channel spacing of 100 GHz and the other ones with the channel
spacing of 50 GHz.
Difference
The TN12ITL board supports VOA mode
a
: transparent transmission of
optical signals with the channel spacing of 100 GHz into one optical signals
with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-45
Item Description
Replacement The TN12ITL board can replace the TN11ITL board. But after the
TN11ITL is replaced with the TN12ITL, the SCC software need be
upgraded.
The TN11ITL board can replace the TN12ITL board only in one
application scenario: multiplexing /demultiplexing optical signals between
the ones with the channel spacing of 100 GHz and the other ones with the
channel spacing of 50 GHz.
a: If the services are less than 40 channels, VOA mode can be configured in which all the
service signals pass through the TE optical interface of even channel.

8.6.2 Application
The ITL is a type of optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. It multiplexes/demultiplexes
optical signals between the ones with the channel spacing of 100 GHz and the other ones with
the channel spacing of 50 GHz.
For the position of the ITL in the WDM system, see Figure 8-16.
Figure 8-16 Position of the ITL in the WDM system
OA
OA
1
40
1
40
1
40
1
40
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
D40
D40
M40
40
1
40
1
M40
40
1
40
1
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
D40
D40
OA
OA
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
M40
M40
C_EVEN
C_ODD
C_EVEN
C_ODD
C_EVEN
C_ODD
C_EVEN
C_ODD
ITL ITL
WMU
WMU
8.6.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the ITL are multiplexing, demultiplexing and
detection of the online spectrum.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 8-40.
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 8-40 Functions and features of the ITL
Functions and
Features
Description
Basic function Multiplexes /demultiplexes optical signals between C_ODD signals
and C_EVEN signals.
Detection and
monitoring of the
online spectrum
Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical
signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer
unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the
services.

8.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The ITL board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 8-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ITL.
Figure 8-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the ITL
SCC
Interleaver IN
Coupler
TO
TE
RO
RE
Optical module
OUT
MON
Splitter
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Signal Flow
TN11ITL:
l The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface are sent to the
interleaver that splits the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then,
the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces
respectively.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-47
l The coupler multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE
optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical signals is
output through the OUT optical interface.
TN12ITL:
l The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface are sent to the
interleaver. Then according to the requirement, get the signals all passed through the TE
interface or split the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then, the
two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces
respectively.
l The coupler multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE
optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical signals is
output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module
Performs the transformation between C band optical signals in 100 GHz spacing and C
band optical signals in 50 GHz spacing.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
8.6.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ITL front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 8-18 and Figure 8-19 shows the ITL front panel.
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 8-18 TN11ITL front panel
ITL
ITL
STAT
M
O
N
O
U
T
I
N
T
O
R
O
T
E
R
E
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-49
Figure 8-19 TN12ITL front panel
ITL
ITL
M
O
N
O
U
T
I
N
T
O
R
O
T
E
R
E
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of TN11ITL.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
There are four indicators on the front panel of TN12ITL.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are seven optical interfaces on the ITL front panel.Table 8-41 lists the type and function
of each interface.
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 8-41 Types and functions of the ITL interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Accesses the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing
(C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals).
OUT LC Outputs the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing
(C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals).
TE LC Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing
(C_EVEN multiplexed signals).
RE LC Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel
spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals).
TO LC Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing
(C_ODD multiplexed signals).
RO LC Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel
spacing (C_ODD multiplexed signals).
MON LC Connects to the input port on the MCA4 or the MCA8
board so that the MCA4 or the MCA8 board can detect
the optical spectrum in service.
The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the
optical power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical
power at the MON interface is 10 dB lower than the
optical power at the OUT interface.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).
8.6.6 Valid Slots
The ITL occupies one slot. The valid slots for the ITL are IU1-IU17.
8.6.7 Characteristic Code for the ITL
The characteristic code for the FIU consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the
board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 8-42.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-51
Table 8-42 Characteristic code for the ITL
Code Meaning Description
The first character Band Indicates the multiplexing
solution adopted by the board.
The value C represents C
band; the value L represents L
band.

For example, the characteristic code for the ITL is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C
band.
8.6.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 8-43.
Table 8-43 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ITL displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN/OUT 1
RE/TE 2
RO/TO 3
MON 4

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Configure Band
Configure Working Band Parity
Actual Band
Actual Working Band Parity
Board Mode
8.6.9 Specifications of the ITL
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Optical Specifications
Table 8-44 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL
Interface Item Unit Value
-
Input channel spacing
a
GHz 100
-
Output channel spacing
a
GHz 50
RE-OUT
RO-OUT
Insertion loss dB <4.5
IN-TE
IN-TO
Insertion loss dB <2.5
IN-TE
IN-TO
Isolation dB >25
- Optical return loss dB >45
- Directivity dB >45
- PMD ps <0.5
- Polarization dependent
loss
dB <0.5
- Input optical power range dBm 26
a: The input and output ends are defined based on the multiplexing process of the interleaver.

Table 8-45 Optical specifications of the TN12ITL
Item Unit Value
TN12ITL
Input channel spacing
a
- GHz 100
Output channel spacing
a
- GHz 50
Insertion loss RE-OUT
RO-OUT
dB <4.5
IN-TE
IN-TO
dB <3.5
Isolation IN-TE
IN-TO
dB >22
Optical return loss - dB >45
Directivity - dB >45
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-53
Item Unit Value
TN12ITL
PMD - ps <0.5
Polarization dependent loss - dB <0.5
Input optical power range - dBm 23
a: The input and output ends are defined based on the multiplexing process of the interleaver.

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.7 lb. (1.2 kg)
Power Consumption
Board The maximum power
consumption at 25
(77) (W)
The maximum power
consumption at 55
(131) (W)
TN11ITL 0.2 0.3
TN12ITL 10.0 11.5

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
8-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
About This Chapter
9.1 CMR2
CMR2: CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
9.2 CMR4
CMR4: CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
9.3 DMR1
DMR1: CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board
9.4 MR2
MR2: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
9.5 MR4
MR4: 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
9.6 MR8
MR8: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
9.7 SBM2
SBM2: 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bi-directional add/drop board
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-1
9.1 CMR2
CMR2: CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
9.1.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the CMR2 board is available, that is TN11.
9.1.2 Application
The CMR2 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The CMR2 realizes the adding/
dropping and multiplexing of two signals.
9.1.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the CMR2 are adding/dropping and multiplexing
of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface.
9.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The CMR2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,,
and power supply module.
9.1.5 Front Panel
There is an indicator and eight interfaces on the CMR2 front panel.
9.1.6 Valid Slots
The CMR2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the CMR2 are IU1-IU17 in the subrack.
9.1.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR2
The characteristic code for the CMR2 consists of eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths
that bear the signals processed by the board.
9.1.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
9.1.9 Specifications of the CMR2
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
9.1.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the CMR2 board is available, that is TN11.
9.1.2 Application
The CMR2 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The CMR2 realizes the adding/
dropping and multiplexing of two signals.
For the position of the CMR2 in the CWDM system, see Figure 9-1.
Figure 9-1 Position of the CMR2 in the CWDM system
CMR2 CMR2
OTU OTU OTU OTU
Client side Client side
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
9.1.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the CMR2 are adding/dropping and multiplexing
of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 9-1.
Table 9-1 Functions and features of the CMR2
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Adds/Drops and multiplexes two signals to/from the multiplexed
signals.
WDM specification Supports the CWDM specification.
Cascade interface Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop
multiplexing board to achieve the expansion.
Wavelength query Supports the query of the wavelengths for the added/dropped signals.

9.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The CMR2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,,
and power supply module.
Figure 9-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CMR2.
Figure 9-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR2
OADM optical
module
IN
D1 D2 A1 A2
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
OUT
MO MI
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-3
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical
module separates two wavelengths from the signals and these two wavelengths are transmitted
to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipments through the D1 and D2 interfaces. The
rest wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface.
The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed
with two wavelengths added through the A1 and A2 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l OADM optical module
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths.
Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so
that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
9.1.5 Front Panel
There is an indicator and eight interfaces on the CMR2 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 9-3 shows the CMR2 front panel.
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 9-3 CMR2 front panel
CMR2
CMR2
STAT
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
O
U
T
I
N
M
O
M
I
D
1
A
1
D
2
A
2
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the CMR2 front panel. Table 9-2 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 9-2 Types and functions of the CMR2 interfaces
Interface Type Function
A1-A2 LC Receives the signal sent from the OTU or the integrated
client-side equipment.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-5
Interface Type Function
D1-D2 LC Transmits the signal to the OTU or the integrated client-
side equipment.
IN LC Receives the multiplexed signal.
OUT LC Transmits the multiplexed signal.
MI LC Cascade input interface, connected to the output
interface of another OADM board.
MO LC Cascade output interface, connected to the input
interface of another OADM board.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).
9.1.6 Valid Slots
The CMR2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the CMR2 are IU1-IU17 in the subrack.
9.1.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR2
The characteristic code for the CMR2 consists of eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths
that bear the signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 9-3.
Table 9-3 Characteristic code for the CMR2
Code Meaning Description
The first four digits The first wavelength that
bears optical signals
Indicate the first wavelength
that bears the optical signals
processed by the board.
The last four digits The second wavelength that
bears optical signals
Indicate the second
wavelength that bears the
optical signals processed by
the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR2 is 14711571.
l "1471" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm.
l "1571" indicates that the second wavelength is 1571 nm.
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
9.1.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 9-4.
Table 9-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR2 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
A1/D1 1
A2/D2 2
MI/MO 3
IN/OUT 4

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
9.1.9 Specifications of the CMR2
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 9-5 lists the optical specifications of the CMR2.
Table 9-5 Optical specifications of the CMR2
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item Unit Value
- Operating wavelength
range
nm 1271-1611
- Adjacent channel spacing nm 20
IN-D1
IN-D2
0.5 dB spectral width nm 6.5
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-7
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item Unit Value
Drop channel insertion
loss
dB 1.5
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB >25
Non-adjacent channel
isolation
dB >35
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
0.5 dB spectral width nm 6.5
Add channel insertion
loss
dB 1.5
IN-MO
MI-OUT
Insertion loss dB 1.0
Isolation dB >13
- Optical return loss dB >40

Rules of Adding/Dropping Wavelength
The CMR2 adds/drops and multiplexes two signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are
five groups of wavelengths:
Table 9-6 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the CMR2
Group Wavelength (nm)
A1/D1 A2/D2
1 1271 1371
2 1471 1491
3 1511 1531
4 1551 1571
5 1591 1611

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 1.8 lb. (0.8 kg)
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 0.2 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 0.3 W
9.2 CMR4
CMR4: CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
9.2.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the CMR4 board is available, that is TN11.
9.2.2 Application
The CMR4 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The CMR4 realizes the adding/
dropping and multiplexing of four signals.
9.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the CMR4 are adding/dropping and multiplexing
of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface.
9.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The CMR4 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
and power supply module.
9.2.5 Front Panel
There is an indicator and 12 interfaces on the CMR4 front panel.
9.2.6 Valid Slots
The CMR4 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the CMR4 are IU1-IU17.
9.2.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR4
The characteristic code for the CMR4 consists of eight digits, indicating the four wavelengths
that bear the signals processed by the board.
9.2.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
9.2.9 Specifications of the CMR4
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
9.2.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the CMR4 board is available, that is TN11.
9.2.2 Application
The CMR4 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The CMR4 realizes the adding/
dropping and multiplexing of four signals.
For the position of the CMR4 in the CWDM system, see Figure 9-4.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-9
Figure 9-4 Position of the CMR4 in the CWDM system
CMR4 CMR4
OTU
4 4
OTU OTU OTU
Client side Client side
9.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the CMR4 are adding/dropping and multiplexing
of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 9-7.
Table 9-7 Functions and features of the CMR4
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Adds/Drops and multiplexes four signals to/from the multiplexed
signals.
WDM specification Supports the CWDM specification.
Cascade interface Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop
multiplexing board to achieve the expansion.
Wavelength query Supports the query of the wavelengths for the added/dropped signals.

9.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The CMR4 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
and power supply module.
Figure 9-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CMR4.
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 9-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR4
OADM optical module
IN
D1 D4 A1 A4
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
OUT
MO MI
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical
module separates four wavelengths from the signals and these four wavelengths are transmitted
to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipments through the D1 to D4 interfaces. The
rest wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface.
The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed
with four wavelengths added through the A1 to A4 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l OADM optical module
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of four wavelengths.
Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so
that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-11
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
9.2.5 Front Panel
There is an indicator and 12 interfaces on the CMR4 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 9-6 shows the CMR4 front panel.
Figure 9-6 CMR4 front panel
CMR4
CMR4
STAT
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
O
U
T
I
N
M
O
M
I
D
1
A
1
D
2
A
2
D
3
A
3
D
4
A
4
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the CMR4 front panel. Table 9-8 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 9-8 Types and functions of the CMR4 interfaces
Interface Type Function
A1-A4 LC Receives the signal sent from the OTU or the integrated
client-side equipment.
D1-D4 LC Transmits the signal to the OTU or the integrated client-
side equipment.
IN LC Receives the multiplexed signal.
OUT LC Transmits the multiplexed signal.
MI LC Cascade input interface, connected to the output
interface of another OADM board.
MO LC Cascade output interface, connected to the input
interface of another OADM board.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).
9.2.6 Valid Slots
The CMR4 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the CMR4 are IU1-IU17.
9.2.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR4
The characteristic code for the CMR4 consists of eight digits, indicating the four wavelengths
that bear the signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 9-9.
Table 9-9 Characteristic code for the CMR4
Code Meaning Description
The first and the second
digits
The first wavelength that
bears optical signals
Indicate the middle two digits
of the first wavelength that
bears the optical signals
processed by the board.
The third and the fourth digits The second wavelength that
bears optical signals
Indicate the middle two digits
of the second wavelength that
bears the optical signals
processed by the board.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-13
Code Meaning Description
The fifth and the sixth digits The third wavelength that
bears optical signals
Indicate the middle two digits
of the third wavelength that
bears the optical signals
processed by the board.
The seventh and the eighth
digits
The fourth wavelength that
bears optical signals
Indicate the middle two digits
of the fourth wavelength that
bears the optical signals
processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR4 is 47495961.
l "47" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm.
l "49" indicates that the second wavelength is 1491 nm.
l "59" indicates that the third wavelength is 1591 nm.
l "61" indicates that the fourth wavelength is 1611 nm.
9.2.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 9-10.
Table 9-10 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR4 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
A1/D1 1
A2/D2 2
A3/D3 3
A4/D4 4
MI/MO 5
IN/OUT 6

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Configuration Parameters
Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
9.2.9 Specifications of the CMR4
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 9-11 lists the optical specifications of the CMR4.
Table 9-11 Optical specifications of the CMR4
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item Unit Value
- Operating wavelength
range
nm 1291-1611 (1371 nm not included)
- Adjacent channel spacing nm 20
IN-D1
IN-D2
IN-D3
IN-D4
0.5 dB spectral width nm 6.5
Drop channel insertion
loss
dB 2
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB >25
Non-adjacent channel
isolation
dB >35
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
A3-OUT
A4-OUT
0.5 dB spectral width nm 6.5
Add channel insertion
loss
dB 2
IN-MO
MI-OUT
Insertion loss dB 1.5
Isolation dB >13
- Optical return loss dB >40

Rules of Adding/Dropping Wavelength
The CMR4 adds/drops and multiplexes four signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are
four groups of wavelengths:
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-15
Table 9-12 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the CMR4
Group Wavelength (nm)
A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4
1 1291 1311 1331 1351
2 1391 1411 1431 1451
3 1471 1491 1591 1611
4 1511 1531 1551 1571

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.0 lb. (0.9 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 0.2 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 0.3 W
9.3 DMR1
DMR1: CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board
9.3.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the DMR1 board is available, that is TN11.
9.3.2 Application
The DMR1 board is used to add/drop and multiplex a 1310nm wavelength on the east and west
directions.
9.3.3 Functions and Features
The DMR1 board supports add/drop multiplexing, port concatenation and wavelength query.
9.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The DMR1 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
and power supply module.
9.3.5 Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the board.
9.3.6 Valid Slots
The DMR1 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the DMR1 are IU1-IU17 in the subrack.
9.3.7 Characteristic Code for the DMR1
The characteristics code for the DMR1 board consists of four digits, identifying the frequency
of the optical signals processed by the board.
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
9.3.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
9.3.9 Specifications of the DMR1
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
9.3.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the DMR1 board is available, that is TN11.
9.3.2 Application
The DMR1 board is used to add/drop and multiplex a 1310nm wavelength on the east and west
directions.
For the position of the DMR1 in the CWDM system, see Figure 9-7.
Figure 9-7 Position of the DMR1 in the CWDM system
OTU OTU
D
M
R
1
O
A
D
M
O
A
D
M
D
M
R
1
WA ED
WIN
WOUT
WD EA
WMO
WMI
EMO
EMI
OA OA
OA
OA
1310nm
1310nm
1310nm
1310nm
EIN
EOUT
NOTE
The DMR1 board is able to process signals from two directions. In the figure, the two DRM1 boards are
actually one physical board.
9.3.3 Functions and Features
The DMR1 board supports add/drop multiplexing, port concatenation and wavelength query.
Table 9-13 provides the detailed features and functions of the DMR1 board.
Table 9-13 Functions and features of the DMR1 board
Functions and
Features
Description
Basic functions Adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310nm wavelength on the east and
west directions.
WDM specification Supports the CWDM specification.
Supports port
concatenation.
Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop
multiplexing board to achieve the expansion.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-17
Functions and
Features
Description
Supports wavelength
query.
Supports the query of the wavelengths for the added/dropped signals.

9.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The DMR1 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
and power supply module.
Figure 9-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DMR1.
Figure 9-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the DMR1
OADM optical module
WIN
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
EOUT
WD ED WA EA
EIN
WOUT
WMO EMO WMI EMI
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
WIN receives signals from west main path. Drop optical module extracts 1310nm signals from
the received signals. The extracted signals are dropped through WD. The remaining signals are
connected to other OADM equipment through WMO. EIN receives signals from east main path.
Drop optical module extracts 1310nm signals from the received signals. The extracted signals
are dropped through ED. The remaining signals are connected to other OADM equipment
through EMO.
Local 1310nm signals are added through EA, and other signals are added through EMI. After
multiplexed by add optical module, the signals are sent to east main path by EOUT. Similarly,
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Local 1310nm signals are added through WA, and other signals are added through WMI. After
multiplexed by add optical module, the signals are sent to west main path by WOUT.
Module Function
l OADM optical module
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of 1310nm signals and other signals.
Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so
that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
9.3.5 Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the board.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 9-9 shows the DMR1 front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-19
Figure 9-9 DMR1 front panel
DMR1
DMR1
STAT
W
O
U
T
W
M
O
W
M
I
E
M
O
E
M
I
W
D
W
A
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
E
D
E
A
E
O
U
T
W
I
N
E
I
N
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the DMR1 board. Table 9-14 lists the type and function of
each interface.
Table 9-14 Types and functions of the DMR1 interfaces
Interface Type Function
EA/WA LC Receives the 1310nm optical signals that west and east
client-side equipment transmits.
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Interface Type Function
ED/WD LC Transmits 1310nm optical signals to west and east
client-side equipment.
EIN/WIN LC Receives the multiplexed signals on west and east main
paths.
EOUT/WOUT LC Transmits multiplexed signals to west and east main
paths.
EMI/WMI LC Serves as concatenation input optical interface. It
connects to the output interfaces on other boards.
EMO/WMO LC Serves as concatenation output optical interface. It
connects to the input interfaces on other boards.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).
9.3.6 Valid Slots
The DMR1 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the DMR1 are IU1-IU17 in the subrack.
9.3.7 Characteristic Code for the DMR1
The characteristics code for the DMR1 board consists of four digits, identifying the frequency
of the optical signals processed by the board.
Table 9-15 provides the details on the characteristics code.
Table 9-15 Characteristic code for the DMR1
Barcode Meaning Description
First to fourth digits Optical signal frequency Frequency of the optical
signals processed by the
board

For example, the characteristics code of the DMR1 is 9210. The code indicates that the frequency
of the optical signals is 192.1THz.
9.3.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-21
Interface Display
Table 9-16 lists the number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the board.
Table 9-16 Number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the DMR1 board
Interface on Front Panel Number on the NM
WA/WD 1
EA/ED 2
WMI/WMO 3
WIN/WOUT 4
EMI/EMO 5
EIN/EOUT 6

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Board Parameter Configuration
Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
9.3.9 Specifications of the DMR1
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 9-17 Optical specifications of the DMR1
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item Unit Value
EA/ED/WA/
WD
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1260-1360
EIN-ED
WIN-WD
Drop channel insertion
loss
dB 1
Isolation dB >40
EA-EOUT
WA-WOUT
Add channel insertion
loss
dB 1
EIN-EMO
EMI-EOUT
Insertion loss dB 0.8
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item Unit Value
WIN-WMO
WMI-WOUT
Isolation dB 25
- Optical return loss dB >40

Rules of Adding/Dropping Wavelength
The DMR1 board adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310nm wavelength on the east and west
directions from the multiplexed signals.
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 1.5 lb. (0.7 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 0.2W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 0.3W
9.4 MR2
MR2: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
9.4.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the MR2 board is available, that is TN11.
9.4.2 Application
The MR2 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The MR2 realizes the adding/
dropping and multiplexing of two signals.
9.4.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the MR2 are adding/dropping and multiplexing
of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface.
9.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The MR2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and
power supply module.
9.4.5 Front Panel
There is an indicator and eight interfaces on the MR2 front panel.
9.4.6 Valid Slots
The MR2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the MR2 are IU1-IU17.
9.4.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-23
The characteristic code for the MR2 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the
two signals processed by the board.
9.4.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
9.4.9 Specifications of the MR2
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
9.4.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the MR2 board is available, that is TN11.
9.4.2 Application
The MR2 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The MR2 realizes the adding/
dropping and multiplexing of two signals.
For the position of the MR2 in the DWDM system, see Figure 9-10.
Figure 9-10 Position of the MR2 in the DWDM system
MR2
OA OA
OA OA
MR2
OTU OTU OTU OTU
Client side Client side
9.4.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the MR2 are adding/dropping and multiplexing
of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 9-18.
Table 9-18 Functions and features of the MR2
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Adds/Drops and multiplexes random two signals to/from the
multiplexed signals.
WDM specification Supports the DWDM specification.
Cascade interface Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop
multiplexing board to achieve the expansion.
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Function and
Feature
Description
Wavelength query Supports the query of the wavelengths for the added/dropped signals.

9.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The MR2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and
power supply module.
Figure 9-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR2.
Figure 9-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR2
OADM optical
module
IN
D1 D2 A1 A2
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
OUT
MO MI
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical
module separates two wavelengths from the signals and these two wavelengths are transmitted
to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipments through the D1 and D2 interfaces. The
rest wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface.
The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed
with two wavelengths added through the A1 and A2 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-25
Module Function
l OADM optical module
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths.
Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so
that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
9.4.5 Front Panel
There is an indicator and eight interfaces on the MR2 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 9-12 shows the MR2 front panel.
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 9-12 MR2 front panel
MR2
MR2
STAT
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
O
U
T
I
N
M
O
M
I
D
1
A
1
D
2
A
2
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the MR2 front panel. Table 9-19 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 9-19 Types and functions of the MR2 interfaces
Interface Type Function
A1-A2 LC Receives the signal sent from the OTU or the integrated
client-side equipment.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-27
Interface Type Function
D1-D2 LC Transmits the signal to the OTU or the integrated client-
side equipment.
IN LC Receives the multiplexed signal.
OUT LC Transmits the multiplexed signal.
MO LC Cascade output interface, connected to the input
interface of another OADM board.
MI LC Cascade input interface, connected to the output
interface of another OADM board.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).
9.4.6 Valid Slots
The MR2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the MR2 are IU1-IU17.
9.4.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2
The characteristic code for the MR2 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the
two signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 9-20.
Table 9-20 Characteristic code for the MR2
Code Meaning Description
The first four digits The frequency of the first
optical signal
Indicate the last four digits of
the frequency that bears the
first optical signal.
The last four digits The frequency of the second
optical signal
Indicate the last four digits of
the frequency that bears the
second optical signal.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR2 is 93609370.
l "9360" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 193.60 THz.
l "9370" indicates that the frequency of the second optical signal is 193.70 THz.
9.4.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 9-21.
Table 9-21 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR2 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
A1/D1 1
A2/D2 2
MI/MO 3
IN/OUT 4

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
9.4.9 Specifications of the MR2
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 9-22 lists the optical specifications of the MR2.
Table 9-22 Optical specifications of the MR2
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item Unit Value
- Operating wavelength
range
nm 1529-1561
- Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100
IN-D1
IN-D2
0.5 dB spectral width nm 0.11
Drop channel insertion
loss
dB 1.5
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB >25
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-29
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item Unit Value
Non-adjacent channel
isolation
dB >35
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
0.5 dB spectral width nm 0.11
Add channel insertion
loss
dB 1.5
IN-MO
MI-OUT
Insertion loss dB 1.0
Isolation dB >13
- Optical return loss dB >40

Rules of Adding/Dropping Wavelength
The MR2 adds/drops and multiplexes random two signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There
are no rules of adding/dropping wavelength.
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.0 lb. (0.9 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 0.2 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 0.3 W
9.5 MR4
MR4: 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
9.5.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the MR4 board is available, that is TN11.
9.5.2 Application
The MR4 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The MR4 realizes the adding/
dropping and multiplexing of four signals.
9.5.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the MR4 are adding/dropping and multiplexing
of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface.
9.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The MR4 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and
power supply module.
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
9.5.5 Front Panel
There is an indicator and 12 interfaces on the MR4 front panel.
9.5.6 Valid Slots
The MR4 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the MR4 are IU1-IU17.
9.5.7 Characteristic Code for of MR4
The characteristic code for the MR4 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the
first and the fourth signals processed by the board.
9.5.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
9.5.9 Specifications of the MR4
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
9.5.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the MR4 board is available, that is TN11.
9.5.2 Application
The MR4 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The MR4 realizes the adding/
dropping and multiplexing of four signals.
For the position of the MR4 in the DWDM system, see Figure 9-13.
Figure 9-13 Position of the MR4 in the DWDM system
MR4
OA OA
OA OA
MR4
OTU
4 4
OTU OTU OTU
Client side Client side
9.5.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the MR4 are adding/dropping and multiplexing
of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 9-23.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-31
Table 9-23 Functions and features of the MR4
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Adds/Drops and multiplexes consecutive four signals to/from the
multiplexed signals.
WDM specification Supports the DWDM specification.
Cascade interface Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop
multiplexing board to achieve the expansion.
Wavelength query Supports the query of the wavelengths for the added/dropped signals.

9.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The MR4 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and
power supply module.
Figure 9-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR4.
Figure 9-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR4
OADM optical module
IN
D1 D4 A1 A4
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
OUT
MO MI
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical
module separates four wavelengths from the signals and these four wavelengths are transmitted
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipments through the D1 to D4 interfaces. The
rest wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface.
The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed
with four wavelengths added through the A1 to A4 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l OADM optical module
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of four wavelengths.
Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so
that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
9.5.5 Front Panel
There is an indicator and 12 interfaces on the MR4 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 9-15 shows the MR4 front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-33
Figure 9-15 MR4 front panel
MR4
MR4
STAT
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
O
U
T
I
N
M
O
M
I
D
1
A
1
D
2
A
2
D
3
A
3
D
4
A
4
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the MR4 front panel. Table 9-24 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 9-24 Types and functions of the MR4 interfaces
Interface Type Function
A1-A4 LC Receives the signal sent from the OTU or the integrated
client-side equipment.
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Interface Type Function
D1-D4 LC Transmits the signal to the OTU or the integrated client-
side equipment.
IN LC Receives the multiplexed signal.
OUT LC Transmits the multiplexed signal.
MI LC Cascade input interface, connected to the output
interface of another OADM board.
MO LC Cascade output interface, connected to the input
interface of another OADM board.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).
9.5.6 Valid Slots
The MR4 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the MR4 are IU1-IU17.
9.5.7 Characteristic Code for of MR4
The characteristic code for the MR4 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the
first and the fourth signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 9-25.
Table 9-25 Characteristic code for the MR4
Code Meaning Description
The first four digits The frequency of first optical
signal
Indicate the last four digits of
the frequency that bears the
first optical signal processed
by the board.
The last four digits The frequency of forth
optical signal
Indicate the last four digits of
the frequency that bears the
fourth optical signal
processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR4 is 92109240.
l "9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz.
l "9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth optical signal is 192.40 THz.
Since the four optical signals processed by the MR4 are in sequence, it is inferred that:
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-35
l The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz.
l The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz.
9.5.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 9-26.
Table 9-26 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR4 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
A1/D1 1
A2/D2 2
A3/D3 3
A4/D4 4
MI/MO 5
IN/OUT 6

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
9.5.9 Specifications of the MR4
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 9-27 lists the optical specifications of the MR4.
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 9-27 Optical specifications of the MR4
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item Unit Value
- Operating wavelength
range
nm 1529-1561
- Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100
IN-D1
IN-D2
IN-D3
IN-D4
0.5 dB spectral width nm 0.11
Drop channel insertion
loss
dB 2.2
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB >25
Non-adjacent channel
isolation
dB >35
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
A3-OUT
A4-OUT
0.5 dB spectral width nm 0.11
Add channel insertion
loss
dB 2.2
IN-MO
MI-OUT
Insertion loss dB 1.5
Isolation dB >13
- Optical return loss dB >40

Rules of Adding/Dropping Wavelength
The MR4 adds/drops and multiplexes consecutive four signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
There are ten groups of wavelengths:
Table 9-28 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the MR4
Group Wavelength (nm)
A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4
1 1560.61 1559.79 1558.98 1558.17
2 1557.36 1556.55 1555.75 1554.94
3 1554.13 1553.33 1552.52 1551.72
4 1550.92 1550.12 1549.32 1548.51
5 1547.72 1546.92 1546.12 1545.32
6 1544.53 1543.73 1542.94 1542.14
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-37
Group Wavelength (nm)
A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4
7 1541.35 1540.56 1539.77 1538.95
8 1538.19 1537.40 1536.61 1535.82
9 1535.04 1534.25 1533.47 1532.68
10 1531.90 1531.12 1530.33 1529.55

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.0 lb. (0.9 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 0.2 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 0.3 W
9.6 MR8
MR8: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
9.6.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the MR8 board is available, that is TN11.
9.6.2 Application
The MR8 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The MR8 realizes the adding/
dropping and multiplexing of eight signals.
9.6.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the MR8 are adding/dropping and multiplexing
of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface.
9.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The MR8 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and
power supply module.
9.6.5 Front Panel
There is an indicator and 20 interfaces on the MR8 front panel.
9.6.6 Valid Slots
The MR8 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the MR8 are IU1-IU16 in the subrack.
9.6.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8
The characteristic code for the MR8 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the
first and the eighth signals processed by the board.
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
9.6.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
9.6.9 Specifications of the MR8
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
9.6.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the MR8 board is available, that is TN11.
9.6.2 Application
The MR8 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The MR8 realizes the adding/
dropping and multiplexing of eight signals.
For the position of the MR8 in the DWDM system, see Figure 9-16.
Figure 9-16 Position of the MR8 in the DWDM system
MR8
OA OA
OA OA
MR8
OTU
8 8
OTU OTU OTU
Client side Client side
9.6.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the MR8 are adding/dropping and multiplexing
of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 9-29.
Table 9-29 Functions and features of the MR8
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Adds/Drops and multiplexes eight signals to/from the multiplexed
signals.
WDM specification Supports the DWDM specification.
Cascade interface Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop
multiplexing board to achieve the expansion.
Wavelength query Supports the query of the wavelengths for the added/dropped signals.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-39
9.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The MR8 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and
power supply module.
Figure 9-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR8.
Figure 9-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR8
OADM optical module
IN
D1 D8 A1 A8
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
OUT
MO MI
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical
module separates eight wavelengths from the signals and these eight wavelengths are transmitted
to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipments through the D1 to D8 interfaces. The
rest wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface.
The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed
with eight wavelengths added through the A1 to A8 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l OADM optical module
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of eight wavelengths.
Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so
that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
9.6.5 Front Panel
There is an indicator and 20 interfaces on the MR8 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 9-18 shows the MR8 front panel.
Figure 9-18 MR8 front panel
MR8
MR8
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
D
6
A
6
D
7
A
7
D
5
A
5
D
4
A
4
D
8
A
8
D
1
A
1
D
2
A
2
M
O
M
I
O
U
T
I
N
D
3
A
3
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-41
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
Interfaces
There are 20 optical interfaces on the MR8 front panel. Table 9-30 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 9-30 Types and functions of the MR8 interfaces
Interface Type Function
A1-A8 LC Receives the signal sent from the OTU or the integrated
client-side equipment.
D1-D8 LC Transmits the signal to the OTU or the integrated client-
side equipment.
IN LC Receives the multiplexed signal.
OUT LC Transmits the multiplexed signal.
MI LC Cascade input interface, connected to the output
interface of another OADM board.
MO LC Cascade output interface, connected to the input
interface of another OADM board.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
9.6.6 Valid Slots
The MR8 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the MR8 are IU1-IU16 in the subrack.
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack,
so the slot number of the MR8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the
two occupied slots.
For example, if the MR8 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the MR8 displayed on
the NM is IU1.
9.6.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8
The characteristic code for the MR8 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the
first and the eighth signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 9-31.
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 9-31 Characteristic code for the MR8
Code Meaning Description
The first four digits The frequency of the first
optical signal
Indicate the last four digits of
the frequency that bears the
first optical signal processed
by the board.
The last four digits The frequency of the eighth
optical signal
Indicate the last four digits of
the frequency that bears the
eighth optical signal
processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR8 is 92109280.
l "9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz.
l "9280" indicates that the frequency of the eighth optical signal is 192.80 THz.
Since the eight optical signals processed by the MR8 are in sequence, it is inferred that:
l The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz.
l The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz.
l Inferred from it, the frequency of the seventh signal is 192.70 THz.
9.6.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 9-32.
Table 9-32 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR8 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
A1/D1 1
A2/D2 2
A3/D3 3
A4/D4 4
A5/D51 5
A6/D6 6
A7/D7 7
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-43
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
A8/D8 8
MI/MO 9
IN/OUT 10

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
9.6.9 Specifications of the MR8
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 9-33 lists the optical specifications of the MR8.
Table 9-33 Optical specifications of the MR8
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item Unit Value
- Operating wavelength
range
nm 1529-1561
- Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100
IN-D1
IN-D2
IN-D3
IN-D4
IN-D5
IN-D6
IN-D7
IN-D8
0.5 dB spectral width nm 0.11
Drop channel insertion
loss
dB 4
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB >25
Non-adjacent channel
isolation
dB >35
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
A3-OUT
A4-OUT
A5-OUT
0.5 dB spectral width nm 0.11
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item Unit Value
A6-OUT
A7-OUT
A8-OUT
Add channel insertion
loss
dB 4
IN-MRO
MRI-OUT
Insertion loss dB 3.5
Isolation dB >13
- Optical return loss dB >40

Rules of Adding/Dropping Wavelength
The MR8 adds/drops and multiplexes eight signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are
five groups of wavelengths:
Table 9-34 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8
Group Wavelength (nm)
A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4 A5/D5 A6/D6 A7/D7 A8/D8
1 1560.6
1
1559.7
9
1558.9
8
1558.1
7
1557.3
6
1556.5
5
1555.7
5
1554.9
4
2 1554.1
3
1553.3
3
1552.5
2
1551.7
2
1550.9
2
1550.1
2
1549.3
2
1548.5
1
3 1547.7
2
1546.9
2
1546.1
2
1545.3
2
1544.5
3
1543.7
3
1542.9
4
1542.1
4
4 1541.3
5
1540.5
6
1539.7
7
1538.9
8
1538.1
9
1537.4
0
1536.6
1
1535.8
2
5 1535.0
4
1534.2
5
1533.4
7
1532.6
8
1531.9
0
1531.1
2
1530.3
3
1529.5
5

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.0 lb. (0.9 kg)
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-45
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 0.2 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 0.3 W
9.7 SBM2
SBM2: 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bi-directional add/drop board
9.7.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the SBM2 board is available, that is TN11.
9.7.2 Application
The SBM2 board drops two signals from the multiplexed signals, and at the same time adds
another two signals to the multiplexed signals.
9.7.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the SBM2 are adding/dropping and multiplexing
of signals and providing a cascade interface.
9.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SBM2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
and power supply module.
9.7.5 Front Panel
There are interfaces on the SBM2 front panel.
9.7.6 Valid Slots
The SBM2 occupies one slot.The valid slots for the SBM2 are IU1-IU17.
9.7.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
9.7.8 Specifications of the SBM2
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
9.7.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the SBM2 board is available, that is TN11.
9.7.2 Application
The SBM2 board drops two signals from the multiplexed signals, and at the same time adds
another two signals to the multiplexed signals.
For the position of the SBM2 in the CWDM system, see Figure 9-19.
Figure 9-19 Position of the SBM2 in the CWDM system
SBM2 SBM2
OTU
Client side
OTU OTU OTU
Client side
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
9.7.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the SBM2 are adding/dropping and multiplexing
of signals and providing a cascade interface.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 9-35.
Table 9-35 Functions and features of the SBM2
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Drops two signals from the multiplexed signals and add other two
signals into the multiplexed signals. The added and dropped optical
signals must be of different wavelengths.
WDM specification Supports only the single-fiber dual fed CWDM system.
Cascade interface Provides a cascade optical interface to cascade other single-fiber bi-
directional OADM boards.

9.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SBM2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
and power supply module.
Figure 9-20 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2.
Figure 9-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2
OADM optical module
EXT
D1 D2 A1 A2
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
LINE
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
SCC
Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
DC power supply
from a backplane
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-47
Signal Flow
The board receives the multiplexed signals through the LINE interface. After the optical module
processes the multiplexed signals. Then, the board separates the multiplexed signals into two
wavelengths of optical signals and outputs them through the D1 and D2 optical interfaces to the
OTU boards or integrated client-side equipments. The board also receives two wavelengths of
optical signals through the A1 and A2 interfaces and couples them to the multiplexed signals
and outputs the coupled signals through the LINE interface.
The EXT interface is used as a cascade interface. It transmits the multiplexed signals to other
single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards to add/drop the rest channels of the multiplexed
signals.
Module Function
l OADM optical module
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths.
Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so
that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
9.7.5 Front Panel
There are interfaces on the SBM2 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 9-21 shows the SBM2 front panel.
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 9-21 SBM2 front panel
SBM2
SBM2
E
X
T
D
1
A
1
STAT
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
L
I
N
E
D
2
A
2
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the SBM2 front panel.Table 9-36 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 9-36 Types and functions of the SBM2 interfaces
Interface Type Function
A1/A2 LC Receives the signal sent from the OTU or the integrated
client-side equipment.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-49
Interface Type Function
D1/D2 LC Transmits the signal to the OTU or the integrated client-
side equipment.
LINE LC Receives and transmits multiplexed signals.
EXT LC Cascade interface, transmits the multiplexed signals to
other single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards to add/
drop the rest channels of the multiplexed signals.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).
9.7.6 Valid Slots
The SBM2 occupies one slot.The valid slots for the SBM2 are IU1-IU17.
9.7.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 9-37.
Table 9-37 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SBM2 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
A1 1
D1 2
A2 3
D2 4
LINE 5
EXT 6

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
9-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Configuration Parameters
Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type
9.7.8 Specifications of the SBM2
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 9-38 lists the optical specifications of the SBM2.
Table 9-38 Optical specifications of the SBM2
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item Unit Value
- Operating wavelength
range
CWDM nm 1291 to 1611
LINE-D1
LINE-D2
Drop channel insertion loss dB 3
Isolation dB 30
A1-LINE
A2-LINE
Add channel insertion loss dB 3
Isolation dB 30
Optical return loss dB >40
Passthrough loss dB 1.5

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 1.8 lb. (0.8 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 0.2 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 0.3 W
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-51
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop
Multiplexing Unit
About This Chapter
10.1 RMU9
RMU9: 9-port ROADM multiplexing board
10.2 ROAM
ROAM: reconfigurable optical adding module board
10.3 WSD9
WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board
10.4 WSM9
WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board
10.5 WSMD4
WSMD4: 4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-1
10.1 RMU9
RMU9: 9-port ROADM multiplexing board
10.1.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the RMU9 board is available, that is TN11.
10.1.2 Application
The RMU9 is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the
WSD9, the RMU9 realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
10.1.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the RMU9 are dynamic grooming of wavelengths,
online optical performance monitoring, and alarms and performance events monitoring.
10.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The RMU9 board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
10.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the RMU9 front panel.
10.1.6 Valid Slots
The RMU9 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the RMU9 are IU1-IU17.
10.1.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
10.1.8 Specifications of the RMU9
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
10.1.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the RMU9 board is available, that is TN11.
Type
Table 10-1lists the types of the RMU9.
Table 10-1 Type description of the RMU9
Board Type Description
TN11RMU9 01 Processes the odd and even
wavelengths of C-band.

10.1.2 Application
The RMU9 is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the
WSD9, the RMU9 realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
The RMU9 can add eight single-channel signal or multi-channel signals to the main path. Being
multiplexed by the optical multiplexer unit or optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the
multiplexed channels enter the RMU9 through the channel-adding port. As for the single
channels, they are directly sent to the RMU9 through the channel-adding port by the optical
transponder units.
For the position of the RMU9 in the DWDM system, see Figure 10-1.
Figure 10-1 Position of the RMU9 in the DWDM system
DCM
Client-side
O A
RMU9
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O A O A
O A
DCM
WSD9
DMUX
DMUX
WSD9
MUX
RMU9
MUX
Client-side
Client-side Client-side
8 8
8 8
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength
at the same time.
10.1.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the RMU9 are dynamic grooming of wavelengths,
online optical performance monitoring, and alarms and performance events monitoring.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 10-2.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-3
Table 10-2 Functions and features of the RMU9
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Adds eight single-channel signal or multi-channel signals to the main
path. Used with the OTU with tunable wavelength, the RMU9 realizes
the dynamic input of eight channel signals.
WDM specification Supports the DWDM specification.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical
signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer
unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the
services.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to
report the alarms and performance events of the board.

10.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The RMU9 board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 10-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the RMU9.
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 10-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the RMU9
SCC
Optical multiplexer module
VOA VOA VOA VOA VOA VOA VOA VOA
TOA
ROA
EXPI
AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4 AM5 AM6 AM7 AM8
MONO
OUT
MONI
Optical module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
The wavelengths to be added are input through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces.
NOTE
l The channel corresponding to each interface (AM1-AM8) must use a unique wavelength. Otherwise,
the services in the two channels that use the same wavelength are interrupted.
l The wavelength used by the channel corresponding to each interface (AM1-AM8) cannot be the same
as the wavelength of the optical signals input through the EXPI optical interface. Otherwise, the services
in the two channels that use the same wavelength are interrupted.
After being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer module, the optical signals input through the
AMn optical interface are output through the TOA optical interface.
The optical signals output through the TOA optical interface can be cascaded with an optical
amplifier board. If no cascading is required, the optical signals are directly input to the ROA
optical interface.
After the main optical path input through the EXPI optical interface is multiplexed with the
optical wavelength signals added on the board through the ROA optical interface, the
multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
A small amount of optical signals input through the EXPI interface are separated from the main
path, and output through the MONI interface. They are used for optical performance detection.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-5
A small amount of optical signals are separated from those output through the TOA interface,
and output to the MONO interface. These signals are used for optical performance detection.
Module Function
l Optical module
Multiplexes eight wavelengths added on the board.
Eight VOAs achieve the in-service adjustment of input optical power.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for input and output
optical power detection.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to
the MONI/MONO interface for detection.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
10.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the RMU9 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 10-3 shows the RMU9 front panel.
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 10-3 RMU9 front panel
RMU9
RMU9
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
O
U
T
E
X
P
I
T
O
A
R
O
A
A
M
1
A
M
2
A
M
3
A
M
4
A
M
5
A
M
6
A
M
7
A
M
8
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces on the RMU9 front panel. Table 10-3 lists the type and function
of each interface.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-7
Table 10-3 Types and functions of the RMU9 interfaces
Interface Type Function
AM1-AM8 LC Receive the single-channel signals or multi-channel
signals that are to be multiplexed into the main path.
OUT LC Transmits the main path signal.
EXPI LC Receives the main path signal.
MONI LC Connected to the input interface of the spectrum
analyzer unit, accomplishes the online detection of the
optical spectrum for the input signals transmitted by the
main optical path.
The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite
signal at the EXPI port (15dB lower than the actual
signal power).
MONO LC Connected to the input interface of the spectrum
analyzer unit, accomplishes the online detection of
optical spectrum for the signals output through the
TOA interface.
The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite
signal at the TOA port (15dB lower than the actual
signal power).
TOA LC Used as the cascade output interface.
ROA LC Used as the cascade input interface.

NOTE
When cascading is not adopted, the TOA and ROA interfaces should be directly connected by a fiber
jumper.
Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
10.1.6 Valid Slots
The RMU9 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the RMU9 are IU1-IU17.
10.1.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 10-4.
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 10-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RMU9 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
EXPI 1
OUT 2
AM1-AM8 3-10
TOA/ROA 11
MONI 12
MONO 13

Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB)
10.1.8 Specifications of the RMU9
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 10-5 lists the optical specifications of the RMU9.
Table 10-5 Optical specifications of the RMU9
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss EXPI-OUT dB 8.5
AMx
a
-TOA
dB
12.5
b
ROA-OUT dB 1.5
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561
Optical return loss dB >40
Attenuation range dB 0-15
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.5
Attenuation accuracy dB 1
NOTE
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface.
b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-9
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.4 lb. (1.1 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 11 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 12 W
10.2 ROAM
ROAM: reconfigurable optical adding module board
10.2.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the ROAM board is available, that is TN11.
10.2.2 Application
The ROAM is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the
optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the ROAM realizes the
wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
10.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the ROAM are dynamic grooming of wavelengths,
built-in power equilibrium, and alarms and performance events monitoring.
10.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The ROAM consists of the planar lightwave circuit optical module, control and communication
module, and power supply module.
10.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ROAM front panel.
10.2.6 Valid Slots
The ROAM occupies three slots. The valid slots for the ROAM are IU1-IU15 in the subrack.
10.2.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
10.2.8 Specifications of the ROAM
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
10.2.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the ROAM board is available, that is TN11.
Type
Table 10-6 lists the types of the ROAM.
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 10-6 Type description of the ROAM
Board Type Description
TN11ROAM 01 Processes the even
wavelengths in C band.
02 Processes the odd
wavelengths in C band.

10.2.2 Application
The ROAM is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the
optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the ROAM realizes the
wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
For the position of the ROAM in the DWDM system, see Figure 10-4.
Figure 10-4 Position of the ROAM in the DWDM system
O A
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O A
O A
DMUX
ROAM
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
DMUX
O
T
U
O
T
U
ROAM
O A
Client-side Client-side
40 40
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength
at the same time.
10.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the ROAM are dynamic grooming of wavelengths,
built-in power equilibrium, and alarms and performance events monitoring.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 10-7.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-11
Table 10-7 Functions and features of the ROAM
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Realizes the dynamic adding/dropping, pass-through, and blocking of
a maximum of 40 wavelengths with the demultiplexing board as well
as the dynamic grooming of wavelengths for the services on the ring
network.
WDM specification Supports the DWDM specification.
Power equilibrium Realizes the wavelength-level equilibrium and control of optical
power to flatten the spectrum for the working signals.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to
report the alarms and performance events of the board.

10.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The ROAM consists of the planar lightwave circuit optical module, control and communication
module, and power supply module.
Figure 10-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ROAM.
Figure 10-5 Functions and features of the ROAM
SCC
Optical multiplexer module
OUT
IN
M01 M02 M40
EXPI
EXPO
PLC optical module
DM
Splitter
VOA
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
VOA VOA
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Signal Flow
The main path signals are received through the IN interface. The splitter divides the main path
signals into two channels of the same signals. One signal is output to the optical demultiplexer
unit through the DM interface and demultiplexed into single wavelengths dropped at the local
station. The other signal passes through and is output through the EXPO interface.
The signals to be added at the local station are received through the corresponding M01-M40
interfaces. These signals are multiplexed with the signal input through the EXPI interface and
then output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l PLC optical module
Multiplexes forty wavelengths added on the board.
The planar lightwave circuit (PLC) optical module contains the VOA modules that
realize the power adjustment at the wavelength level.
The PLC optical module blocks and terminates the signals dropped at the local station
and adjusts the optical power of other signals.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
10.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ROAM front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 10-6 shows the ROAM front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-13
Figure 10-6 ROAM front panel
ROAM
ROAM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
M01
M02
M03
M04
M05
M06
M07
M08
M09
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26
M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
M39
M40
196.00
195.90
195.80
195.70
195.60
195.50
195.40
195.30
195.20
195.10
195.00
194.90
194.80
194.70
194.60
194.50
194.20
194.10
194.40
194.30
194.00
193.90
193.80
193.70
193.60
193.50
193.20
193.10
193.40
193.30
193.00
192.90
192.80
192.70
192.60
192.50
192.20
192.10
192.40
192.30
I
N
O
U
T
M
0
1
M
0
2
M
0
3
M
0
4
M
0
5
M
0
6
M
0
7
M
0
8
M
0
9
M
1
0
M
1
1
M
1
2
M
1
3
M
1
4
M
1
5
M
1
6
M
1
7
M
1
8
M
1
9
M
2
0
E
X
P
O
M
2
1
M
2
2
M
2
3
M
2
4
M
2
5
M
2
6
M
2
7
M
2
8
M
2
9
M
3
0
E
X
P
I
M
3
1
M
3
2
M
3
4
M
3
5
M
3
6
M
3
7
M
3
8
M
3
9
M
4
0
D
M
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 45 optical interfaces on the ROAM front panel. Table 10-8 lists the type and function
of each interface.
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 10-8 Types and functions of the ROAM interfaces
Interface Type Function
M01-M40 LC Add channels from the local station.
DM LC Drops channels to the local station.
OUT LC Transmits the main path signal.
IN LC Receives the main path signal.
EXPO LC Used as the cascade interface to transmit the pass-
through signal.
EXPI LC Used as the cascade interface to receive the pass-
through signal.

There are 40 output interfaces on the ROAM front panel. Table 10-9 and Table 10-10 show the
mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the ROAM board.
Table 10-9 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM
board (even)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01 196.00 1529.55 M21 194.00 1545.32
M02 195.90 1530.33 M22 193.90 1546.12
M03 195.80 1531.12 M23 193.80 1546.92
M04 195.70 1531.90 M24 193.70 1547.72
M05 195.60 1532.68 M25 193.60 1548.51
M06 195.50 1533.47 M26 193.50 1549.32
M07 195.40 1534.25 M27 193.40 1550.12
M08 195.30 1535.04 M28 193.30 1550.92
M09 195.20 1535.82 M29 193.20 1551.72
M10 195.10 1536.61 M30 193.10 1552.52
M11 195.00 1537.40 M31 193.00 1553.33
M12 194.90 1538.19 M32 192.90 1554.13
M13 194.80 1538.98 M33 192.80 1554.94
M14 194.70 1539.77 M34 192.70 1555.75
M15 194.60 1540.56 M35 192.60 1556.55
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-15
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M16 194.50 1541.35 M36 192.50 1557.36
M17 194.40 1542.14 M37 192.40 1558.17
M18 194.30 1542.94 M38 192.30 1558.98
M19 194.20 1543.73 M39 192.20 1559.79
M20 194.10 1544.53 M40 192.10 1560.61

Table 10-10 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM
board (odd)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01 196.05 1529.16 M21 194.05 1544.92
M02 195.95 1529.94 M22 193.95 1545.72
M03 195.85 1530.72 M23 193.85 1546.52
M04 195.75 1531.51 M24 193.75 1547.32
M05 195.65 1532.29 M25 193.65 1548.11
M06 195.55 1533.07 M26 193.55 1548.91
M07 195.45 1533.86 M27 193.45 1549.72
M08 195.35 1534.64 M28 193.35 1550.52
M09 195.25 1535.43 M29 193.25 1551.32
M10 195.15 1536.22 M30 193.15 1552.12
M11 195.05 1537.00 M31 193.05 1552.93
M12 194.95 1537.79 M32 192.95 1553.73
M13 194.85 1538.58 M33 192.85 1554.54
M14 194.75 1539.37 M34 192.75 1555.34
M15 194.65 1540.16 M35 192.65 1556.15
M16 194.55 1540.95 M36 192.55 1556.96
M17 194.45 1541.75 M37 192.45 1557.77
M18 194.35 1542.54 M38 192.35 1558.58
M19 194.25 1543.33 M39 192.25 1559.39
M20 194.15 1544.13 M40 192.15 1560.20

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).
10.2.6 Valid Slots
The ROAM occupies three slots. The valid slots for the ROAM are IU1-IU15 in the subrack.
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack,
so the slot number of the ROAM board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the
three occupied slots.
For example, if the ROAM occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the ROAM
displayed on the NM is IU1.
10.2.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 10-11.
Table 10-11 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ROAM displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN 1
EXPO 2
EXPI 3
OUT 4
DM 5
A01-A40 6-45

Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
Wavelength Target Power
10.2.8 Specifications of the ROAM
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 10-12 lists the optical specifications of the ROAM.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-17
Table 10-12 Optical specifications of the ROAM
Item Unit Value
Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100
Insertion loss
Mx
a
-OUT
dB
9
b
IN-DM dB 7
EXPI-OUT dB
14
b
IN-EXPO dB 3
Operating wavelength range nm 1529 - 1561
Adjacent channel isolation dB >22
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB >25
Attenuation range dB 0 - 20
Attenuation precision dB <1 (0 to 10dB)
<1.5 ( >10dB )
Polarization dependent loss dB 1.5
Module switch time ms 50
Extinction ratio dB 30
-0.5 dB bandwidth of adding wavelength nm >0.3
-0.5 dB bandwidth of pass-through
wavelength
nm >0.2
NOTE
a: Mx represents the M01-M40 interface.
b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 7.0 lb. (3.2 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 66 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 73 W
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
10.3 WSD9
WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board
10.3.1 Version Description
Three functional versions of the WSD9 board are available: TN11, TN12 and TN13. The main
difference among the three versions is that the channel spacing of the wavelength is different.
10.3.2 Application
The WSD9 is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the
WSM9 or the RMU9, the WSD9 realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM
network.
10.3.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the WSD9 are dynamic grooming of wavelengths,
online optical performance monitoring, and alarms and performance events monitoring.
10.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The WSD9 board consists of the optical module, temperature and optical power detection
module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
10.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the WSD9 front panel.
10.3.6 Valid Slots
The TN11WSD9 and TN12WSD9 occupies two slots. The TN13WSD9 occupies three slots.
The valid slots for TN11WSD9 and TN12WSD9 are IU1-IU16 in the subrack. The valid slots
for the TN13WSD9 are IU1-IU15 in the subrack.
10.3.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
10.3.8 Specifications of the WSD9
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
10.3.1 Version Description
Three functional versions of the WSD9 board are available: TN11, TN12 and TN13. The main
difference among the three versions is that the channel spacing of the wavelength is different.
Version
Table 10-13 lists the version description of the WSD9.
Table 10-13 Version description of the WSD9
Item Description
Functional
version
Three functional versions of the WSD9 board are available: TN11, TN12
and TN13.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-19
Item Description
Similarity The TN11WSD9, TN12WSD9 and TN13WSD9 boards share the same
functioning principle.
Difference The wavelength of the TN11WSD9 board is separated at 100 GHz channel
spacing, and the board occupies two slots.
The wavelength of the TN12WSD9 board is separated at 100 GHz channel
spacing, and the board occupies two slots.
The wavelength of the TN13WSD9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel
spacing, and the board occupies three slots.
Replacement The TN12WSD9 and TN11WSD9 boards share the same functionality and
can be replaced with each other. But after the TN11WSD9 board is replaced
with the TN12WSD9 board, the SCC software need be upgraded.
The boards of other versions cannot be replaced with each other.

Type
Table 10-14 lists the types of the WSD9.
Table 10-14 Type description of the WSD9
Board Type Description
TN12WSD9 A01 The wavelength of the board
is separated at 100 GHz
channel spacing in C band.
TN13WSD9 C01 The wavelength of the board
is separated at 50 GHz
channel spacing in C band.

10.3.2 Application
The WSD9 is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the
WSM9 or the RMU9, the WSD9 realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM
network.
The single-channel or multi-channel signals to be dropped at the local station are output through
the interfaces of the WSD9 based on the configuration.
If the dropped signal is a multi-channel signal, it is sent to the optical demultiplexer unit for
demultiplexing. Then, the demultiplexed signals enter corresponding OTUs and are sent to the
client-side equipment at the local station.
If the dropped signal is a single-channel signal, it is directly sent to the OTU at the local station.
For the position of the WSD9 in the DWDM system, see Figure 10-7.
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 10-7 Position of the WSD9 in the DWDM system
DCM
O A
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O A
O A
DCM
WSD9
DMUX
DMUX
WSM9
MUX
WSM9
MUX
WSD9 O A
Client-side Client-side
Client-side Client-side
8
8
8
8
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength
at the same time.
10.3.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the WSD9 are dynamic grooming of wavelengths,
online optical performance monitoring, and alarms and performance events monitoring.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 10-15.
Table 10-15 Functions and features of the WSD9
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or
chain network can output any wavelength combination to any
interface so as to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths.
WDM specification Supports the DWDM specification.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical
signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer
unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the
services.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-21
Function and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to
report the alarms and performance events of the board.
Optical power
adjustment
Provides the function to adjust the optical power of each channel.

10.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The WSD9 board consists of the optical module, temperature and optical power detection
module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 10-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9.
Figure 10-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9
EXPO
Temperature and optical power deteciton module
Temperature
detection
MONO
Optical module
SCC
Splitter
PIN
DM2 DM8
WSS optical module
IN
MONI
Splitter
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
DM1
Signal Flow
The main path signal is received through the IN interface. The single-channel or multi-channel
signals to be dropped at the local station are output through the DM1-DM8 interfaces based on
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
the configuration. Other channels pass through the station and are output through the EXPO
interface.
Module Function
l Optical module
The optical module can combine any wavelengths and transmit the signals through the
DM1-DM8 and EXPO interfaces.
The wavelength selecting switch (WSS) optical module contains the VOA module that
realizes the power adjustment at the wavelength level.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for input and output
optical power detection.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to
the MONI/MONO interface for detection.
l Temperature and optical power detection module
Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature.
Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
10.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the WSD9 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 10-9 shows the WSD9 front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-23
Figure 10-9 WSD9 front panel
WSD9
WSD9
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D
M
1
D
M
2
D
M
3
D
M
4
E
X
P
O
I
N
D
M
5
D
M
6
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
D
M
7
D
M
8
WSD9
WSD9
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
D
M
1
D
M
2
D
M
3
D
M
4
E
X
P
O
I
N
D
M
5
D
M
6
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
D
M
7
D
M
8
TN13WSD9
TN11WSD9/
TN12WSD9
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the WSD9 front panel. Table 10-16 lists the type and function
of each interface.
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 10-16 Types and functions of the WSD9 interfaces
Interface Type Function
DM1-DM8 LC Transmit the single-channel or multi-channel signal
separated from the main path. If the signal is a multi-
channel signal, it is sent to the optical demultiplexer
unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. If the
signal is a single-channel signal, it is directly sent to the
optical transponder unit.
EXPO LC Transmits the main path signal.
IN LC Receives the main path signal.
MONI LC Connected to the input interface of the spectrum
analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical
performance monitoring for the received main path
signal.
The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite
signal at the IN port (15dB lower than the actual signal
power).
MONO LC Connected to the output interface of the spectrum
analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical
performance monitoring for the transmitted main path
signal.
The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite
signal at the EXPO port (15dB lower than the actual
signal power).

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).
10.3.6 Valid Slots
The TN11WSD9 and TN12WSD9 occupies two slots. The TN13WSD9 occupies three slots.
The valid slots for TN11WSD9 and TN12WSD9 are IU1-IU16 in the subrack. The valid slots
for the TN13WSD9 are IU1-IU15 in the subrack.
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack,
so the slot number of TN11WSD9 and TN12WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number
of the left one of the two occupied slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSD9 board displayed
on the NM is the number of the left one of the three occupied slots.
For example, if the TN12WSD9 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the WSD9
displayed on the NM is IU1. If the TN13WSD9 occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number
of the WSD9 displayed on the NM is IU1.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-25
10.3.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 10-17.
Table 10-17 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSD9 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN 1
EXPO 2
DM1-DM8 3-10
MONI 11
MONO 12

Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB)
10.3.8 Specifications of the WSD9
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 10-18 Optical specifications of the WSD9
Item Unit Value
Adjacent
channel spacing
TN11WSD9 GHz 100
TN12WSD9 100
TN13WSD9 50
Insertion loss
IN-DMx
a
IN-EXPO
dB
8
b
Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to 1561
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
0.5 dB spectral width nm >0.35
Adjacent channel isolation dB >25
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB >30
Extinction ratio dB 35
Reconfiguration time s 3
Optical return loss dB 30
Directivity dB 35
Attenuation range of each of dropping
wavelengths
dB 0-15
Attenuation precision of each of dropping
wavelengths
dB 1
Polarization dependence loss dB 1
Dimension - 19
NOTE
a: DMx represents the DM1-DM8 interface.
b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
Dimensions of front panel:
l TN11WSD9: 264.6 mm (H) 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W))
l TN12WSD9: 264.6 mm (H) 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W))
l TN13WSD9: 264.6 mm (H) 76.2 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W))
Weight:
l TN11WSD9: 4.9 lb. (2.2 kg)
l TN12WSD9: 4.9 lb. (2.2 kg)
l TN13WSD9: 10.6 lb. (4.8 kg)
Power Consumption
Board The maximum power
consumption at 25
(77) (W)
The maximum power
consumption at 55
(131) (W)
TN11WSD9 17.0 18.7
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-27
Board The maximum power
consumption at 25
(77) (W)
The maximum power
consumption at 55
(131) (W)
TN12WSD9 30.0 35.0
TN13WSD9 30.0 35.0

10.4 WSM9
WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board
10.4.1 Version Description
Three functional versions of the WSM9 board are available: TN11, TN12 and TN13. The main
difference among the three versions is that the channel spacing of the wavelength is different.
10.4.2 Application
The WSM9 is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the
WSD9, the WSM9 realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
10.4.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the WSM9 are dynamic grooming of wavelengths,
online optical performance monitoring, and alarms and performance events monitoring.
10.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The WSM9 board consists of four parts: the optical module, temperature and optical power
detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
10.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the WSM9 front panel.
10.4.6 Valid Slots
The TN11WSM9 and TN12WSM9 occupies two slots. The TN13WSM9 occupies three slots.
The valid slots for TN11WSM9 and and TN12WSM9 are IU1-IU16 in the subrack. The valid
slots for the TN13WSM9 are IU1-IU15 in the subrack.
10.4.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
10.4.8 Specifications of the WSM9
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
10.4.1 Version Description
Three functional versions of the WSM9 board are available: TN11, TN12 and TN13. The main
difference among the three versions is that the channel spacing of the wavelength is different.
Version
Table 10-19 lists the version description of the WSM9.
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 10-19 Version description of the WSM9
Item Description
Functional
version
Three functional versions of the WSM9 board are available: TN11, TN12
and TN13.
Similarity The TN11WSM9, TN12WSM9 and TN13WSM9 boards share the same
functioning principle.
Difference The wavelength of the TN11WSM9 board is separated at 100 GHz channel
spacing, and the board occupies two slots.
The wavelength of the TN12WSM9 board is separated at 100 GHz channel
spacing, and the board occupies two slots.
The wavelength of the TN13WSM9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel
spacing, and the board occupies three slots.
Replacement The TN12WSM9 and TN11WSM9 boards share the same functionality
and can be replaced with each other. But after the TN11WSM9 board is
replaced with the TN12WSM9 board, the SCC software need be upgraded.
The boards of other versions cannot be replaced with each other.

Type
Table 10-20 lists the types of the WSM9.
Table 10-20 Type description of the WSM9
Board Type Description
TN12WSM9 A01 The wavelength of the board
is separated at 100 GHz
channel spacing in C band.
TN13WSM9 C01 The wavelength of the board
is separated at 50 GHz
channel spacing in C band.

10.4.2 Application
The WSM9 is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the
WSD9, the WSM9 realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
The single-channel or multi-channel signals to be added to the main path are input through the
interfaces of WSM9.
If the added signal is a mutli-channel signal, it is received after being multiplexed by the optical
multiplexer unit. If the added signal is a single-channel signal, it is directly received after being
converted by the OTU.
For the position of the WSM9 in the DWDM system, see Figure 10-10.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-29
Figure 10-10 Position of the WSM9 in the DWDM system
DCM
O A
WSM9
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O A
O A
O A
DCM
WSD9
DMUX
DMUX
WSD9
MUX
WSM9
MUX
Client-side Client-side
Client-side Client-side
8 8
8 8
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength
at the same time.
10.4.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the WSM9 are dynamic grooming of wavelengths,
online optical performance monitoring, and alarms and performance events monitoring.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 10-21.
Table 10-21 Functions and features of the WSM9
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or
chain network can receive any wavelengths at the local station through
any interfaces so as to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths.
WDM specification Supports the DWDM specification.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical
signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer
unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the
services.
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Function and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to
report the alarms and performance events of the board.
Optical power
adjustment
Provides the function to adjust the optical power of each channel.

10.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The WSM9 board consists of four parts: the optical module, temperature and optical power
detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 10-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9.
Figure 10-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9
OUT
Temperature and optical power deteciton module
Temperature
detection
MONO
Optical module
SCC
Splitter
PIN
AM1 AM2 AM8
WSS optical module
EXPI
MONI
Splitter
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-31
Signal Flow
The board receives the multiplexed optical signals of the main optical path through the EXPI
optical interface. The single-wavelength or multiplexed optical signals to be added are input
through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces.
l If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for
processing and then input to the WSM9 board through the AMn optical interface.
l If single wavelength is to be added, the signal can be directly input to the WSM9 board
from the optical transponder unit through the AMn interface.
After the main optical path input through the EXPI optical interface is multiplexed with the
optical wavelength signals added through the AMn optical interface, the multiplexed signals are
output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module
Selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs it through AM1-AM8 or EXPI.
The wavelength selecting switch (WSS) optical module contains a VOA module, which
realizes the optical power adjustment on a wavelength level.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for input and output
optical power detection.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to
the MONI/MONO interface for detection.
l Temperature and optical power detection module
Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature.
Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
10.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the WSM9 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 10-12 shows the WSM9 front panel.
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 10-12 WSM9 front panel
TN13WSM9
WSM9
WSM9
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
A
M
1
A
M
2
A
M
3
A
M
4
O
U
T
E
X
P
I
A
M
5
A
M
6
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
A
M
7
A
M
8
WSM9
WSM9
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
A
M
1
A
M
2
A
M
3
A
M
4
O
U
T
E
X
P
I
A
M
5
A
M
6
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
A
M
7
A
M
8
TN11WSM9/
TN12WSM9
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the WSM9 front panel. Table 10-22 lists the type and function
of each interface.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-33
Table 10-22 Types and functions of the WSM9 interfaces
Interface Type Function
AM1-AM8 LC Receive the single-channel signal or multi-channel
signal that are to be multiplexed into the main path.
OUT LC Transmits the main path signal.
EXPI LC Receives the main path signal.
MONI LC Connected to the input interface of the spectrum
analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical
performance monitoring for the received main path
signal.
The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite
signal at the EXPI port (15dB lower than the actual
signal power).
MONO LC Connected to the output interface of the spectrum
analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical
performance monitoring for the transmitted main path
signal.
The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite
signal at the OUT port (15dB lower than the actual
signal power).

Laser Safety Level
TN11WSM9 and TN12WSM9:
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
TN13WSM9:
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).
10.4.6 Valid Slots
The TN11WSM9 and TN12WSM9 occupies two slots. The TN13WSM9 occupies three slots.
The valid slots for TN11WSM9 and and TN12WSM9 are IU1-IU16 in the subrack. The valid
slots for the TN13WSM9 are IU1-IU15 in the subrack.
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack,
so the slot number of TN11WSM9 and TN12WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number
of the left one of the two occupied slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSM9 board displayed
on the NM is the number of the left one of the three occupied slots.
For example, if the TN12WSM9 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the WSM9
displayed on the NM is IU1. If the TN13WSM9 occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number
of the TN13WSM9 displayed on the NM is IU1.
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
10.4.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 10-23.
Table 10-23 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSM9 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
EXPI 1
OUT 2
AM1-AM8 3-10
MONI 11
MONO 12

Configuration Parameters
Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB)
10.4.8 Specifications of the WSM9
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 10-24 Optical specifications of the WSM9
Item Unit Value
Type - TN11WSM9/
TN12WSM9
TN13WSM9
Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100 50
Insertion
loss
AMx
a
-OUT
EXPI-OUT
dB
8
b
8
b
Operating wavelength range nm 1529.55-1560.61 1529 to 1561
0.5 dB spectral width nm >0.22 >0.16
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-35
Item Unit Value
Adjacent channel isolation dB >25 >25
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB >30 >30
Extinction ratio dB 35 35
Reconfiguration time s 3 3
Optical return loss dB 30 30
Directivity dB 35 35
Attenuation range of each of
adding wavelengths
dB 0-15 0-15
Attenuation precision of each of
adding wavelengths
dB 1 1
Polarization dependence loss dB 1 1
Dimension - 91 91
NOTE
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface.
b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
Dimensions of front panel:
l TN11WSM9: 264.6 mm (H) 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W))
l TN12WSM9: 264.6 mm (H) 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W))
l TN13WSM9: 264.6 mm (H) 76.2 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W))
Weight:
l TN11WSM9: 4.9 lb. (2.2 kg)
l TN12WSM9: 4.9 lb. (2.2 kg)
l TN13WSM9: 10.6 lb. (4.8 kg)
Power Consumption
Board The maximum power
consumption at 25
(77) (W)
The maximum power
consumption at 55
(131) (W)
TN11WSM9 17.0 18.7
TN12WSM9 30.0 35.0
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board The maximum power
consumption at 25
(77) (W)
The maximum power
consumption at 55
(131) (W)
TN13WSM9 30.0 35.0

10.5 WSMD4
WSMD4: 4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board
10.5.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the WSMD4 board is available, that is TN11.
10.5.2 Application
The WSMD4 is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the
optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit, and the optical add and drop multiplexing unit,
WSMD4 realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
10.5.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the WSMD4 are service broadcasting, dynamic
grooming of wavelengths, online optical performance monitoring, and alarms and performance
events monitoring.
10.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The WSMD4 board consists of the RDU optical module, WSS optical module, temperature and
optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
10.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the WSMD4 front panel.
10.5.6 Valid Slots
The WSMD4 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the WSMD4 are IU1-IU16 in the subrack.
10.5.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
10.5.8 Specifications of the WSMD4
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
10.5.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the WSMD4 board is available, that is TN11.
Type
Table 10-25 lists the version description of the WSMD4.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-37
Table 10-25 Version description of the WSMD4
Board Type Description
TN11WSMD4 01 Processes the even
wavelengths in C band.
02 Processes the odd
wavelengths in C band.

10.5.2 Application
The WSMD4 is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the
optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit, and the optical add and drop multiplexing unit,
WSMD4 realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
For the position of the WSMD4 in the DWDM system, see Figure 10-13.
Figure 10-13 Position of the WSMD4 in the DWDM system
West
ODF
East
ODF
WSMD4 WSMD4
F
I
U
F
I
U
WSMD4
F
I
U
F
I
U
WSMD4
West client
side
North
ODF
South
ODF
East client
side
North client
side
South client
side
10.5.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the WSMD4 are service broadcasting, dynamic
grooming of wavelengths, online optical performance monitoring, and alarms and performance
events monitoring.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 10-26.
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 10-26 Functions and features of the WSMD4
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Provides service broadcasting function, and configures any
wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or chain network
can receive any wavelengths at the local station through any
interfaces, and output any wavelength combination to any interface,
so as to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths.
WDM specification Supports the DWDM specification.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical
signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer
unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the
services.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to
report the alarms and performance events of the board.
Optical power
adjustment
Provides the function to adjust the optical power of any add
wavelengths at the local station.

10.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The WSMD4 board consists of the RDU optical module, WSS optical module, temperature and
optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 10-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-39
Figure 10-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4
OUT
Temperature and optical power deteciton module
Temperature
detection
MONO
Optical module
SCC
Splitter
PIN
IN
MONI
Splitter
D
M
1
D
M
2
D
M
4
RDU optical
module
A
M
1
A
M
2
A
M
4
WSS optical
module
D
M
3
A
M
3
PIN
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal flow
The optical signals of the main path is accessed through the IN interface. It is broadcasted into
four same optical signals through the ROADM demux unit (RDU) optical module. Then, the
board outputs the single-channel or multiplexed signals to be dropped at the local station through
the DM1 interface as per the configuration. Other wavelengths that are not dropped at the local
station are output through the DM2-DM4 optical interfaces.
Local add optical signal (single-channel or multiplexed signals) is input to the board through
the AM1 optical interface. If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to
the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSMD4 board through the AM1 optical
interface; if single wavelength is to be added, the signal can be directly input to the WSDM4
board from the optical transponder unit through the AM1 interface. Optical signals cross-
connected from other directions are input to the board through the AM1-AM4 optical interfaces.
Then, they are multiplexed with the added wavelengths at the local station. The multiplexed
signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module function
l Optical module
The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through any of
the following optical interfaces: AM1, AM2, AM3 and AM4.
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
The WSS optical module contains the VOA module that realizes the power adjustment
at the wavelength level.
The RDU optical module selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs it through
DM1-DM4. Realizes the broadcasting from wavelength signals to four ports.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and sends them to
MONI/MONO for detection.
l Temperature and optical power detection module
Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature.
Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
10.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the WSMD4 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 10-15 shows the WSMD4 front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-41
Figure 10-15 WSMD4 front panel
WSMD4
WSMD4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D
M
1
A
M
1
D
M
2
A
M
2
O
U
T
I
N
D
M
3
A
M
3
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
D
M
4
A
M
4
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the WSMD4 front panel. Table 10-27 lists the type and
function of each interface.
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 10-27 Types and functions of the WSMD4 interfaces
Interface Type Function
AM1-AM4 LC Receives the single-channel signal or multiplexed
signal from the local station or other stations. Then, the
accessed signal is multiplexed into the main path.
DM1-DM4 LC Transmits the multiplexed signals to be output at the
local station or other stations to the optical
demultiplexing unit or the optical add/drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT LC Transmits the main path signal.
IN LC Receives the main path signal.
MONI LC Connected to the input interface of the spectrum
analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical
performance monitoring for the received main path
signal.
The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite
signal at the EXPI port (15dB lower than the actual
signal power).
MONO LC Connected to the output interface of the spectrum
analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical
performance monitoring for the transmitted main path
signal.
The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite
signal at the OUT port (15dB lower than the actual
signal power).

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).
10.5.6 Valid Slots
The WSMD4 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the WSMD4 are IU1-IU16 in the subrack.
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack,
so the slot number of the WSMD4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of
the two occupied slots.
For example, if the WSMD4 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the WSMD4
displayed on the NM is IU1.
10.5.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-43
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 10-28.
Table 10-28 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSMD4 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN 1
DM1 2
AM1 3
OUT 4
DM2-DM4 5 to 7
AM2-AM4 8 to 10
MONO 11
MONI 12

Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Configure Band
Configure Working Band Parity
Actual Band
Actual Working Band Parity
10.5.8 Specifications of the WSMD4
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 10-29 lists the optical specifications of the WSMD4.
Table 10-29 Optical specifications of the WSMD4
Item Unit Value
Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561
Insertion loss
AMx
a
-OUT
dB
8
b
10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
10-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
IN-DMx
a

0.5 dB spectral width nm >0.22
Adjacent channel isolation dB >25
Extinction ratio dB 35
Reconfiguration time s 3
Optical return loss dB 30
Directivity dB 35
Attenuation range per add wavelength dB 0-15
Attenuation accuracy per add wavelength dB 1
Polarization dependence loss dB 1
Dimension - 4
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM4 interface.
DMx represents the DM1-DM4 interface.
b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 7.1 lb. (3.2 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 17.0W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 18.7W
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-45
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
About This Chapter
11.1 CRPC
CRPC: case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C band
11.2 HBA
HBA: high-power booster amplifier board
11.3 OAU1
OAU1: optical amplifying unit
11.4 OBU1
OBU1: optical booster unit
11.5 OBU2
OBU2: optical booster unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-1
11.1 CRPC
CRPC: case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C band
11.1.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the CRPC board is available, that is TN11.
11.1.2 Application
The CRPC is a type of optical amplifier unit and adopts the backward pumping technology. It
supports the transmission over ultra-long distance and the application of the 40G OTU. It can
generate multi-channel pump light of high power. The CRPC must be used with the EDFA.
11.1.3 Functions and Features
The main function and feature supported by the CRPC is online optical performance monitoring.
11.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The CRPC board consists of the Raman pump optical module, driving and detection module,
control and communication module, and power supply module.
11.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the CRPC front panel.
11.1.6 Valid Slots
The CRPC is a case-shaped Raman amplifier. It is put outside the cabinet and not installed in
the subrack. Its Ethernet interface is connected to the ETH1/ETH2 of the AUX or the ETH3
interface of the EFI board for the communications with the SCC. The logical slots of CRPC is
slot 28 to slot 31 on the T2000.
11.1.7 Dip Switch and Jumper
There are two groups of jumpers on the CRPC boards. The two groups are identified as J3 and
J4.
11.1.8 Characteristic Code for of CRPC
The characteristic code for the CRPC consists of one character and two digits, indicating the
gain of the optical signals processed by the board.
11.1.9 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
11.1.10 Specifications of the CRPC
Specifications include optical specifications, weight and power consumption.
11.1.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the CRPC board is available, that is TN11.
Type
Table 11-1 lists the types of the CRPC.
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 11-1 Type description of the CRPC
Board Type Description
CRPC 01 Adopts the backward pumping technology.
03 Adopts the forward pumping technology.

11.1.2 Application
The CRPC is a type of optical amplifier unit and adopts the backward pumping technology. It
supports the transmission over ultra-long distance and the application of the 40G OTU. It can
generate multi-channel pump light of high power. The CRPC must be used with the EDFA.
CAUTION
Always turn off the pump laser of the CRPC before removing or inserting the fiber of the CRPC.
For the position of the CRPC in the WDM system, see Figure 11-1 and Figure 11-2.
Figure 11-1 Position of the CRPC in the WDM system (backward pump)
CRPC
CRPC
OTU
OBU1
OAU1
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OAU1
OBU1
F
I
U
F
I
U
F
I
U
F
I
U
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
Figure 11-2 Position of the CRPC in the WDM system (forward pump)
OTU
OBU1
OAU1
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
OTU
OTU
OTU
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OAU1
OBU1
F
I
U
F
I
U
F
I
U
F
I
U
CRPC
CRPC
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
11.1.3 Functions and Features
The main function and feature supported by the CRPC is online optical performance monitoring.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 11-2.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-3
Table 11-2 Functions and features of the CRPC
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Generates multi-channel pump light of high power, providing
energy for the amplification of signals in the fiber.
l Realizes the distributed online amplification of signals over long
distance with wide bandwidth and low noise.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical
signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer
unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the
services.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Detects the optical power of the pump laser, temperature control
current, pump current, and back-facet current.

11.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The CRPC board consists of the Raman pump optical module, driving and detection module,
control and communication module, and power supply module.
The CRPC is used at the receive end of the system, making use of the stimulated Raman scattering
effect to amplify the optical signals during transmission.
The CRPC is located before the receiver. The pump light travels in the reverse direction of the
signal light. Figure 11-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC.
The CRPC is located after the transmit end. The pump light travels in the same direction of the
signal light. Figure 11-4 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC.
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 11-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC (backward pump)
SYS
Driving and detection module
Pumping
current and
temperature
control
Detection for
temperature
SCC
PIN
Raman pump optical module
Splitter
Pump source
Signal
Pump light
Signal
Detection for
pump light
power and
current
MON
LINE
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from PDU
Required
voltage
Fuse
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-5
Figure 11-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC (forward pump)
SYS
Driving and detection module
Pumping
current and
temperature
control
Detection for
temperature
SCC
PIN
Raman pump optical module
Splitter
Pump source
Signal
Pump light
Signal
Detection for
pump light
power and
current
MON
LINE
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from PDU
Required
voltage
Fuse
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Signal Flow
l Backward pump
The pump source of the CRPC sends the pump light to the WDM side through the LINE
optical interface. On the line, the signals that are amplified through the distributed
amplification are input through the LINE interface, then the splitter splits them into two,
among which the service optical signals are output through the SYS interface. A few
supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8)
or test instrument through the MON interface for online optical performance monitoring.
The Ethernet interface of the CRPC is connected to the ETH1/ETH2 interface of the AUX
or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communication with the SCC.
l Forward pump
The signal light is input through the SYS interface and output to the optical line through
the LINE interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum
analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8) or test instrument through the MON interface for online
optical performance monitoring. The pump light that is generated by the CRPC is output
to the optical line through the LINE interface in the same direction of the signal light, to
realize the distributed amplification of the optical signal. The Ethernet interface of the
CRPC is connected to the ETH1/ETH2 interface of the AUX or the ETH3 interface of the
EFI board for the communication with the SCC.
Module Function
l Raman pump optical module
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
The laser in the pump source generates the pump light and sends the light to the optical
line for transmission. Raman pump optical module makes use of the stimulated Raman
scattering effect of the fiber to amplify the optical signals during transmission.
The splitter splits one channel of optical signals from the pump source module into two
channels of signals of different power. One of them are output through the SYS interface
and transmitted in the main optical path. The other channel of signals are output to the
MON interface for spectrum detection and supervising.
l Driving and detection module
Detects in real time the optical power of service signals.
Detects in real time the drive current, backlight current, cooling current and operating
temperature of the pump laser inside the pump optical module.
Drives the pump laser inside the pump optical module.
Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
11.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the CRPC front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 11-5 shows the CRPC front panel.
Figure 11-5 CRPC front panel
:
WARNING: FIBERS MUST
BE CONNECTED SEFORE
POWER UP
!
AVOIDEYEORSKIN
EXPOSURETODIRECTOR
CLASS4LASER
PRODUCT
SCATTEREDRADIATION
LASER
RADIATION
ALM
CRPC
RUN
LINE SYS MON
RS232-1 RS232-2 LAN
Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel.
l Running status indicator (RUN) - green
l Service alarm indicator (ALM) - red
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-7
Interfaces
There are six interfaces on the CRPC front panel. Table 11-3 lists the type and function of each
interface.
Table 11-3 Types and functions of the CRPC interfaces
Interface Type Function
LINE LSH/APC Receives the line optical signal.
SYS LC Transmits the amplified signal to the FIU.
MON LC Connected to the MCA4 or MCA8, accomplishes the
online performance monitoring.
The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal
at the SYS port (20dB lower than the actual signal
power).
LAN RJ-45 Connected to the ETH1/ETH2 of the AUX interface or
the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the
communications with the SCC.
RS232-1/
RS232-2
- RS232 communication interface

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 4 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is above 27 dBm (500 mW)).
11.1.6 Valid Slots
The CRPC is a case-shaped Raman amplifier. It is put outside the cabinet and not installed in
the subrack. Its Ethernet interface is connected to the ETH1/ETH2 of the AUX or the ETH3
interface of the EFI board for the communications with the SCC. The logical slots of CRPC is
slot 28 to slot 31 on the T2000.
11.1.7 Dip Switch and Jumper
There are two groups of jumpers on the CRPC boards. The two groups are identified as J3 and
J4.
Figure 11-6 shows the number of each jumper.
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 11-6 Jumpers on the CRPC board
CPU
J3 J4
12
9
1
0
1
0
1 2
9
CRPC
Jumpers 9 to 10 in J3 and 1 to 6 in J4 are used for internal identification on the board. To ensure
the normal operation of the board, follow the requirements below to set the jumpers.
l Do not connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J3.
l Do not connect jumpers 3 to 4 in J3.
l Do not connect jumpers 5 to 6 in J3.
l Do not connect jumpers 7 to 8 in J3.
l Do not connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3.
l Connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J4.
l Connect jumpers 3 to 4 in J4.
l Connect jumpers 5 to 6 in J4.
Jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are used to set the IP of the CRPC board. When several CRPC boards
are used in an NE, an IP for each board is required to prevent IP conflict. The following are
jumper setting regulations:
l When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board IP is 192.168.0.28.
l When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board IP
is 192.168.0.29.
l When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board IP
is 192.168.0.30.
l When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board IP is 192.168.0.31.
11.1.8 Characteristic Code for of CRPC
The characteristic code for the CRPC consists of one character and two digits, indicating the
gain of the optical signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 11-4.
Table 11-4 Characteristic code for the CRPC
Code Meaning Description
The first character - This character is always G.
The two digits Gain Indicate the gain value.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-9
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CRPC is G10, indicating 10 dB gain.
11.1.9 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 11-5.
Table 11-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CRPC displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
LINE 1
SYS 2
MON 3

Configuration Parameters
Laser Status
Board Work Type
Configure Band
Configure Working Band Parity
Actual Band
Actual Working Band Parity
11.1.10 Specifications of the CRPC
Specifications include optical specifications, weight and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 11-6 Optical specifications of the CRPC
Item Un
it
Value
CRPC01 CRPC03
Pump wavelength range nm 1400-1500 1400-1500
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561 1529-1561
Maximum pump power dB
m
29 29.5
Channel gain on G.652 fiber dB 10 >10
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Un
it
Value
CRPC01 CRPC03
Channel gain on LEAF fiber dB 12 NA
Effective noise figure on G.652
fiber
dB 0 NA
Effective noise figure on LEAF
fiber
dB -1 NA
Polarization dependence loss dB 0.5 0.5
Output connector type - LSH/APC, LC/PC LSH/APC, LC/PC

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board: 345.0 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 76.0 mm (W) (13.8 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 3.0 in. (W) )
Weight
l CRPC01: 8.8 1b. (4.0 kg)
l CRPC03: 9.2 1b.(4.2 kg)
Power Consumption
Board The maximum power
consumption at 25
(77) (W)
The maximum power
consumption at 55
(131) (W)
CRPC01 110.0 121.0
CRPC03 70.0 77.0

11.2 HBA
HBA: high-power booster amplifier board
11.2.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the HBA board is available, that is TN11.
11.2.2 Application
The HBA is a type of optical amplifier unit. The HBA realizes the amplification of optical signals.
It can be used at the transmit end.
11.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the HBA are online optical performance
monitoring, gain lock, and transient control.
11.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-11
The HBA board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
11.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the HBA front panel.
11.2.6 Valid Slots
The HBA occupies three slots. The valid slots for the HBA are IU2-IU16 in the subrack.
11.2.7 Characteristic Code for the HBA
The characteristic code for the HBA consists of seven characters and digits, indicating the band,
the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the
board.
11.2.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
11.2.9 Specifications of the HBA
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
11.2.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the HBA board is available, that is TN11.
11.2.2 Application
The HBA is a type of optical amplifier unit. The HBA realizes the amplification of optical signals.
It can be used at the transmit end.
For the position of the HBA in the WDM system, see Figure 11-7.
Figure 11-7 Position of the HBA in the WDM system
OTU
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
HBA
OAU1
F
I
U
OTU
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
HBA
OAU1
F
I
U
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
11.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the HBA are online optical performance
monitoring, gain lock, and transient control.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 11-7.
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 11-7 Functions and features of the HBA
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Only applied on the transmit edge of the OTM station in the system
that covers a long fiber span transmission.
l The HBA can amplify the input optical signals in C band. The total
wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm.
l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans
without electrical regeneration.
Typical gain The typical gain of the HBA is 29 dB.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical
signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer
unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the
services.
Gain lock function The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or
dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not
affect the signal gain of other channels.
Transient control
function
The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When
channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation
of the optical power in the path so as to realize the smooth upgrading
and expansion.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
l Detects and reports the optical power.
l Monitors the temperature of the pump laser.
l Detects the pump driving current, back-facet current, pump cooling
current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature
of the board.

11.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The HBA board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 11-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the HBA.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-13
Figure 11-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the HBA
OUT IN
MON
Splitter
EDFA optical module
Driving and detection module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
PIN
Driving
current
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA
optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks
the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l EDFA optical module
Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification.
The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal
to realize the optical power amplification function.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power
detection.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to
the MON interface for detection.
l Driving and detection module
Detects in real time the optical power of service signals.
Detects in real time the drive current, backlight current, cooling current and operating
temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA.
Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module.
Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module.
l Control and communication module
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
11.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the HBA front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 11-9 shows the HBA front panel.
Figure 11-9 HBA front panel
HBA
HBA
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
M
O
N
I
N
O
U
T
LASER
RADIATION
AVOIDEXPOSURE
TOBEAM
CLASS3BLASER
PRODUCT
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-15
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the HBA front panel.Table 11-8 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 11-8 Types and functions of the HBA interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified.
OUT LSH/APC Transmits the amplified signal.
MON LC Connected to the MCA4 or MCA8 or WMU,
accomplishes the online performance monitoring.
The MON port is a 1/999 tap of the total composite
signal at the OUT port (30dB lower than the actual
signal power).

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 3B (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 22.15 dBm (164 mW) to 27 dBm (500mW)).
11.2.6 Valid Slots
The HBA occupies three slots. The valid slots for the HBA are IU2-IU16 in the subrack.
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the middle slot of the three
occupied slots in the subrack, so the slot number of the HBA board displayed on the NM is the
number of the middle slot.
For example, if the HBA occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the HBA displayed
on the NM is IU2.
11.2.7 Characteristic Code for the HBA
The characteristic code for the HBA consists of seven characters and digits, indicating the band,
the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the
board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given inTable 11-9.
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 11-9 Characteristic code for the HBA
Code Meaning Description
The first character Band Indicates the band of the
optical signals processed by
the board. The value C
represents C band; the value L
represents L band.
The second character - The second character is
always G.
The third to the fourth digits Gain The third to the fourth digits
indicate the gain value.
The fifth character - The fifth character is always I.
The sixth and the seventh
digits
Maximum nominal input
optical power
Indicate the maximum
nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11HBA is CG29I-8. This code indicates that the
HBA board is used in C band, the gain is 29 dB, and the maximum nominal input optical power
is -8 dBm.
11.2.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 11-10.
Table 11-10 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the HBA displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN 1
OUT 2
MON 3

Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
Laser Status
Gain (dB)
Nominal Gain (dB)
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-17
Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)
Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)
Rated Optical Power
Configure Band
Configure Working Band Parity
Actual Band
Actual Working Band Parity
11.2.9 Specifications of the HBA
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 11-11 Optical specifications of the HBA
Item Unit Value
Type - TN11HBA
Channel allocation nm 40-channel system: 192.1 THz-196.05
THz
10-channel system: Any two of the last
20 wavelengths are spaced at 200 GHz.
Nominal input power range dBm -19 to -3
Typical input power of a single
wavelength
dBm 40-channel system: -19
10-channel system: -13
Noise figure (NF) dB <8
Output reflectance dB <-45
Maximum total output power dBm 26
Gain response time on adding/dropping of
channels
ms <10
Channel gain dB 291
Gain flatness dB 2.5
Polarization dependent loss dB <0.5
Polarization mode dispersion ps <0.5

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W))
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l Weight: 6.6 lb. (3.0 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 47 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 75 W
11.3 OAU1
OAU1: optical amplifying unit
11.3.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the OAU1 board is available, that is TN11.
11.3.2 Application
The OAU1 is a type of optical amplifier unit. The OAU1 realizes the amplification of optical
signals. It can be used at the transmit end and the receive end.
11.3.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the OAU1 are gain adjustment, online optical
performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control.
11.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The OAU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
11.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OAU1 front panel.
11.3.6 Valid Slots
The OAU1 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the OAU1 are IU2-IU17 in the subrack.
11.3.7 Characteristic Code for the OAU1
The characteristic code for the OAU1 consists of eight characters and digits, indicating the gain
range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
11.3.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
11.3.9 Specifications of the OAU1
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
11.3.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the OAU1 board is available, that is TN11.
Type
Table 11-12 lists the types of the OAU1.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-19
Table 11-12 Type description of the OAU1
Unit Type Description Gain Range
TN11OAU1 01 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. 20 dB to 31 dB
02 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. 20 dB to 31 dB
03 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. 24 dB to 36 dB
05 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. 23 dB to 34 dB

11.3.2 Application
The OAU1 is a type of optical amplifier unit. The OAU1 realizes the amplification of optical
signals. It can be used at the transmit end and the receive end.
For the position of the OAU1 in the WDM system, see Figure 11-10.
Figure 11-10 Position of the OAU1 in the WDM system
OTU
OAU1
OBU1
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OBU1
OAU1
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
11.3.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the OAU1 are gain adjustment, online optical
performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 11-13.
Table 11-13 Functions and features of the OAU1
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Amplify the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths
range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm.
l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans
without electrical regeneration.
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Function and
Feature
Description
Gain adjustment The OAU101/OAU102 continuously adjusts the gain from 20 dB to
31 dB based on the input optical power.
The OAU103 continuously adjusts the gain from 24 dB to 36 dB based
on the input optical power.
The OAU105 continuously adjusts the gain from 23 dB to 34 dB based
on the input optical power.
NOTE
11.3.9 Specifications of the OAU1 only provides the value of nominal gain.
Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal
gain.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical
signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer
unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the
services.
Gain lock function The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or
dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not
affect the signal gain of other channels.
Transient control
function
The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When
channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation
of the optical power in the path so as to realize the smooth upgrading
and expansion.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
l Detects and reports the optical power.
l Monitors the temperature of the pump laser.
l Detects the pump driving current, back-facet current, pump cooling
current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature
of the board.

11.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The OAU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 11-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OAU1.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-21
Figure 11-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the OAU1
OUT IN
MON RDC TDC
EDFA optical module Splitter
Driving and detection module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
PIN
Driving
current
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA
optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks
the gain of the signal. Then the signal is sent to the DCM through the TDC interface for dispersion
compensation and returns to the EDFA optical module through the RDC interface. At last, the
amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l EDFA optical module
Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification.
The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal
to realize the optical power amplification function.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power
detection.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to
the MON interface for detection.
l Driving and detection module
Detects in real time the optical power of service signals.
Detects in real time the drive current, backlight current, cooling current and operating
temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA.
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module.
Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
11.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OAU1 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 11-12 shows the OAU1 front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-23
Figure 11-12 OAU1 front panel
OAU1
OAU1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
D
C
R
D
C
O
U
T
I
N
M
O
N
OAU1
OAU1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
D
C
R
D
C
O
U
T
I
N
M
O
N
LASER
RADIATION
AVOIDEXPOSURE
TOBEAM
CLASS3BLASER
PRODUCT
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
OAU101/OAU102/
OAU103
OAU105
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are five optical interfaces on the OAU1 front panel. Table 11-14 lists the type and function
of each interface.
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 11-14 Types and functions of the OAU1 interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified.
OUT LC Transmits the amplified signal.
TDC/RDC LC Connected to the interface of the DCM for dispersion
compensation.
MON LC Connected to the MCA4 or MCA8 or WMU,
accomplishes the online performance monitoring.
The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal
at the OUT port (20dB lower than the actual signal
power).

Laser Safety Level
OAU101, OAU102, OAU103:
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).
OAU105:
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 3B (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 22.15 dBm (164 mW) to 27 dBm (500mW)).
11.3.6 Valid Slots
The OAU1 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the OAU1 are IU2-IU17 in the subrack.
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack,
so the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of
the two occupied slots.
For example, if the OAU1 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the OAU1 displayed
on the NM is IU2.
11.3.7 Characteristic Code for the OAU1
The characteristic code for the OAU1 consists of eight characters and digits, indicating the gain
range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 11-15.
Table 11-15 Characteristic code for the OAU1
Code Meaning Description
The first character - The first character is always
G.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-25
Code Meaning Description
The second to the fifth digits Gain range Indicate the range within
which the gain can be
continuously adjusted.
The sixth character - The sixth character is always
I.
The seventh and the eighth
digits
Maximum nominal input
optical power
Indicate the maximum
nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OAU1 is G2031I0. This code indicates that
the gain can be continuously adjusted from 20 dB to 31 dB and the maximum nominal input
optical power is 0 dBm.
11.3.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 11-16.
Table 11-16 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OAU1 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN 1
OUT 4
RDC/TDC 5
MON 6

Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
Laser Status
Gain (dB)
Nominal Gain (dB)
Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)
Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)
Rated Optical Power
Configure Band
Configure Working Band Parity
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Actual Band
Actual Working Band Parity
11.3.9 Specifications of the OAU1
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 11-17 Optical specifications of the OAU101
Item Unit Value
Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to 1561 1529 to 1561 1529 to 1561
Nominal gain dB 20 26 31
Nominal input power range dBm -32 to 0 -32 to -6 -32 to -11
Input power range per
channel
40 channels dBm -32 to -16 -32 to -22 -32 to -27
80 channels dBm -32 to -19 -32 to -25 -32 to -30
Noise figure (NF)
a
dB 8.5 6.5 5.5
Input reflectance dB <-40 <-40 <-40
Output reflectance dB <-40 <-40 <-40
Pump leakage at input dBm <-30 <-30 <-30
Maximum reflectance tolerance at
input
dB -27 -27 -27
Maximum reflectance tolerance at
output
dB -27 -27 -27
Maximum total output optical power dBm 20 20 20
Gain response time on adding/
dropping of channels
ms <10 <10 <10
Channel gain dB 202 262 312
Gain flatness dB 2.0 2.0 2.0
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB 2.0 2.0 2.0
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.5 0.5 0.5
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise
figure when the noise figure adopts the typical value.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-27
Table 11-18 Optical specifications of the OAU102
Item Unit Value
Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to 1561 1529 to 1561 1529 to 1561
Nominal gain dB 20 26 31
Nominal input power range dBm -32 to -3 -32 to -9 -32 to -14
Input power range per
channel
40 channels dBm -32 to -19 -32 to -25 -32 to -30
80 channels dBm -32 to -22 -32 to -28 -32
Noise figure (NF)
a
dB 7.5 6.0 5.5
Input reflectance dB <-40 <-40 <-40
Output reflectance dB <-40 <-40 <-40
Pump leakage at input dBm <-30 <-30 <-30
Maximum reflectance tolerance at
input
dB -27 -27 -27
Maximum reflectance tolerance at
output
dB -27 -27 -27
Maximum total output optical power dBm 17 17 17
Gain response time on adding/
dropping of channels
ms <10 <10 <10
Channel gain dB 202 262 312
Gain flatness dB 2 2 2
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB 2 2 2
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.5 0.5 0.5
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise
figure when the noise figure adopts the typical value.

Table 11-19 Optical specifications of the OAU103
Item Unit Value
Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to 1561 1529 to 1561 1529 to 1561
Nominal gain dB 24 29 36
Nominal input power range dBm -32 to -4 -32 to -9 -32 to -16
Input power range
per channel
40
channels
dBm -32 to -20 -32 to -25 -32
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Unit Value
80
channels
dBm -32 to -23 -32 to -28 -32
Noise figure (NF)
a
dB 7.5 6.5 5.5
Input reflectance dB <-40 <-40 <-40
Output reflectance dB <-40 <-40 <-40
Pump leakage at input dBm <-30 <-30 <-30
Maximum reflectance tolerance at
input
dB -27 -27 -27
Maximum reflectance tolerance at
output
dB -27 -27 -27
Maximum total output optical
power
dBm 20 20 20
Gain response time on adding/
dropping of channels
ms <10 <10 <10
Channel gain dB 242 292 362
Gain flatness dB 2 2 2
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB 2 2 2
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.5 0.5 0.5
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise
figure when the noise figure adopts the typical value.

Table 11-20 Optical specifications of the OAU105
Item Unit Value
Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to 1561 1529 to 1561 1529 to 1561
Nominal gain dB 23 30 34
Nominal input power range dBm -32 to 0 -32 to -7 -32 to -11
Input power range
per channel
40
channels
dBm -32 to -16 -32 to -23 -32 to -27
80
channels
dBm -32 to -19 -32 to -26 -32 to -30
Noise figure (NF)
a
dB <8.5 <7 <6
Input reflectance dB <-40 <-40 <-40
Output reflectance dB <-40 <-40 <-40
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-29
Item Unit Value
Pump leakage at input dBm <-30 <-30 <-30
Maximum reflectance tolerance at
input
dB -27 -27 -27
Maximum reflectance tolerance at
output
dB -27 -27 -27
Maximum total output optical
power
dBm 23 23 23
Gain response time on adding/
dropping of channels
ms <10 <10 <10
Channel gain dB 232 302 342
Gain flatness dB 2 2 2
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB 2 2 2
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.5 0.5 0.5
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise
figure when the noise figure adopts the typical value.

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 4.0 lb. (1.8 kg)
Power Consumption
Board The maximum power
consumption at 25
(77)
The maximum power
consumption at 55
(131)
OAU101 25.0 31.0
OAU102 25.0 31.0
OAU103 24.0 30.0
OAU105 24.0 30.0

11.4 OBU1
OBU1: optical booster unit
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
11.4.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the OBU1 board is available, that is TN11.
11.4.2 Application
The OBU1 is a type of optical amplifier unit. The OBU1 realizes the amplification of optical
signals. The OBU1 is of three types: OBU101, OBU103 and OBU104.
11.4.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the OBU1 are online optical performance
monitoring, gain lock, and transient control.
11.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The OBU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
11.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OBU1 front panel.
11.4.6 Valid Slots
The OBU1 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the OBU1 are IU1-IU17.
11.4.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU1
The characteristic code for the OBU1 consists of six characters and digits, indicating the gain
and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
11.4.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
11.4.9 Specifications of the OBU1
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
11.4.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the OBU1 board is available, that is TN11.
Type
Table 11-21 lists the types of the OBU1.
Table 11-21 Type description of the OBU1
Unit Type Description Gain Range
TN11OBU1 01 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. 201.5 dB
03 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. 231.5 dB
04 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. 171.5 dB

11.4.2 Application
The OBU1 is a type of optical amplifier unit. The OBU1 realizes the amplification of optical
signals. The OBU1 is of three types: OBU101, OBU103 and OBU104.
For the position of the OBU1 in the WDM system, see Figure 11-13.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-31
Figure 11-13 Position of the OBU1 in the WDM system
OTU
OBU1
OBU1
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OBU1
OBU1
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
11.4.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the OBU1 are online optical performance
monitoring, gain lock, and transient control.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 11-22.
Table 11-22 Functions and features of the OBU1
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Amplify the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths
range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm.
l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans
without electrical regeneration.
Typical gain l The typical gain of the OBU101 is 20 dB.
l The typical gain of the OBU103 is 23 dB.
l The typical gain of the OBU104 is 17 dB.
NOTE
11.4.9 Specifications of the OBU1 only provides the value of nominal gain.
Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal
gain.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical
signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer
unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the
services.
Gain lock function The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or
dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not
affect the signal gain of other channels.
Transient control
function
The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When
channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation
of the optical power in the path so as to realize the smooth upgrading
and expansion.
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Function and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
l Detects and reports the optical power.
l Monitors the temperature of the pump laser.
l Detects the pump driving current, back-facet current, pump cooling
current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature
of the board.

11.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The OBU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 11-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OBU1.
Figure 11-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the OBU1
OUT IN
Driving and detection module
MON
PIN
Splitter
EDFA optical module
SCC
Driving
current
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(Controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA
optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks
the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-33
Module Function
l EDFA optical module
Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification.
The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal
to realize the optical power amplification function.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power
detection.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to
the MON interface for detection.
l Driving and detection module
Detects in real time the optical power of service signals.
Detects in real time the drive current, backlight current, cooling current and operating
temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA.
Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module.
Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
11.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OBU1 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 11-15 shows the OBU1 front panel.
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 11-15 OBU1 front panel
OBU1
OBU1
M
O
N
O
U
T
I
N
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the OBU1 front panel. Table 11-23 lists the type and
function of each interface.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-35
Table 11-23 Types and functions of the OBU1 interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified.
OUT LC Transmits the amplified signal.
MON LC Connected to the MCA4 or MCA8 or WMU,
accomplishes the online performance monitoring.
The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal
at the OUT port (20dB lower than the actual signal
power).

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).
11.4.6 Valid Slots
The OBU1 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the OBU1 are IU1-IU17.
11.4.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU1
The characteristic code for the OBU1 consists of six characters and digits, indicating the gain
and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 11-24.
Table 11-24 Characteristic code for the OBU1
Code Meaning Description
The first character - The first character is always
G.
The second and the third
digits
Gain The second and the third
digits indicate the gain value.
The fourth character - The fourth character is always
I.
The fifth and the sixth digits Maximum nominal input
optical power
The fifth and the sixth digits
indicate the maximum
nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 is G23I-3. This code indicates that the
gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm.
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
11.4.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 11-25.
Table 11-25 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OBU1 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN 1
OUT 2
MON 3

Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
Laser Status
Gain (dB)
Nominal Gain (dB)
Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)
Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)
Rated Optical Power
Configure Band
Configure Working Band Parity
Actual Band
Actual Working Band Parity
11.4.9 Specifications of the OBU1
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 11-26 Optical specifications of the OBU1
Item Unit Value
OBU101 OBU103 OBU104
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561 1529-1561 1529-1561
Nominal input power range dBm -32 to -4 -32 to -3 -32 to -1
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-37
Item Unit Value
OBU101 OBU103 OBU104
Input power
range per
channel
40
channels
dBm -32 to -20 -32 to -19 -32 to -17
80
channels
-32 to -23 -32 to -22 -32 to -20
Typical input
power of a single
wavelength
40
channels
dBm -20 -19 -17
80
channels
-23 -22 -20
Noise figure (NF) dB 5.5 6.0 5.5
Input reflectance dB <-40 <-40 <-40
Output reflectance dB <-40 <-40 <-40
Pump leakage at input dBm <-30 <-30 <-30
Maximum reflectance
tolerance at input
dB -27 -27 -27
Maximum reflectance
tolerance at output
dB -27 -27 -27
Maximum total output optical
power
dBm 16 20 16
Nominal gain dB 20 23 17
Gain response time on adding/
dropping of channels
ms <10 <10 <10
Channel gain dB 201.5 231.5 171.5
Gain flatness dB 2.0 2.0 2.0
Multi-channel gain slope dB 2.0 2.0 2.0
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.5 0.5 0.5

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.9 1b.(1.3 kg)
Power Consumption
The power consumption of OBU101 and OBU104:
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 16 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 17.6 W
The power consumption of OBU103:
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 18 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 20.5 W
11.5 OBU2
OBU2: optical booster unit
11.5.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the OBU2 board is available, that is TN11.
11.5.2 Application
The OBU2 is a type of optical amplifier unit. The OBU2 realizes the amplification of optical
signals. It can be used at the transmit end and the receive end.
11.5.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the OBU2 are online optical performance
monitoring, gain lock, and transient control.
11.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The OBU2 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
11.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OBU2 front panel.
11.5.6 Valid Slots
The OBU2 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the OBU2 are IU2-IU17 in the subrack.
11.5.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU2
The characteristic code for the OBU2 consists of six characters and digits, indicating the gain
range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
11.5.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
11.5.9 Specifications of the OBU2
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
11.5.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the OBU2 board is available, that is TN11.
11.5.2 Application
The OBU2 is a type of optical amplifier unit. The OBU2 realizes the amplification of optical
signals. It can be used at the transmit end and the receive end.
For the position of the OBU2 in the WDM system, see Figure 11-16.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-39
Figure 11-16 Position of the OBU2 in the WDM system
OTU
OBU2
OBU2
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OBU2
OBU2
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
11.5.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the OBU2 are online optical performance
monitoring, gain lock, and transient control.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 11-27.
Table 11-27 Functions and features of the OBU2
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Amplify the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths
range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm.
l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans
without electrical regeneration.
Typical gain The typical gain of the OBU205 is 23 dB.
NOTE
11.5.9 Specifications of the OBU2 only provides the value of nominal gain.
Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal
gain.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical
signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer
unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the
services.
Gain lock function The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or
dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not
affect the signal gain of other channels.
Transient control
function
The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When
channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation
of the optical power in the path so as to realize the smooth upgrading
and expansion.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
l Detects and reports the optical power.
l Monitors the temperature of the pump laser.
l Detects the pump driving current, back-facet current, pump cooling
current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature
of the board.

11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
11.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The OBU2 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 11-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OBU2.
Figure 11-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the OBU2
OUT IN
MON
Splitter
EDFA optical
module
Driving and detection module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
PIN
Driving
current
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA
optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks
the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l EDFA optical module
Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification.
The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal
to realize the optical power amplification function.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power
detection.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to
the MON interface for detection.
l Driving and detection module
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-41
Detects in real time the optical power of service signals.
Detects in real time the drive current, backlight current, cooling current and operating
temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA.
Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module.
Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
11.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OBU2 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 11-18 shows the OBU2 front panel.
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 11-18 OBU2 front panel
OBU2
OBU2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
I
N
M
O
N
LASER
RADIATION
AVOIDEXPOSURE
TOBEAM
CLASS3BLASER
PRODUCT
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the OBU2 front panel. Table 11-28 lists the type and
function of each interface.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-43
Table 11-28 Types and functions of the OBU2 interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified.
OUT LC Transmits the amplified signal.
MON LC Connected to the MCA4 or MCA8 or WMU,
accomplishes the online performance monitoring.
The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal
at the OUT port (20dB lower than the actual signal
power).

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 3B (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 22.15 dBm (164 mW) to 27 dBm (500mW)).
11.5.6 Valid Slots
The OBU2 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the OBU2 are IU2-IU17 in the subrack.
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack,
so the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of
the two occupied slots.
For example, if the OBU2 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the OBU2 displayed
on the NM is IU2.
11.5.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU2
The characteristic code for the OBU2 consists of six characters and digits, indicating the gain
range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given inTable 11-29.
Table 11-29 Characteristic code for the OBU2
Code Meaning Description
The first character - The first character is always
G.
The second and the third
digits
Gain The second and the third
digits indicate the gain value.
The fourth character - The fourth character is always
I.
The fifth and the sixth digits Maximum nominal input
optical power
The fifth and the sixth digits
indicate the maximum
nominal input optical power.

11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU2 is G23I00. This code indicates that the
gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.
11.5.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 11-30.
Table 11-30 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OBU2 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN 1
OUT 2
MON 3

Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
Laser Status
Gain (dB)
Nominal Gain (dB)
Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)
Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)
Rated Optical Power
Configure Band
Configure Working Band Parity
Actual Band
Actual Working Band Parity
11.5.9 Specifications of the OBU2
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 11-31 Optical specifications of the OBU2
Item Unit Value
OBU205
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-45
Item Unit Value
OBU205
Nominal input power range dBm -24 to 0
Input power range per
channel
40
Channels
dBm -24 to -16
80
Channels
-24 to -19
Typical input power
of a single wavelength
40
Channels
dBm -16
80
Channels
-19
Noise figure (NF) dB 7.0
Input reflectance dB <-40
Output reflectance dB <-40
Pump leakage at input dBm <-30
Maximum reflectance tolerance at
input
dB -27
Maximum reflectance tolerance at
output
dB -27
Maximum total output optical
power
dBm 23
Nominal gain dB 23
Gain response time on adding/
dropping of channels
ms <10
Channel gain dB 231.5
Gain flatness dB 2.0
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB 2.0
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.5

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 4.2 lb. (1.9 kg)
11 Optical Amplifying Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
11-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 26 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 33 W
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifying Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-47
12 System Control and Communication
Unit
About This Chapter
12.1 SCC
SCC: system control and communication unit
12.2 AUX
AUX: system auxiliary interface unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 12 System Control and Communication Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-1
12.1 SCC
SCC: system control and communication unit
12.1.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the SCC board is available, that is TN11.
12.1.2 Application
The SCC is a type of system control and communication unit. Working with the network
management system to manage each board, the SCC realizes the communications between
equipments.
12.1.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the SCC are DCC communication, subrack
cascading, clock and power supply backup.
12.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SCC board consists of the overhead processing module, clock module, monitoring module,
communication module, CPU and control module, and power supply module.
12.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, buttons and an LED indicator on the front panel.
12.1.6 Valid Slots
The SCC occupies one slot. The valid slots for the SCC are IU17 and IU18. By default, the SCC
is installed in IU18.
12.1.7 Jumper
There is a three-bit jumper inside the SCC. It is used to switch on or off the power supplied by
the battery on the board.
12.1.8 Specifications of the SCC
Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
12.1.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the SCC board is available, that is TN11.
12.1.2 Application
The SCC is a type of system control and communication unit. Working with the network
management system to manage each board, the SCC realizes the communications between
equipments.
12.1.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the SCC are DCC communication, subrack
cascading, clock and power supply backup.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 12-1.
12 System Control and Communication Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
12-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 12-1 Functions and features of the SCC
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and
alarm output of a subrack.
l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management
and alarm output of a subrack.
l Supports the backup of the SCC data.
l Supports the function of the CF card to back up the data of the SCC
so that the NE needs not to be re-configured after the replacement
of the SCC.
l Supports IP over DCC.
DCC
communication
Supports DCC communication with the NEs for network
management.
Active/Standby
backup
Supports active/standby backup: There are two SCCs in the system
that can provide the 1+1 hot backup. When the active board fails, the
standby board becomes active automatically.
Clock function Provides clock source for the system communications.
Subrack cascading Supports subrack cascading. When subracks are cascaded, the
subrack in which the optical layer/overhead processing board is
installed is usually selected as the master subrack. A slave subrack
cannot be upgraded to a master subrack.
The SCC accomplishes different functions based on the mode (master
or slave) of the subrack in which it is installed. The SCC in a slave
subrack processes the overhead bytes, handles alarms and is in charge
of the configuration and grooming of services inside the subrack.
Besides these functions, the SCC in a master subrack also processes
the overhead bytes and handles the alarms of all its slave subracks.
The SCC in the master subrack is connected to the network
management system. The configuration commands are issued to the
SCC of a slave subrack through the SCC in the master subrack.
Power supply backup Provides 1:N power supply backup for the system.

12.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SCC board consists of the overhead processing module, clock module, monitoring module,
communication module, CPU and control module, and power supply module.
Figure 12-1 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SCC.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 12 System Control and Communication Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-3
Figure 12-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCC
CPU and control
module
Clock module
Communication
module
Monitoring
module
Overhead
processing
module
Other boards
Other boards
Backplane
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
Module Function
l CPU and control module
Realizes the control, monitoring and management of each functional module of the board.
l Overhead processing module
Receives overhead signals from the service board and processes the overhead bytes.In
the TN11SCC board, the 360 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module.
Sends the overhead signals to the service board.
l Monitoring module
Detects whether the boards are in position and reports alarms to the T2000.
l Clock module
Provides the clock source for the system.
Receives the clock signals from the OSC board at the upstream station, and ensures that
the local clock of the local board is synchronous with the clock.
Sends the local clock to the downstream station by using the OSC board.
l Communication module
Communicates with each board in the subrack, and reports the data of other boards to the
T2000.
Transmits data with other boards through the Ethernet and reports to the T2000.
Transmits urgent data through the RS485.
l Power supply module
Supplies power for the SCC. It also provides the entire OSN 6800 system with 3.3 V
integrated power backup to protect the 3.3 V power supply of any board in the system. In
12 System Control and Communication Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
12-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
addition, it provides power backup to the boards of which the total power consumption is
less than 60W.
12.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, buttons and an LED indicator on the front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 12-2 shows the SCC front panel.
Figure 12-2 SCC front panel
SCC
SCC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PWRA
PWRB
PWRC
ALMC
RESET
LAMP TEST
ALM CUT
SubRACK_ID
Indicators
There are eight indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 12 System Control and Communication Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-5
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
l System power supply indicator (PWRA)- dual-colored (red, green)
l System power supply indicator (PWRB)- dual-colored (red, green)
l Protection power indicator (PWRC)- dual-colored (red, green)
l Alarm cut-off indicator (ALMC)- yellow
Buttons
There are three buttons on the front panel. Table 12-2 lists the function of each button.
Table 12-2 Functions of the SCC buttons
Button Function
RESET Used to reset the SCC.
ALM CUT Used to clear the sound alarm.
LAMP TEST Used to test all the indicators in the subrack.

LED
There is an LED indicator on the front panel. Table 12-3 shows the its function.
Table 12-3 Function of the SCC LED indicator
LED indicator Function
SubRack_ID The LED on the front panel is used to indicate whether the subrack is
a primary or a secondary one when subracks are cascaded. "0"
indicates that the subrack which the SCC placed is a primary one. "1"
to "7" indicates that the subrack which the SCC placed is a secondary
one. "E" indicates that the AUX board is out of service and the subrack
ID cannot be obtained.

Interfaces
The SCC does not provide external interfaces.
12.1.6 Valid Slots
The SCC occupies one slot. The valid slots for the SCC are IU17 and IU18. By default, the SCC
is installed in IU18.
12.1.7 Jumper
There is a three-bit jumper inside the SCC. It is used to switch on or off the power supplied by
the battery on the board.
12 System Control and Communication Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
12-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
When the board is in normal use, the jumper cap should be installed onto the two pins that are
close to the board edge.
12.1.8 Specifications of the SCC
Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.6 lb. (1.2 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption of at 25 (77): 30.0 W
l The maximum power consumption of at 55 (131): 33.0 W
12.2 AUX
AUX: system auxiliary interface unit
12.2.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the AUX board is available, that is TN11.
12.2.2 Application
The AUX is a type of system control and communication unit. It provides various auxiliary
interfaces and management interfaces.
12.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the AUX are providing various auxiliary interfaces
and management interfaces.
12.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The AUX board consists of the CPU and control module, communication module, and power
supply module.
12.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the AUX front panel.
12.2.6 Valid Slots
The AUX occupies one slot. The valid slot for the AUX is IU21.
12.2.7 Jumper
There is a six-bit jumper inside the AUX, which is used to set the subrack ID.
12.2.8 Specifications of the AUX
Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
12.2.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the AUX board is available, that is TN11.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 12 System Control and Communication Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-7
12.2.2 Application
The AUX is a type of system control and communication unit. It provides various auxiliary
interfaces and management interfaces.
12.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the AUX are providing various auxiliary interfaces
and management interfaces.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 12-4.
Table 12-4 Functions and features of the AUX
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Provides the system with various auxiliary interfaces and
management interfaces.
Interface Provides the Ethernet communications interface and management
interface.
Provides the common and the emergent inter-subrack
communications interfaces
Setting of subrack ID Sets the subrack ID that contains six bits.

12.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The AUX board consists of the CPU and control module, communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 12-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the AUX.
Figure 12-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the AUX
CPU and control
module
Communication
module
Other boards
Backplane
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
12 System Control and Communication Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
12-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Module Function
l CPU and control module
The CPU module realizes the control, monitoring and management of the communication
module and detects the power supply at the same time.
The control module provides the subrack ID and collects the alarms and performance events
of each functional module as well as the clock information.
l Communication module
Provides the inter-board communication interface to connect the service boards and the
SCC. Realizes the data communication between boards.
Provides the NM interface and the NM cascading interface that are used to connect the
NM terminal.
Provides the common and the emergent inter-subrack communication network
interfaces.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
12.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the AUX front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 12-4 shows the AUX front panel.
Figure 12-4 AUX front panel
AUX
STAT
PROG
N
M
_
E
T
H
1
N
M
_
E
T
H
2
E
T
H
1
E
T
H
2
Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 12 System Control and Communication Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-9
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
Interfaces
There are four interfaces on the AUX front panel. Table 12-5 lists the type and function of each
interface.
Table 12-5 Types and functions of the AUX interfaces
Interface Type Function
NM_ETH1 RJ-45 l Connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN
6800 through a network cable to that on the T2000
server to achieve the management of the T2000 over
the OptiX OSN 6800.
l Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network
interface on one NE through a network cable to that
on another NE to achieve communication between
NEs.
NM_ETH2 RJ-45 l Connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN
6800 through a network cable to that on the T2000
server to achieve the management of the T2000 over
the OptiX OSN 6800.
l Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network
interface on one NE through a network cable to that
on another NE to achieve communication between
NEs.
ETH1 RJ-45 Inter-subrack communications network interfaces
ETH2 RJ-45 Inter-subrack communications network interfaces

12.2.6 Valid Slots
The AUX occupies one slot. The valid slot for the AUX is IU21.
12.2.7 Jumper
There is a six-bit jumper inside the AUX, which is used to set the subrack ID.
The SCC detects the subrack ID and identifies whether the subrack is a primary or a secondary
one. The result is indicated by the LED indicator of the SCC front panel.
12.2.8 Specifications of the AUX
Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
12 System Control and Communication Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
12-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of the board (PCB):85 mm (H) x 220 mm (W) x 2mm (T) (3.4 in. (H) x 8.8
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of the front panel: 107.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (4.2 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 1.1 lb. (0.5 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 14.0 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 15.4 W
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 12 System Control and Communication Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-11
13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
About This Chapter
13.1 SC1
SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
13.2 SC2
SC2: bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-1
13.1 SC1
SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
13.1.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the SC1 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference
between the two versions in terms of functionality.
13.1.2 Application
The SC1 is a type of optical supervisory channel unit. The SC1 realizes the processing of one
supervisory channel in one direction. It transmits and extracts the overhead information of the
system, processes the information and sends it to the SCC.
13.1.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the SC1 are processing and regeneration of optical
supervisory signals.
13.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SC1 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI
encoding module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, control and
communication module, and power supply module.
13.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the SC1 front panel.
13.1.6 Valid Slots
The SC1 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the SC1 are IU1-IU17.
13.1.7 Characteristic Code for the SC1
The characteristic code for the SC1 consists of twelve characters and digits, indicating the
wavelength range and numbers of optical interface.
13.1.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
13.1.9 Specifications of the SC1
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
13.1.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the SC1 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference
between the two versions in terms of functionality.
Table 13-1 lists the version description of the SC1.
Table 13-1 Version description of the SC1
Item Description
Functional
version
Two functional versions of the SC1 board are available: TN11 and TN12.
Similarity The TN12SC1 works in the same way as the TN11SC1.
13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
13-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Difference None
Replacement The TN11SC1 and TN12SC1 boards share the same functionality and can
be replaced with each other. But after the TN11SC1 is replaced with the
TN12SC1, the SCC software need be upgraded.

13.1.2 Application
The SC1 is a type of optical supervisory channel unit. The SC1 realizes the processing of one
supervisory channel in one direction. It transmits and extracts the overhead information of the
system, processes the information and sends it to the SCC.
For the position of the SC1 in the WDM system, see Figure 13-1.
Figure 13-1 Position of the SC1 in the WDM system
NE1 NE2 NE3
OA
OA
SC1
F
I
U
OA
OA
F
I
U
SC1
SC2
OA
F
I
U
OA
F
I
U
SCC
SCC
SCC
In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can make use of the
supervisory channel to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 13-1,
the user can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage the NE1 directly. NE2 and NE3 are
remote equipment. They can be remotely managed through the supervisory channel when there
is no data line connected. In this way, the entire network is under management.
The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel
(OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU.
The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all
the signals are transmitted on line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the
line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into
supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing.
13.1.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the SC1 are processing and regeneration of optical
supervisory signals.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-2.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-3
Table 13-2 Functions and features of the SC1
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function The SC1 is used to receive, process, and transmit one optical
supervisory signal.
Technical features The OSC has no limitation on the distance between two optical line
amplifiers. The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the
performance of the OSC.
The SC1 is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position,
the SC1 can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the boards in
the paired slot and monitor other stations .
Regeneration
function
The SC1 transmits signals from section to section. It also has the 3R
function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers,
information can be correctly received and new supervisory signals are
added.
Operating
wavelength
The signal wavelength of supervisory channel is 1510 nm.

13.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SC1 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI
encoding module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, control and
communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 13-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SC1.
13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
13-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 13-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC1
SCC
RM
Overhead
processing
module
CMI
encoding
module
CMI
decoding
module
TM
Optical
receiving
module
Optical
transmitting
module
O/E E/O
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
The optical receiving module converts the optical supervisory signals from the FIU into electrical
signals. The electrical signals enter the overhead processing module after CMI decoding. The
overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them
to the SCC for processing. After the overhead signals are processed by the SCC, this module
sends the electrical signals to be encoded in the CMI encoding module. At last, the electrical
supervisory signals are converted into optical supervisory signals through the optical
transmitting module.
Frame Structure of the OSC Signals
Figure 13-3 shows the timeslots of the E1 frame adopted by the OSC signals. There are 32
timeslots in a frame, numbered 0 to 31.
Figure 13-3 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead
0 1 2 3 14 15 16 31
... ...
For the definition and functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC, refer to Table
13-3.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-5
Table 13-3 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC
Timeslot
Number
Name Function
1 E1 byte Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one
orderwire phone requires three bytes.
2 F1 byte Co-directional 64 kbit/s data interface.
3-13, 15 D1-D12
bytes
DCC channel
Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the
issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and
performances.
The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to the
SCC for processing.
14 ALC
byte
Provides the channel for the transmission of ALC protocol
byte.
17 F2 byte Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the
temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of
specific maintenance.
18 F3 byte Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the
temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of
specific maintenance.
19 E2 byte Provides the path for orderwire phone.
Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes.
21-23 Optical
layer
overhea
d bytes
Used to transmit optical layer overhead information.
Other Reserve
d
-

Module Function
l Optical receiving module
Performs the O/E conversion of an optical supervisory signal.
l Optical transmitting module
Performs the E/O conversion of an electrical supervisory signal.
l CMI encoding/decoding module
Performs mutual conversion between the 8 Mbit/s CMI-coded signal and the 2 Mbit/s
signal.
l Overhead processing module
Extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for
processing. After the overhead signals are processed by the SCC, this module sends the
electrical signals to the optical transmitting module.
13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
13-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
13.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the SC1 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 13-4 shows the SC1 front panel.
Figure 13-4 SC1 front panel
SC1
SC1
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
M
R
M
EOW
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-7
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces and one orderwire phone interface on the SC1 front panel. Table
13-4 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 13-4 Types and functions of the SC1 interfaces
Interface Type Function
TM LC Transmits the supervisory signal.
RM LC Receives the supervisory signal.
EOW - Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone
wires, to realize orderwire communication between
NEs.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
13.1.6 Valid Slots
The SC1 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the SC1 are IU1-IU17.
13.1.7 Characteristic Code for the SC1
The characteristic code for the SC1 consists of twelve characters and digits, indicating the
wavelength range and numbers of optical interface.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 13-5.
Table 13-5 Characteristic code for the SC1
Code Meaning Description
The first character - The first character is always
W.
The second to the tenth
characters
Optical signal wavelength
range
The optical signal wavelength
range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm
processed by the board.
13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
13-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Code Meaning Description
The eleventh character - The eleventh character is
always P.
The twelfth digit Numbers of optical interface The number of optical
interface is one.

For example, the characteristic code for the SC1 is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates that the
optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the number of optical interface is
one.
13.1.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 13-6.
Table 13-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC1 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
RM/TM 1

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Optical Interface Loopback
Laser Status
13.1.9 Specifications of the SC1
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 13-7 lists the optical specifications of the SC1.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-9
Table 13-7 Optical specifications of the SC1
Item Unit Value
Signal rate Mbit/s 16.896 4.096
Operating wavelength range nm 1500 to 1520
Signal coding - CMI
Launched optical power dBm -4 to 0
Receiver sensitivity dBm -46 -48
Receiver overload dBm -3

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.2 lb. (1.0 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 11.0 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 14.9 W
13.2 SC2
SC2: bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit
13.2.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the SC2 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference
between the two versions in terms of functionality.
13.2.2 Application
The SC2 is a type of optical supervisory channel unit. The SC2 realizes the processing of two
supervisory channels in opposite directions. It transmits and extracts the overhead information
of the system, processes the information and sends it to the SCC.
13.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the SC2 are processing and regeneration of optical
supervisory signals.
13.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SC2 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI
encoding module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, control and
communication module, and power supply module.
13.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the SC2 front panel.
13.2.6 Valid Slots
13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
13-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
The SC2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the SC2 are IU1-IU17.
13.2.7 Characteristic Code for the SC2
The characteristic code for the SC2 consists of twelve characters and digits, indicating the
wavelength range and numbers of optical interface.
13.2.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
13.2.9 Specifications of the SC2
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
13.2.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the SC2 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference
between the two versions in terms of functionality.
Table 13-8 lists the version description of the SC2.
Table 13-8 Version description of the SC2
Item Description
Functional
version
Two functional versions of the SC2 board are available: TN11 and TN12.
Similarity The TN12SC2 works in the same way as the TN11SC2.
Difference None
Replacement The TN11SC2 and TN12SC2 boards share the same functionality and can
be replaced with each other. But after the TN11SC2 is replaced with the
TN12SC2, the SCC software need be upgraded.

13.2.2 Application
The SC2 is a type of optical supervisory channel unit. The SC2 realizes the processing of two
supervisory channels in opposite directions. It transmits and extracts the overhead information
of the system, processes the information and sends it to the SCC.
For the position of the SC2 in the WDM system, see Figure 13-5.
Figure 13-5 Position of the SC2 in the WDM system
NE1 NE2 NE3
OA
OA
SC1
F
I
U
OA
OA
F
I
U
SC1
SC2
OA
F
I
U
OA
F
I
U
SCC
SCC
SCC
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-11
In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can make use of the
supervisory channel to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 13-5,
the user can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage the NE1 directly. NE2 and NE3 are
remote equipment. They can be remotely managed through the supervisory channel when there
is no data line connected. In this way, the entire network is under management.
The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel
(OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU.
The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all
the signals are transmitted on line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the
line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into
supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing.
13.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the SC2 are processing and regeneration of optical
supervisory signals.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-9.
Table 13-9 Functions and features of the SC2
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function The SC2 is used to receive, process, and transmit two optical
supervisory signals.
Technical features The OSC has no limitation on the distance between two optical line
amplifiers. The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the
performance of the OSC.
The SC2 is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position,
the SC2 can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical
interfaces and monitor other stations.
Regeneration
function
The SC2 transmits signals from section to section. It also has the 3R
function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers,
information can be correctly received and new supervisory signals are
added.
Operating
wavelength
The signal wavelength of supervisory channel is 1510 nm.

13.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SC2 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI
encoding module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, control and
communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 13-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SC2.
13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
13-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 13-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC2
SCC
RM2
RM1
Overhead
processing
module
TM1
CMI
encoding
module
O/E E/O
CMI
decoding
module
TM2 O/E E/O
Optical
receiving
module
Optical
transmitting
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
The optical receiving module converts the optical supervisory signals from the FIU into electrical
signals. The electrical signals enter the overhead processing module after CMI decoding. The
overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them
to the SCC for processing. After the overhead signals are processed by the SCC, this module
sends the electrical signals to be encoded in the CMI encoding module. At last, the electrical
supervisory signals are converted into optical supervisory signals through the optical
transmitting module.
Frame Structure of the OSC Signals
Figure 13-7 shows the timeslots of the E1 frame adopted by the OSC signals. There are 32
timeslots in a frame, numbered 0 to 31.
Figure 13-7 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead
0 1 2 3 14 15 16 31
... ...
For the definition and functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC, refer to Table
13-10.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-13
Table 13-10 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC
Timeslot
Number
Name Function
1 E1 byte Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one
orderwire phone requires three bytes.
2 F1 byte Co-directional 64 kbit/s data interface.
3-13, 15 D1-D12
bytes
DCC channel
Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the
issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and
performances.
The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to the
SCC for processing.
14 ALC
byte
Provides the channel for the transmission of ALC protocol
byte.
17 F2 byte Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the
temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of
specific maintenance.
18 F3 byte Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the
temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of
specific maintenance.
19 E2 byte Provides the path for orderwire phone.
Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes.
21-23 Optical
layer
overhea
d bytes
Used to transmit optical layer overhead information.
Other Reserve
d
-

Module Function
l Optical receiving module
Performs the O/E conversion of two optical supervisory signals.
l Optical transmitting module
Performs the E/O conversion of two electrical supervisory signals.
l CMI encoding/decoding module
Performs mutual conversion between the 8 Mbit/s CMI-coded signal and the 2 Mbit/s
signal.
l Overhead processing module
Extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for
processing. After the overhead signals are processed by the SCC, this module sends the
electrical signals to the optical transmitting module.
13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
13-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
13.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the SC2 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 13-8 shows the SC2 front panel.
Figure 13-8 SC2 front panel
SC2
SC2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
M
1
R
M
1
T
M
2
R
M
2
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
EOW
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-15
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces and one orderwire phone interface on the SC2 front panel. Table
13-11 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 13-11 Types and functions of the SC2 interfaces
Interface Type Function
TM1/TM2 LC Transmits the first/second supervisory signal.
RM1/RM2 LC Receives the first/second supervisory signal.
EOW - Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone
wires, to realize orderwire communication between
NEs.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
13.2.6 Valid Slots
The SC2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the SC2 are IU1-IU17.
13.2.7 Characteristic Code for the SC2
The characteristic code for the SC2 consists of twelve characters and digits, indicating the
wavelength range and numbers of optical interface.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 13-12.
Table 13-12 Characteristic code for the SC2
Code Meaning Description
The first character - The first character is always
W.
The second to the tenth
characters
Optical signal wavelength
range
The optical signal wavelength
range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm
processed by the board.
13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
13-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Code Meaning Description
The eleventh character - The eleventh character is
always P.
The twelfth digit Numbers of optical interface The numbers of optical
interface are two.

For example, the characteristic code for the SC2 is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates that the
optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the numbers of optical interface
are two.
13.2.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 13-13.
Table 13-13 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC2 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
RM1/TM1 1
RM2/TM2 2

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Optical Interface Loopback
Laser Status
13.2.9 Specifications of the SC2
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 13-14 lists the optical specifications of the SC2.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-17
Table 13-14 Optical specifications of the SC2
Item Unit Value
Signal rate Mbit/s 16.896 4.096
Operating wavelength range nm 1500 to 1520
Signal coding - CMI
Launched optical power dBm -4 to 0
Receiver sensitivity dBm -46 -48
Receiver overload dBm -3

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.2 lb. (1.0 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 12.5 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 14.9 W
13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
13-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
14 Optical Protection Unit
About This Chapter
14.1 DCP
DCP: 2-channel optical path protection unit
14.2 OLP
OLP: optical line protection unit
14.3 SCS
SCS: sync optical channel separator unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 14 Optical Protection Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-1
14.1 DCP
DCP: 2-channel optical path protection unit
14.1.1 Version Description
The main difference between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions
supports the single mode or multimode.
14.1.2 Application
The DCP is a type of optical protection unit. The DCP realizes the intra-board 1+1 protection,
the client-side 1+1 protection and optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP protection).
14.1.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the DCP are intra-board 1+1 protection and client-
side 1+1 protection.
14.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The DCP board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
14.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the DCP front panel.
14.1.6 Valid Slots
The DCP occupies one slot. The valid slots for the DCP are IU1-IU17.
14.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCP
The characteristic code for the DCP consists of one character and two digits, indicating the
maximum protection switching time.
14.1.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
14.1.9 Specifications of the DCP
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
14.1.1 Version Description
The main difference between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions
supports the single mode or multimode.
Version
Table 14-1 lists the version description of the DCP.
Table 14-1 Version description of the DCP
Item Description
Functional
version
Two functional versions of the DCP board are available: TN11 and TN12.
Similarity The TN12DCP works in the same way as the TN11DCP.
14 Optical Protection Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
14-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Difference The TN11DCP supports signle mode and multimode.
The TN12DCP supports signle mode.
Replacement The TN11DCP and TN12DCP boards share the same functionality and can
be replaced with each other when the single mode is used. But after the
TN11DCP is replaced with the TN12DCP, the SCC software need be
upgraded.

Type
Table 14-2 lists the type description of the DCP.
Table 14-2 Type description of the DCP
Board Type Description
TN11DCP 01 Supports single-mode optical module.
02 Supports multi-mode optical module.

14.1.2 Application
The DCP is a type of optical protection unit. The DCP realizes the intra-board 1+1 protection,
the client-side 1+1 protection and optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP protection).
For the position of the DCP in the WDM system, see Figure 14-1, Figure 14-2 and Figure
14-3.
Figure 14-1 Position of the DCP in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection)
MUX
DMUX
DMUX MUX
FIU
FIU
FIU
FIU
DCP
DMUX
MUX
DMUX
RI1 1
RI21
TO11
TO21
RI12
RI22
TO12
TO22
RO1
TI1
RO2
TI2
OTU
OTU
MUX
TO11
TO21
RI11
RI21
TO12
TO22
RI22
RI12
DCP
TI1
OTU
OTU
RO1
TI2
RO2
NOTE
When used for intra-board 1+1 protection, the DCP does not support the 2.5 Gbit/s OTU.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 14 Optical Protection Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-3
Figure 14-2 Position of the DCP in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)
MUX
DMUX
DMUX MUX
FIU
FIU
FIU
FIU
DMUX
MUX
DMUX
MUX
Client-side
OTU
(W)
OTU
(P)
DCP
TO11
RI11
TO21
RI21
TO12
RI12
TO22
RI22
TI1
RO1
TI2
RO2 OTU
(P)
OTU
(W)
RI11
TO11
RI21
TO21
RI12
TO12
RI22
TO22
RO1
TI1
RO2
TI2
DCP
Client-side
NOTE
When the working OTU and the protection OTU are installed in different subracks, the DCP board can be
used for client-side protection.
Figure 14-3 Position of the DCP in the WDM system (OWSP protection)
OTU2 OTU1 OTU2 OTU1
2 x DCP
OTU1 OTU2 OTU1 OTU2
OADM
(West)
OADM
(East)
FIU
FIU
OADM
FIU
OADM
FIU
OADM
FIU
FIU
OADM
OADM
FIU
OADM
FIU
2/1
1/2
2/1

2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2/1
2/1
2
1
2
1
A
B C
D
1/2
1/2
2/1
2/1
2 x DCP
2 x DCP 2 x DCP
2/1
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2 2/1
1/2
1
2
1
2
: Working signal : Protection signal :
(West)
(West)
(West)
(West)
(East)
(East)
(East)
(East)
Optical signal
14.1.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the DCP are intra-board 1+1 protection and client-
side 1+1 protection.
14 Optical Protection Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
14-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-3.
Table 14-3 Functions and features of the DCP
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Provides the intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of
the OTU that has no dual-fed and selective receiving function.
Compared with the OLP, the DCP provides protection for two
signals so as to realize high-integrated 1+1 protection.
l Provides the client-side 1+1 protection, making use of a working
OTU and a protection OTU to protect the client-side services.
l Provides the OWSP protection, make use of two different channels
to achieve the protection of one channel of service between all
stations.
Protection scheme The intra-board 1+1 protection and client-side 1+1 protection:
l The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and single-
end switching.
l When the performance of the working fiber declines, the system
automatically switches the service from the working path to the
protection path. Protection switching is stable and quick because
the APS protocol is not needed.
NOTE
The client-side 1+1 protection supports dual-end switching for GE services.
The OWSP protection:
l The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and dual-end
switching.
l When the performance of the working fiber declines, the system
automatically switches the service from the working path to the
protection path. Protection switching is stable and quick because
the APS protocol is needed.
Protection switching
time
The protection switching time of the system is less than 50 ms.

14.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The DCP board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 14-4 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DCP.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 14 Optical Protection Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-5
Figure 14-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCP
SCC
TI1
RO1
TI2
RO2
TO11
TO12
TO21
TO22
RI11
RI12
RI21
RI22
Optical module
Optical
power detecting
module
Optical switch
Optical switch
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
One DCP board supports the dual-fed and selective receiving of two channels of optical signals.
The DCP board processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section
describes the service flow of only one channel of optical signals.
l Transmit direction
The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the
splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through
the TO11 and TO12 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI11
and RI12 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the optical switch. The optical switch
selects one from the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In
this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved.
The selected optical signals are output through the RO1 optical interface.
The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from
the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and
communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical
power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch
14 Optical Protection Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
14-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the
protection channels is achieved.
Module Function
l Optical module
The optical module consists of two signal dual-fed parts and two signal selection parts.
Signal dual-fed part
Divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same power, and
outputs them to the working and protection channels.
Signal selection part
Receives the optical signals from the working and protection channels. The optical
power detecting module detects and compares the optical power of the two channels of
optical signals. Based on the results, the signal selection part selects one channel of
optical signals and outputs it.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
14.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the DCP front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 14-5 shows the DCP front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 14 Optical Protection Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-7
Figure 14-5 DCP front panel
DCP
DCP
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
O
1
1
R
I
1
1
T
O
1
2
R
I
1
2
T
O
2
1
R
I
2
1
T
O
2
2
R
I
2
2
R
O
1
T
I
1
R
O
2
T
I
2
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the DCP front panel. Table 14-4 lists the type and function
of each interface.
14 Optical Protection Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
14-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 14-4 Types and functions of the DCP interfaces
Interface Type Function
TI1 LC Receives the first channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-
board 1+1 protection)
Receives the first channel of client-side signals. (client-
side 1+1 protection)
Receives one channel of client-side signals. (OWSP
protection)
TI2 LC Receives the second channel of WDM-side signals.
(intra-board 1+1 protection)
Receives the second channel of client-side signals.
(client-side 1+1 protection)
Receives the optical signals from the adjacent stations.
(OWSP protection)
RO1 LC Transmits the first channel of WDM-side signals.
(intra-board 1+1 protection)
Transmits the first channel of client-side signals.
(client-side 1+1 protection)
Transmits one WDM-side optical signal to the OTU
board. (OWSP protection)
RO2 LC Transmits the second channel of WDM-side signals.
(intra-board 1+1 protection)
Transmits the second channel of client-side signals.
(client-side 1+1 protection)
Transmits one optical signal to the adjacent stations.
(OWSP protection)
TO11 LC Transmits the first channel of signals to the working
multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection)
Transmits the first channel of signals to the working
OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)
Serves as a dual-fed optical interface, transmitting one
optical signal to the working router. (OWSP protection)
TO12 LC Transmits the first channel of signals to the protection
multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection)
Transmits the first channel of signals to the protection
OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)
Dual fed optical interface, transmitting one optical
signal to the protection router. (OWSP protection)
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 14 Optical Protection Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-9
Interface Type Function
TO21 LC Transmits the second channel of signals to the working
multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection)
Transmits the second channel of signals to the working
OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)
Connects to the RI12 interface of another DCP board
in the same station by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)
TO22 LC Transmits the second channel of signals to the
protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1
protection)
Transmits the second channel of signals to the
protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)
Connects to the RI22 interface on the same DCP board
by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)
RI11/RI12 LC Receives the first channel of signals from the working
and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1
protection)
Receives the first channel of signals from the working
and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)
Serve as selective receive interfaces, connecting to the
working route and protection route, respectively.
(OWSP protection)
RI21/RI22 LC Receives the second channel of signals from the
working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-
board 1+1 protection)
Receives the second channel of signals from the
working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1
protection)
Connects to the TO12 and TO22 interfaces on the same
DCP board, respectively, by using a fiber. (OWSP
protection)

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
14.1.6 Valid Slots
The DCP occupies one slot. The valid slots for the DCP are IU1-IU17.
14.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCP
The characteristic code for the DCP consists of one character and two digits, indicating the
maximum protection switching time.
14 Optical Protection Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
14-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 14-5.
Table 14-5 Characteristic code for the DCP
Code Meaning Description
The first character - The first character is always
P.
The second and third digits Maximum protection
switching time
Indicate the maximum
protection switching time.

For example, the characteristic code for the DCP is P50. This code indicates that the maximum
protection switching time is 50ms.
14.1.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 14-6.
Table 14-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCP displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
TO11/RI11 1
TO12/RI12 2
TO21/RI21 3
TO22/RI22 4
TI1/RO1 5
TI2/RO2 6

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)
Varance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 14 Optical Protection Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-11
14.1.9 Specifications of the DCP
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 14-7 Optical specifications of the DCP
Interface Item Unit Value
TN11DCP
TN12DCP
a
TI1-TO11
TI1-TO12
TI2-TO21
TI2-TO22
Insertion
loss at the
transmit
end
single
mode
dB 4 4
multimo
de
dB 4.5 -
RI1-RO11
RI1-RO12
RI2-RO21
RI2-RO22
Insertion
loss at the
receive
end
single
mode
dB 1.5 1.5
multimo
de
dB 2 -
Range of the input optical
power
single
mode
dBm -35 to 7 -35 to 7
multimo
de
dBm -35 to 0 -
Operating wavelength single
mode
nm 1310, 1550 1310, 1550
multimo
de
nm 850 -
Operating wavelength
deviation
single
mode
nm 40 (1310)
20 (1550)
40 (1310)
20 (1550)
multimo
de
nm 20 -
Switching threshold of optical power
difference
dB 5 5
a: TN12DCP has no multimode optical module.

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.2 lb. (1.0 kg)
14 Optical Protection Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
14-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 6.8 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 7.5 W
14.2 OLP
OLP: optical line protection unit
14.2.1 Version Description
The main difference between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions
supports the single mode or multimode.
14.2.2 Application
The OLP is a type of optical protection unit. The OLP realizes the optical line protection, intra-
board 1+1 protection and the client-side 1+1 protection.
14.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the OLP are optical line protection, intra-board 1
+1 protection and client-side 1+1 protection.
14.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The OLP board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
14.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OLP front panel.
14.2.6 Valid Slots
The OLP occupies one slot. The valid slots for the OLP are IU1-IU17.
14.2.7 Characteristic Code for the OLP
The characteristic code for the OLP consists of one character and two digits, indicating the
maximum protection switching time.
14.2.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
14.2.9 Specifications of the OLP
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
14.2.1 Version Description
The main difference between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions
supports the single mode or multimode.
Version
Table 14-8 lists the version description of the OLP.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 14 Optical Protection Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-13
Table 14-8 Version description of the OLP
Item Description
Functional
version
Two functional versions of the OLP board are available: TN11 and TN12.
Similarity The TN12OLP works in the same way as the TN11OLP.
Difference The TN11OLP supports signle mode and multimode.
The TN12OLP supports signle mode.
Replacement The TN11OLP and TN12OLP boards share the same functionality and can
be replaced with each other when the single mode is used. But after the
TN11OLP is replaced with the TN12OLP, the SCC software need be
upgraded.

Type
Table 14-9 lists the type description of the OLP.
Table 14-9 Type description of the OLP
Board Type Description
TN11OLP 01 Supports single-mode optical module.
02 Supports multi-mode optical module.

14.2.2 Application
The OLP is a type of optical protection unit. The OLP realizes the optical line protection, intra-
board 1+1 protection and the client-side 1+1 protection.
For the position of the OLP in the WDM system, see Figure 14-6, Figure 14-7 and Figure
14-8.
Figure 14-6 Position of the OLP in the WDM system (optical line protection)
OLP
OTU
OTU
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
FIU
TI
RO
OLP
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
FIU
RO
TI
TO1
RI1
TO2
RI2
RI1
TO1
RI2
TO2
14 Optical Protection Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
14-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength
at the same time.
Figure 14-7 Position of the OLP in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection)
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX DMUX
MUX
DMUX
MUX
FIU
FIU
FIU
FIU
TO1
TO2
RI1
RI2
TO1
RI1
TO2
RI2
OLP
TI
OTU RO
OLP
RO
OTU TI
NOTE
When used for intra-board 1+1 protection, the OLP does not support the 2.5 Gbit/s OTU.
Figure 14-8 Position of the OLP in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
DMUX
MUX
DMUX
MUX
FIU
FIU
FIU
FIU
Client-side
OTU
(W)
OTU
(P)
OLP
TO1
RI1
TO2
RI2
TI
RO
RI1
TO1
RI2
TO2
OTU
(W)
OTU
(P)
RO
TI
OLP
Cient-side
NOTE
When the working OTU and the protection OTU are installed in different subracks, the OLP board can be
used for client-side protection.
14.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the OLP are optical line protection, intra-board 1
+1 protection and client-side 1+1 protection.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-10.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 14 Optical Protection Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-15
Table 14-10 Functions and features of the OLP
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Provides the optical line protection to ensure the normal receiving of
signals when the line fiber fails.
Provides the intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the
OTU that has no dual-fed and selective receiving function.
Provides the client-side 1+1 protection, making use of a working OTU
and a protection OTU to protect the client-side services.
Protection scheme The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and single-end
switching.
NOTE
The client-side 1+1 protection supports dual-end switching for GE services.
Protection switching is stable and quick because the APS protocol is
not required.
Protection switching
time
For the optical line protection, the switching time is less than 100 ms.
For the intra-board 1+1 protection and the client-side 1+1 protection,
the switching time is less than 50 ms.

14.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The OLP board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 14-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OLP.
14 Optical Protection Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
14-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 14-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the OLP
SCC
TI
RO
Optical power
detecting
module
TO1
TO2
RI1
RI2
Optical module
Optical switch
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
l Transmit direction
The TI optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the
splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through
the TO1 and TO2 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI1
and RI2 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the optical switch. The optical switch
selects one from the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In
this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved.
The selected optical signals are output through the RO optical interface.
The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from
the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and
communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical
power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch
based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the
protection channels is achieved.
Module Function
l Optical module
The optical module consists of a signal dual-fed part and a signal selection part.
Signal dual-fed part
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 14 Optical Protection Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-17
Divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same power, and
outputs them to the working and protection channels.
Signal selection part
Receives the optical signals from the working and protection channels. The optical
power detecting module detects and compares the optical power of the two channels of
optical signals. Based on the results, the signal selection part selects one channel of
optical signals and outputs it.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
14.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OLP front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 14-10 shows the OLP front panel.
14 Optical Protection Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
14-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 14-10 OLP front panel
OLP
OLP
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
T
O
1
R
I
1
T
O
2
R
I
2
R
O
T
I
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the OLP front panel. Table 14-11 lists the type and function
of each interface.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 14 Optical Protection Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-19
Table 14-11 Types and functions of the OLP interfaces
Interface Type Function
TI LC Receives the line signal from the FIU board. (optical
line protection)
Receives one WDM-side signal. (intra-board 1+1
protection)
Receives one client-side signal. (client-side 1+1
protection)
RO LC Transmits the line signal to the FIU board. (optical line
protection)
Transmits one WDM-side signal. (intra-board 1+1
protection)
Transmits one client-side signal. (client-side 1+1
protection)
TO1/TO2 LC Transmits the working and the protection signals to the
line side. (optical line protection)
Transmits signals to the working and the protection
multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection)
Transmits signals to the working and the protection
OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)
RI1/RI2 LC Receives the working or the protection signal from the
line side. (optical line protection)
Receives the signals from the working and the
protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1
protection)
Receives the signals from the working and protection
OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).
14.2.6 Valid Slots
The OLP occupies one slot. The valid slots for the OLP are IU1-IU17.
14.2.7 Characteristic Code for the OLP
The characteristic code for the OLP consists of one character and two digits, indicating the
maximum protection switching time.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 14-12.
14 Optical Protection Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
14-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 14-12 Characteristic code for the OLP
Code Meaning Description
The first character - The first character is always
P.
The second and third digits Maximum protection
switching time
Indicate the maximum
protection switching time.

For example, the characteristic code for the OLP is P50. This code indicates that the maximum
protection switching time is 50ms.
14.2.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 14-13.
Table 14-13 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OLP displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
TO11/RI11 1
TO12/RI12 2
TI/RO 3

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)
Varance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)
14.2.9 Specifications of the OLP
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 14 Optical Protection Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-21
Optical Specifications
Table 14-14 Optical specifications of the OLP
Interface Item Unit Value
TN11OLP
TN12OLP
a
TI-TO1
TI-TO2
Insertion
loss at the
transmit
end
single
mode
dB 4 4
multimode dB 4.5 -
RI1-RO
RI2-RO
Insertion
loss at the
receive
end
single
mode
dB 1.5 1.5
multimode dB 2 -
Range of the input
optical power
single
mode
dBm -35 to 7 -35 to 7
multimode dBm -35 to 0 -
Operating wavelength single
mode
nm 1310, 1550 1310, 1550
multimode nm 850 -
Operating wavelength
deviation
single
mode
nm 40 (1310)
20 (1550)
40 (1310)
20 (1550)
multimode nm 20 -
Switching threshold of optical power
difference
dB 5 5
a: TN12OLP has no multimode optical module.

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
Weight
l TN11OLP: 1.98 lb (0.9 kg)
l TN12OLP: 2.20 lb (1.0 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 6.0 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 6.6 W
14 Optical Protection Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
14-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
14.3 SCS
SCS: sync optical channel separator unit
14.3.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the SCS board is available, that is TN11.
14.3.2 Application
The SCS is a type of optical protection unit. The SCS realizes the client-side 1+1 protection and
Board-level protection (extended mode).
14.3.3 Functions and Features
The main function and feature supported by the SCS is the client-side 1+1 protection.
14.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SCS board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
14.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the SCS front panel.
14.3.6 Valid Slots
The SCS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the SCS are IU1-IU17.
14.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SCS
The characteristic code for the SCS consists of one character and two digits, indicating the
maximum protection switching time.
14.3.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
14.3.9 Specifications of the SCS
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
14.3.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the SCS board is available, that is TN11.
Type
Table 14-15 lists the type description of the SCS.
Table 14-15 Type description of the SCS
Board Type Description
SCS 01 Supports single-mode optical module.
02 Supports multi-mode optical module.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 14 Optical Protection Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-23
14.3.2 Application
The SCS is a type of optical protection unit. The SCS realizes the client-side 1+1 protection and
Board-level protection (extended mode).
For the position of the SCS in the WDM system, see Figure 14-11 and Figure 14-12.
Figure 14-11 Position of the SCS in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)
Client-side
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
FIU
FIU
FIU
FIU
OTU
(W)
OTU
(P)
SCS
TO11
RI11
TO21
RI21
TO12
RI12
TO22
RI22
TI1
RO1
TI2
RO2
RI11
TO11
RI21
TO21
RI12
TO12
RI22
TO22
OTU
(W)
OTU
(P)
RO1
TI1
RO2
TI2
SCS
Client-side
DMUX
MUX
DMUX
MUX
Figure 14-12 Position of the SCS in the WDM system (board-level protection with extended
mode)
F
I
U
F
I
U
L
4
G
TBE2
TBE1
TBE2
TBE1 TBE1
TBE2
TBE1
TBE2
L
4
G
S
C
S
R1
S
C
S
R1
O
A
D
M
O
A
D
M
14.3.3 Functions and Features
The main function and feature supported by the SCS is the client-side 1+1 protection.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-16.
Table 14-16 Functions and features of the SCS
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Receives signals from the working and the protection OTUs and
realizes the client-side 1+1 protection.
l Receives signals from the working and the protection TBE and
realizes the board-level protection (extended mode).
Protection scheme The channel protection supported by the SCS board does not need the
support of protocol. Instead, the channel protection executes
switching by detecting SD and SF events of the channel.

14 Optical Protection Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
14-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
14.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SCS board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 14-13 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SCS.
Figure 14-13 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCS
Optical module
TI1
TI2
TO11
RO1
RO2
TO12
TO21
TO22
RI11
RI12
RI21
RI22
Splitter
Splitter
Coupler
Coupler
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
One SCS board supports the dual-fed and dual receiving of two channels of optical signals. The
SCS board processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section describes
the service flow of only one channel of optical signals.
l Transmit direction
The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the
splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection channels through the TO11
and TO12 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The signals in the working and the protection channels are input through the RI1 and RI2
optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the coupler. The system activates one of the
two channels of optical signals based on the service quality. In this way, the selection of
path optical signals is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO1
optical interface. Normally, the working OTU at the receive end is active, and the protection
OTU is standby. Once a fault occurs in the services, an alarm triggers a protection switching.
The system shuts down the working OTU, and activates the protection OTU.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 14 Optical Protection Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-25
Module Function
l Optical module
The optical module consists of the splitters and couplers.
Splitter
Divides the one channel of optical signals into to two channels of the same power, and
outputs them to the working and protection channels.
Coupler
Receives the signals in the working and the protection channels. The system selects one
channel of optical signals based on the service quality.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
14.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the SCS front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 14-14 shows the SCS front panel.
14 Optical Protection Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
14-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 14-14 SCS front panel
SCS
SCS
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
T
O
1
1
T
O
1
2
R
I
1
2
T
O
2
1
R
I
2
1
T
O
2
2
R
I
2
2
R
O
1
T
I
1
R
O
2
T
I
2
R
I
1
1
STAT
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the SCS front panel. Table 14-17 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 14-17 Types and functions of the SCS interfaces
Interface Type Function
TI1/TI2 LC Receives the first/second channel of client-side signals.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 14 Optical Protection Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-27
Interface Type Function
RO1/RO2 LC Transmits the first/second channel of client-side
signals.
TO11/TO12 LC Transmits the first channel of signals to the working
and protection OTU.
TO21/TO22 LC Transmits the second channel of signals to the working
and the protection OTU.
RI11/RI12 LC Receives the first channel of signals from the working
and protection OTU.
RI21/RI22 LC Receives the second channel of signals from the
working and protection OTU.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
14.3.6 Valid Slots
The SCS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the SCS are IU1-IU17.
14.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SCS
The characteristic code for the SCS consists of one character and two digits, indicating the
maximum protection switching time.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 14-18.
Table 14-18 Characteristic code for the SCS
Code Meaning Description
The first character - The first character is always
P.
The second and third digits Maximum protection
switching time
Indicate the maximum
protection switching time.

For example, the characteristic code for the SCS is P50. This code indicates that the maximum
protection switching time is 50ms.
14.3.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
14 Optical Protection Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
14-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 14-19.
Table 14-19 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SCS displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
TI1/RO1 1
TO11/RI11 2
TO12/RI12 3
TI2/RO2 4
TO21/RI21 5
TO22/RI22 6

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
14.3.9 Specifications of the SCS
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 14-20 lists the optical specifications of the SCS.
Table 14-20 Optical specifications of the SCS
Interface Item Unit Value
TI1-TO11
TI1-TO21
TI2-TO21
TI2-TO22
Splitting
insertion loss
single mode dB 4
multimode dB 4.5
RI11-RO1
RI12-RO1
RI21-RO2
RI22-RO2
Coupling
insertion loss
single mode dB 4
multimode dB 4.5
Operating wavelength single mode nm 1310, 1550
multimode nm 850
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 14 Optical Protection Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-29
Interface Item Unit Value
Operating wavelength deviation single mode nm 40 (1310)
20 (1550)
multimode nm 20

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 1.8 lb. (0.8 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 0.2 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 0.3 W
14 Optical Protection Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
14-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
About This Chapter
15.1 MCA4
MCA4: 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit
15.2 MCA8
MCA8: 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit
15.3 WMU
WMU: wavelength monitored unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15-1
15.1 MCA4
MCA4: 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit
15.1.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the MCA4 board is available, that is TN11.
15.1.2 Application
The MCA4 is a type of spectrum analyzer unit. The MCA4 supports spectral analysis for four
channels.
15.1.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the MCA4 are spectral analysis, detection and
APE.
15.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The MCA4 board consists of the 1x4 optical switch, spectral analysis module, driving and control
module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
15.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the MCA4 front panel.
15.1.6 Valid Slots
The MCA4 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the MCA4 are IU1-IU16 in the subrack.
15.1.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA4
The characteristic code for the MCA4 consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical
signals processed by the board.
15.1.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
15.1.9 Specifications of the MCA4
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
15.1.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the MCA4 board is available, that is TN11.
15.1.2 Application
The MCA4 is a type of spectrum analyzer unit. The MCA4 supports spectral analysis for four
channels.
For the position of the MCA4 in the WDM system, see Figure 15-1.
Figure 15-1 Position of the MCA4 in the WDM system
OTU
OAU OAU
OAU OAU
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
MCA4
MCA4
15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
15-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
NOTE
The MCA4 is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at both the receive and
transmit ends, you can configure MCA4 supervision at both ends.
15.1.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the MCA4 are spectral analysis, detection and
APE.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-1.
Table 15-1 Functions and features of the MCA4
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Provides the spectral analysis for four channels.
Detection function Supports the following detection functions and reports to the SCC.
l Optical power of the channel
l Central wavelength
l Optical signal-to-noise ratio
l Number of wavelengths in the main optical path
APE function Realizes the APE function in cooperation with other boards.
Detects the optical power of each channel.

15.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The MCA4 board consists of the 1x4 optical switch, spectral analysis module, driving and control
module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 15-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15-3
Figure 15-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4
R01
Driving and control module
14
optical switch
Spectral analysis module
R02
R03
R04
Control
signal
Driving
signal
Data
signal

CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
The 1x4 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the spectral analysis
module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, each data parameter is sent
to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and
communication module further reports the parameter to the SCC board and the T2000. The final
spectrum analysis results are displayed on the T2000.
Module Function
l 1x4 optical switch
Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed four channels of optical signals
for spectrum analysis.
l Spectral analysis module
Monitors parameters such as the central wavelength, optical power, OSNR, and number of
wavelengths.
l Driving and control module
Drives and controls spectrum.
Controls the 1x4 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum
analysis.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
15-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
15.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the MCA4 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 15-3 shows the MCA4 front panel.
Figure 15-3 MCA4 front panel
MCA4
MCA4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
I
N
1
I
N
2
I
N
3
I
N
4
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15-5
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the MCA4 front panel.Table 15-2 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 15-2 Types and functions of the MCA4 interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN1-IN4 LC Connected to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to
receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can
be connected to four "MON" interfaces at the same
time.

15.1.6 Valid Slots
The MCA4 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the MCA4 are IU1-IU16 in the subrack.
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two
occupied slots in the subrack, so the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is
the number of the left slot.
For example, if the MCA4 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the MCA4 displayed
on the NM is IU1.
15.1.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA4
The characteristic code for the MCA4 consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical
signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 15-3.
Table 15-3 Characteristic code for the MCA4
Code Meaning Description
The first character Band Indicates the band of the
optical signals processed by
the board. The value C
represents C band. The value
L represents L band.

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
15-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA4 is C, indicating C band.
15.1.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 15-4.
Table 15-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA4 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN1-IN4 1-4

Configuration Parameters
Optical Monitoring
Monitor Interval (min.)
Wavelength Monitor Status
15.1.9 Specifications of the MCA4
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 15-5 lists the optical specifications of the MCA4.
Table 15-5 Optical specifications of the MCA4
Item Unit Value
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561
Detect range for single channel optical power dBm -30 to -10
Detect accuracy for optical power dBm 1.5
Detect accuracy for OSNR (The detect range
for signal-to-noise ratio is 13 dB to 23 dB, and
the wavelength spacing is 50 GHz.)
dB 1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19)
2 (OSNR: 19 to 23)
Detect accuracy for central wavelength nm 0.1
Numbers of optical interface pcs 4

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15-7
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 4.18 lb (1.9 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 16.0 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 17.6 W
15.2 MCA8
MCA8: 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit
15.2.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the MCA8 board is available, that is TN11.
15.2.2 Application
The MCA8 is a type of Spectrum Analyzer unit. The MCA8 supports spectral analysis for eight
channels.
15.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the MCA8 are spectral analysis, detection and
APE.
15.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The MCA8 board consists of the 1x8 optical switch, spectral analysis module, driving and control
module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
15.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the MCA8 front panel.
15.2.6 Valid Slots
The MCA8 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the MCA8 are IU1-IU16.
15.2.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA8
The characteristic code for the MCA8 consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical
signals processed by the board.
15.2.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
15.2.9 Specifications of the MCA8
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
15.2.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the MCA8 board is available, that is TN11.
15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
15-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
15.2.2 Application
The MCA8 is a type of Spectrum Analyzer unit. The MCA8 supports spectral analysis for eight
channels.
For the position of the MCA8 in the WDM system, see Figure 15-4.
Figure 15-4 Position of the MCA8 in the WDM system
OTU
OAU OAU
OAU OAU
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
MCA8
MCA8
NOTE
The MCA8 is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at both the receive and
transmit ends, you can configure MCA8 supervision at both ends.
15.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the MCA8 are spectral analysis, detection and
APE.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-6.
Table 15-6 Functions and features of the MCA8
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Provides the spectral analysis for four channels.
Detection function Supports the following detection functions and reports to the SCC.
l Optical power of the channel
l Central wavelength
l Optical signal-to-noise ratio
l Number of wavelengths in the main optical path
APE function Realizes the APE function in cooperation with other boards.
Detects the optical power of each channel.

15.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The MCA8 board consists of the 1x8 optical switch, spectral analysis module, driving and control
module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 15-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15-9
Figure 15-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8
R01
Driving and control module
18
optical switch
Spectral analysis module
R02
R03
R05
R04
R06
R07
R08
Control
signal
Driving
signal
Data
signal
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
The 1x8 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the spectral analysis
module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, each data parameter is sent
to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and
communication module further reports the parameter to the SCC board and the T2000. The final
spectrum analysis results are displayed on the T2000.
Module Function
l 1x8 optical switch
Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed eight channels of optical signals
for spectrum analysis.
l Spectral analysis module
Monitors parameters such as the central wavelength, optical power, OSNR, and number of
wavelengths.
l Driving and control module
Drives and controls spectrum.
Controls the 1x8 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum
analysis.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
15-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
15.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the MCA8 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 15-6 shows the MCA8 front panel.
Figure 15-6 MCA8 front panel
MCA8
MCA8
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
I
N
3
I
N
4
I
N
5
I
N
6
I
N
1
I
N
2
I
N
7
I
N
8
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15-11
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the MCA8 front panel.Table 15-7 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 15-7 Types and functions of the MCA8 interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN1-IN8 LC Connected to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to
receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can
be connected to eight "MON" interfaces at the same
time.

15.2.6 Valid Slots
The MCA8 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the MCA8 are IU1-IU16.
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two
occupied slots in the subrack, so the slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is
the number of the left slot.
For example, if the MCA8 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the MCA8 displayed
on the NM is IU1.
15.2.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA8
The characteristic code for the MCA8 consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical
signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 15-8.
Table 15-8 Characteristic code for the MCA8
Code Meaning Description
The first character Band Indicates the band of the
optical signals processed by
the board. The value C
represents C band. The value
L represents L band.

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
15-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA8 is C, indicating C band.
15.2.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 15-9.
Table 15-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA8 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN1-IN8 1-8

Configuration Parameters
Optical Monitoring
Monitor Interval (min.)
Wavelength Monitor Status
15.2.9 Specifications of the MCA8
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 15-10 lists the optical specifications of the MCA8.
Table 15-10 Optical specifications of the MCA8
Item Unit Value
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561
Detect range for single channel optical power dBm -30 to -10
Detect accuracy for optical power dBm 1.5
Detect accuracy for OSNR (The detect range
for signal-to-noise ratio is 13 dB to 23 dB, and
the wavelength spacing is 50 GHz.)
dB 1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19)
2 (OSNR: 19 to 23)
Detect accuracy for central wavelength nm 0.1
Numbers of optical interface pcs 8

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15-13
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 4.18 lb (1.9 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 17.0 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 18.7 W
15.3 WMU
WMU: wavelength monitored unit
15.3.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the WMU board is available, that is TN11.
15.3.2 Application
The WMU board realizes the wavelength monitoring in the system with wavelengths at 50 GHz
channel spacing.
15.3.3 Functions and Features
The WMU board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths on the OTU board at
the transmit end in the system with wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing.
15.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The WMU board consists of the 1x2 optical switch, optical wavelength and power detection
module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
15.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the WMU front panel.
15.3.6 Valid Slots
The WMU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the WMU are IU1-IU17 in the subrack.
15.3.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
15.3.8 Specifications of the WMU
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
15.3.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the WMU board is available, that is TN11.
15.3.2 Application
The WMU board realizes the wavelength monitoring in the system with wavelengths at 50 GHz
channel spacing.
For the position of the WMU in the WDM system, seeFigure 15-7.
15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
15-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 15-7 Position of the WMU in the WDM system
ITL
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
OA
OA
O
T
U
T
U
O
T
U
T
U
O O
MUX
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
ITL
OA
FIU
OA
OSC
WMU
MUX
FIU
WMU
NOTE
One WMU board can realize the centralized wavelength monitoring in two directions.Figure 15-7 shows the
WMU in two places. Actually it refers to the same one WMU board.
15.3.3 Functions and Features
The WMU board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths on the OTU board at
the transmit end in the system with wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-11.
Table 15-11 Functions and features of the WMU
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function The board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths on
the OTU board at the transmit end in the system with wavelengths at
50 GHz channel spacing; and performs centralized monitoring of the
wavelengths on the OTU at the transmit end in a transmission system.
In addition, the board can monitor the wavelengths in two different
optical transmit directions.
Optical switch The optical switch is used to select the optical signals from the desired
transmission direction to monitor.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15-15
15.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The WMU board consists of the 1x2 optical switch, optical wavelength and power detection
module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 15-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WMU.
Figure 15-8 Functional block diagram of the WMU
IN1
IN2
Optical wavelength and power
detection module 1X2
optical switch
Control
signal
Driving
signal
Data
signal
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
The 1x2 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the optical
wavelength and power detection module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and
converted, the wavelength and optical power information is sent to the control and
communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module further
reports the results to the SCC board and the T2000. The final results are displayed on the T2000.
Module Function
l 1x2 optical switch
Selects one channel of signals from the signals accessed through two optical interfaces for
optical wavelength and power detection.
l Optical wavelength and power detection module
Detects each single-wavelength optical signals from the optical channel selection module,
and reports the wavelength and optical power information to the SCC board.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
15-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
15.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the WMU front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 15-9 shows the WMU front panel.
Figure 15-9 WMU front panel
WMU
WMU
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
I
N
1
I
N
2
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15-17
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the WMU front panel.Table 15-12 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 15-12 Types and functions of the WMU interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN1/IN2 LC Connects to the MON optical interface on the optical
amplifier boards in two different transmit directions,
respectively, for centralized wavelength monitoring.

15.3.6 Valid Slots
The WMU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the WMU are IU1-IU17 in the subrack.
15.3.7 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 15-13.
Table 15-13 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WMU displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN1 1
IN2 2

15.3.8 Specifications of the WMU
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
15-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Optical Specifications
Table 15-14 Optical specifications of the WMU
Item Unit Value
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561
Adjacent channel spacing - Supports the monitoring to system
wavelengths with spacing of 50
GHz.
Per-channel input optical power range dBm -36 to -16
Detect accuracy for central wavelength GHz <2.5
Detect accuracy for single channel optical
power
dB <2
Detect range for Central wavelength offset nm -10 to 10

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.25 lb (1.02kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 12W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 15W
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15-19
16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
About This Chapter
16.1 VA1
VA1: 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit
16.2 VA4
VA4: 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16-1
16.1 VA1
VA1: 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit
16.1.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the VA1 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference
between the two versions in terms of functionality.
16.1.2 Application
The VA1 is a type of variable optical attenuator unit. The VA1 realizes the power adjustment
for one signal.
16.1.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the VA1 are optical power adjustment, alarm
monitoring and power-off protection.
16.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The VA1 board consists of the variable optical attenuator, driving and control module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
16.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the VA1 front panel.
16.1.6 Valid Slots
The VA1 occupies one slot in a subrack. The valid slots for the VA1 are IU1-IU17.
16.1.7 Characteristic Code for the VA1
The characteristic code for the VA1 consists of three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation
of the optical signals processed by the board.
16.1.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
16.1.9 Specifications of the VA1
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
16.1.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the VA1 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference
between the two versions in terms of functionality.
Table 16-1 lists the version description of the VA1.
Table 16-1 Version description of the VA1
Item Description
Functional
version
Two functional versions of the VA1 board are available: TN11 and TN12.
Similarity The TN12VA1 works in the same way as the TN11VA1.
Difference None
16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
16-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Replacement The TN11VA1 and TN12VA1 boards share the same functionality and can
be replaced with each other. But after the TN11VA1 is replaced with the
TN12VA1, the SCC software need be upgraded.

16.1.2 Application
The VA1 is a type of variable optical attenuator unit. The VA1 realizes the power adjustment
for one signal.
For the position of the VA1 in the WDM system, see Figure 16-1.
Figure 16-1 Position of the VA1 in the WDM system
MR2
OA OA
OA
OA
MR2
OTU OTU
VA1
OTU OTU
VA1
VA1
VA1
VA1
VA1 VA1 VA1
16.1.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the VA1 are optical power adjustment, alarm
monitoring and power-off protection.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 16-2.
Table 16-2 Functions and features of the VA1
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Adjusts the optical power of one optical signal according to the control
command sent by the SCC.
Alarm monitoring Detects the input optical power, attenuation and reports various
alarms to the SCC.
Power-off protection Supports the power-off protection to avoid the damages caused by too
high optical power to the corresponding optical receiver when the
power supply recovers.
When there is no power supplied to the VA1, the attenuation of the
VA1 changes to its maximum value automatically. Shortly after the
power supply recovers, the attenuation of the VA1 still remains its
maximum value. When the system begins to work normally, the
attenuation automatically changes back to the value set last time.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16-3
Function and
Feature
Description
Attenuation range The variable attenuation ranges between 1.5 dB and 21.5 dB. The
resolution is 0.1 dB.

16.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The VA1 board consists of the variable optical attenuator, driving and control module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 16-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the VA1.
Figure 16-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA1
Driving and control module
SCC
OUT IN Variable optical attenuator
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
According to the instructions from the SCC board, the VA1 board adjusts the power of input
signals by using a variable optical attenuator.
Module Function
l Variable optical attenuator
Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals.
l Driving and control module
Detects the input and output optical power of the VA1 board.
16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
16-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Drives and controls the variable optical attenuator, and reports the detected attenuation
to the control and communication module.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
16.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the VA1 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 16-3 shows the VA1 front panel.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16-5
Figure 16-3 VA1 front panel
VA1
VA1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
O
U
T
I
N
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the VA1 front panel. Table 16-3 lists the type and function
of each interface.
16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
16-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 16-3 Types and functions of the VA1 interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Receives the optical signals to be adjusted.
OUT LC Transmits the adjusted optical signals.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).
16.1.6 Valid Slots
The VA1 occupies one slot in a subrack. The valid slots for the VA1 are IU1-IU17.
16.1.7 Characteristic Code for the VA1
The characteristic code for the VA1 consists of three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation
of the optical signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 16-4.
Table 16-4 Characteristic code for the VA1
Code Meaning Description
The first to the third digits Attenuation value Indicate the maximum
attenuation.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA1 is 21.5, indicating that the maximum
attenuation value is 21.5 dB.
16.1.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 16-5.
Table 16-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA1 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN/OUT 1

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16-7
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Path Use Status
16.1.9 Specifications of the VA1
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 16-6 lists the optical specifications of the VA1.
Table 16-6 Optical specifications of the VA1
Item Unit Value
TN11VA1 TN12VA1
IN-OUT Inherent insertion
loss
dB 1.5 1.5
Dynamic
attenuation range
dB 0-20 0-20
Adjustment accuracy dB 1 1(attenuation10dB)
1.3(attenuation15dB)
1.8(attenuation>15dB)
WDL dB 0.5 1.0 (attenuation
15dB)
1.5 (attenuation
20dB)
PDL dB 0.5 0.7 (attenuation
15dB)
1.0 (attenuation
20dB)
PMD ps 0.2 0.2

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
16-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.2 lb. (1.0 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 6.5 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 7.2 W
16.2 VA4
VA4: 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit
16.2.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the VA4 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference
between the two versions in terms of functionality.
16.2.2 Application
The VA4 is a type of variable optical attenuator unit. The VA4 realizes the power adjustment
for four optical signals.
16.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the VA4 are optical power adjustment, alarm
monitoring, and power-off protection.
16.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The VA4 board consists of the variable optical attenuator, driving and control module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
16.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the VA4 front panel.
16.2.6 Valid Slots
The VA4 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the VA4 are IU1-IU17.
16.2.7 Characteristic Code for the VA4
The characteristic code for the VA4 consists of three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation
of the optical signals processed by the board.
16.2.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
16.2.9 Specifications of the VA4
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
16.2.1 Version Description
Two functional versions of the VA4 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference
between the two versions in terms of functionality.
Table 16-7 lists the version description of the VA4.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16-9
Table 16-7 Version description of the VA4
Item Description
Functional
version
Two functional versions of the VA4 board are available: TN11 and TN12.
Similarity The TN12VA4 works in the same way as the TN11VA4.
Difference None
Replacement The TN11VA4 and TN12VA4 boards share the same functionality and can
be replaced with each other. But after the TN11VA4 board is replacement
with the TN12VA4 board, the SCC software need be upgraded.

16.2.2 Application
The VA4 is a type of variable optical attenuator unit. The VA4 realizes the power adjustment
for four optical signals.
For the position of the VA4 in the WDM system, see Figure 16-4.
Figure 16-4 Position of the VA4 in the WDM system
MR2
OA OA
OA
OA
MR2
OTU OTU
VA4
OTU OTU
VA4
VA4
VA4
VA4
VA4
VA4
16.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the VA4 are optical power adjustment, alarm
monitoring, and power-off protection.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 16-8.
Table 16-8 Functions and features of the VA4
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Adjusts the optical power of four optical signals respectively
according to the control command sent by the SCC.
Alarm monitoring Detects attenuation and reports various alarms to the SCC.
16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
16-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Function and
Feature
Description
Power-off protection Supports the power-off protection to avoid the damages caused by too
high optical power to the corresponding optical receiver when the
power supply recovers.
When there is no power supplied to the VA4, the attenuation of the
VA4 changes to its maximum value automatically. Shortly after the
power supply recovers, the attenuation of the VA4 still remains its
maximum value. When the system begins to work normally, the
attenuation automatically changes back to the value set last time.
Attenuation range The variable attenuation ranges between 1.5 dB and 21.5 dB. The
resolution is 0.1 dB.

16.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The VA4 board consists of the variable optical attenuator, driving and control module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 16-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the VA4.
Figure 16-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA4
Driving and control module
SCC
OUT2 IN2
OUT4 IN4
Variable optical attenuator
Variable optical attenuator
OUT1 IN1
Variable optical attenuator
OUT3
IN3
Variable optical attenuator
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16-11
Signal Flow
According to the instructions from the SCC board, the VA4 board adjusts the power of four
channels of optical signals by using a variable optical attenuator.
Module Function
l Variable optical attenuator
Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals.
l Driving and control module
Detects the input and output optical power of the VA4 board.
Drives and controls the variable optical attenuator, and reports the detected attenuation
to the control and communication module.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
16.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the VA4 front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 16-6 shows the VA4 front panel.
16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
16-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 16-6 VA4 front panel
VA4
VA4
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
I
N
O
U
T
2
I
N
2
O
U
T
3
I
N
3
O
U
T
4
I
N
4
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the VA4 front panel. Table 16-9 lists the type and function
of each interface.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16-13
Table 16-9 Types and functions of the VA4 interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN1-IN4 LC Receives the optical signals to be adjusted.
OUT1-OUT4 LC Transmits the adjusted optical signals.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).
16.2.6 Valid Slots
The VA4 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the VA4 are IU1-IU17.
16.2.7 Characteristic Code for the VA4
The characteristic code for the VA4 consists of three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation
of the optical signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 16-10.
Table 16-10 Characteristic code for the VA4
Code Meaning Description
The first to the third digits Attenuation value Indicate the maximum
attenuation.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA4 is 21.5, indicating that the maximum
attenuation value is 21.5 dB.
16.2.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 16-11.
Table 16-11 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA4 displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2
16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
16-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN3/OUT3 3
IN4/OUT4 4

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Configuration Parameters
Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Path Use Status
16.2.9 Specifications of the VA4
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 16-12 lists the optical specifications of the VA4.
Table 16-12 Optical specifications of the VA4
Item Unit Value
TN11VA4 TN12VA4
IN-OUT Inherent
insertion loss
dB 1.5 1.5
Dynamic
attenuation
range
dB 0-20 0-20
Adjustment accuracy dB 1 1(attenuation10dB)
1.3(attenuation15dB)
1.8(attenuation>15dB)
WDL dB 0.5 1.0 (attenuation15dB)
1.5 (attenuation20dB)
PDL dB 0.5 0.7 (attenuation15dB)
1.0 (attenuation20dB)
PMD ps 0.2 0.2

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16-15
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.2 lb. (1.0 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 8.5 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 9.4 W
16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
16-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
17 Optical Power and Dispersion
Equalizing Unit
About This Chapter
17.1 DCU
DCU: dispersion compensation unit
17.2 GFU
GFU: gain flatness unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17-1
17.1 DCU
DCU: dispersion compensation unit
17.1.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the DCU board is available, that is TN11.
17.1.2 Application
The DCU board is a kind of dispersion compensation board, compensating for the dispersion
which is accumulated in an optical transmission system. It is used at the transmit end and the
receive end in the transmission system.
17.1.3 Functions and Features
The DCU board compensates for the dispersion which is accumulated in the fiber during
transmission and compresses optical signal pulse. In this way, the optical signals transmitted
can be restored at the output end. In addition, when used together with an optical amplifier board,
the DCU board can realize long haul optical transmission.
17.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The DCU board consists of the dispersion compensation module, control and communication
module, and power supply module.
17.1.5 Front Panel
There are interfaces and laser safety label on the DCU front panel.
17.1.6 Valid Slots
The DCU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the DCU are IU1-IU17.
17.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCU
The characteristic code for the DCU board consists of characters, indicating the type of the fiber
that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance.
17.1.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
17.1.9 Specifications of the DCU
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
17.1.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the DCU board is available, that is TN11.
17.1.2 Application
The DCU board is a kind of dispersion compensation board, compensating for the dispersion
which is accumulated in an optical transmission system. It is used at the transmit end and the
receive end in the transmission system.
For the position of the DCU in the WDM system, see Figure 17-1.
17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
17-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 17-1 Position of the DCU in the WDM system
OBU OAU
OBU OAU DMUX
OTU
OTU
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
DCU
DCU
OTU
MUX
OTU
OBU OAU
OBU OAU DMUX
OTU
OTU
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
DCU
DCU
OTU
MUX
OTU
17.1.3 Functions and Features
The DCU board compensates for the dispersion which is accumulated in the fiber during
transmission and compresses optical signal pulse. In this way, the optical signals transmitted
can be restored at the output end. In addition, when used together with an optical amplifier board,
the DCU board can realize long haul optical transmission.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 17-1.
Table 17-1 Functions and features of the DCU
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Provides dispersion compensation for different transmission distance.
Dispersion
compensation
method
Compensates for the dispersion accumulated in an optical
transmission system, and compresses the optical signal pulse. In this
way the optical signals transmitted can be restored at the output end.
Long haul
transmission with
optical regeneration
Realizes long haul transmission when used together with an optical
amplifier board.

17.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The DCU board consists of the dispersion compensation module, control and communication
module, and power supply module.
Figure 17-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DCU.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17-3
Figure 17-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCU
OUT
IN
EDFA optical module
SCC
Dispersion compensation
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(Controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
Signal Flow
The dispersion compensation module (DCM) performs the dispersion compensation with the
main path optical signals received through the IN optical interface. Then, the signals are output
through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l The dispersion compensation module
After the optical signal is transmitted for a certain distance, the optical signal pulse is
widened because of the positive dispersion accumulated in the system. In this case, the
system transmission performance is severely affected. The DCM employs the negative
dispersion borne with the dispersion compensating fiber (DCF) to offset the positive
dispersion in the transmission fiber, and compresses the input optical signal pulse. In this
way, the optical signals at the output end are restored back to the original signals.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
17.1.5 Front Panel
There are interfaces and laser safety label on the DCU front panel.
17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
17-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 17-3 shows the DCU front panel.
Figure 17-3 DCU front panel
DCU
DCU
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
O
U
T
I
N
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the DCU front panel.Table 17-2 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 17-2 Types and functions of the DCU interfaces
Interface Type Function
IN LC Accesses the multiplexed signals to be compensated in
terms of dispersion.
OUT LC Outputs the multiplexed signals that have been
compensated in terms of dispersion.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17-5

17.1.6 Valid Slots
The DCU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the DCU are IU1-IU17.
17.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCU
The characteristic code for the DCU board consists of characters, indicating the type of the fiber
that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 17-3.
Table 17-3 Characteristic code for the DCU
Code Meaning Description
The character before hyphen
(-)
Fiber type Type of the fiber that the DCU
board works with
The character after hyphen
(-)
Dispersion compensation
distance
The transmission distance
achieved through dispersion
compensation

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11DCU is G.655LEAF-40. It indicates that the
DCU board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is 40 km.
NOTE
If the characteristic code contains varieties of the dispersion compensation distance, the symbol "&" is
used to separate each distance variety.
17.1.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 17-4.
Table 17-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCU displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN/OUT 1

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
17-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
17.1.9 Specifications of the DCU
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 17-5 Optical specifications of the DCU
Item Unit Value
DC
U0
1
DC
U0
2
DC
U0
3
DC
U0
4
DC
U0
5
DC
U06
D
CU
07
DCU0
8
Typical dispersion
compensation distance
km 20 40 60 80 100 120 5 10
Maximum insertion loss dB 3.3 4.7 6.4 8 9 9.8 2.3 2.6
Dispersion compensation
slope
- 90%-110%
Polarization mode
dispersion
ps 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.3 0.3
Polarization dependent
loss
dB 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
Maximum input power dBm 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1525-1565
Dispersion compensating
fiber type
- G.652 fiber

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 0.5W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 0.5W
17.2 GFU
GFU: gain flatness unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17-7
17.2.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the GFU board is available, that is TN11.
17.2.2 Application
The GFU is a kind of optical power and dispersion slope equalizing unit. It is used to equalize
optical power by working with the ROP board in the remote optical pumping amplifier
subsystem.
17.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the GFU are optical power equalization and
software loading in-service.
17.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The GFU unit consists of four parts: the optical module, the control and communication module,
and the power supply module.
17.2.5 Front Panel
There are interfaces and laser safety label on the GFU front panel.
17.2.6 Valid Slots
The GFU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the GFU are IU1-IU17.
17.2.7 Characteristic Code for the GFU
The characteristic code for the GFU consists of two characters and two digits, indicating the
gradient of optical signals processed by the board.
17.2.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
17.2.9 Specifications of the GFU
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
17.2.1 Version Description
Only one functional version of the GFU board is available, that is TN11.
17.2.2 Application
The GFU is a kind of optical power and dispersion slope equalizing unit. It is used to equalize
optical power by working with the ROP board in the remote optical pumping amplifier
subsystem.
For the position of the board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-4.
Figure 17-4 Position of the GFU in the WDM system
DCM
M
4
0
V
HBA
DCM
OAU
D
4
0
OAU
HBA
OTM
OTM
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
M
4
0
V
D
4
0
GFU CRPC
GFU CRPC
ROP
ROP RGU
RGU
17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
17-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
NOTE
For details of the ROP board, refer to ROPA Subsystem User Guide.
17.2.3 Functions and Features
The main functions and features supported by the GFU are optical power equalization and
software loading in-service.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 17-6.
Table 17-6 Functions and features of the GFU
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Equalizes the optical power of the ROP board in the ROPA (remote optical
pumping amplifier) subsystem and offers static compensation for the gain
flatness of the system.
Information
query
Queries board ambient temperature, detailed board information, board
software version and optical component type.
Software
loading in-
service
Supports online loading of board software.

17.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The GFU unit consists of four parts: the optical module, the control and communication module,
and the power supply module.
Figure 17-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the GFU.
Figure 17-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the GFU
OUT
IN
GFF module
Optical module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
SCC
Backplane
(Controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
Fuse
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17-9
Signal Flow
According to the instructions from the SCC board, the GFU board provides the fixed optical
power equilibrium function by using the gain flattening filter (GFF) module.
Module Function
l Optical module
Adopts the GFF module. Provides static compensation for the gain unflatness after cascaded
amplifiers.
l Control and communication module
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
17.2.5 Front Panel
There are interfaces and laser safety label on the GFU front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 17-6 shows the GFU front panel.
17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
17-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 17-6 GFU front panel
GFU
GFU
STAT
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS1M LASER
PRODUCT
I
N
O
U
T
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the GFU front panel. Table 17-7 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 17-7 Types and functions of the GFU interfaces
Interface Connector
Type
Description
IN LC Receives optical signals to be gain flattened.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17-11
Interface Connector
Type
Description
OUT LC Sends optical signals after gain flattening.

Laser Safety Level
The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power
of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).
17.2.6 Valid Slots
The GFU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the GFU are IU1-IU17.
17.2.7 Characteristic Code for the GFU
The characteristic code for the GFU consists of two characters and two digits, indicating the
gradient of optical signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 17-8.
Table 17-8 Characteristic code for the GFU
Code Meaning Description
The first and second
characters
- The first and second
characters are always GF.
The third and fourth digits Gradient Indicate the gradient of
optical signals.

For example, the characteristic code for the GFU is GF10. This code indicates that the gradient
of optical signals processed by the board is 10.
17.2.8 NM Configuration Reference
NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration
of boards through the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 17-9.
Table 17-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the GFU displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN/OUT 1

17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
17-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces,
of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
17.2.9 Specifications of the GFU
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 17-10 Optical specifications of the GFU
Item Unit Value
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561
Channel insertion loss dB 0.5-6.0
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.5

Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
l Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))
l Weight: 2.0 lb. (0.9 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 0.2 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 0.3 W
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17-13
18 Cables
About This Chapter
18.1 Power Cables and Grounding Cables
The OptiX OSN 6800 has cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND power cables and subrack power cables.
18.2 Optical Fibers
Optical fibers of the OptiX OSN 6800 can be classified into three types: LC/PC-LC/PC, LC/
PC-FC/PC, LC/PC-SC/PC.
18.3 Grounding Cables
OptiX OSN 6800 has grounding cables, including cabinet door grounding cables and a PDU
grounding cable.
18.4 Alarm Cables
Alarm cables of the OptiX OSN 6800 include cabinet indicator alarm cable, alarm concatenating/
inter-subrack concatenating cable, and alarm interface cable.
18.5 Management Cables
Management cables of the OptiX OSN 6800 include the OAM serial port cable.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 18 Cables
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18-1
18.1 Power Cables and Grounding Cables
The OptiX OSN 6800 has cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND power cables and subrack power cables.
18.1.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cables
The -48 V, BGND, and PGND power cables supply power to devices inside the cabinet. One
end of the power cable is connected to the power distribution cabinet and grounding bar in the
equipment room. The other end is connected to the DC power distribution box at the cabinet
top.
18.1.2 Subrack Power Cables
The subrack power cables connect the DC power distribution box at the cabinet top and the
power interface in the subrack interface area, which lead the -48 V power supply from the top
of the cabinet to the subracks. The subrack power cables have been correctly connected before
delivery.
18.1.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cables
The -48 V, BGND, and PGND power cables supply power to devices inside the cabinet. One
end of the power cable is connected to the power distribution cabinet and grounding bar in the
equipment room. The other end is connected to the DC power distribution box at the cabinet
top.
Structure
Figure 18-1 shows the structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and the cabinet BGND
grounding cable.Figure 18-2 shows the structure of the cabinet PGND grounding cable.
Figure 18-1 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and cabinet BGND grounding cable
1 2
3
1. Cord end terminal 2. OT naked crimping connector 3. Cable clip
18 Cables
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
18-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 18-2 Structure of the cabinet PGND grounding cable
L
1
2
3
4
5
6
1. OT naked crimping connector 2. Cable clip 3. JG two-hole naked crimping connector
4. Heat shrink tube 5. Heat shrink tube 6. Cable
Pin Assignment
None
Technical Parameters
Table 18-1 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables(16 mm
2
)
Item Description
Cabinet -48 V power
cable
Connector 1
Cord end terminal-16 mm
2
-0.024mm-80A-
Insertion depth 16mm-Green
Connector 2
OT naked crimping connector-16 mm
2
-M8
Type of the cable Electric power cable-450 V/750 V-227 IEC
02(RV)-16mm
2
-Blue-85 A
Cabinet BGND
grounding cable
Connector 1
Cord end terminal-16 mm
2
-0.024mm-80A-
Insertion depth 16mm-Green
Connector 2
OT naked crimping connector-16 mm
2
-M8
Type of the cable Electric power cable-450 V/750 V-227 IEC
02(RV)-16mm
2
-Black-85 A

Table 18-2 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables(25 mm
2
)
Item Description
Cabinet -48 V power
cable
Connector 1
Cord end terminal-25 mm
2
-30 mm-75 A-
Insertion depth 16 mm-Brown
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 18 Cables
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18-3
Item Description
Connector 2
OT naked crimping connector-25 mm
2
-M8
Type of the cable
Electric power cable-450 V/750 V-25 mm
2
-
Blue-110 A
Cabinet BGND
grounding cable
Connector 1
Cord end terminal-25 mm
2
-30 mm-75A-
Insertion depth 16 mm-Brown
Connector 2
Naked crimping connector-OT type-25 mm
2
-
M8
Type of the cable
Electric power cable-450 V/750 V-25 mm
2
-
Black-110 A

Table 18-3 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables (35 mm
2
)
Item Description
Cabinet -48 V power
cable
Connector 1
Cord end terminal-35mm
2
-0.03m-105A-
Insertion depth 16mm-Cream-colored
Connector 2
OT naked crimping connector-35 mm
2
-M8
Type of the cable Electric power cable-750V/450V-227 IEC 02
(RV)-35mm
2
-Blue-135 A
Cabinet BGND
grounding cable
Connector 1
Cord end terminal-35mm
2
-0.03m-105A-
Insertion depth 16mm-Cream-colored
Connector 2
OT naked crimping connector-35 mm
2
-M8
Type of the cable Electric power cable-750V/450V-227 IEC 02
(RV)-35mm
2
-Black-135 A

Table 18-4 Technical parameters of the cabinet PGND power cables
Item Description
Cabinet PGND
grounding cable
Connector 1
OT naked crimping connector-25 mm
2
-M8
Connector 2 JG dual-hole naked crimping connector-25
mm
2
-M6-150 A-Tin plating
Type of the cable
Electric power cable-450 V/750 V-25 mm
2
-
Yellow and green-110 A

18 Cables
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
18-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
18.1.2 Subrack Power Cables
The subrack power cables connect the DC power distribution box at the cabinet top and the
power interface in the subrack interface area, which lead the -48 V power supply from the top
of the cabinet to the subracks. The subrack power cables have been correctly connected before
delivery.
Structure
Figure 18-3 shows the subrack power cable.
Figure 18-3 Structure of the subrack power cable
X1
X3
X2
500
L
A
A
A1
A2
A3
1
W1
W2
2 3
1. Cable connector 2. Cable clip 3. Naked crimping connector
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of subrack power cables, refer to Table 18-5.
Table 18-5 Pin assignment of the subrack power cables
Cable Cable
Connector
Cord End
Terminal
Connection Core Color
W2 X1.A1 X2 A1 connects to
X2.
Blue (-48 V
power)
W1 X1.A3 X3 A3 connects to
X3.
Black (power
ground)

Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of subrack power cables are listed in Table 18-6.
Table 18-6 Technical parameters of subrack power cables
Item Description
Cable connector X1 Cable connector-D type-3PIN-Female-Solder
injection molding type-No middle contact
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 18 Cables
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18-5
Item Description
Cord end terminals X2, X3
Common terminal-Conductor Cross Section-6 mm
2
-
Length 20 mm-30 A-Insertion depth 12 mm-Black
Type of the cable W2
Power cable-450 V/750 V-H07Z-K-6 mm
2
-Blue-Low
Smoke Zero Halogen Cable
Type of the cable W1
Power cable-450 V/750 V-H07Z-K-6 mm
2
-Black-Low
Smoke Zero Halogen Cable

18.2 Optical Fibers
Optical fibers of the OptiX OSN 6800 can be classified into three types: LC/PC-LC/PC, LC/
PC-FC/PC, LC/PC-SC/PC.
18.2.1 Classification
The connectors and the length of the fibers are selected based on the results of site survey.
18.2.2 Connectors
All optical interfaces on the front panel of the OptiX OSN 6800 boards are of LC/PC type. LC/
PC fiber connectors are used with these board. The optical interfaces on the ODF in the
equipment room are generally of FC/PC or SC/PC type. FC/PC or SC/PC fiber connectors are
used with them.
18.2.1 Classification
The connectors and the length of the fibers are selected based on the results of site survey.
The optical fibers used by the equipment are classified as shown in Table 18-7.
Table 18-7 Classification of optical fiber jumpers
Types of the Connectors at Both Ends Type of the Cable
LC/PCLC/PC 2.0 mm (0.1 in.) single-mode fiber
2.0 mm (0.1 in.) multimode fiber
LC/PCFC/PC 2.0 mm (0.1 in.) single-mode fiber
2.0 mm (0.1 in.) multimode fiber
LC/PCSC/PC 2.0 mm (0.1 in.) single-mode fiber
2.0 mm (0.1 in.) multimode fiber
LSH/APCSC/APC 2.0 mm (0.1 in.) single-mode fiber
2.0 mm (0.1 in.) multimode fiber

18 Cables
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
18-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
18.2.2 Connectors
All optical interfaces on the front panel of the OptiX OSN 6800 boards are of LC/PC type. LC/
PC fiber connectors are used with these board. The optical interfaces on the ODF in the
equipment room are generally of FC/PC or SC/PC type. FC/PC or SC/PC fiber connectors are
used with them.
The classification of fiber connectors is given in Table 18-8.
Table 18-8 Classification of fiber connectors
Type of Fiber Connectors Description
LC/PC Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding polished
FC/PC Round fiber connector/protruding polished
SC/PC Square fiber connector/protruding polished
LSH/APC Fiber connector with auto-protective dustproof cap/
eight-degree radian surface/protruding polished

The appearances of the fiber connectors are shown in Figure 18-4, Figure 18-5, Figure 18-6
and Figure 18-7.
Figure 18-4 LC/PC fiber connector
LC/PC connector
Protective cap
Figure 18-5 FC/PC fiber connector
Protective cap
FC/PC connector
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 18 Cables
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18-7
Figure 18-6 SC/PC fiber connector
SC/PC connector
Protective cap
Figure 18-7 LSH/APC fiber connector
18.3 Grounding Cables
OptiX OSN 6800 has grounding cables, including cabinet door grounding cables and a PDU
grounding cable.
18.3.1 Cabinet Door Grounding Cables
The cabinet door grounding cables ground the front door, rear door and side doors. The
cabinet door grounding cables have been correctly connected before delivery.
18.3.2 PDU Grounding Cable
One end of the PDU grounding cable is connected to a protection grounding screw of the power
distribution box. The other end is connected to the protection grounding screw on the top of the
cabinet. The PDU grounding cable has been correctly connected before delivery.
18.3.1 Cabinet Door Grounding Cables
The cabinet door grounding cables ground the front door, rear door and side doors. The
cabinet door grounding cables have been correctly connected before delivery.
Structure
Figure 18-8 shows the structure of the cabinet door grounding cables.
18 Cables
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
18-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Figure 18-8 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable
1
X1 X2
L
1. OT naked crimping connector
Pin Assignment
None
Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the cabinet door grounding cables are listed in Table 18-9.
Table 18-9 Technical parameters of the cabinet door grounding cables
Item Description
Connector X1/X2
Naked crimping terminal-OT-6 mm
2
(0.01 in.
2
)-M6-Tin plating-
Insulated ring terminal-12-10AWG
Type of the cable
Electric power cable-600V-UL1015-0 mm
2
-10AWG-Yellow/
Green-50 A-105 core strand

18.3.2 PDU Grounding Cable
One end of the PDU grounding cable is connected to a protection grounding screw of the power
distribution box. The other end is connected to the protection grounding screw on the top of the
cabinet. The PDU grounding cable has been correctly connected before delivery.
Structure
Figure 18-9 shows the structure of the PDU grounding cable.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 18 Cables
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18-9
Figure 18-9 Structure of the PDU grounding cable
1 2
X1 X2
1. OT naked crimping connector 2. Heat-shrink tube
Pin Assignment
None
Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the PDU grounding cable are listed in Table 18-10.
Table 18-10 Technical parameters of the PDU grounding cable
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Naked crimping terminal-OT-10-6
Type of the cable
Electric power cable-450/750V-227IEC02 (RV)-10 mm
2
(0.02
in.
2
)-Yellow/Green-62 A

18.4 Alarm Cables
Alarm cables of the OptiX OSN 6800 include cabinet indicator alarm cable, alarm concatenating/
inter-subrack concatenating cable, and alarm interface cable.
18.4.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable
The cabinet indicator cable is used to cascade the signals of the indicators at different subracks
in the same cabinet. One end of the cable is connected to LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface of one
subrack. The other end of the cable is connected to LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface of another
subrack.
18.4.2 Alarm Interface Cable
The alarm interface cable between cabinets is connected to the ALMI interface in the EFI board
area of the subrack to achieve the input of alarm signals. The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight
alarm outputs. By default, critical, major, and minor alarms use the first three alarm outputs.
The other five are reserved. The output alarm signals can be concatenated.
18.4.3 Alarm Concatenating/Inter-Subrack Concatenating Cable
The inter-subrack indicator/alarm concatenating cable is used to concatenate alarm signals of
the different subracks in one cabinet. Both ends of the cable use the RJ-45 connector. Each end
is connected to ALMO interface of the EFI in a different subrack.
18 Cables
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
18-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
18.4.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable
The cabinet indicator cable is used to cascade the signals of the indicators at different subracks
in the same cabinet. One end of the cable is connected to LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface of one
subrack. The other end of the cable is connected to LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface of another
subrack.
Structure
The structure of the cable indicator alarm cable is displayed in Figure 18-10.
Figure 18-10 Structure of the cabinet indicator alarm cable
2
X1
L
X2
B
3 4
B
1
2
A
1
A
1
8
View
X3
X4
X5
View
1. Network interface connector 2. Heat-shrink tube 3. Common plug 4. Ordinary connector
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable, refer to Table 18-11.
Table 18-11 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable
Connector X1 Connectors X2, X3,
X4, X5
Color Relationship
X1.4 X2.2 White Pair
X1.5 X2.1 Green
X1.1 X3.2 White Pair
X1.2 X3.1 Blue
X1.3 X4.2 White Pair
X1.6 X4.1 Brown
X1.7 X5.2 White Pair
X1.8 X5.1 Orange

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 18 Cables
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18-11
Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable are listed in Table 18-12.
Table 18-12 Technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable
Item Description
Connector X1 Network interface connector-8PIN-single
row-single port-8bit-shielded-crystal model
connector
Connector X2/X3/X4/X5 Common plug-2PIN-single row/2.5 mm (0.1
in.)
Type of the cable Twisted pair cable -100-
SEYPVPV-0.48mm (0.02 in.)-26AWG-4
pairs-black
Number of cores 8
Core diameter 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)

18.4.2 Alarm Interface Cable
The alarm interface cable between cabinets is connected to the ALMI interface in the EFI board
area of the subrack to achieve the input of alarm signals. The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight
alarm outputs. By default, critical, major, and minor alarms use the first three alarm outputs.
The other five are reserved. The output alarm signals can be concatenated.
Structure
Figure 18-11 shows the structure of the alarm interface cable.
Figure 18-11 Alarm interface cable
A
L
X1 X2
View A
8
6
3
1
1
1. Network interface connector
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the alarm interface cable, refer to Table 18-13.
18 Cables
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
18-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table 18-13 Pin assignment of X1
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relationship
X1.2 X2.2 Orange Pair
X1.1 X2.1 White-orange
X1.6 X2.6 Green Pair
X1.3 X2.3 White-green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Pair
X1.5 X2.5 White-blue
X1.8 X2.8 Brown Pair
X1.7 X2.7 White-brown

Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the alarm interface cable are listed in Table 18-14.
Table 18-14 Technical parameters of the alarm interface cable
Item Description
Connector X1 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-
unshielded-RJ-45 connector-uniconductor
flat cable
Type of the cable W1 Symmetrical twisted pair cable-100-
UTPCAT5E-0.5 mm (0.02 in.)-24AWG-4
pairs-PANTONE 430U-low-smoke and
halogen-free cable
Number of cores 8
Core diameter 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)

18.4.3 Alarm Concatenating/Inter-Subrack Concatenating Cable
The inter-subrack indicator/alarm concatenating cable is used to concatenate alarm signals of
the different subracks in one cabinet. Both ends of the cable use the RJ-45 connector. Each end
is connected to ALMO interface of the EFI in a different subrack.
Structure
Figure 18-12 shows the structure of the cable.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 18 Cables
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18-13
Figure 18-12 Structure of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable
1
8
1
8
X1 X2
1
1. Network interface connector-RJ-45
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, refer to
Table 18-15.
Table 18-15 Pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relationship
X1.2 X2.2 Orange Pair
X1.1 X2.1 White-orange
X1.6 X2.6 Green Pair
X1.3 X2.3 White-green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Pair
X1.5 X2.5 White-blue
X1.8 X2.8 Brown Pair
X1.7 X2.7 White-brown

Technical Parameters
For the technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, refer
to Table 18-16.
Table 18-16 Technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-
crystal model connector
18 Cables
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
18-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Type of the cable Communication cable-8 cores category-5
twisted pair-24AWG
Number of cores 8
Core diameter 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)

18.5 Management Cables
Management cables of the OptiX OSN 6800 include the OAM serial port cable.
18.5.1 OAM Serial Port Cable
The OAM serial port cable is used to connect to the OAM interface.
18.5.1 OAM Serial Port Cable
The OAM serial port cable is used to connect to the OAM interface.
Structure
Figure 18-13 shows the structure of the OAM serial port cable.
Figure 18-13 Structure of the OAM serial port cable

1. DB9 connector
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the OAM serial port cable, refer to Table 18-17.
Table 18-17 Pin assignment of the OAM serial port
Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship
X1.1 X2.1 Pair
X1.5 X2.5
X1.2 X2.2 Pair
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description 18 Cables
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18-15
Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship
X1.3 X2.3
X1.6 X2.6 Pair
X1.7 X2.7
X1.8 X2.8 Pair
X1.9 X2.9

Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable are listed in Table 18-18.
Table 18-18 Technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable
Item Description
Connector X1, X2 Cable connector-D type-9 PIN-Male-Cable
welding type
Type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable-100ohm-
SEYVP-0.48mm (0.02 in.)-26AWG-4 pairs-
Black
Number of cores 4 pairs
Length 10.0m (0.4 in.), 20.0m (0.8 in.)

18 Cables
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
18-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
A Indicators
A.1 Cabinet Indicators
There are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and
yellow.
A.2 Subrack Indicator
There are altogether four indicators in different colors of the subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800:
red, orange, yellow and green.
A.3 Board Indicators
There are indicators on the front panel to indicate the status of running and alarm.
A.4 Fan Indicator
There is one indicator on the FAN to indicate the status.
A.5 PIU Indicator
There is one indicator on the PIU to indicate the status.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description A Indicators
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-1
A.1 Cabinet Indicators
There are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and
yellow.
The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-1.
Table A-1 Indicators description of the cabinet
Indicator Name Status Description
power Power indicator On (green) The cabinet is powered
on.
Off The cabinet is not
powered on.
critical Critical alarm
indicator
On (red) There is a critical alarm.
Off There is no critical alarm.
major Major alarm
indicator
On (Orange) There is a major alarm.
Off There is no major alarm.
minor Minor alarm
indicator
On (Yellow) There is a minor alarm.
Off There is no minor alarm.

A.2 Subrack Indicator
There are altogether four indicators in different colors of the subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800:
red, orange, yellow and green.
The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-2.
Table A-2 Indicators description of the subrack
Indicator Name Status Description
PWR Power indicator On (Green) The subrack works
normally.
Off The subrack does not
work.
CRI Critical alarm
indicator
On (Red) There is a critical alarm.
Off There is no critical alarm.
MAJ Major alarm
indicator
On (Orange) There is a major alarm.
Off There is no major alarm.
A Indicators
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Indicator Name Status Description
MIN Minor alarm
indicator
On (Yellow) There is a minor alarm.
Off There is no minor alarm.

A.3 Board Indicators
There are indicators on the front panel to indicate the status of running and alarm.
The corresponding messages of board indicators are listed inTable A-3 and Table A-4.
Table A-3 Indicator description of the boards
Indicator Name Status Description
STAT Board Hardware Indicator On (green) The board works
normally.
On (red) The board hardware fails
or the optical module of
the board is not inserted.
Off The board is not powered
on.
PROG Board Software Indicator On (red) Memory check failed/
loading unit software
failed/the FPGA file is
lost/the unit software is
lost.
Blinking (red) 100ms on and 100ms off
BOOTROM check failed.
Blinking
quickly (green)
100ms on and 100ms off
Writing FLASH.
Blinking slowly
(green)
300ms on and 300ms off
BIOS booting/loading
FPGA/loading unit
software.
On (green) The board software or
software for FPGA is
uploaded successfully, or
the board software is
initialized successfully.
SRV Service Alarm Indicator On (green) Service is normal, no
service alarm occurs.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description A Indicators
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-3
Indicator Name Status Description
On (red) Critical or major alarm
occurs to service.
On (yellow) Minor or remote alarm
occurs to service.
Off No service is configured.
ACT Service Activation
Indicator
On (green) The board is in working
mode.
The board is in the active
mode.
Off The board is not in
working mode.
The board is in the
standby mode.
Blinking
quickly (green)
100ms on and 100ms off
Backing up the system
database in patches.

Table A-4 Indicator description of the SCC board
Indicator Name Status Description
STAT Board Hardware Indicator On (green) The board works
normally.
On (red) The board hardware fails.
Off The board is not powered
on.
PROG Board Software Indicator On (red) Memory check failed/
loading unit software
failed/the FPGA file is
lost/the unit software is
lost.
Blinking (red) 100ms on and 100ms off
BOOTROM check failed.
Blinking
quickly (green)
100ms on and 100ms off
Writing FLASH.
Blinking slowly
(green)
300ms on and 300ms off
BIOS booting/loading
FPGA/loading unit
software.
A Indicators
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
A-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Indicator Name Status Description
On (green) The board software or
software for FPGA is
uploaded successfully, or
the board software is
initialized successfully.
SRV Service Alarm Indicator On (green) Service is normal, no
service alarm occurs.
On (red) Critical or major alarm
occurs to service.
On (yellow) Minor or remote alarm
occurs to service.
Off No service is configured.
ACT Service Activation
Indicator
On (green) The board is in working
mode.
The board is in the active
mode.
Off The board is not in
working mode.
The board is in the
standby mode.
Blinking
quickly (green)
100ms on and 100ms off
Backing up the system
database in patches.
PWRA Indicator for system
power supply
On (green) The -48 V power supply A
is normal.
On (red) The -48 V power supply A
is faulty (lost or failed).
Off No power supply inputs.
PWRB Indicator for system
power supply
On (green) The -48 V power supply B
is normal.
On (red) The -48 V power supply B
is faulty (lost or failed).
Off No power supply inputs.
PWRC Indicator for protection
power supply
On (green) The +3.3 V protection
power is normal.
On (red) The +3.3 V protection
power is lost.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description A Indicators
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-5
Indicator Name Status Description
ALMC Alarm cut indicator On (yellow) Currently in permanent
alarm cut-off status.
Off Give sound warning upon
alarm.

A.4 Fan Indicator
There is one indicator on the FAN to indicate the status.
The corresponding messages of Fan indicator are listed in Table A-5.
Table A-5 Indicator description of the FAN
Indicator Name Status Description
STAT Fan indicator On (green) The fan is normal
On (red) The major alarm exists; two or more
fans are faulty.
On (yellow) The minor alarm exists; one fan is
faulty.
Off The fan is not powered on, or is
absent, or the software is not
loaded.

A.5 PIU Indicator
There is one indicator on the PIU to indicate the status.
The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-6.
Table A-6 Indicators description of the PIU
Indicator Name Status Description
RUN Running status
indicator
On (green) Indicates that the power is
accessed normally.
Off Indicates that the power is
not accessed.

A Indicators
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
A-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
B Bar Code for Boards
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the
board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name,
and board characteristic code.
B.1 Overview
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the
board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name,
and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code.
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs
The characteristic code for OTUs indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the optical
modules in DWDM OTUs, DWDM wavelength-tunable OTUs and CWDM OTUs.
B.3 Characteristic Code for Line Unit
The characteristic code for line unit indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the DWDM
optical modules and DWDM wavelength-tunable optical modules.
B.4 Characteristic Code for FOADMs
The characteristic code for FOADMs indicates the wavelength or frequency of the optical signals
processed by the board.
B.5 Characteristic Code for MCAs
The characteristic code for MCAs indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the
board.
B.6 Characteristic Code for OAUs
The characteristic code for OAUs indicates the gain, gain range and the maximum nominal input
optical power of the optical signals processed by the board.
B.7 Characteristic Code for Optical MUX/DMUX Units
The characteristic code for optical MUX/DMUX units indicates the band of the optical signals
processed by the board, whether the wavelengths that bear the signals are odd or even
wavelengths, and the multiplexing solution adopted by the board.
B.8 Characteristic Code for Protection Units
The characteristic code for optical protection boards indicates the maximum protection
switching time.
B.9 Characteristic Code for VOAs
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description B Bar Code for Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-1
The characteristic code for VOAs indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical signals
processed by the board.
B.10 Characteristic Code for PDE Units
The characteristic code for PDE units indicates the type of the fiber that the board works with,
the dispersion compensation distance and the gradient of optical signals.
B Bar Code for Boards
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
B-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
B.1 Overview
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the
board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name,
and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code.
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
The information of a bar code includes can be queried on the T2000, for details refer to
Supporting Tasks.
NOTE
Such information as frequency of signals queried on the T2000 is a commissioning value, different from
that on the bar code.
Figure B-1 and Figure B-2 show a bar code.
Figure B-1 Description of the bar code (example 1)
21023132421059000003 19210PA
BOM
Delivery
information
Board version
(TN11)
Board
name
Characteristic
code
TN1M1L4G
Y 01
Board model
number
Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
Figure B-2 Description of the bar code (example 2)
030FBQ1073000001 -94509520
Last four numbers of
the BOM
TN11MR4 N 01
Environmental
friendliness flag
Delivery
information
Board name
Board version
Characteristic
code
Board model
number
(N: Environmentally
unfriendly)
B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs
The characteristic code for OTUs indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the optical
modules in DWDM OTUs, DWDM wavelength-tunable OTUs and CWDM OTUs.
B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description B Bar Code for Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-3
The characteristic code for a DWDM OTU consists of digits and characters, indicating the
frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU.
B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs
The characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU consists of characters, indicating
the frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU.
B.2.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUs
The characteristic code for a CWDM OTU consists of characters, indicating the wavelength and
type of the optical module in the OTU.
B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs
The characteristic code for a DWDM OTU consists of digits and characters, indicating the
frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU.
Detailed information of the characteristic code is listed in Table B-1.
Table B-1 Characteristic code for a DWDM OTU
Code Meaning Description
The first five digit The frequency of the
DWDM-side optical
transmitter module
Indicate the frequency of the
DWDM-side optical
transmitter module.
The sixth character The type of the DWDM-side
receiving optical module
The value can be A or P. A
represents APD. P represents
PIN.
The seventh character The type of the DWDM-side
optical transmitter module
The detailed meaning of the
character is shown in Table
B-2.

NOTE
In the case of the OTU boards with dual fed optical interfaces, such as the LDGD, LQMD, LWXD and
LWX2 boards, the characteristic code consists of eight digits. The frequency values of the two channels
of optical signals on the WDM side are indicated.
The types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules are listed in Table B-2.
Table B-2 Types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules
Character Dispersion (1550
nm)
Distance Rate
A 1600ps/nm 80km 2.5G
3200ps/nm 170km 2.5G
800ps/nm 40km 10.66G
3200ps/nm 160km 2.5G
B Bar Code for Boards
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
B-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Character Dispersion (1550
nm)
Distance Rate
B 1500ps/nm 80km 10.66G
1600ps/nm 80km 10.66G
3200ps/nm 170km 2.5G
C 800ps/nm 40km 10.66G
12800ps/nm 640km 2.5G
6500ps/nm 320km 2.5G
D 12800ps/nm 640km 2.5G
E 6500ps/nm 320km 2.5G
G 800ps/nm 40km 10.71G
H >600ps/nm >30km 10.71G
>600ps/nm >30km 10.66G
K 800ps/nm 40km 10.66G
1800ps/nm 90km 2.66G
L 12800ps/nm 640km 2.66G
12800ps/nm 640km 2.5G
1500ps/nm 80km 10.66G
M >600ps/nm >30km 10.66G
>600ps/nm >30km 10.71G
6400ps/nm 320km 4.9-5.4G
6400ps/nm 320km 10.66G
1500ps/nm 80km 10.71G
3400ps/nm 170km 4.9-5.4G
Z 800ps/nm 40km 10.71G
U >600ps/nm >30km 10.71G

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11L4G is 19210PA. This code indicates the
following features: The frequency of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is 192.10 THz;
PIN is adopted by the DWDM-side receiving optical module; the code of the DWDM-side
optical transmitter module is A. For details, refer to Table B-2.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description B Bar Code for Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-5
B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs
The characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU consists of characters, indicating
the frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU.
Detailed information of the characteristic code is listed in Table B-3.
Table B-3 Characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU
Code Meaning Description
The first character Wavelength-tunable T is the abbreviation for
Tunable, indicating that the
wavelength is tunable.
The second character The type of the DWDM-side
receiving optical module
The value can be A or P. A
represents APD. P represents
PIN.
The third character The type of the DWDM-side
optical transmitter module
The detailed meaning of the
character is shown in Table
B-4.

The types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules are listed in Table B-4.
Table B-4 Types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules
Character Dispersion (1550
nm)
Distance Rate
T 1200ps/nm 60km 10.71G
12800ps/nm 640km 2.66G
12800ps/nm 640km 2.67G
3400ps/nm 170km 5.33G
-1000 to 1100ps/nm 60km 10.71G
4800ps/nm 240km 11.3G

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LSX is TAT. This code indicates the following
features: This board is a wavelength-tunable OTU; APD is adopted by the DWDM-side receiving
optical module; the code of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is T. For details, refer
to Table B-4.
B.2.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUs
The characteristic code for a CWDM OTU consists of characters, indicating the wavelength and
type of the optical module in the OTU.
Detailed information of the characteristic code is listed in Table B-5.
B Bar Code for Boards
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
B-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table B-5 Characteristic code for a CWDM OTU
Code Meaning Description
The first four digits The wavelength of the
CWDM-side transmitting
optical module
Indicate the wavelength of the
CWDM-side transmitting
optical module.
The fifth character The type of the CWDM-side
receiving optical module
The value can be A or P. A
represents APD. P represents
PIN.
The sixth character The type of the CWDM-side
transmitting optical module
The value can be L or S. L
represents long haul. S
represents short haul.

NOTE
As for the LWX2 board, only the information of the first wavelength is indicated.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LDGS is 1531PS. This code indicates the
following features: The wavelength is 1531 nm; PIN is adopted by the CWDM-side receiving
optical module; the CWDM-side transmitting optical module is used for short-haul transmission
(80 km).
B.3 Characteristic Code for Line Unit
The characteristic code for line unit indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the DWDM
optical modules and DWDM wavelength-tunable optical modules.
The line unit shares the same feature code with the WDM-side DWDM optical module of the
wavelength tunable unit. For details, refer to B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs
and B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs.
B.4 Characteristic Code for FOADMs
The characteristic code for FOADMs indicates the wavelength or frequency of the optical signals
processed by the board.
B.4.1 Characteristic Code for the CMR2
The characteristic code for the CMR2 consists of eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths
that bear the signals processed by the board.
B.4.2 Characteristic Code for the CMR4
The characteristic code for the CMR4 consists of eight digits, indicating the four wavelengths
that bear the signals processed by the board.
B.4.3 Characteristic Code for the DMR1
The characteristics code for the DMR1 board consists of four digits, identifying the frequency
of the optical signals processed by the board.
B.4.4 Characteristic Code for the MR2
The characteristic code for the MR2 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the
two signals processed by the board.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description B Bar Code for Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-7
B.4.5 Characteristic Code for of MR4
The characteristic code for the MR4 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the
first and the fourth signals processed by the board.
B.4.6 Characteristic Code for the MR8
The characteristic code for the MR8 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the
first and the eighth signals processed by the board.
B.4.1 Characteristic Code for the CMR2
The characteristic code for the CMR2 consists of eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths
that bear the signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-6.
Table B-6 Characteristic code for the CMR2
Code Meaning Description
The first four digits The first wavelength that
bears optical signals
Indicate the first wavelength
that bears the optical signals
processed by the board.
The last four digits The second wavelength that
bears optical signals
Indicate the second
wavelength that bears the
optical signals processed by
the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR2 is 14711571.
l "1471" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm.
l "1571" indicates that the second wavelength is 1571 nm.
B.4.2 Characteristic Code for the CMR4
The characteristic code for the CMR4 consists of eight digits, indicating the four wavelengths
that bear the signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-7.
Table B-7 Characteristic code for the CMR4
Code Meaning Description
The first and the second
digits
The first wavelength that
bears optical signals
Indicate the middle two digits
of the first wavelength that
bears the optical signals
processed by the board.
The third and the fourth digits The second wavelength that
bears optical signals
Indicate the middle two digits
of the second wavelength that
bears the optical signals
processed by the board.
B Bar Code for Boards
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
B-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Code Meaning Description
The fifth and the sixth digits The third wavelength that
bears optical signals
Indicate the middle two digits
of the third wavelength that
bears the optical signals
processed by the board.
The seventh and the eighth
digits
The fourth wavelength that
bears optical signals
Indicate the middle two digits
of the fourth wavelength that
bears the optical signals
processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR4 is 47495961.
l "47" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm.
l "49" indicates that the second wavelength is 1491 nm.
l "59" indicates that the third wavelength is 1591 nm.
l "61" indicates that the fourth wavelength is 1611 nm.
B.4.3 Characteristic Code for the DMR1
The characteristics code for the DMR1 board consists of four digits, identifying the frequency
of the optical signals processed by the board.
Table B-8 provides the details on the characteristics code.
Table B-8 Characteristic code for the DMR1
Barcode Meaning Description
First to fourth digits Optical signal frequency Frequency of the optical
signals processed by the
board

For example, the characteristics code of the DMR1 is 9210. The code indicates that the frequency
of the optical signals is 192.1THz.
B.4.4 Characteristic Code for the MR2
The characteristic code for the MR2 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the
two signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-9.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description B Bar Code for Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-9
Table B-9 Characteristic code for the MR2
Code Meaning Description
The first four digits The frequency of the first
optical signal
Indicate the last four digits of
the frequency that bears the
first optical signal.
The last four digits The frequency of the second
optical signal
Indicate the last four digits of
the frequency that bears the
second optical signal.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR2 is 93609370.
l "9360" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 193.60 THz.
l "9370" indicates that the frequency of the second optical signal is 193.70 THz.
B.4.5 Characteristic Code for of MR4
The characteristic code for the MR4 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the
first and the fourth signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-10.
Table B-10 Characteristic code for the MR4
Code Meaning Description
The first four digits The frequency of first optical
signal
Indicate the last four digits of
the frequency that bears the
first optical signal processed
by the board.
The last four digits The frequency of forth
optical signal
Indicate the last four digits of
the frequency that bears the
fourth optical signal
processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR4 is 92109240.
l "9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz.
l "9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth optical signal is 192.40 THz.
Since the four optical signals processed by the MR4 are in sequence, it is inferred that:
l The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz.
l The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz.
B Bar Code for Boards
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
B-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
B.4.6 Characteristic Code for the MR8
The characteristic code for the MR8 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the
first and the eighth signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-11.
Table B-11 Characteristic code for the MR8
Code Meaning Description
The first four digits The frequency of the first
optical signal
Indicate the last four digits of
the frequency that bears the
first optical signal processed
by the board.
The last four digits The frequency of the eighth
optical signal
Indicate the last four digits of
the frequency that bears the
eighth optical signal
processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR8 is 92109280.
l "9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz.
l "9280" indicates that the frequency of the eighth optical signal is 192.80 THz.
Since the eight optical signals processed by the MR8 are in sequence, it is inferred that:
l The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz.
l The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz.
l Inferred from it, the frequency of the seventh signal is 192.70 THz.
B.5 Characteristic Code for MCAs
The characteristic code for MCAs indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the
board.
B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4
The characteristic code for the MCA4 consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical
signals processed by the board.
B.5.2 Characteristic Code for the MCA8
The characteristic code for the MCA8 consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical
signals processed by the board.
B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4
The characteristic code for the MCA4 consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical
signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-12.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description B Bar Code for Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-11
Table B-12 Characteristic code for the MCA4
Code Meaning Description
The first character Band Indicates the band of the
optical signals processed by
the board. The value C
represents C band. The value
L represents L band.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA4 is C, indicating C band.
B.5.2 Characteristic Code for the MCA8
The characteristic code for the MCA8 consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical
signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-13.
Table B-13 Characteristic code for the MCA8
Code Meaning Description
The first character Band Indicates the band of the
optical signals processed by
the board. The value C
represents C band. The value
L represents L band.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA8 is C, indicating C band.
B.6 Characteristic Code for OAUs
The characteristic code for OAUs indicates the gain, gain range and the maximum nominal input
optical power of the optical signals processed by the board.
B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the HBA
The characteristic code for the HBA consists of seven characters and digits, indicating the band,
the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the
board.
B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the OAU1
The characteristic code for the OAU1 consists of eight characters and digits, indicating the gain
range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
B.6.3 Characteristic Code for the OBU1
The characteristic code for the OBU1 consists of six characters and digits, indicating the gain
and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
B.6.4 Characteristic Code for the OBU2
B Bar Code for Boards
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
B-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
The characteristic code for the OBU2 consists of six characters and digits, indicating the gain
range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
B.6.5 Characteristic Code for of CRPC
The characteristic code for the CRPC consists of one character and two digits, indicating the
gain of the optical signals processed by the board.
B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the HBA
The characteristic code for the HBA consists of seven characters and digits, indicating the band,
the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the
board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given inTable B-14.
Table B-14 Characteristic code for the HBA
Code Meaning Description
The first character Band Indicates the band of the
optical signals processed by
the board. The value C
represents C band; the value L
represents L band.
The second character - The second character is
always G.
The third to the fourth digits Gain The third to the fourth digits
indicate the gain value.
The fifth character - The fifth character is always I.
The sixth and the seventh
digits
Maximum nominal input
optical power
Indicate the maximum
nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11HBA is CG29I-8. This code indicates that the
HBA board is used in C band, the gain is 29 dB, and the maximum nominal input optical power
is -8 dBm.
B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the OAU1
The characteristic code for the OAU1 consists of eight characters and digits, indicating the gain
range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-15.
Table B-15 Characteristic code for the OAU1
Code Meaning Description
The first character - The first character is always
G.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description B Bar Code for Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-13
Code Meaning Description
The second to the fifth digits Gain range Indicate the range within
which the gain can be
continuously adjusted.
The sixth character - The sixth character is always
I.
The seventh and the eighth
digits
Maximum nominal input
optical power
Indicate the maximum
nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OAU1 is G2031I0. This code indicates that
the gain can be continuously adjusted from 20 dB to 31 dB and the maximum nominal input
optical power is 0 dBm.
B.6.3 Characteristic Code for the OBU1
The characteristic code for the OBU1 consists of six characters and digits, indicating the gain
and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-16.
Table B-16 Characteristic code for the OBU1
Code Meaning Description
The first character - The first character is always
G.
The second and the third
digits
Gain The second and the third
digits indicate the gain value.
The fourth character - The fourth character is always
I.
The fifth and the sixth digits Maximum nominal input
optical power
The fifth and the sixth digits
indicate the maximum
nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 is G23I-3. This code indicates that the
gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm.
B.6.4 Characteristic Code for the OBU2
The characteristic code for the OBU2 consists of six characters and digits, indicating the gain
range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given inTable B-17.
B Bar Code for Boards
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
B-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table B-17 Characteristic code for the OBU2
Code Meaning Description
The first character - The first character is always
G.
The second and the third
digits
Gain The second and the third
digits indicate the gain value.
The fourth character - The fourth character is always
I.
The fifth and the sixth digits Maximum nominal input
optical power
The fifth and the sixth digits
indicate the maximum
nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU2 is G23I00. This code indicates that the
gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.
B.6.5 Characteristic Code for of CRPC
The characteristic code for the CRPC consists of one character and two digits, indicating the
gain of the optical signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-18.
Table B-18 Characteristic code for the CRPC
Code Meaning Description
The first character - This character is always G.
The two digits Gain Indicate the gain value.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CRPC is G10, indicating 10 dB gain.
B.7 Characteristic Code for Optical MUX/DMUX Units
The characteristic code for optical MUX/DMUX units indicates the band of the optical signals
processed by the board, whether the wavelengths that bear the signals are odd or even
wavelengths, and the multiplexing solution adopted by the board.
B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the D40
The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other
indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd
or even wavelengths.
B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V
The characteristic code for the D40V consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The
other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are
odd or even wavelengths.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description B Bar Code for Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-15
B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the FIU
The characteristic code for the FIU consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the
board.
B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the ITL
The characteristic code for the FIU consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the
board.
B.7.5 Characteristic Code for the M40
The characteristic code for the M40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other
indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd
or even wavelengths.
B.7.6 Characteristic Code for the M40V
The characteristic code for the M40V consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The
other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are
odd or even wavelengths.
B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the D40
The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other
indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd
or even wavelengths.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-19.
Table B-19 Characteristic code for the D40
Code Meaning Description
The first character Band Indicates the band of the
optical signals processed by
the board. The value C
represents C band; the value L
represents L band.
The second character Odd/Even wavelengths Indicates whether the
wavelengths that bear signals
are odd or even wavelengths.
The value E represents even
wavelengths; the value O
represents odd wavelengths.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40 is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 6800 products now support only even wavelengths in C band.
B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V
The characteristic code for the D40V consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The
other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are
odd or even wavelengths.
B Bar Code for Boards
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
B-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-20.
Table B-20 Characteristic code for the D40V
Code Meaning Description
The first character Band Indicates the band of the
optical signals processed by
the board. The value C
represents C band; the value L
represents L band.
The second character Odd/Even wavelengths Indicates whether the
wavelengths that bear signals
are odd or even wavelengths.
The value E represents even
wavelengths; the value O
represents odd wavelengths.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40V is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the FIU
The characteristic code for the FIU consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the
board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-21.
Table B-21 Characteristic code for the FIU
Code Meaning Description
The first character Band Indicates the multiplexing
solution adopted by the board.
The value C represents C
band; the value L represents L
band.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11FIU is C, indicating that the optical signals
are in C band.
B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the ITL
The characteristic code for the FIU consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the
board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-22.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description B Bar Code for Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-17
Table B-22 Characteristic code for the ITL
Code Meaning Description
The first character Band Indicates the multiplexing
solution adopted by the board.
The value C represents C
band; the value L represents L
band.

For example, the characteristic code for the ITL is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C
band.
B.7.5 Characteristic Code for the M40
The characteristic code for the M40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other
indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd
or even wavelengths.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-23.
Table B-23 Characteristic code for the M40
Code Meaning Description
The first character Band Indicates the band of the
optical signals processed by
the board. The value C
represents C band; the value L
represents L band.
The second character Odd/Even wavelengths Indicates whether the
wavelengths that bear signals
are odd or even wavelengths.
The value E represents even
wavelengths; the value O
represents odd wavelengths.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40 is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
B.7.6 Characteristic Code for the M40V
The characteristic code for the M40V consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The
other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are
odd or even wavelengths.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-24.
B Bar Code for Boards
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
B-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table B-24 Characteristic code for the M40V
Code Meaning Description
The first character Band Indicates the band of the
optical signals processed by
the board. The value C
represents C band; the value L
represents L band.
The second character Odd/Even wavelengths Indicates whether the
wavelengths that bear signals
are odd or even wavelengths.
The value E represents even
wavelengths; the value O
represents odd wavelengths.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40V is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
B.8 Characteristic Code for Protection Units
The characteristic code for optical protection boards indicates the maximum protection
switching time.
B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the DCP
The characteristic code for the DCP consists of one character and two digits, indicating the
maximum protection switching time.
B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the OLP
The characteristic code for the OLP consists of one character and two digits, indicating the
maximum protection switching time.
B.8.3 Characteristic Code for the SCS
The characteristic code for the SCS consists of one character and two digits, indicating the
maximum protection switching time.
B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the DCP
The characteristic code for the DCP consists of one character and two digits, indicating the
maximum protection switching time.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-25.
Table B-25 Characteristic code for the DCP
Code Meaning Description
The first character - The first character is always
P.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description B Bar Code for Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-19
Code Meaning Description
The second and third digits Maximum protection
switching time
Indicate the maximum
protection switching time.

For example, the characteristic code for the DCP is P50. This code indicates that the maximum
protection switching time is 50ms.
B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the OLP
The characteristic code for the OLP consists of one character and two digits, indicating the
maximum protection switching time.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-26.
Table B-26 Characteristic code for the OLP
Code Meaning Description
The first character - The first character is always
P.
The second and third digits Maximum protection
switching time
Indicate the maximum
protection switching time.

For example, the characteristic code for the OLP is P50. This code indicates that the maximum
protection switching time is 50ms.
B.8.3 Characteristic Code for the SCS
The characteristic code for the SCS consists of one character and two digits, indicating the
maximum protection switching time.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-27.
Table B-27 Characteristic code for the SCS
Code Meaning Description
The first character - The first character is always
P.
The second and third digits Maximum protection
switching time
Indicate the maximum
protection switching time.

For example, the characteristic code for the SCS is P50. This code indicates that the maximum
protection switching time is 50ms.
B Bar Code for Boards
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
B-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
B.9 Characteristic Code for VOAs
The characteristic code for VOAs indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical signals
processed by the board.
B.9.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1
The characteristic code for the VA1 consists of three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation
of the optical signals processed by the board.
B.9.2 Characteristic Code for the VA4
The characteristic code for the VA4 consists of three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation
of the optical signals processed by the board.
B.9.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1
The characteristic code for the VA1 consists of three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation
of the optical signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-28.
Table B-28 Characteristic code for the VA1
Code Meaning Description
The first to the third digits Attenuation value Indicate the maximum
attenuation.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA1 is 21.5, indicating that the maximum
attenuation value is 21.5 dB.
B.9.2 Characteristic Code for the VA4
The characteristic code for the VA4 consists of three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation
of the optical signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-29.
Table B-29 Characteristic code for the VA4
Code Meaning Description
The first to the third digits Attenuation value Indicate the maximum
attenuation.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA4 is 21.5, indicating that the maximum
attenuation value is 21.5 dB.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description B Bar Code for Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-21
B.10 Characteristic Code for PDE Units
The characteristic code for PDE units indicates the type of the fiber that the board works with,
the dispersion compensation distance and the gradient of optical signals.
B.10.1 Characteristic Code for the DCU
The characteristic code for the DCU board consists of characters, indicating the type of the fiber
that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance.
B.10.2 Characteristic Code for the GFU
The characteristic code for the GFU consists of two characters and two digits, indicating the
gradient of optical signals processed by the board.
B.10.1 Characteristic Code for the DCU
The characteristic code for the DCU board consists of characters, indicating the type of the fiber
that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-30.
Table B-30 Characteristic code for the DCU
Code Meaning Description
The character before hyphen
(-)
Fiber type Type of the fiber that the DCU
board works with
The character after hyphen
(-)
Dispersion compensation
distance
The transmission distance
achieved through dispersion
compensation

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11DCU is G.655LEAF-40. It indicates that the
DCU board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is 40 km.
NOTE
If the characteristic code contains varieties of the dispersion compensation distance, the symbol "&" is
used to separate each distance variety.
B.10.2 Characteristic Code for the GFU
The characteristic code for the GFU consists of two characters and two digits, indicating the
gradient of optical signals processed by the board.
The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-31.
Table B-31 Characteristic code for the GFU
Code Meaning Description
The first and second
characters
- The first and second
characters are always GF.
B Bar Code for Boards
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
B-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Code Meaning Description
The third and fourth digits Gradient Indicate the gradient of
optical signals.

For example, the characteristic code for the GFU is GF10. This code indicates that the gradient
of optical signals processed by the board is 10.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description B Bar Code for Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-23
C Parameter Description
C.1 Optical Transponder Units (OTUs), Tributary Units and Line Units
C.2 Optical Multiplexing Units (MUXs) and Optical Demultiplexing Units (DMUXs)
C.3 Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing Units (OADMs)
C.4 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit (ROADMs)
C.5 Optical Amplifier Units
C.6 Optical Supervisory Channel Units (OSCs)
C.7 Optical Protection Units
C.8 Spectrum Analyzer Units
C.9 Variable Optical Attenuator Units (VOAs)
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-1
C.1 Optical Transponder Units (OTUs), Tributary Units and
Line Units
C.1.1 Path Use Status
C.1.2 Optical Interface Loopback
C.1.3 Service Type
C.1.4 Client Service Bearer Rate (M)
C.1.5 Port Mapping
C.1.6 Laser Status
C.1.7 Automatic Laser Shutdown
C.1.8 Current Bearer Rate (M)
C.1.9 Service Mode
C.1.10 FEC Working State
C.1.11 FEC Type
C.1.12 PAUSE Frame Flow Control
C.1.13 Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
C.1.14 Configure Band Type
C.1.15 Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
C.1.16 Actual Band Type
C.1.17 Maximum Packet Length
C.1.18 Ethernet Working Mode
C.1.19 LPT Enabled
C.1.20 Path Loopback
C.1.21 SD Trigger Condition
C.1.22 FC Distance Extension
C.1.23 Board Mode
C.1.24 Line Rate
C.1.1 Path Use Status
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to set the path use status.
C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Parameter values Used, Unused
Parameter value
description
Default value: Used
Recommended
value
Used
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
When the Path Use Status of an optical interface is set to Unused,
service alarms at this interface are suppressed, which disables the
automatic laser turn on function.
Relevant boards OTU: L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, ECOM, TMX, LSXL, LSXLR,
LQG, LDMD, LDMS, LDM, LQM, LQMD, LQMS, LSX, LSXR,
LWXS, LWXD, LWX2
Tributary unit: TBE, TDX, TQM, TDG, TQS, TOM, TQX, TSXL
Line unit: NS2, ND2
Configuration
requirements
When the channel is not required, its Path Use Status can be set to
Unused. In this case, a command should be issued to shut down the laser
of this path; otherwise, an alarm indicates that the laser is forcibly turned
on is reported.

C.1.2 Optical Interface Loopback
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to set the loopback mode of the current optical interface.
Parameter values Non-Loopback, Outloop, Inloop
Parameter value
description
Default value: Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback: indicates that the equipment is in normal state. Optical
interface loopback is not required when the equipment normally
operates.
Inloop: indicates a mode that signals to be output from the output
interface of the local-end equipment are looped back to the signal input
interface of this equipment. Inloop is used to test the signal processing
on the board.
Outloop: indicates a mode that unprocessed signals accessed to the
local-end equipment are directly looped back to the corresponding
output interface without the signal structure changed. Outloop is used
to test connections between fiber lines and connectors.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-3
Item Description
Recommended
value
Non-Loopback
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
When the loopback mode is set to Inloop or Outloop, services are
interrupted.
Relevant boards OTU: L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, ECOM, TMX, LSXL,
LSXLR, LQG, LDMD, LDMS, LDM, LQM, LQMD, LQMS, LSX,
LSXR, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2
Tributary unit: TBE, TDX, TQM, TDG, TQS, TOM, TQX, TSXL
Line unit: NS2, ND2
Configuration
requirements
None

C.1.3 Service Type
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to set the type of services at a client-side optical interface.
C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Parameter values LDM:
OTU1, STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC-200,
FICON Express, HDTV, GE, FC-100, FICON, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI,
ESCON, FE, FDDI
LDMD, LDMS:
OTU1, STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC-200,
FICON Express, HDTV, GE, FC-100, FICON, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI,
ESCON, FE, FDDI
LOM:
GE, FC-100, FC-200, FC-400, FICON, FICON Express, ISC 1G, ISC
2G
LQM:
GE, FE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100,
FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, DVB-ASI, ESCON, OTU-1,
HDTV, DVB-SDI, FDDI
LQMS, LQMD:
GE, FE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100,
FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, DVB-ASI, ESCON, OTU1,
HDTV, DVB-SDI, FDDI
LSX:
10GE WAN, 10GE LAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2, FC-1200
LSXL:
STM-256, OC-768
LWXS:
GE, FE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100,
FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, ESCON,
ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO
LWXD, LWX2:
GE, FE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100,
FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, ESCON
TMX:
STM-16, OC-48, OTU1
TOM:
OC-3, STM-1, OC-12, STM-4, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FE, GE,
ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, DVB-ASI,
DVB-SDI, HDTV, FDDI
TQM:
GE, FE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100,
FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, DVB-ASI, ESCON, OTU1,
HDTV, DVB-SDI, FDDI
TQS:
OTU1, OC-48, STM-16
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-5
Item Description
TQX:
10GE WAN, 10GE LAN, STM-64, OC-192
TDX:
10GE WAN, 10GE LAN, STM-64, OC-192
TSXL:
STM-256, OC-768
Parameter value
description (default
value)
LSX, TN11TDX: 10GE LAN
LWXS, LWXD, LWX2: Any
LOM: GE
TQS, TMX: OTU1
Recommended value None
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the system None
Relevant boards OTU: LDM, LDMD, LDMS, LQM, LQMS, LQMD, LSX, LWXS,
LWXD, LWX2, LOM, TMX, LSXL
Tributary unit: TQM, TDX, TQS, TOM, TQX, TSXL
Configuration
requirements
The type of actually accessed services must be the same as the type
of configured services. Otherwise, the services are not available. If
the LQMS, LQMD, LQM, TOM, or TQM board is configured with
electrical-layer cross-connections, the type of services in the
corresponding channels cannot be changed.

C.1.4 Client Service Bearer Rate (M)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to set the bearer rate of client-side services.
Parameter
value range
(M)
16.0-2500.0
Parameter
value
description
The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the client-side
services are of Any type. The set value should equal to the maximum rate of
actually accessed services.
Recommend
ed value
None
C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
A SPEED_OVER alarm is reported when the rate of actually accessed
services exceeds the set value.
Relevant
boards
LWXS, LWXD, LWX2
Configuratio
n
requirements
(the set value
of bearer rate
should be the
same as the
rate of
actually
accessed
services)
Actually
accessed services
Set value Actually
accessed services
Set value
STM1 155.5 GE 1250
STM4 622 FE 125
STM16 2488.3 FC100 1062
OC3 155.5 FC200 2124
OC12 622 FICON 1062
OC48 2488.3 FICON Express 2124
HDTV 1485 ESCON 270
DVB-SDI 270 FDDI 125
DVB-ASI 270

C.1.5 Port Mapping
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to set and query the port mapping.
Parameter
values
Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping
(10.7G), Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G)
Parameter
value
description
Default value: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-7
Item Description
Relevant
boards
LSX, TDX, TQX
Configuration
requirements
Services other than 10GE LAN do not require configuring the port
mapping. The port mapping of 10GE LAN services can be configured as
Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping
(10.7G) or Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G).
Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) and Bit Transparent Mapping
(10.7G) meet customers' demand for transparent bit transport of 10GE LAN
signals.
Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) services provide an FEC/AFEC
coding gain value equivalent to that of 10G SDH services. Bit Transparent
Mapping (10.7G) services occupy some AFEC areas and thus provide a
weaker AFEC coding gain.
MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G) meets customers' demand for
transparently transporting 10GE MAC frames only. MAC transparently
mapped (10.7G) services have the standard OTU2 frame structure and
supports the FEC/AFEC code which is the same as that of 10G bit/s SDH
services.
NOTE
TN12LSX does not support the configuration of MAC Transparent Mapping
(10.7G).

C.1.6 Laser Status
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to set the laser Open/Close status.
Parameter
values
Open, Close
Default value: Open
Parameter value
description
Open: The laser is turned on to start transmitting services.
Close: The laser is turned off to stop service transmitting.
Recommended
value
Open
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
When the laser is set to Close, services are interrupted.
C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Relevant boards OTU: ECOM, L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, TMX, LQMS, LQMD,
LSX, LSXR, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2, LSXL, LSXLR, LDM, LQM,
LDMD, LDMS, LQG
Tributary unit: TBE, TDX, TQM, TDG, TQS, TOM, TQX, TSXL
Line unit: NS2, ND2
Configuration
requirements
When an optical interface is unused or is not connected to a fiber, the laser
at this interface should be set to Open.

C.1.7 Automatic Laser Shutdown
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to set whether to enable automatic laser shutdown (ALS) of the
downstream laser of the local board in the case of loss of received signals.
If ALS is enabled, when the received signals are lost, the laser is
automatically shut down and stops transmitting signals. ALS prolongs the
service life of a laser and avoids injury of laser to human.
Parameter
values
Enabled, Disabled
Parameter value
description
ALS of optical interfaces on OTU client sides and tributary units is set to
Enabled by default.
Recommended
value
ALS of optical interfaces on OTU client sides and tributary units is set to
Enabled.
Application
scenarios
In configuration and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards OTU: L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, TMX, LQMS, LQMD, LSX,
LWXS, LWXD, LWX2, LSXL, LDM, LQM, LDMD, LDMS, LQG
Tributary unit: TBE, TDX, TQM, TDG, TQS, TOM, TQX, TSXL
Configuration
requirements
None

C.1.8 Current Bearer Rate (M)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to query the current bearer rate of client-side services.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-9
Item Description
Parameter
values
Queriable only
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards LWXS, LWXD, LWX2
Configuration
requirements
None

C.1.9 Service Mode
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to set the mode of line-side services.
Parameter
values
OTN, SDH
Parameter value
description
Default mode: OTN
Recommended
value
OTN
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LQG
Configuration
requirements
The mode of line-side services of boards on an NE at the local end should
be the same as that at the opposite end. When a local-end board need be
connected to an SDH service board of another product, the mode of line-
side services should be set to SDH.

C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to set the mode of electrical layer grooming services.
Parameter
values
ODU1, ODU2
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards ND2TN12NS2
Configuration
requirements
When grooming the ODU1 services, ODU1mode must be configured.
When grooming the ODU2 services, ODU2mode must be configured.

C.1.10 FEC Working State
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to set and query the FEC working state.
Parameter
values
Enabled, Disabled
Parameter value
description
Default value: Enabled
Recommended
value
Enabled
Application
scenarios
In configuration and commissioning stages
Impact on the
system
Enabling the FEC working state lowers the requirement of optical signal-
to-noise ratio (OSNR) at the receive end and stretches the distance between
an optical amplifying station and a regenerating station.
Relevant boards OTU: L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, TMX, LQMS, LQMD, LSX,
LSXR, LSXL, LSXLR, LDM, LQM, LDMD, LDMS, LQG
Tributary unit:, TOM
Line unit: NS2, ND2
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-11
Item Description
Configuration
requirements
During configuration, the FEC working states of two corresponding
optical interfaces at the two ends of the transport line should be the same.
Otherwise, the setting of FEC working states fails.
FEC is enabled in most cases unless in scenarios where the requirement
of transport delay is extremely high.

C.1.11 FEC Type
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to select the FEC type.
Parameter values FEC, AFEC
Parameter value
description
Default value: FEC
Recommended
value
AFEC
Application
scenarios
In configuration and commissioning stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards OTU: LSX, LOG, LOM, TMX, LSXR, LSXL, LSXLR
Line unit: NS2, ND2
Configuration
requirements
Relationships between service type, port mapping and FEC type:
l When the service type is 10GE LAN, if the port mapping is without
flow control, the FEC type can be AFEC only; if the port mapping is
in other modes, the FEC type is not limited.
l FEC types of services other than 10GE LAN are not limited.
During configuration, the FEC types of two corresponding optical
interfaces at the two ends of the transport line should be the same.

C.1.12 PAUSE Frame Flow Control
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to select whether to enable flow control.
C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Parameter
values
Enabled, Disabled
Parameter value
description
Default value: Enabled
Recommended
value
Enabled
Application
scenarios
In configuration and commissioning stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards TN11LSX, TDX
Configuration
requirements
This parameter can be configured only when the service type is 10GE
LAN.

C.1.13 Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency
(THz)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to configure the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical
interface of a board.
Parameter
values
C-band wavelength spacing: 100G (192.100-196.00 THz)
CWDM-band wavelength spacing: 20 nm (1271-1611 nm)
Recommended
value
The operating wavelength of a fixed-wavelength OTU should be set to the
actual wavelength of the OTU. The operating wavelength of a tunable-
wavelength OTU should be set upon the network wavelength planning.
Application
scenarios
In configuration stage
Impact on the
system
l The same wavelength should be used for a service in the receive and
the transmit directions.
l If a service travels through multiple regenerating stations, it is
recommended that these regenerating sections use the same
wavelength.
l It is recommended that the active and standby channels use the same
wavelength when the inter-board channel protection or client-side path
protection is adopted.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-13
Item Description
Relevant boards OTU: ECOM, L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, TMX, LQMS, LQMD,
LSX, LSXR, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2, LSXL, LSXLR, LDM, LQM,
LDMD, LDMS, LQG
Line unit: NS2, ND2
Configuration
requirements
The configured logic wavelength must be the same as the actual physical
wavelength. Otherwise, a CFGDATA_OUTRANGE alarm is reported.
As for tunable optical modules, issuing the captioned command directly
changes their physical wavelengths (but does not change the band). As for
non-tunable optical modules, issuing this command changes their logic
wavelengths only.

C.1.14 Configure Band Type
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to configure the band type.
Parameter values C, CWDM
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards OTU: ECOM, L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, TMX, LQMS, LQMD,
LSX, LSXR, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2, LSXL, LSXLR, LDM, LQM,
LDMD, LDMS, LQG
Line unit: NS2, ND2
Configuration
requirements
The configured logic band must be the same as the actual physical band.
Otherwise, a CFGDATA_OUTRANGE alarm is reported.

C.1.15 Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical
interface of a board.
C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards OTU: ECOM, L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, TMX, LQMS,
LQMD, LSX, LSXR, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2, LSXL, LSXLR, LDM,
LQM, LDMD, LDMS, LQG
Tributary unit: TOM
Line unit: NS2, ND2
Configuration
requirements
None

C.1.16 Actual Band Type
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to query the band type.
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards OTU: ECOM, L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, TMX, LQMS,
LQMD, LSX, LSXR, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2, LSXL, LSXLR, LDM,
LQM, LDMD, LDMS, LQG
Tributary unit: TOM
Line unit: NS2, ND2
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-15
Item Description
Configuration
requirements
None

C.1.17 Maximum Packet Length
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to configure the maximum packet length of data services.
Parameter value
range (byte)
1518-9600
Parameter value
description
Value range: 1518-9600
Default value: 1518
Recommended
value
1518
Application
scenarios
In configuration and commissioning stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards OTU: LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, LQMS, LQMD, LDM, LQM,
LDMD, LDMS, LQG
Tributary unit: TDX, TQM, TDG, TOM, TQX
Configuration
requirements
The maximum packet length can be set when the service type is 10GE
LAN, 10GE WAN, GE or FE. If a customer requires extra long packets,
set the maximum packet length according to the requirement.

C.1.18 Ethernet Working Mode
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to query and set the Ethernet working mode.
Parameter values Auto-Negotiation, 1000M Full-Duplex
Parameter value
description
Default value: 1000M Full-Duplex
Recommended
value
Auto-Negotiation
C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Application
scenarios
In configuration and commissioning stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards OTU: LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, LQMS, LQMD, LDM, LQM,
LDMD, LDMS, LQG
Tributary unit: TDG, TQM, TOM
Configuration
requirements
The Ethernet working mode of the local station should be the same as
that of the upstream. If the two ports protect each other, these two active
and standby ports must be set to be in the same Ethernet working mode.
The LOM, TQM, LQMS, LQMD, LQM, LDM, LDMD, LDMS, TOM
boards support the Ethernet working mode setting only when the service
type is GE.

C.1.19 LPT Enabled
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to query and set the Enabled/Disabled state of link state pass
through (LPT).
Parameter values Enabled, Disabled
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
Disabled
Application
scenarios
In configuration and commissioning stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards OTU: L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, LQMS, LQMD, LSX, LDM,
LQM, LDMD, LDMS, LQG
Tributary unit: TBE, TDX, TQM, TDG, TOM, TQX
Configuration
requirements
LPT is valid for only data services. When the router has redundant
protection paths, LPT of the access ports of the corresponding routers
should be set to Enabled.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-17
C.1.20 Path Loopback
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to query and set the path loopback.
Parameter values Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop
Parameter value
description
Non-Loopback: indicates the normal state. Path loopback is not
required when the equipment normally operates.
Inloop: indicates a mode that signals to be output from the output path
of the local-end equipment are looped back to the signal input path of
this equipment. Inloop is used to test the signal processing on the board.
Outloop: indicates a mode that unprocessed signals accessed to the
local-end equipment is directly looped back to the corresponding output
path without the signal structure changed. Outloop is used to test
connections between fiber lines and connectors.
Recommended
value
Non-Loopback
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
Path loopback interrupts services.
Relevant boards NS2, ND2
Configuration
requirements
The path loopback should be configured upon the commissioning
purpose.

C.1.21 SD Trigger Condition
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to configure the trigger condition to perform SD switching on the
board.
Parameter values B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG, None
Parameter value
description
B1_SD: Regeneration section (B1) signal degrade
OTUk_DEG: OTUk signal degrade
ODUk_PM_DEG: ODUk_PM signal degrade
None: No condition is configured for SD switching.
Recommended
value
Set the value to None.
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Impact on the
system
When the B1_SD, OTUk_DEG or ODUk_PM_DEG alarm occurs, the
protection group might be triggered to perform protection switching.
Relevant boards OTU: L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, LSX, LWXS, LWXD,
LWX2, LSXL
Tributary unit: TN11TDX, TQM, TDG, TQS, TQX
Line unit: TN11NS2
Configuration
requirements
Set the value to B1_SD, OTUk_DEG or ODUk_PM_DEG if the
protection mechanism needs such a trigger condition.

C.1.22 FC Distance Extension
Item Description
Parameter
description
To enable or disable the function for extending the transmission
distance for the FC services.
Parameter values enable, disable
Parameter value
description
enable: To enable the function for extending the transmission distance
for the FC services.
disable: To disable the function for extending the transmission distance
of FC services.
Recommended
value
disable
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stage
Impact on the
system
Extends the transmission distance for the FC services.
Relevant boards LOM
Configuration
requirements
When the board accesses FC100/FC200/FC400 services, this parameter
must be enabled.

C.1.23 Board Mode
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to configure the working mode of the board.
Parameter values ECOM: Service Mode, HUB Mode
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-19
Item Description
TN12LQMS: NS1 Mode, LQM Mode
TOM: Connect Mode, Alone Mode
Parameter value
description
Service Mode: Supports converging 8 x FE services to 1 x GE service.
HUB Mode: Supports converging 8 x FE services to 1 x FE service.
NS1 Mode: As a line board, this board adds and drops OTU1 signals
in conjunction with another tributary board.
LQM Mode: As a tributary/line integrated board, this board converges
four channels of Any signals into a channel of OTU1 signals.
Connect Mode: Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-
side optical interfaces. The board supports multiplexing up to eight
channels of Any signals into one channel of OTU1 signals.
Alone Mode: RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical
interfaces. The board supports multiplexing up to four channels of Any
signals into one channel of OTU1 signals.
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
For the board that supports various board modes, the board mode must
be configured based on the application scenario. If the board mode
configured is not consistent with the current application scenario, the
board cannot work normally.
Relevant boards ECOM, TN12LQMS, TOM
Configuration
requirements
The board mode configured must be consistent with the current
application scenario.

C.1.24 Line Rate
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to configure the line rate of OTN.
Parameter values Standard Mode, Speedup Mode
Parameter value
description
Standard Mode: The speed of WDM side is 10.7 Gbit/s.
Speedup Mode: The speed of WDM side is 11.1 Gbit/s.
Recommended
value
None
C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
The line rate must be configured based on the actual speed supported
by the board. Otherwise, the service must be interrupted.
Relevant boards TN12NS2, TN11ND2
Configuration
requirements
If the cross-connect services at the ODU1 level are configured on the
TN12NS2, TN11ND2 or TN51NQ2, only the 10.7 Gbit/s line rate can
be supported. If the line rate is set to 11.1 Gbit/s, services must be
interrupted. If the cross-connect services at the ODU2 level is
configured on the TN12NS2, TN11ND2 or TN51NQ2, the line rate
must be configured based on the actual speed supported by the board.

C.2 Optical Multiplexing Units (MUXs) and Optical
Demultiplexing Units (DMUXs)
C.2.1 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)
C.2.2 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
C.2.3 Configure Band
C.2.4 Configure Working Band Parity
C.2.5 Actual Band
C.2.6 Actual Working Band Parity
C.2.7 Board Mode
C.2.1 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to adjust the attenuation of optical power in the corresponding
channels to equalize the optical power of each wavelength.
Parameter value
range (dB)
0.0-15.0
Parameter value
description
Value range: varies with boards. The value range of optical interface
attenuation ratio of a board can be obtained by querying the Maximum
Attenuation Ratio and Minimum Attenuation Ratio of the board.
Default value: 15 dB (maximum attenuation ratio of the board)
Recommended
value
Configured upon the engineering optical power planning.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-21
Item Description
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
Influences the downstream optical power.
Relevant boards M40V, D40V
Configuration
requirements
The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be too large. It should
be controlled within 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every
time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. In an expansion project
or maintenance, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be
controlled within 1 dB.

C.2.2 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Indicates the lower threshold of input optical power loss (an MUT_LOS
alarm is reported).
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
The default value varies with boards.
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards D40, D40V, FIU
Configuration
requirements
None

C.2.3 Configure Band
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to configure type of the working band of a board.
Parameter values C
C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Parameter value
description
Supports only C band.
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards FIU, M40, M40V, D40, D40V, ITL
Configuration
requirements
None

C.2.4 Configure Working Band Parity
Item Description
Parameter
description
Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Parameter values All, Even, Odd
Parameter value
description
All: All 192.10 THz to 196.05 THz odd and even wavelengths at 50
GHz channel spacing in C band. There are 80 wavelengths in total. It
is applicable for the FIU and ITL.
Even: All 192.10 THz to 196.00 THz even wavelengths at 100 GHz
channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for
the M40, M40V, D40 and D40V boards.
Odd: All 192.15 THz to 196.05 THz odd wavelengths at 100 GHz
channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for
the M40, M40V, D40 and D40V boards.
Recommended
value
Corresponding wavelengths are used according to different
requirements.
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards FIU, M40, M40V, D40, D40V, ITL
Configuration
requirements
When configuring the parity of wavelengths on the T2000, make sure
that the parity configured is consistent with that of the actual working
wavelengths.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-23
C.2.5 Actual Band
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to query the actual working band of the board.
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards FIU, M40, M40V, D40, D40V, ITL
Configuration
requirements
None

C.2.6 Actual Working Band Parity
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to query the parity of the actual working band of the board.
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards FIU, M40, M40V, D40, D40V, ITL
Configuration
requirements
None

C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
C.2.7 Board Mode
Item Description
Parameter
description
To configure the working mode of the board.
Parameter values ITL Mode, VOA Mode
Parameter value
description
ITL Mode: Supports multiplexing /demultiplexing optical signals
between the ones with the channel spacing of 100 GHz and the other
ones with the channel spacing of 50 GHz.
VOA Mode: Supports transparent transmission of optical signals with
the channel spacing of 100 GHz into one optical signals with the channel
spacing of 100 GHz.
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
No impact on the original even wavelengths of the system.
Relevant boards TN12ITL
Configuration
requirements
The TE optical interface supports even wavelengths only.

C.3 Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing Units (OADMs)
C.3.1 Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
C.3.2 Configure Band Type
C.3.1 Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to configure the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical
interface of a board.
Parameter values C-band wavelength spacing: 100G (192.100-196.00 THz)
CWDM-band wavelength spacing: 20 nm (1271-1611 nm)
Parameter value
description
MR2, MR4, MR8: values of C-even 40 wavelengths
CMR2, CMR4, DMR1: CWDM-band values
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-25
Item Description
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards MR2, MR4, MR8, CMR2, CMR4, DMR1, SBM2
Configuration
requirements
The configured logic wavelength must be the same as the actual physical
wavelength. Otherwise, a CFGDATA_OUTRANGE alarm is reported.
The same wavelength cannot be configured at different optical
interfaces of the same board.

C.3.2 Configure Band Type
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to configure the band type.
Parameter values C
Parameter value
description
Supports only C band.
Recommended
value
The default value varies with boards. Refer to the value obtained on
site through the T2000.
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards MR2, MR4, MR8, CMR2, CMR4, DMR1, SBM2
Configuration
requirements
None

C.4 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing
Unit (ROADMs)
C.4.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
C.4.2 Wavelength Target Power (dBm)
C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
C.4.3 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)
C.4.4 Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)
C.4.5 Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB)
C.4.6 Configure Band
C.4.7 Configure Working Band Parity
C.4.8 Actual Band
C.4.9 Actual Working Band Parity
C.4.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Indicates the lower threshold of input optical power loss (an
MUT_LOS alarm is reported).
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
The default value varies with boards and subjects to the on-site queried
result.
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards ROAM, WSD9, RMU9, WSMD4
Configuration
requirements
None

C.4.2 Wavelength Target Power (dBm)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Applies to the ROAM board only and is used to set the single-
wavelength target output optical power after add wavelengths are
multiplexed.
Parameter value
range (dB)
-32.0 to 8.0
Parameter value
description
None
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-27
Item Description
Recommended
value
Standard single-wavelength input optical power at the IN interface of
an optical amplifying unit connected to the OUT interface of an ROAM
board.
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
Influences the downstream optical power.
Relevant boards ROAM
Configuration
requirements
The configuration of target output optical power takes effect only when
optical cross-connections are configured in the corresponding channels.

C.4.3 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to adjust the attenuation of optical power in the corresponding
channels to equalize the optical power of each wavelength.
Parameter value
range (dB)
WSM9: 0-20
WSD9: 0-20
RMU9: 0-15
WSMD4: 0-40
Parameter value
description
Value range: varies with boards. The value range of optical interface
attenuation ratio of a board can be obtained by querying the Maximum
Attenuation Ratio and Minimum Attenuation Ratio of the board.
Default value: maximum attenuation ratio of the board
Recommended
value
Configured upon the engineering optical power planning.
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
Influences the downstream optical power.
Relevant boards WSM9, WSD9, RMU9, WSMD4
Configuration
requirements
The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be too large. It should
be controlled within 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every
time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. In an expansion project
or maintenance, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be
controlled within 1 dB.

C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
C.4.4 Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Indicates the maximum optical power attenuation ratio of a board.
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
Value type: integers
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In maintenance stage
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards WSM9, WSD9, RMU9, WSMD4
Configuration
requirements
None

C.4.5 Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Indicates the minimum optical power attenuation ratio of a board.
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
Value type: integers
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In maintenance stage
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards WSM9, WSD9, RMU9, WSMD4
Configuration
requirements
None

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-29
C.4.6 Configure Band
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to configure type of the working band of a board.
Parameter values C
Parameter value
description
Supports only C band.
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards RMU9, ROAM, WSD9, WSM9, WSMD4
Configuration
requirements
None

C.4.7 Configure Working Band Parity
Item Description
Parameter
description
Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Parameter values All, Even, Odd
Parameter value
description
All: All 192.10 THz to 196.05 THz odd and even wavelengths at 50
GHz channel spacing in C band. There are 80 wavelengths in total. It
is applicable for the RMU9, TN13WSD9, TN13WSM9 board.
Even: All 192.10 THz to 196.00 THz even wavelengths at 100 GHz
channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for
the ROAM, WSMD4, TN12WSD9, TN12WSM9, TN11WSD9,
TN11WSM9 boards.
Odd: All 192.15 THz to 196.05 THz odd wavelengths at 100 GHz
channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for
the ROAM, WSMD4, TN12WSD9, TN12WSM9, TN11WSD9,
TN11WSM9 boards.
Recommended
value
Corresponding wavelengths are used according to different
requirements.
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards RMU9, ROAM, WSD9, WSM9, WSMD4
Configuration
requirements
When configuring the parity of wavelengths on the T2000, make sure
that the parity configured is consistent with that of the actual working
wavelengths.

C.4.8 Actual Band
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to query the actual working band of the board.
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards RMU9, ROAM, WSD9, WSM9, WSMD4
Configuration
requirements
None

C.4.9 Actual Working Band Parity
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to query the parity of the actual working band of the board.
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
None
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-31
Item Description
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards RMU9, ROAM, WSD9, WSM9, WSMD4
Configuration
requirements
None

C.5 Optical Amplifier Units
C.5.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
C.5.2 Laser Status
C.5.3 Gain (dB)
C.5.4 Nominal Gain (dB)
C.5.5 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)
C.5.6 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)
C.5.7 Rated Optical Power (dBm)
C.5.8 Board Work Type
C.5.9 Configure Band
C.5.10 Configure Working Band Parity
C.5.11 Actual Band
C.5.12 Actual Working Band Parity
C.5.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Indicates the lower threshold of input optical power loss (an MUT_LOS
alarm is reported).
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
The default value varies with boards and subjects to the on-site queried
result.
Recommended
value
None
C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, HBA
Configuration
requirements
None

C.5.2 Laser Status
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to set the laser Enabled/Disabled status.
Parameter values Enabled, Disabled .
Default value of the OAU1/OBU1: Enabled.
Default value of the CRPC: Disabled
Parameter value
description
Enabled: The laser is turned on to start transmitting services.
Disabled: The laser is turned off to stop service transmitting.
Recommended
value
Enabled
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
When the laser is set to Disabled, services are interrupted.
Relevant boards OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, HBA, CRPC
Configuration
requirements
When services are normal, the laser of the optical amplifying unit should
be set to Enabled.

C.5.3 Gain (dB)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to query the optical power gain of the current optical amplifying
unit.
Parameter values Queriable only
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-33
Item Description
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, HBA
Configuration
requirements
Normally, the queried result should range from the nominal gain minus
2.5 dB to the nominal gain plus 2.5 dB.

C.5.4 Nominal Gain (dB)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to set and query the gain at optical interfaces to optimize the
flatness of optical channels.
Parameter value
range (dB)
0-40
Parameter value
description
Value range: varies with boards. The nominal gain value range of a
board can be obtained by querying the Nominal Gain Upper
Threshold and Nominal Gain Lower Threshold of the board.
Recommended
value
OAU101: 20dB
OAU102: 20dB
OAU103: 24dB
OAU105: 23dB
OBU101: 20dB
OBU103: 23dB
OBU104: 17dB
OBU205: 23dB
HBA: 29dB
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
Gain values influence the performance of downstream services.
Relevant boards OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, HBA
C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Configuration
requirements
The nominal gain should be correctly set upon the network optical power
budget. The OBU1 , OBU2, HBA does not require the nominal gain
setting and adopts the recommended value.

C.5.5 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to query the nominal gain upper threshold.
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, HBA
Configuration
requirements
None

C.5.6 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to query the nominal gain lower threshold.
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-35
Item Description
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, HBA
Configuration
requirements
None

C.5.7 Rated Optical Power (dBm)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to set and query the single-wavelength rated optical power as the
reference value for automatic optical power adjustment. When the
optical amplifying unit and ROADM are used for networking, this
parameter is set in the optical amplifying unit.
Parameter value
range (dBm)
-30.0 to 30.0
Parameter value
description
Default value at the input optical interface: -19 dBm.
Default value at the output optical interface: 4 dBm.
Recommended
value
OAU101: input interface: -16 dBm; output interface: 4 dBm
OAU102: input interface: -19 dBm; output interface: 1 dBm
OAU103: input interface: -20 dBm; output interface: 0 dBm
OAU105: input interface: -16 dBm; output interface: 4 dBm
OBU101: input interface: -20 dBm; output interface: 0 dBm
OBU103: input interface: -19 dBm; output interface: 4 dBm
OBU104: input interface: -17 dBm; output interface: 0 dBm
OBU205: input interface: -16 dBm; output interface: 7 dBm
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, HBA
Configuration
requirements
The rated input and output optical power should be configured by
referring to the actual configurable input and output range of the optical
amplifying unit and should be the same as the input and output values
measured when the optical amplifying unit normally operates.

C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
C.5.8 Board Work Type
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to query and set the board work type.
Parameter values C, C+L, L
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
C
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards CRPC
Configuration
requirements
None

C.5.9 Configure Band
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to configure type of the working band of a board.
Parameter values C
Parameter value
description
Supports only C band.
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards CRPC, HBA, OAU1, OBU1, OBU2
Configuration
requirements
None

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-37
C.5.10 Configure Working Band Parity
Item Description
Parameter
description
Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Parameter values All, Even, Odd
Parameter value
description
All: All 192.10 THz to 196.05 THz odd and even wavelengths at 50
GHz channel spacing in C band. There are 80 wavelengths in total. It
is applicable for the CRPC, HBA, OAU1, OBU1, OBU2 boards.
Even: All 192.10 THz to 196.00 THz even wavelengths at 100 GHz
channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for
the CRPC board.
Odd: All 192.15 THz to 196.05 THz odd wavelengths at 100 GHz
channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for
the CRPC board.
Recommended
value
Corresponding wavelengths are used according to different
requirements.
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards CRPC, HBA, OAU1, OBU1, OBU2
Configuration
requirements
When configuring the parity of wavelengths on the T2000, make sure
that the parity configured is consistent with that of the actual working
wavelengths.

C.5.11 Actual Band
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to query the actual working band of the board.
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards HBA, OAU1, OBU1, OBU2
Configuration
requirements
None

C.5.12 Actual Working Band Parity
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to query the parity of the actual working band of the board.
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards CRPC, HBA, OAU1, OBU1, OBU2
Configuration
requirements
None

C.6 Optical Supervisory Channel Units (OSCs)
C.6.1 Optical Interface Loopback
C.6.2 Laser Status
C.6.1 Optical Interface Loopback
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to set the loopback mode of the current optical interface.
Parameter values Non-Loopback, Outloop, Inloop
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-39
Item Description
Parameter value
description
Default value: Non-LoopbackNon-Loopback: indicates the normal
state. Path loopback is not required when the equipment normally
operates.
Inloop: indicates a mode that signals to be output from the output
interface of the local-end equipment are looped back to the signal input
interface of this equipment. Inloop is used to test the signal processing
on the board.
Outloop: indicates a mode that unprocessed signals accessed to the
local-end equipment are directly looped back to the corresponding
output interface without the signal structure changed. Outloop is used
to test connections between fiber lines and connectors.
Recommended
value
Non-Loopback
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
When the loopback mode is set to Inloop or Outloop, services in the
supervisory channel are interrupted.
Relevant boards SC1, SC2
Configuration
requirements
None

C.6.2 Laser Status
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to set the laser Enabled/Disabled status.
Parameter values Enabled, Disabled
Default value: Enabled
Parameter value
description
Enabled: The laser at an optical interface is turned on.
Disabled: The laser at an optical interface is turned off.
Recommended
value
Enabled
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards SC1, SC2
C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Configuration
requirements
None

C.7 Optical Protection Units
C.7.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
C.7.2 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)
C.7.3 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)
C.7.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Indicates the lower threshold of input optical power loss (an MUT_LOS
alarm is reported).
Parameter value
range (dBm)
-35.0 to -10.0
Parameter value
description
Default value: -35.0
Recommended
value
-35.0
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
This parameter directly influences the SF switching condition of OLP
protection, OTU+OLP/DCP intra-board 1+1 protection and client-side
1+1 protection with the OLP/DCP board. The larger the parameter value
is, the more likely the SF switching occurs.
Relevant boards DCP, OLP
Configuration
requirements
Normally, the threshold should be set to the recommended value. The
actual network situation and fiber aging, however, should be considered
during the parameter configuration to avoid mis-switching.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-41
C.7.2 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input
Power (dB)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Indicates the initial variance value between primary and secondary input
power. Initial variance value = initial input power at the primary optical
interface - initial input power at the secondary optical interface
Parameter value
range (dB)
-10.0 to 10.0
Parameter value
description
Default value: 0.0
Recommended
value
0.0
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
This parameter serves as the SD switching threshold reference value for
OLP protection, OTU+OLP/DCP intra-board 1+1 protection and OLP/
DCP client-side 1+1 protection with the OLP/DCP board.
Variance between primary and secondary input power = input power at
the primary optical interface - input power at the secondary optical
interface - initial variance
During SD switching judgement, if the absolute value of variance between
primary and secondary input power reaches the SD switching threshold,
SD switching is actuated.
Relevant boards DCP, OLP
Configuration
requirements
The parameter should be set upon the actual variance between primary
and secondary input power.

C.7.3 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input
Power (dB)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to set the variance threshold between primary and secondary input
power at which signals degrade (SD).
Parameter value
range (dB)
3.0-8.0
Parameter value
description
Default value: 5.0
C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Recommended
value
5.0
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
This parameter serves as the SD switching threshold reference value for
OLP protection, OTU+OLP/DCP intra-board 1+1 protection and OLP/
DCP client-side 1+1 protection with the OLP/DCP board.
Variance between primary and secondary input power = input power at
the primary optical interface - input power at the secondary optical
interface - initial variance
During SD switching judgement, if the absolute value of variance
between primary and secondary input power reaches the SD switching
threshold, SD switching is actuated.
Relevant boards DCP, OLP
Configuration
requirements
Generally, the threshold is set to the recommended value.
In special cases, the threshold can be adjusted upon the actual on-site
situation.
When the variance between primary and secondary input power reaches
5 dB, if services in channels with lower optical power are still normal,
the threshold can be properly elevated. When the variance between
primary and secondary input power is far from reaching 5 dB while
services degrade, the threshold should be properly lowered.

C.8 Spectrum Analyzer Units
C.8.1 Optical Monitoring
C.8.2 Monitor Interval (min)
C.8.3 Wavelength Monitor Status
C.8.4 Configure Band
C.8.5 Configure Working Band Parity
C.8.6 Actual Band
C.8.7 Actual Working Band Parity
C.8.1 Optical Monitoring
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to set the optical interface monitoring state.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-43
Item Description
Parameter values Enabled, Disabled
Parameter value
description
Default value: Enabled
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In configuration stage
Impact on the
system
When the monitoring of an optical interface is set to Disabled, the MCA
board does not analyze the wavelength at this interface.
Relevant boards MCA4, MCA8
Configuration
requirements
The monitoring state of optical interfaces that require monitoring should
be set to Enabled.

C.8.2 Monitor Interval (min)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to set the supervisory channel of the current board for analyzing
the channel status monitor interval.
Parameter value
range (min)
5-49995
Parameter value
description
Default value: 10
Recommended
value
10
Application
scenarios
In configuration stage
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards MCA4, MCA8
Configuration
requirements
The default value is recommended.

C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
C.8.3 Wavelength Monitor Status
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to set whether to monitor the current wavelength.
Parameter values Monitor, No Monitor
Parameter value
description
Default value: No Monitor
Recommended
value
It is recommended to set the monitor status of wavelengths that bear
services to Monitor.
Application
scenarios
In configuration stage
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards MCA4, MCA8
Configuration
requirements
The monitor status of wavelengths that bear services should be set to
Monitor.

C.8.4 Configure Band
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to configure type of the working band of a board.
Parameter values C
Parameter value
description
Supports only C band.
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards MCA4, MCA8
Configuration
requirements
None

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-45
C.8.5 Configure Working Band Parity
Item Description
Parameter
description
Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Parameter values All, Even, Odd
Parameter value
description
All: All 192.10 THz to 196.05 THz odd and even wavelengths at 50
GHz channel spacing in C band. There are 80 wavelengths in total. It
is applicable for the MCA4 and MCA8 board.
Even: All 192.10 THz to 196.00 THz even wavelengths at 100 GHz
channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for
the MCA4 and MCA8 board.
Odd: All 192.15 THz to 196.05 THz odd wavelengths at 100 GHz
channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for
the MCA4 and MCA8 board.
Recommended
value
Corresponding wavelengths are used according to different
requirements.
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards MCA4, MCA8
Configuration
requirements
When configuring the parity of wavelengths on the T2000, make sure
that the parity configured is consistent with that of the actual working
wavelengths.

C.8.6 Actual Band
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to query the actual working band of the board.
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards MCA4, MCA8
Configuration
requirements
None

C.8.7 Actual Working Band Parity
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to query the parity of the actual working band of the board.
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards MCA4, MCA8
Configuration
requirements
None

C.9 Variable Optical Attenuator Units (VOAs)
C.9.1 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)
C.9.2 Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)
C.9.3 Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB)
C.9.4 Path Use Status
C.9.5 Configure Band
C.9.6 Configure Working Band Parity
C.9.7 Actual Band
C.9.8 Actual Working Band Parity
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-47
C.9.9 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
C.9.1 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to adjust the attenuation of optical power in the corresponding
channels to meet the requirement of optical power test.
Parameter value
range (dB)
Varies with the environment or optical components and subjects to the
on-site query result.
Parameter value
description
Value range: varies with boards. The value range of optical interface
attenuation ratio of a board can be obtained by querying the Maximum
Attenuation Ratio and Minimum Attenuation Ratio of the board.
Default value: maximum attenuation ratio of the board (21.5 dB)
Recommended
value
Configured upon the requirement of optical power test.
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
Influences the downstream optical power.
Relevant boards VA1, VA4
Configuration
requirements
The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be too large. It should
be controlled within 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every
time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. In an expansion project
or maintenance action, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be
controlled within 1 dB.

C.9.2 Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Indicates the maximum optical power attenuation ratio of a board.
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In maintenance stage
C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards VA1, VA4
Configuration
requirements
None

C.9.3 Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Indicates the minimum optical power attenuation ratio of a board.
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In maintenance stage
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards VA1, VA4
Configuration
requirements
None

C.9.4 Path Use Status
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to set the path use status.
Parameter values Used, Unused
Parameter value
description
Value type: enumeration
Default value: Used
Used: indicates that the port is in use.
Unused: indicates that the port is not in use.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-49
Item Description
Recommended
value
Used
Application
scenarios
In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
If the port is set to Unused, alarms generated at this port are suppressed.
Relevant boards VA1, VA4
Configuration
requirements
If a port has services, its use status must be set to Used.
If the port has no services, its use status should be set to Unused to
suppress alarms, generated by the port, of no concerns.

C.9.5 Configure Band
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to configure type of the working band of a board.
Parameter values C
Parameter value
description
Supports only C band.
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards VA1, VA4
Configuration
requirements
None

C.9.6 Configure Working Band Parity
Item Description
Parameter
description
Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Parameter values All
C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Item Description
Parameter value
description
All: All 192.10 THz to 196.05 THz odd and even wavelengths at 50
GHz channel spacing in C band. There are 80 wavelengths in total. It
is applicable for the VA1 and VA4 board.
Recommended
value
Corresponding wavelengths are used according to different
requirements.
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards VA1, VA4
Configuration
requirements
When configuring the parity of wavelengths on the T2000, make sure
that the parity configured is consistent with that of the actual working
wavelengths.

C.9.7 Actual Band
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to query the actual working band of the board.
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards VA1, VA4
Configuration
requirements
None

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description C Parameter Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-51
C.9.8 Actual Working Band Parity
Item Description
Parameter
description
Used to query the parity of the actual working band of the board.
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
None
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards VA1, VA4
Configuration
requirements
None

C.9.9 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
Item Description
Parameter
description
Indicates the lower threshold of input optical power loss (an MUT_LOS
alarm is reported).
Parameter values Queriable only
Parameter value
description
The default value varies with boards. Refer to the value obtained on site
through the T2000.
Recommended
value
None
Application
scenarios
In commissioning and maintenance stages
Impact on the
system
None
Relevant boards VA1, VA4
Configuration
requirements
None

C Parameter Description
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
C-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
D Quick Reference Table of the Units
Quick reference tables include those for specifications of optical transponder units, optical
amplifier units and other boards, and also the functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards.
D.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification
The main specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards and line boards
include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.
D.2 Optical Amplifying Unit Specification
The main specifications of the optical amplifying unit include the operating wavelength range,
channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum output
power of a single wavelength.
D.3 Other Unit Specification
The main specifications of other boards include the insertion loss values of each board.
D.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio
Some boards of WDM equipment provide a MON interface. A small number of supervisory
signals are split from the main-path signals and are output through MON for in-service
performance monitoring of the optical signals.
D.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards
The main functions and features supported by OTUs, tributary boards and line boards are
wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
D.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support different loopback.
D.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support protection function.
D.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support electrical cross-connection.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description D Quick Reference Table of the Units
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-1
D.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification
The main specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards and line boards
include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.
D.1.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification on the Client Side
The main client-side specifications of the optical transponder unit (OTU) include the access
service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.
D.1.2 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification on the WDM Side
The main wdm-side specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards and
line boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module
type.
D.1.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification on the
Client Side
The main client-side specifications of the optical transponder unit (OTU) include the access
service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.
Table D-1 Quick reference table for client-side specifications of OTU boards
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module Optical
Module
Type
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)

TN11ECO
M
FE 100 BASE-
FX-1310
nm-40km
0 -5 -30 -10 eSFP
100 BASE-
FX-1310
nm-2km
-14 -19 -30 -14
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -28 -9
TN11L4G GE 2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
1000 BASE-
LX-10km
-3 -11.5 -19 -3
D Quick Reference Table of the Units
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
D-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module Optical
Module
Type
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)

1000 BASE-
LX-40km
0 -4.5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80km
5 -2 -22 -3
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate-40km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate-80km
5 0 -28 -9
TN11LDG
D
GE 2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
1000 BASE-
LX-10km
-3 -11.5 -19 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40km
0 -4.5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80km
5 -2 -22 -3
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate-40km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate-80km
5 0 -28 -9
TN11LDG
S
GE 2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
1000 BASE-
LX-10km
-3 -11.5 -19 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40km
0 -4.5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80km
5 -2 -22 -3
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate-40km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description D Quick Reference Table of the Units
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-3
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module Optical
Module
Type
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)

2.67 Gbit/s
multirate-80km
5 0 -28 -9
TN12LDM FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10km
-3 -11.5 -19 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40km
0 -4.5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80km
5 -2 -22 -3
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
I-16 -3 -10 -18 -3
S-16.1 0 -5 -18 0
L-16.1 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2 3 -2 -28 -9
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -28 -9
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
3 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
TN11LDM
D
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
1000 BASE-
LX-10km
-3 -11.5 -19 -3
D Quick Reference Table of the Units
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
D-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module Optical
Module
Type
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)

STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-40km
0 -4.5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80km
5 -2 -22 -3
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
I-16 -3 -10 -18 -3
S-16.1 0 -5 -18 0
L-16.1 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2 3 -2 -28 -9
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -28 -9
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
3 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
TN11LDM
S
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10km
-3 -11.5 -19 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40km
0 -4.5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80km
5 -2 -22 -3
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
I-16 -3 -10 -18 -3
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description D Quick Reference Table of the Units
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-5
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module Optical
Module
Type
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)

GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
S-16.1 0 -5 -18 0
L-16.1 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2 3 -2 -28 -9
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -28 -9
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
3 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
TN11LOG GE 2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
1000 BASE-
LX-10km
-3 -11.5 -19 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40km
0 -4.5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80km
5 -2 -22 -3
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -28 -9
TN11LOM GE 2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
D Quick Reference Table of the Units
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
D-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module Optical
Module
Type
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)

1000 BASE-
LX-10km
-3 -11.5 -19 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40km
0 -4.5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80km
5 -2 -22 -3
FC 100/ FC 200/
FC 400/ FICON/
FICON Express
FC 400 module-
Multimode
-1 -9 -14 0
FC 400 module-
Single-mode
-2 -8 -16 0
FC 100/
FICON/ FC
200/ FICON
Express
module-
Multimode
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0
FC 100/
FICON/ FC
200/ FICON
Express
module-Single-
mode
-3 -10 -18 0
GE/ FC 100/ FC
200
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -28 -9
TN11LQG GE 2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
1000 BASE-
LX-10km
-3 -11.5 -19 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40km
0 -4.5 -20 -3
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description D Quick Reference Table of the Units
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-7
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module Optical
Module
Type
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)

1000 BASE-
ZX-80km
5 -2 -22 -3
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -28 -9
TN13LQM FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10km
-3 -11.5 -19 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40km
0 -4.5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80km
5 -2 -22 -3
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
I-16 -3 -10 -18 -3
S-16.1 0 -5 -18 0
L-16.1 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2 3 -2 -28 -9
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -28 -9
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
3 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
D Quick Reference Table of the Units
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
D-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module Optical
Module
Type
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)

TN11LQM
D/
TN12LQM
D
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10km
-3 -11.5 -19 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40km
0 -4.5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80km
5 -2 -22 -3
OTU1
b
/
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
I-16 -3 -10 -18 -3
S-16.1 0 -5 -18 0
L-16.1 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2 3 -2 -28 -9
FC100/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
FE/ DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -28 -9
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
3 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
TN11LQM
S/
TN12LQM
S
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10km
-3 -11.5 -19 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40km
0 -4.5 -20 -3
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description D Quick Reference Table of the Units
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-9
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module Optical
Module
Type
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)

1000 BASE-
ZX-80km
5 -2 -22 -3
OTU1
b
/
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
I-16 -3 -10 -18 -3
S-16.1 0 -5 -18 0
L-16.1 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2 3 -2 -28 -9
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -28 -9
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
3 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
TN11LSX/
TN12LSX
OC-192/
STM-64/ 10GE
LAN/ 10GE
WAN/ OTU2/
FC1200
a
10Gbit/s
multirate-10km
-1 -6 -11 0.5 XFP
10Gbit/s
multirate-40km
2 -1 -14 -1
10Gbit/s single-
rate-0.3km
-1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1
10Gbit/s
multirate-80km
4 0 -24.0 -7
TN11LSX
L
STM-256/
OC-768
Transponder 3 0 -5 3 -
TN11LWX
2
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
D Quick Reference Table of the Units
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
D-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module Optical
Module
Type
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)

STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
I-16 -3 -10 -18 -3
S-16.1 0 -5 -18 0
L-16.2 3 -2 -28 -9
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -28 -9
TN11LWX
D
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
I-16 -3 -10 -18 -3
S-16.1 0 -5 -18 0
L-16.2 3 -2 -28 -9
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -28 -9
TN11LWX
S/
TN12LWX
S
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
ISC 1G/ ISC 2G/
ETR/ CLO
c
/
STM-16/ FC200/
I-16 -3 -10 -18 -3
S-16.1 0 -5 -18 0
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description D Quick Reference Table of the Units
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-11
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module Optical
Module
Type
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)

FC100/GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
L-16.2 3 -2 -28 -9
ISC 1G/ ETR/
CLO/ GE/
FC100/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
FE/ DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
ISC 1G/ ISC 2G/
ETR/ CLO/
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -28 -9
TN11TMX STM-16/ OC-48/
OTU1 (without
FEC)
I-16 -3 -10 -18 -3 eSFP
S-16.1 0 -5 -18 0
L-16.1 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2 3 -2 -28 -9
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -28 -9 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
3 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
TN11TBE FE 100 BASE-
FX-1310
nm-40km
0 -5 -30 -10 eSFP
100 BASE-
FX-1310
nm-2km
-14 -19 -30 -14
GE/ 10GE LAN/
10GE WAN
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0
D Quick Reference Table of the Units
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
D-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module Optical
Module
Type
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)

1000 BASE-
LX-10km
-3 -11.5 -19 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40km
0 -4.5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80km
5 -2 -22 -3
10Gbit/s
multirate-10km
-1 -6 -11 0.5 XFP
10Gbit/s
multirate-40km
2 -1 -14 -1
10Gbit/s single-
rate-0.3km
-1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1
10Gbit/s
multirate-80km
4 0 -24 -7
FE/ GE/ 10GE
LAN/ 10GE
WAN
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -28 -9
TN11TDG GE 2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
1000 BASE-
LX-10km
-3 -11.5 -19 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40km
0 -4.5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80km
5 -2 -22 -3
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate-40km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate-80km
5 0 -28 -9
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description D Quick Reference Table of the Units
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-13
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module Optical
Module
Type
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)

TN11TDX
/
TN12TDX
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192
10Gbit/s
multirate-10km
-1 -6 -11 0.5 XFP
10Gbit/s
multirate-40km
2 -1 -14 -1
10Gbit/s single-
rate-0.3km
-1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1
10Gbit/s
multirate-80km
4 0 -24 -7
TN11TOM FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10km
-3 -11.5 -19 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40km
0 -4.5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80km
5 -2 -22 -3
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
I-16 -3 -10 -18 -3
S-16.1 0 -5 -18 0
L-16.1 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2 3 -2 -28 -9
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -28 -9
D Quick Reference Table of the Units
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
D-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module Optical
Module
Type
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)

OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
3 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
TN11TQM
/
TN12LQM
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10km
-3 -11.5 -19 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40km
0 -4.5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80km
5 -2 -22 -3
OTU1
b
/
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
I-16 -3 -10 -18 -3
S-16.1 0 -5 -18 0
L-16.1 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2 3 -2 -28 -9
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -28 -9
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
3 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
TN11TQS STM-16/ OC-48/
OTU1
I-16 -3 -10 -18 -3 eSFP
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description D Quick Reference Table of the Units
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-15
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module Optical
Module
Type
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)

S-16.1 0 -5 -18 0
L-16.1 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2 3 -2 -28 -9
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -28 -9 eSFP
CWDM
TN11TQX 10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192
10Gbit/s
multirate-10km
-1 -6 -11 0.5 XFP
10Gbit/s
multirate-40km
2 -1 -14 -1
10Gbit/s single-
rate-0.3km
-1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1
10Gbit/s
multirate-80km
4 0 -24 -7
TN11TSX
L
STM-256/
OC-768
40G
Transponder
3 0 -5 3 -
a: Only TN12LSX supports FC1200 service.
b: Only TN12LQMD/TN12LQMS/TN12TQM support OTU1 service.
c: Only TN12LWXS supports ISC 1G/ISC 2G/ETR/CLO services.

D.1.2 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification on the
WDM Side
The main wdm-side specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards and
line boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module
type.
D Quick Reference Table of the Units
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
D-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table D-2 Quick reference table for DWDM-side specifications of OTU boards
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched Optical
Power
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
TN11L4G OTU 5G 3400 ps/nm 2 -2 -25 -9
6400 ps/nm -1 -5 -25 -9
3400 ps/nm-
tunable
4 0 -25 -9
TN11LDG
D
STM-16/
OTU1
12800 ps/nm-PIN -4 -8 -18 0
12800 ps/nm-
APD
-4 -8 -28 -9
6500 ps/nm-PIN 0 -5 -18 0
3200 ps/
nm-2mW-APD
0 -5 -28 -9
12800 ps/nm-
tunable
0 -5 -28 -9
6400 ps/nm- four
channels- tunable
0 -5 -28 -9
TN11LDG
S
STM-16/
OTU1
12800 ps/nm-PIN -1 -5 -18 0
12800 ps/nm-
APD
-1 -5 -28 -9
6500 ps/nm-PIN 3 -2 -18 0
3200 ps/
nm-2mW-APD
3 -2 -28 -9
12800 ps/nm-
tunable
3 -2 -28 -9
6400 ps/nm- four
channels- tunable
3 -2 -28 -9
TN12LDM OTU1 2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
3 0 -28 -9
TN11LDM
D
OTU1 12800 ps/nm-
APD
-4 -8 -28 -9
12800 ps/nm-
tunable
0 -5 -26 -9
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description D Quick Reference Table of the Units
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-17
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched Optical
Power
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
6400ps/nm-
tunable
0 -5 -28 -9
TN11LDM
S
OTU1 12800 ps/nm-
APD
-1 -5 -28 -9
12800 ps/nm-
tunable
3 -2 -26 -9
6400ps/nm-
tunable
3 -2 -28 -9
TN11LOG OTU2 800 ps/nm 2 -3 -16 0
1600 ps/nm 4 0 -26 -9
1200 ps/nm-
tunable-PIN
2 -3 -16 0
1200 ps/nm-
tunable-APD
2 -3 -26 -9
4800 ps/nm-
ODB-tunable
2 -3 -26 -9
800 ps/nm-DRZ-
tunable
2 -3 -16 0
800 ps/nm-fixed 2 -3 -16 0
TN11LOM OTU2/
OTU2v
800 ps/nm 2 -3 -16 0
1600 ps/nm 4 0 -26 -9
1200 ps/nm-
tunable-PIN
2 -3 -16 0
1200 ps/nm-
tunable-APD
2 -3 -26 -9
4800 ps/nm-
ODB-tunable
2 -3 -26 -9
800 ps/nm-DRZ-
tunable
2 -3 -16 0
800 ps/nm-fixed 2 -3 -16 0
TN11LQG FEC 5G/ OTU5G 3400 ps/nm 2 -2 -25 -9
6400 ps/nm -1 -5 -25 -9
D Quick Reference Table of the Units
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
D-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched Optical
Power
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
3400 ps/nm-
tunable
4 0 -25 -9
6400 ps/nm-ODB
tunable
2 -3 -25 -9
TN13LQM OTU1 2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
3 0 -28 -9
TN11LQM
D
OTU1 12800 ps/nm-PIN -4 -8 -18 0
12800 ps/nm-
APD
-4 -8 -28 -9
6500 ps/nm-PIN 0 -5 -18 0
3200 ps/
nm-2mW-APD
0 -5 -28 -9
12800 ps/nm-
tunable
0 -5 -28 -9
6400 ps/nm- four
channels- tunable
0 -5 -28 -9
TN12LQM
D
OTU1 12800 ps/nm-
APD
-4 -8 -28 -9
12800 ps/nm-
tunable
0 -5 -26 -9
6400ps/nm-
tunable
0 -5 -28 -9
TN11LQM
S
OTU1 12800 ps/nm-PIN -1 -5 -18 0
12800 ps/nm-
APD
-1 -5 -28 -9
6500 ps/nm-PIN 3 -2 -18 0
3200 ps/
nm-2mW-APD
3 -2 -28 -9
12800 ps/nm-
tunable
3 -2 -28 -9
6400 ps/nm- four
channels- tunable
3 -2 -28 -9
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description D Quick Reference Table of the Units
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-19
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched Optical
Power
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
TN12LQM
S
OTU1 12800 ps/nm-
APD
-1 -5 -28 -9
12800 ps/nm-
tunable
3 -2 -26 -9
6400ps/nm-
tunable
3 -2 -28 -9
TN11LSX/
TN12LSX
OTU2/
OTU2v
800 ps/nm 2 -3 -16 0
1600 ps/nm 4 0 -26 -9
1200 ps/nm-
tunable-PIN
2 -3 -16 0
1200 ps/nm-
tunable-APD
2 -3 -26 -9
4800 ps/nm-
ODB-tunable
2 -3 -26 -9
800 ps/nm-DRZ-
tunable
2 -3 -16 0
800 ps/nm-fixed 2 -3 -16 0
TN11LSX
L
OTU3 ODB- tunable 0 -5 -16 0
DRZ- tunable 0 -5 -16 0
TN11LSX
LR
OTU3 ODB- tunable 0 -5 -16 0
DRZ- tunable 0 -5 -16 0
TN11LSX
R
OTU2/
OTU2v
800 ps/nm 2 -3 -16 0
1600 ps/nm 4 0 -26 -9
1200 ps/nm-
tunable-PIN
2 -3 -16 0
1200 ps/nm-
tunable-APD
2 -3 -26 -9
4800 ps/nm-
ODB-tunable
2 -3 -26 -9
800 ps/nm-DRZ-
tunable
2 -3 -16 0
D Quick Reference Table of the Units
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
D-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched Optical
Power
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
800 ps/nm-fixed 2 -3 -16 0
TN11LWX
2
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
12800 ps/nm-
PIN
a
-1 -5 -18 0
12800ps/nm-
APD
a
-1 -5 -28 9
6500 ps/nm -PIN 3 -2 -18 0
3200 ps/nm
-2mW-APD
3 -2 -26 -9
6400 ps/nm- four
channels- tunable
3 -2 -28 -9
TN11LWX
D
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
12800 ps/nm-
PIN
a
-4 -8 -18 0
12800ps/nm-
APD
a
-4 -8 -28 9
6500 ps/nm -PIN 0 -5 -18 0
3200 ps/nm
-2mW-APD
0 -5 -26 -9
12800 ps/nm-
tunable
0 -5 -28 -9
6400 ps/nm- four
channels- tunable
0 -5 -28 -9
TN11LWX
S/
TN12LWX
S
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE/ ISC 1G/
ISC 2G/ ETR/
CLO
12800 ps/nm-
PIN
a
-1 -5 -18 0
12800ps/nm-
APD
a
-1 -5 -28 9
6500 ps/nm -PIN 3 -2 -18 0
3200 ps/nm
-2mW-APD
3 -2 -26 -9
12800 ps/nm-
tunable
3 -2 -28 -9
6400 ps/nm- four
channels- tunable
3 -2 -28 -9
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description D Quick Reference Table of the Units
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-21
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched Optical
Power
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
TN11TMX OTU2 800 ps/nm 2 -3 -16 0
1600 ps/nm 4 0 -26 -9
1200 ps/nm-
tunable-PIN
2 -3 -16 0
1200 ps/nm-
tunable-APD
2 -3 -26 -9
4800 ps/nm-
ODB-tunable
2 -3 -26 -9
800 ps/nm-DRZ-
tunable
2 -3 -16 0
800 ps/nm-fixed 2 -3 -16 0
TN11ND2 OTU2 800 ps/nm- NRZ-
fixed
2 -3 -16 0
TN11NS2 OTU2 800 ps/nm 2 -3 -16 0
1600 ps/nm 4 0 -26 -9
1200 ps/nm-
tunable-PIN
2 -3 -16 0
1200 ps/nm-
tunable-APD
2 -3 -26 -9
4800 ps/nm-
ODB-tunable
2 -3 -26 -9
800 ps/nm-DRZ-
tunable
2 -3 -16 0
800 ps/nm-fixed 2 -3 -16 0
TN12NS2 OTU2 800ps/nm- NRZ-
fixed
2 -3 -16 0
1200 ps/nm -
tunable- PIN
2 -3 -16 0
1200 ps/nm -
tunable-APD
2 -3 -26 -9
4800 ps/nm -
ODB- tunable
2 -3 -26 -9
D Quick Reference Table of the Units
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
D-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched Optical
Power
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
800 ps/nm- DRZ-
tunable
2 -3 -16 0
a: The 12800 ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.
b: Only TN12LWXS supports ISC 1G/ ISC 2G/ ETR/ CLO services.

Table D-3 Quick reference table for CWDM-side specifications of OTU boards
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched Optical
Power
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
TN11ECO
M
GE 1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate
5 0 -19 -3
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate
5 0 -28 -9
TN11L4G OTU.5G 3400 ps/nm 5 2.5 -25 -9
TN11LDG
D
STM-16/
OTU1
1600 ps/
nm-4mW
2 -0.5 -28 -9
TN11LDG
S
STM-16/
OTU1
1600 ps/
nm-4mW
5 2.5 -28 -9
TN12LDM OTU1 2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -28 -9
TN13LQM OTU1 2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
5 0 -28 -9
TN11LQM
D
OTU1 1600 ps/
nm-4mW
2 -0.5 -28 -9
TN11LQM
S
OTU1 1600 ps/
nm-4mW
5 2.5 -28 -9
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description D Quick Reference Table of the Units
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-23
Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched Optical
Power
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
TN11LWX
2
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ DVB-SDI/
FE/FICON/
FICON Express
1600 ps/
nm-4mW
5 2.5 -28 -9
TN11LWX
D
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ DVB-SDI/
FE/FICON/
FICON Express
1600 ps/
nm-4mW
2 -0.5 -28 -9
TN11LWX
S
TN12LWX
S
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ DVB-SDI/
FE/FICON/
FICON Express/
ISC 1G/ ISC 2G/
ETR/ CLO
1600 ps/
nm-4mW
5 2.5 -28 -9
a: Only TN12LWXS supports ISC 1G/ ISC 2G/ ETR/ CLO services.

D.2 Optical Amplifying Unit Specification
The main specifications of the optical amplifying unit include the operating wavelength range,
channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum output
power of a single wavelength.
Table D-4 Quick reference table for optical amplifying unit
Board
Name
Gain
Adjustable
Range (dB)
Nomin
al
Chann
el Gain
(dB)
Input Power Range per Channel
(dBm)
Typical Input Power of a
Single Wavelength (dBm)
40 channels 80 channels 40 channels 80 channels
OAU101 20 to 23 20 -32 to -16 -32 to -19 - -
D Quick Reference Table of the Units
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
D-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board
Name
Gain
Adjustable
Range (dB)
Nomin
al
Chann
el Gain
(dB)
Input Power Range per Channel
(dBm)
Typical Input Power of a
Single Wavelength (dBm)
40 channels 80 channels 40 channels 80 channels
23 to 29 26 -32 to -22 -32 to -25
29 to 31 31 -32 to -27 -32 to -30
OAU102 20 to 23 20 -32 to -19 -32 to -22 - -
23 to 29 26 -32 to -25 -32 to -28
29 to 31 31 -32 to -30 -32
OAU103 24 to 28 24 -32 to -20 -32 to -23 - -
28 to 30 29 -32 to -25 -32 to -28
30 to 36 36 -32 -32
OAU105 23 to 26 23 -32 to -16 -32 to -19 - -
26 to 33 30 -32 to -23 -32 to -26
33 to 34 34 -32 to -27 -32 to -30
OBU101 - 20 -32 to -20 -32 to -23 -20 -23
OBU103 - 23 -32 to -19 -32 to -22 -19 -22
OBU104 - 17 -32 to -17 -32 to -20 -17 -20
OBU205 - 23 -24 to -16 -24 to -19 -16 -19

Table D-5 Quick reference table for CRPC
Board Name Channel Gain (dB) Maximum Pump Power
(dBm)
G.652 fiber LEAF fiber
CRPC01 10 12 29
CRPC03 >10 NA 29.5

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description D Quick Reference Table of the Units
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-25
Table D-6 Quick reference table for HBA
Board
Name
Channel
Gain (dB)
Typical Input Power of a
Single Wavelength (dBm)
Nominal
Input Power
Range (dBm)
Channel Allocation (nm)
40 channels 10 channels 40 channels 10 channels
HBA 29 -19 -13 -19 to -3 1529 to 1561 Any two of
the last 20
wavelengths
are spaced at
200 GHz.

D.3 Other Unit Specification
The main specifications of other boards include the insertion loss values of each board.
Table D-7 Quick reference table for specifications of other boards
Board Name Insertion Loss (dB)
TN11MR2 IN-MO
MI-OUT
1.0
Add/drop channel 1.5
TN11MR4 IN-MO
MI-OUT
1.5
Add/drop channel 2.2
TN11MR8 IN-MO
MI-OUT
3.5
Add/drop channel 4
TN11CMR2 IN-MO
MI-OUT
1.0
Add/drop channel 1.5
TN11CMR4 IN-MO
MI-OUT
1.0
Add/drop channel 2
TN11DMR1 EIN-EMO
EMI-EOUT
WIN-WMO
WMI-WOUT
0.8
Add/drop channel 1
D Quick Reference Table of the Units
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
D-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board Name Insertion Loss (dB)
TN11SBM2 Add/drop channel 3
TN11D40 6.5
TN11D40V
8
a
TN11FIU/TN12FIU IN-TM
RM-OUT
1.5
IN-TC
RC-OUT
1
TN11ITL RE-OUT
RO-OUT
<4.5
IN-TE
IN-TO
<2.5
TN12ITL RE-OUT
RO-OUT
<4.5
IN-TE
IN-TO
<3.5
TN11M40 6.5
TN11M40V
8
a
TN11DCP Transmit-end insertion
loss
Single mode 4
Multimode 4.5
Receive-end insertion loss Single mode 1.5
Multimode 2
TN12DCP Transmit-end insertion
loss
Single mode 4
Receive-end insertion loss Single mode 1.5
TN11OLP Transmit-end insertion
loss
Single mode 4
Multimode 4.5
Receive-end insertion loss Single mode 1.5
Multimode 2
TN12OLP Transmit-end insertion
loss
Single mode 4
Receive-end insertion loss Single mode 1.5
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description D Quick Reference Table of the Units
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-27
Board Name Insertion Loss (dB)
TN11SCS Wavelength dropping
insertion loss
Single mode 4
Multimode 4.5
Wavelength adding
insertion loss
Single mode 4
Multimode 4.5
TN11RMU9 EXPI-OUT 8.5
AMx
b
-TOA 12.5
a
ROA-OUT 1.5
TN11ROAM
Mx
c
-OUT 9
a
IN-DM 7
EXPI-OUT
14
a
IN-EXPO 3
TN11WSD9/
TN12WSD9/TN13WSD9
IN-DMx
d
IN-EXPO
8
a
TN11WSM9/
TN12WSM9/
TN13WSM9
AMx
b
-OUT
EXPI-OUT
8
a
TN11WSMD4
AMx
b
-OUT
IN-DMx
d
8
a
TN11GFU Channel insertion loss 0.5-6
a: The value tested when the VOA attenuation is set to 0 dB.
b: AMx denotes AM1-AM8.
c: Mx denotes M1-M40.
d: DMx denotes DM1-DM8.

D.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio
Some boards of WDM equipment provide a MON interface. A small number of supervisory
signals are split from the main-path signals and are output through MON for in-service
performance monitoring of the optical signals.
Table D-8 lists the ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals
of each type of board.
D Quick Reference Table of the Units
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
D-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Table D-8 Ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals of each type of board
Board Name Ratio of MON Interface to Received
Signal in Main Path
Ratio of MON Interface to
Transmitting Signal in Main Path
CRPC - "MON"/"SYS" = 1/99 (20dB)
D40 "MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10dB) -
D40V "MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10dB) -
FIU - "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20dB)
HBA - "MON"/"OUT" = 1/999 (30dB)
ITL - "MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10dB)
M40 - "MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10dB)
M40V - "MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10dB)
OAU1 - "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20dB)
OBU1 - "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20dB)
OBU2 - "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20dB)
RMU9 "MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15dB) "MONO"/"TOA" = 3/97 (15dB)
WSD9 "MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15dB) "MONO"/"EXPO" = 3/97 (15dB)
WSM9 "MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15dB) "MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15dB)
WSMD4 "MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15dB) "MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15dB)

D.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line
Boards
The main functions and features supported by OTUs, tributary boards and line boards are
wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table D-9.
Table D-9 Basic functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards
Board
Name
Tunabl
e
Wavel
ength
Functi
on
ESC
Functio
n
ALS
Functio
n
OTN
Functio
n
FEC Encoding WDM
Specification
Optical
Modul
e
FEC AFEC DWD
M
CWDM
TN11E
COM
x x x x x x x eSFP
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description D Quick Reference Table of the Units
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-29
Board
Name
Tunabl
e
Wavel
ength
Functi
on
ESC
Functio
n
ALS
Functio
n
OTN
Functio
n
FEC Encoding WDM
Specification
Optical
Modul
e
FEC AFEC DWD
M
CWDM
TN11L4
G
x eSFP
TN11L
DGD
x eSFP
TN11L
DGS
x eSFP
TN11L
DM
x x eSFP
TN11L
DMD
x x eSFP
TN11L
DMS
x x eSFP
TN11L
OG
x eSFP
TN11L
OM
x eSFP
TN11L
QG
x x eSFP
TN13L
QM
x x eSFP
TN11L
QMD
x eSFP
TN12L
QMD
x x eSFP
TN11L
QMS
x eSFP
TN12L
QMS
x x eSFP
TN11LS
X
/
TN12LS
X
x XFP
TN11LS
XL
x x
D Quick Reference Table of the Units
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
D-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board
Name
Tunabl
e
Wavel
ength
Functi
on
ESC
Functio
n
ALS
Functio
n
OTN
Functio
n
FEC Encoding WDM
Specification
Optical
Modul
e
FEC AFEC DWD
M
CWDM
TN11LS
XLR
x x
TN11LS
XR
x XFP
TN11L
WX2
x x x eSFP
TN11L
WXD
x x x eSFP
TN11L
WXS
/
TN12L
WXS
x x x eSFP
TN11T
MX
x eSFP
TN11N
D2
x x x
TN11N
S2
/
TN12N
S2
x x
TN11T
BE
x x x x x x x eSFP
XFP
TN11T
DG
x x x x x x x eSFP
TN11T
DX
/
TN12T
DX
x x x x x x x eSFP
TN11T
OM
x x eSFP
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description D Quick Reference Table of the Units
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-31
Board
Name
Tunabl
e
Wavel
ength
Functi
on
ESC
Functio
n
ALS
Functio
n
OTN
Functio
n
FEC Encoding WDM
Specification
Optical
Modul
e
FEC AFEC DWD
M
CWDM
TN11T
QM
/
TN12T
QM
x x x x x x x eSFP
TN11T
QS
x x x x eSFP
TN11T
QX
x x x x x x XFP
TN11TS
XL
x x x x x x x
NOTE
l "" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "x" indicates that the OTU does not support the function
l The SCC board can automatically detect that the eSFP and XFP modules are installed and online. The following information
about the modules can be obtained through a query on the T2000: VendorName, BarCode, and type of optical interface.

D.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line
Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support different loopback.
Table D-10 Loopback function of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards
Board Name Client-Side
Inloop
Client-Side
Outloop
WDM-Side
Inloop
WDM-Side
Outloop
ECOM x
LDGD
LDGS
LDM
LDMD
LDMS
LOG
LOM
D Quick Reference Table of the Units
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
D-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board Name Client-Side
Inloop
Client-Side
Outloop
WDM-Side
Inloop
WDM-Side
Outloop
LQG
LQM
LQMD
LQMS
LSX
LSXL x x
LSXLR x x x x
LSXR x x x x
LWX2
LWXD
LWXS
TMX
ND2
a
x x
NS2
a
x x
TDG x x
TDX x x
TOM
TQM x x
TQS x x
TQX x x
TSXL x x
a: NS2 /ND2 also support path loopback.
NOTE
"" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "x" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.

Table D-11 Loop function of the Ethernet boards
Board Name Interface Loop Mode
L4G Client side MAC inloop
PHY outloop
WDM side Inloop
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description D Quick Reference Table of the Units
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-33
Board Name Interface Loop Mode
Outloop
TBE 10GE optical interface MAC inloop
MAC outloop
PHY inloop
PHY outloop
GE optical interface MAC inloop
PHY inloop
GE electric interface MAC inloop
PHY inloop
PHY outloop
FE optical interface MAC inloop
PHY inloop
FE electric interface MAC inloop
PHY inloop
PHY outloop

D.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line
Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support protection function.
For detailed protection mode, refer to Table D-12.
Table D-12 Protection mode of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards
Board
Name
Protection Mode
SW
SNC
P
VLA
N
SNC
P
OD
Uk
SNC
P
Clie
nt-
Side
1+1
Prote
ction
Intra-
Board
1+1
Protec
tion
OWS
P
Prote
ction
OD
Uk
SPRi
ng
Prot
ectio
n
Bo
ard
-
Le
vel
Pro
tect
ion
DB
PS
DL
AG
MS
SNCP
Tribut
ary
SNCP
ECOM x x x x x x x x x x x x
L4G x x x x x x
D Quick Reference Table of the Units
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
D-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board
Name
Protection Mode
SW
SNC
P
VLA
N
SNC
P
OD
Uk
SNC
P
Clie
nt-
Side
1+1
Prote
ction
Intra-
Board
1+1
Protec
tion
OWS
P
Prote
ction
OD
Uk
SPRi
ng
Prot
ectio
n
Bo
ard
-
Le
vel
Pro
tect
ion
DB
PS
DL
AG
MS
SNCP
Tribut
ary
SNCP
LDGD x x x x x x x x
LDGS x x x x x x x x x
LDM x x x x x x x x x
LDMD x x x x x x x x x
LDMS x x x x x x x x x
LOG x x x x x x x
LOM x x x x x x x x x
LQG x x x x x x x
LQM x x x x x x x
LQMD x x x x x x x
LQMS x x x x x x
LSX x x x x x x x x x
LSXL x x x x x x x x x
LSXLR x x x x x x x x x x x x
LSXR x x x x x x x x x x x x
LWX2 x x x x x x x x x x
LWXD x x x x x x x x x
LWXS x x x x x x x x x x
TMX x x x x x x x x x
ND2 x x x x x x x
NS2 x x x x x x x
TBE x x x x
TDG x x x x x x x x
TDX x x x x x x x x x
TOM x x x x x
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description D Quick Reference Table of the Units
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-35
Board
Name
Protection Mode
SW
SNC
P
VLA
N
SNC
P
OD
Uk
SNC
P
Clie
nt-
Side
1+1
Prote
ction
Intra-
Board
1+1
Protec
tion
OWS
P
Prote
ction
OD
Uk
SPRi
ng
Prot
ectio
n
Bo
ard
-
Le
vel
Pro
tect
ion
DB
PS
DL
AG
MS
SNCP
Tribut
ary
SNCP
TQM x x x x x x x
TQS x x x x x x x x x
TQX x x x x x x x x x
TSXL x x x x x x x x x
NOTE
"" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "x" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.

D.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards
and Line Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support electrical cross-connection.
For detailed electrical cross-connection functions, refer to Table D-13.
Table D-13 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards
Board Name Electrical Cross-Connection
Integrated Cross-Connection Distributed Cross-Connection
ECOM 1 x GE 1 x GE
L4G 4 x GE 4 x GE
LDGD 2 x GE 2 x GE
LDGS 2 x GE 2 x GE
LDM x x
LDMD x x
LDMS x x
LOG 8 x GE 8 x GE
LOM x x
LQG 4 x GE 4 x GE
D Quick Reference Table of the Units
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
D-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board Name Electrical Cross-Connection
Integrated Cross-Connection Distributed Cross-Connection
LQM 4 x GE/1 x OTU1 4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1
LQMD 4 x GE/1 x OTU1 4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1
LQMS 4 x GE/1 x OTU1/1 x ODU1 4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x ODU1/1 x OTU1
LSX x x
LSXL x x
LSXLR x x
LSXR x x
LWX2 x x
LWXD x x
LWXS x x
TMX x x
ND2 8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2 x
NS2 4 x ODU1/1 x ODU2 4 x ODU1
TBE 16 x GE 16 x GE
TDG 2 x GE/1 x ODU1 2 x GE/1 x ODU1
TDX 8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2 8 x ODU1
TOM 8 x GE/4 x ODU1/1 x OTU1 8 x GE/1 x OTU1/8 x Any/4 x ODU1
TQM 4 x GE/1 x ODU1/1 x OTU1 4 x GE/4 x Any/1 x ODU1/1 x OTU1
TQS 4 x ODU1 4 x ODU1
TQX 4 x ODU2 x
TSXL 4 x ODU2 x
NOTE
"x" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description D Quick Reference Table of the Units
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-37
E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid
Slots of Boards
This chapter describes the power consumption, weight and valid slots of the boards used in the
OptiX OSN 6800 system.
The power consumption, weight and valid slots of the OptiX OSN 6800 boards are shown in
Table E-1. The values listed in the following table indicate the power consumption of the boards
when they normally work at 25 and 55.
Table E-1 Power consumption, weight and valid slots of the OptiX OSN 6800 boards
Board Module Type Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on at 25C
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion at 55C
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Numb
er of
Occupi
ed
Slots
Valid Slots
TN11AUX - 14.0 15.4 0.5 1 IU21
TN11CMR2 - 0.2 0.3 0.8 1 IU1-IU17
TN11CMR4 - 0.2 0.3 0.9 1 IU1-IU17
TN11CRPC01 - 110.0 121.0 4.0 - -
TN11CRPC03 - 70.0 77.0 4.2 - -
TN11D40 - 20.0 22.0 2.2 3 IU1-IU15
TN11D40V - 38.5 42.3 2.3 3 IU1-IU15
TN11DCP/
TN12DCP
- 6.8 7.5 1.0 1 IU1-IU17
TN11DCU - 0.5 0.5 1.5 1 IU1-IU17
TN11DMR1 - 0.2 0.3 0.7 1 IU1-IU17
TN11ECOM - 19.6 21.6 1.0 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-1
Board Module Type Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on at 25C
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion at 55C
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Numb
er of
Occupi
ed
Slots
Valid Slots
TN11FIU/
TN12FIU
- 4.2 4.6 1.0 1 IU1-IU17
TN11GFU - 0.2 0.3 0.9 1 IU1-IU17
TN11HBA - 47.0 75.0 3.0 3 IU2-IU16
TN11ITL - 0.2 0.3 1.2 1 IU1-IU17
TN12ITL - 10 11.5 1.2 1 IU1-IU17
TN11L4G NRZ-fixed(D)(5G)
(3400 ps/nm
6400 ps/nm)
50.0 55.0 1.4 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
NRZ-fixed(C)(5G)
(3400 ps/nm)
45.0 50.0
NRZ-tunable(5G)
(3400 ps/nm)
53.0 58.0
TN11LDGD Fixed(2.5G) (12800 ps/
nm-PIN
12800 ps/nm-APD
6500 ps/nm-PIN
3200 ps/nm-2mW-APD
1600 ps/nm-4mW)
34.0 37.4 1.4 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
Tunable(2.5G) (12800
ps/nm
6400 ps/nm)
38.0 41.8
TN11LDGS Fixed(2.5G) (12800 ps/
nm-PIN
12800 ps/nm-APD
6500 ps/nm-PIN
3200 ps/nm-2mW-APD
1600 ps/nm-4mW)
32.0 35.2 1.2 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
Tunable(2.5G) (12800
ps/nm
6400 ps/nm)
36.0 39.6
TN12LDM - 22.6 24.8 1.1 1 IU1-IU17
TN11LDMD - 26.9 29.6 1.2 1 IU1-IU17
TN11LDMS - 26.9 29.6 1.1 1 IU1-IU17
E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
E-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board Module Type Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on at 25C
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion at 55C
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Numb
er of
Occupi
ed
Slots
Valid Slots
TN11LOG NRZ-fixed(10G)(800
ps/nm-40 channels
fixed
1600 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80 channels
fixed)
49.5 54.5 1.6 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
NRZ-tunable(10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
50.0 55.0
DRZ-tunable(10G)
(800 ps/nm-80 channels
tunable)
51.2 56.1
ODB-tunable(10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
55.0 60.5
TN11LOM NRZ-fixed(10G)(800
ps/nm-40 channels
fixed
1600 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80 channels
fixed)
92.7 101.7 2.3 2 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
NRZ-tunable(10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
92.9 101.9
DRZ-tunable(10G)
(800 ps/nm-80 channels
tunable)
93.4 102.7
ODB-tunable(10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
98.2 108.0
TN11LQG NRZ-fixed (5G)(3400
ps/nm
6400 ps/nm)
30.0 33.0 1.3 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-3
Board Module Type Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on at 25C
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion at 55C
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Numb
er of
Occupi
ed
Slots
Valid Slots
NRZ-tunable (5G)
(3400 ps/nm)
31.0 34.4
ODB-tunable (5G)
(6400 ps/nm)
36.0 40.0
TN13LQM - 32.6 35.9 1.1 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
TN11LQMD Fixed(2.5G) (12800 ps/
nm-PIN
12800 ps/nm-APD
6500 ps/nm-PIN
3200 ps/nm-2mW-APD
1600 ps/nm-4mW)
54.9 60.4 1.4 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
Tunable(2.5G) (12800
ps/nm
6400 ps/nm)
59.1 65.1
TN12LQMD - 32.1 35.3 1.4 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
TN11LQMS Fixed(2.5G) (12800 ps/
nm-PIN
12800 ps/nm-APD
6500 ps/nm-PIN
3200 ps/nm-2mW-APD
1600 ps/nm-4mW)
53.2 58.5 1.3 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
Tunable(2.5G) (12800
ps/nm
6400 ps/nm)
57.8 63.6
TN12LQMS - 32.1 35.3 1.3 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
TN11LSX NRZ-fixed(10G)(800
ps/nm-40 channels
fixed
1600 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80 channels
fixed)
47.7 52.3 1.3 1 IU1-IU17
E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
E-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board Module Type Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on at 25C
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion at 55C
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Numb
er of
Occupi
ed
Slots
Valid Slots
NRZ-tunable(10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
47.9 52.5
DRZ-tunable(10G)
(800 ps/nm-80 channels
tunable)
49.7 52.7
ODB-tunable(10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
52.7 55.7
TN12LSX NRZ-fixed(10G)(800
ps/nm-40 channels
fixed
1600 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80 channels
fixed)
32.0 38.4 1.4 1 IU1-IU17
NRZ-tunable(10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
32.2 38.6
DRZ-tunable(10G)
(800 ps/nm-80 channels
tunable)
34.0 40.8
ODB-tunable(10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
36.0 43.2
TN11LSXL DRZ-tunable(40G)
(Transponder)
103.0 110.0 5.0 4 IU1-IU14
DRZ-tunable(40G)
(Transponder)
98.0 105.0
TN11LSXLR DRZ-tunable(40G)
(Transponder)
87.0 90.0 3.1 4 IU1-IU14
DRZ-tunable(40G)
(Transponder)
82.0 85.0
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-5
Board Module Type Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on at 25C
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion at 55C
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Numb
er of
Occupi
ed
Slots
Valid Slots
TN11LSXR NRZ-fixed(10G)(800
ps/nm-40 channels
fixed
1600 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80 channels
fixed)
34.8 38.3 1.2 1 IU1-IU17
NRZ-tunable(10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
35.0 38.5
DRZ-tunable(10G)
(800 ps/nm-80 channels
tunable)
36.8 40.3
ODB-tunable(10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
39.8 43.3
TN11LWX2 - 38.5 42.4 1.3 1 IU1-IU17
TN11LWXD - 35.8 39.4 1.2 1 IU1-IU17
TN11LWXS/
TN12LWXS
- 33.9 37.3 1.1 1 IU1-IU17
TN11M40 - 20.0 22.0 2.2 3 IU1-IU15
TN11M40V - 38.5 42.3 2.3 3 IU1-IU15
TN11MCA4 - 16.0 17.6 1.9 2 IU1-IU16
TN11MCA8 - 17.0 18.7 1.9 2 IU1-IU16
TN11MR2 - 0.2 0.3 0.9 1 IU1-IU17
TN11MR4 - 0.2 0.3 0.9 1 IU1-IU17
TN11MR8 - 0.2 0.3 1.0 2 IU1-IU16
TN11ND2 - 68.0 74.8 1.6 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
E-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board Module Type Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on at 25C
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion at 55C
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Numb
er of
Occupi
ed
Slots
Valid Slots
TN11NS2 NRZ-fixed(10G)(800
ps/nm-40 channels
fixed
1600 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80 channels
fixed)
38.0 41.8 1.2 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
NRZ-tunable(10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
39.0 42.9
DRZ-tunable(10G)
(800 ps/nm-80 channels
tunable)
41.0 45.1
ODB-tunable(10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
44.0 48.4
TN12NS2 - 39.5 47.4 1.2 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
TN11OAU101 - 25.0 31.0 1.8 2 IU2-IU17
TN11OAU102 - 25.0 31.0 1.8 2 IU2-IU17
TN11OAU103 - 24.0 30.0 1.8 2 IU2-IU17
TN11OAU105 - 24.0 30.0 1.8 2 IU2-IU17
TN11OBU101
/
TN11OBU104
- 16.0 17.6 1.3 1 IU1-IU17
TN11OBU103 - 18.0 20.5 1.3 1 IU1-IU17
TN11OBU205 - 26.0 33.0 1.9 2 IU2-IU17
TN11OLP - 6.0 6.6 0.9 1 IU1-IU17
TN12OLP - 6.0 6.6 1.0 1 IU1-IU17
TN11PIU - 35 35 0.5 1 IU19, IU20
TN11RMU9 - 11.0 12.1 1.1 1 IU1-IU17
TN11ROAM - 66.0 72.6 3.2 3 IU1-IU15
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-7
Board Module Type Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on at 25C
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion at 55C
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Numb
er of
Occupi
ed
Slots
Valid Slots
TN11SBM2 - 0.2 0.3 0.8 1 IU1-IU17
TN11SC1/
TN12SC1
- 11.0 14.9 1.0 1 IU1-IU17
TN11SC2/
TN12SC2
- 12.5 14.9 1.0 1 IU1-IU17
TN11SCC - 30.0 33.0 1.2 1 IU17, IU18
TN11SCS - 0.2 0.3 0.8 1 IU1-IU17
TN11TBE - 40.7 44.8 1.4 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
TN11TDG - 30.0 33.0 1.1 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
TN11TDX - 78.0 80.0 1.3 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
TN12TDX - 40.0 44.0 1.4 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
TN11TMX NRZ-fixed(10G)(800
ps/nm-40 channels
fixed
1600 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80 channels
fixed)
40.3 44.3 1.4 1 IU1-IU17
NRZ-tunable(10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
42.1 46.4
DRZ-tunable(10G)
(800 ps/nm-80 channels
tunable)
42.4 46.6
ODB-tunable(10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
46.5 51.2
TN11TOM - 55.0 60.0 1.1 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
E-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
Board Module Type Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on at 25C
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion at 55C
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Numb
er of
Occupi
ed
Slots
Valid Slots
TN11TQM - 50.3 57.6 1.2 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
TN12TQM - 25.0 27.5 1.1 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
TN11TQS - 43.0 47.3 1.2 1 IU1-IU8,
IU11-IU16
TN11TQX - 65.0 71.2 1.5 1 IU1, IU4,
IU11, IU14
TN11TSXL - 90.5 95.4 2.5 2 IU2-IU8,
IU12-IU16
TN11VA1/
TN12VA1
- 6.5 7.2 1.0 1 IU1-IU17
TN11VA4/
TN12VA4
- 8.5 9.4 1.0 1 IU1-IU17
TN11WMU - 12.0 15.0 1.0 1 IU1-IU17
TN11WSD9 - 17.0 18.7 2.2 2 IU1-IU16
TN12WSD9 - 30.0 35.0 2.5 2 IU1-IU16
TN13WSD9 - 30.0 35.0 2.5 3 IU1-IU15
TN11WSM9 - 17.0 18.7 2.2 2 IU1-IU16
TN12WSM9 - 30.0 35.0 2.5 2 IU1-IU16
TN13WSM9 - 30.0 35.0 2.5 3 IU1-IU15
TN11WSMD4 - 17.0 18.7 3.2 2 IU1-IU16
TN11XCS - 20.0 22.0 1.0 1 IU9, IU10
TN12XCS - 25.0 27.5 1.2 1 IU9, IU10

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-9
F Glossary
Numerics
1+1 protection A protection mechanism in which the same service is sent to the working and protection
channels (dual fed) at the transmit end and the receive end selects the service in the
working channel under normal situations. When the working channel is faulty. The
receive end selects the service in the protection channel. It is also called single-ended
switching, that is, switching occurs only at the receive end. This protection mechanism
is applicable to channel level protection, board level protection, and even equipment
level protection.
3R Regeneration, Reforming, Rtiming.
A
Alarm A visible or an audible indication to notify the person concerned that a failure or an
emergency has occurred. See also Event.
APD Avalanche Photodiode. A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and
amplification stages. Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region
where they free an avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require
higher voltages than other semiconductor electronics.
B
Back up A method to copy the important data into a backing storage in case that the original is
damaged or corrupted.
Bandwidth Information-carrying capacity of a communication channel. Analog bandwidth is the
range of signal frequencies that can be transmitted by a communication channel or
network.
Bit error An error occurs to some bits in the digital code stream after being received, judged, and
regenerated, thus damaging the quality of the transmitted information.
Bit Error Rate The ratio of the errored bit count to the transmitted bit count in a certain period of time.
In the digital communication system, bit error rate is the ratio of the errored bit count to
the received bit count in a typical period of time.
Broadcast The act of sending a frame addressed to all stations on the network
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description F Glossary
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
F-1
C
Channel The trail at the channel layer.
Configure To set the basic parameters of an operation object.
Connection A "transport entity" which consists of an associated pair of "unidirectional connections"
capable of simultaneously transferring information in opposite directions between their
respective inputs and outputs.
Convergence A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one or
several channels of required signals.
Conversion In the context of message handling, a transmittal event in which an MTA transforms
parts of a message content from one encoded information type to another, or alters a
probe so it appears that the described messages were so modified.
CWDM Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing. The technology for transmitting signals at
multiple wavelengths through the same fiber with wide spacing between optical
channels. Typical spacing is several nanometers or more.
D
DC power distribution
box
See Power Box. The DC power distribution box on the top of a cabinet provides power
supply to subracks in the cabinet.
DCF Dispersion Compensation Fiber. A kind of fiber which uses negative dispersion to
compensate for the positive dispersion of transmitting fiber to maintain the original shape
of the signal pulse.
DCM Dispersion Compensation Module. A module, which contains dispersion compensation
fibers to compensate for the positive dispersion of transmitting fiber.
DCN Data Communication Network. A communication network within a TMN or between
TMNs which supports the data communication function (DCF).
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing. The technology utilizes the characteristics of
broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple
wavelengths with specific frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels
to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber.
E
EDFA Erbium Coped Fiber Amplifier. An optical device that amplifies the optical signals. The
device uses a short length of optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium and
the energy level jump of Erbium ions activated by pump sources. When the amplifier
passes the external light source pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specific
wavelength range.
ESC Electric Supervisory Channel. A technology realizes the communication among all the
nodes and transmits the monitoring data in the optical transmission network. The
monitoring data of ESC is introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with
service signals.
ESCON Enterprise System Connection. A path protocol which connects the host with various
control units in a storage system. It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The
transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.
F Glossary
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
F-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
ESD Electrostatic Discharge. The phenomena the energy being produced by electrostatic
resource discharge instantly.
Ethernet A data link level protocol comprising the OSI model's bottom two layers. It is a broadcast
networking technology that can use several different physical media, including twisted
pair cable and coaxial cable. Ethernet usually uses CSMA/CD. TCP/IP is commonly
used with Ethernet networks.
Eye pattern A graphic presentation formed by the superimposition of the waveforms of all possible
pulse sequences.
F
F1 byte The user path byte, which is reserved for the user, but is typically special for network
providers. The F1 byte is mainly used to provide the temporary data or voice path for
special maintenance objectives. It belongs to the regenerator section overhead byte.
Fan tray assembly A module which contains fans used for heat dissipation.
Fiber spool The spool on the side of a subrack which is used for fiber routing.
Flow An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the T2000 or NE
software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets that
have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present, two flows are supported:
port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port ID and port+VLAN flow is
based on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexist in the same port.
Frame A cyclic set of consecutive time slots in which the relative position of each time slot can
be identified.
G
Gain The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical
amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber,
which expressed in dB.
H
History alarms Alarms that have been cleared and acknowledged.
I
Internal cable The cables and optical fibers which are used for interconnecting electrical interfaces and
optical interfaces within the cabinet.
IP over DCC The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote
NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead
DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description F Glossary
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
F-3
IPA Intelligent Power Adjustment. The technology that the system reduces the optical power
of all the amplifiers in an adjacent regeneration section in the upstream to a safety level
if the system detects the loss of optical signals on the link. The loss of optical signals
may due to the fiber is broken, the performance of equipments trend to be inferior or the
connector is not plugged well. Thus, the maintenance engineers are not hurt by the laser
being sent out from the slice of broken fiber.
L
Label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
Laser The device that generates the directional light covering a narrow range of wavelengths.
Laser light is more coherent than ordinary light. Semiconductor diode lasers are the used
light source in fiber-optic system.
Layer A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically
as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer
of its characteristic information.
M
MAN Metropolitan Area Network. A network where the computer resources in a geographic
region are connected. The coverage of a MAN is larger than the coverage of a local area
network (LAN) but smaller than the coverage of a wide area network (WAN).
Mapping The process by which tributary signals are adapted into the corresponding virtual
container at the PDH/SDH edge.
MO Managed Object. The management view of a resource within the telecommunication
environment that may be managed via the agent. Examples of SDH managed objects
are: equipment, receive port, transmit port, power supply, plug-in card, virtual container,
multiplex section, and regenerator section.
Multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher
order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex
section.
N
NE A network unit, including the hardware and software. Normally a network unit has at
least one SCC board, which manages and monitors the entire network unit. NE software
runs on the SCC board.
Noise figure An index that represents the degrade extent of optical signals after the signals passing a
system.
O
OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer. A device that can be used to add the optical signals of
various wavelengths to one channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths
from one channel.
ODF Optical Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
F Glossary
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
F-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
ODF Optical Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
OLA A piece of equipment that functions as an OLA to directly amplify the input optical
signals and to compensate for the line loss. Currently, the key component of the OLA is
the EDFA amplifier.
OLP A protection mechanism that adopts dual fed and selective receiving principle and single-
ended switching mode. In this protection, two pairs of fibers are used. One pair of fibers
forms the working route. The working route transmits line signals when the line is
normal. The other pair of fibers forms the protection route. The protection route carries
line signals when the line is broken or the signal attenuation is extremely large.
ONE Optical Network Element. An independent physical entity in an optical transmission
network. An ONE provides the functions that are similar to an NE. The ONE can be an
OTM, OLA, or OADM. One ONE can consist of multiple subrack NEs.
Optical Amplifier A device or subsystem in which optical signals are amplified by means of photon energy
transfer.
Optical switch A passive component possessing two or more ports which selectively transmits, redirects,
or blocks optical power in an optical fiber transmission line.
OSC Optical Supervisory Channel. A technology realizes communication among nodes in
optical transmission network and transmits the monitoring data in a certain channel (the
wavelength of the working channel for it is 1510 nm and that of the corresponding
protection one is 1625 nm).
OSNR Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio. Ratio of the optical power of the transmitted optical signal
to the noise on the received signal.
OTU Optical Transponder Unit. A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals
into the G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM wavelength.
P
Path protection The working principle of path protection: When the system works in path protection
mode, the PDH path uses the dual-fed and signal selection mode. Through the tributary
unit and cross-connect unit, the tributary signal is sent simultaneously to the east and
west lines. Meanwhile, the cross-connect matrix sends the signal dually sent from the
opposite end to the tributary board through the active and standby buses, and the
hardware of the tributary board automatically and selectively receive the signal from the
two groups of buses automatically according to the AIS number of the lower order path.
PIN Photodiode. A semiconductor detector with an intrinsic (i) region separating the p- and
n-doped regions. It has fast linear response and is used in fiber-optic receivers.
Polarization
dependence loss
The maximum variation of loss result from a variation of the state of polarization of the
input signal at nominal operating conditions.
Power distribution box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies
power for the subracks in the cabinet. It is another name of power box.
R
Receiver sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received
power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER.
REG A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description F Glossary
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
F-5
Regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes,
waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
Ring network One type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one to be a cycle.
RS232 In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It can
communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the
transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19. 2 kbit/s.
S
SD Signal Degrade. A signal that indicates the associated data has degraded in the sense that
a degraded defect condition is active.
SF Signal Fail. A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-
end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
T
T2000 A network management system that Huawei provides to manage transmission networks.
The T2000 is located between the NE level and the network level in the
telecommunication management network structure. That is, the T2000 is a subnetwork
management system. The T2000 provides all management functions at the NE layer and
some of the management functions at the network layer.
TCP/IP One of the key protocols in the Internal protocol suite. The hosts that connect to each
other through the TCP protocol can create connection between each other and exchange
data. The TCP protocol ensures that the data can be transmitted from the transmitter to
the receiver in a reliable and orderly manner. The TCP can also distinguish data for the
concurrent applications on the same host.
Timeslot Single timeslot on a E1 digital interfacethat is, a 64-kbps, synchronous, full-duplex
data channel, typically used for a single voice connection.
U
User The user of the T2000 client, and the user and password define the corresponding
authority of operation and management of the T2000.
W
Working path The channels allocated to transport the normal traffic.
F Glossary
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
F-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
G Acronyms and Abbreviations
A
ADM Add and Drop Multiplexer
AFEC Advanced Forward Error Correction
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ALC Automatic Level Control
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
APD Avalanche Photo Diode
APE Automatic Power Equilibrium
APS Automatic Protection Switch
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

B
BER Bit Error Ratio

C
CAR Committed Access Rate
CMI Coded Mark Inversion
CoS Class of Service
CWDM Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplex

D
DCC Data Communication Channel
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description G Acronyms and Abbreviations
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
G-1
DCF Dispersion Compensation Fiber
DCM Dispersion Compensation Module
DCN Data Communication Network
DMUX Double Multiplexer
DWDM Dense Wave Division Multiplexer

E
ECC Embedded Control Channel
EDFA Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EPL Ethernet Private Line
ESCON Enterprise Systems Connection
eSFP Enhanced Small Form-Factor Pluggable
ETSI European Telecommunication Standards Institute
EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line

F
FC Fiber Channel
FEC Forward Error Correction
FICON Fiber Connection
FOADM Fixed Optical add/drop Multiplexer

G
GE Gigabit Ethernet

I
ID Identity
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IP Internet Protocol
IPA Intelligent Power Adjustment
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Sector
G Acronyms and Abbreviations
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
G-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

L
LAG Link Aggregation Group
LAN Local Area Network
LCN Local Communication Network
LCT Local Craft Terminal
LOS Loss Of Signal

N
NE Network Element
NRZ Non Return to Zero

O
OA Optical Amplifier
OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance
OD Optical Demultiplexing
ODUk Optical Channel Data Unit-k
OLA Optical Line Amplifier
OLP Optical Line Protection
OM Optical Multiplexing
OMS Optical Multiplex Section
OSC Optical Supervisory Channel
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSN Optical Switch Node
OSNR Optical Signal-to-noise Ratio
OTM Optical Terminal Multiplexer
OTN Optical Transmission Network
OTU Optical Transponder Unit

P
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description G Acronyms and Abbreviations
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
G-3
PIN Positive Intrinsic Negative

Q
QA Q Adaptation
QoS Quality of Service
QinQ 802.1Q in 802.1Q

R
RDU ROADM Demux Unit
ROADM Reconfiguration Optical Add/drop Multiplexer
RS Reed-Solomon

S
SAN Storage Area Network
SCC System Control & Communication
SD Signal Degrade
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SF Signal Fail
SLM Single Longitudinal Mode
SM Section Monitoring
SNCP Subnetwork Connection Protection
SONET Synchronous Optical Network

T
TCM Tandem Connection Monitoring

V
VC Virtual Container
VLAN Virtual Local Area Network
VOA Variable Optical Attenuator

G Acronyms and Abbreviations
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
G-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
W
WAN Wide Area Network
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplex
WSS Wavelength Selective Switching

X
XFP 10Gbit/s Small Form-Factor Pluggable

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description G Acronyms and Abbreviations
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
G-5
Index
A
alarm concatenating cable, 18-13
alarm interface cable, 18-12
appearance and dimensions, 4-2
aux
application, 12-8
DIP switch and jumper, 12-10
front panel, 12-9
functions and features, 12-8
signal flow, 12-8
slots, 12-10
specifications, 12-10
version, 12-7
working principle, 12-8
B
bar code, 4-5, B-3
C
cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND power cable, 18-2
cabinet door grounding cable, 18-8
cabinet Indicator cable, 18-11
cabinet structure, 1-2
cable, 18-2, 18-8
alarm concatenating cable, 18-13
alarm interface cable, 18-12
cabinet Indicator cable, 18-11
inter-subrack cable, 18-13
OAM serial port cable, 18-15
PDU grounding cable, 18-9
subrack power cable, 18-5
characteristic code
DCP, B-19
DCU, B-22
FOADM, B-7
GFU, B-22
MCA, B-11
OAU, B-12
OLP, B-19
optical MUX/DMUX, B-15
OTU, B-3
SCS, B-19
VOA, B-21
cmr2
application, 9-2
characteristic code, 9-6, B-8
front panel, 9-4
functions and features, 9-3
NM configuration reference, 9-7
signal flow, 9-3
slots, 9-6
specifications, 9-7
working principle, 9-3
cmr4
application, 9-9
characteristic code, 9-13, B-8
front panel, 9-12
functions and features, 9-10
NM configuration reference, 9-14
signal flow, 9-10
slots, 9-13
specifications, 9-15
working principle, 9-10
crpc
application, 11-3
characteristic code, 11-9, B-15
front panel, 11-7
functions and features, 11-3
NM configuration reference, 11-10
signal flow, 11-4
slots, 11-8
specifications, 11-10
working principle, 11-4
CRPC frame, 3-2
D
d40
application, 8-20
characteristic code, 8-26, B-16
front panel, 8-23
functions and features, 8-21
NM configuration reference, 8-27
signal flow, 8-21
slots, 8-26
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Index
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i-1
specifications, 8-28
working principle, 8-21
d40v
application, 8-30
characteristic code, 8-35, B-17
front panel, 8-14, 8-32
functions and features, 8-30
NM configuration reference, 8-36
signal flow, 8-30
slots, 8-35
specifications, 8-37
working principle, 8-30
DC power distribution box, 1-4
DCM frame, 3-2
dcp
application, 14-3
characteristic code, 14-10, B-19
front panel, 14-7
functions and features, 14-4
NM configuration reference, 14-11
signal flow, 14-5
slots, 14-10
specifications, 14-12
version, 14-2
working principle, 14-5
dcu
application, 17-2
characteristic code, 17-6, B-22
front panel, 17-4
functions and features, 17-3
NM configuration reference, 17-6
signal flow, 17-3
slots, 17-6
specifications, 17-7
working principle, 17-3
dmr1
application, 9-17
characteristic code, 9-21, B-9
front panel, 9-19
functions and features, 9-17
NM configuration reference, 9-21
signal flow, 9-18
slots, 9-21
specifications, 9-22
working principle, 9-18
E
ECOM
functions and features, 5-4
ecom
application, 5-3
front panel, 5-9
signal flow, 5-5
slots, 5-10
specifications, 5-13
working principle, 5-5
F
fiu
application, 8-39
characteristic code, 8-42, B-17
front panel, 8-41
functions and features, 8-39
NM configuration reference, 8-43
signal flow, 8-39
slots, 8-42
specifications, 8-44
working principle, 8-39
G
GFU
application, 17-8
function and feature, 17-9
NM configuration reference, 17-12
signal flow, 17-9
slot, 17-10
slots, 17-12
specifications, 17-13
working principle, 17-9
gfu
characteristic code, 17-12, B-22
H
hba
application, 11-12
characteristic code, 11-16, B-13
front panel, 11-15
functions and features, 11-12
NM configuration reference, 11-17
signal flow, 11-13
slots, 11-16
specifications, 11-18
working principle, 11-13
I
indicators
board, A-3
cabinet, A-2
fan, A-6
scc, A-3
subrack, A-2
integrated cabinet
configuration, 1-3
specifications, 1-3
inter-subrack cable, 18-13
interfaces
AUX, 2-15
EFI, 2-13
interface area, 2-13
PIN assignment, 2-16
Index
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
i-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
itl
characteristic code, 8-51, B-17
signal flow, 8-47
working principle, 8-47
L
l4g
application, 5-17
front panel, 5-22
functions and features, 5-17
signal flow, 5-19
slots, 5-24
specifications, 5-27
T2000 configuration reference, 5-24
working principle, 5-19
laser safety label, 4-4
ldgd
application, 5-33
characteristic code, 5-39
front panel, 5-37
functions and features, 5-33
signal flow, 5-35
slots, 5-39
specifications, 5-42
T2000 configuration reference, 5-40
working principle, 5-35
ldgs
application, 5-48
front panel, 5-52
functions and features, 5-48
NM configuration reference, 5-53
signal flow, 5-49
slots, 5-53
specifications, 5-56
working principle, 5-49
ldm
application, 5-62
characteristic code, 5-69
front panel, 5-67
functions and features, 5-63
NM configuration reference, 5-69
signal flow, 5-65
slots, 5-69
specifications, 5-70
working principle, 5-65
ldmd
application, 5-78
characteristic code, 5-84
front panel, 5-83
functions and features, 5-79
NM configuration reference, 5-85
signal flow, 5-80
slots, 5-84
specifications, 5-86
working principle, 5-80
ldms
application, 5-93
front panel, 5-97
functions and features, 5-94
signal flow, 5-95
slots, 5-99
specifications, 5-100
working principle, 5-95
log
signal flow, 5-109
working principle, 5-109
lom
signal flow, 5-124
slots, 5-129
working principle, 5-124
lqg
application, 5-138
front panel, 5-142
functions and features, 5-138
signal flow, 5-140
specifications, 5-147
T2000 configuration reference, 5-144
working principle, 5-140
lqm
application, 5-152
characteristic code, 5-159
front panel, 5-157
functions and features, 5-153
NM configuration reference, 5-159
signal flow, 5-155
slots, 5-159
specifications, 5-163
working principle, 5-155
lqmd
application, 5-172
characteristic code, 5-179
front panel, 5-177
functions and features, 5-172
NM configuration reference, 5-180
signal flow, 5-174
slots, 5-179
specifications, 5-183
version, 5-171
working principle, 5-174
lqms
application, 5-193
front panel, 5-200
functions and features, 5-194
NM configuration reference, 5-202
signal flow, 5-196
slots, 5-202
specifications, 5-207
version, 5-193
working principle, 5-196
lsx
application, 5-217
front panel, 5-222
functions and features, 5-218
NM configuration reference, 5-224
signal flow, 5-219
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Index
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i-3
slots, 5-224
specifications, 5-225
version, 5-217
working principle, 5-219
lsxl
front panel, 5-235
functions and features, 5-231
signal flow, 5-232
slots, 5-236
specifications, 5-237
T2000 configuration reference, 5-237
working principle, 5-232
lsxlr
front panel, 5-244
functions and features, 5-241
signal flow, 5-242
slots, 5-245
specifications, 5-246
T2000 configuration reference, 5-245
working principle, 5-242
lsxr
application, 5-248
front panel, 5-252
functions and features, 5-249
NM configuration reference, 5-253
signal flow, 5-250
slots, 5-253
specifications, 5-254
working principle, 5-250
lwx2
application, 5-258
characteristic code, 5-263
front panel, 5-261
functions and features, 5-258
NM configuration reference, 5-264
signal flow, 5-259
slots, 5-263
specifications, 5-265
working principle, 5-259
lwxd
application, 5-271
characteristic code, 5-277
front panel, 5-275
functions and features, 5-272
NM configuration reference, 5-278
signal flow, 5-273
slots, 5-277
specifications, 5-278
working principle, 5-273
lwxs
application, 5-286
front panel, 5-289
functions and features, 5-286
NM configuration reference, 5-291
signal flow, 5-287
slots, 5-291
specifications, 5-292
working principle, 5-287
M
m40
application, 8-3
characteristic code, 8-8, B-18
front panel, 8-5
functions and features, 8-3
NM configuration reference, 8-9
signal flow, 8-3
slots, 8-8
specifications, 8-9
working principle, 8-3
m40v
application, 8-11
characteristic code, 8-17, B-18
functions and features, 8-12
NM configuration reference, 8-18
signal flow, 8-12
slots, 8-17
specifications, 8-19
working principle, 8-12
mca4
characteristic code, 15-6, B-11
front panel, 15-5
functions and features, 15-3
NM configuration reference, 15-7
signal flow, 15-3
slots, 15-6
specifications, 15-2, 15-7
working principle, 15-3
mca8
characteristic code, 15-12, B-12
front panel, 15-11
functions and features, 15-9
NM configuration reference, 15-13
signal flow, 15-9
slots, 15-12
specifications, 15-9, 15-13
working principle, 15-9
mr2
application, 9-24
characteristic code, 9-28, B-9
front panel, 9-26
functions and features, 9-24
NM configuration reference, 9-29
signal flow, 9-25
slots, 9-28
specifications, 9-29
working principle, 9-25
mr4
application, 9-31
characteristic code, 9-35, B-10
front panel, 9-33
functions and features, 9-31
NM configuration reference, 9-36
signal flow, 9-32
slots, 9-35
Index
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
i-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
specifications, 9-36
working principle, 9-32
mr8
application, 9-39
characteristic code, 9-42, B-11
front panel, 9-41
functions and features, 9-39
NM configuration reference, 9-43
signal flow, 9-40
slots, 9-42
specifications, 9-44
working principle, 9-40
N
nd2
application, 6-2
characteristic code, 6-8
front panel, 6-6
functions and features, 6-3
NM configuration reference, 6-8
signal flow, 6-4
slots, 6-8
specifications, 6-12
working principle, 6-4
ns2
application, 6-14
characteristic code, 6-22
front panel, 6-20
functions and features, 6-15
NM configuration reference, 6-22
signal flow, 6-17
slots, 6-22
specifications, 6-26
version, 6-14
working principle, 6-17
O
OAM serial port cable, 18-15
oau1
application, 11-20
characteristic code, 11-25, B-13
front panel, 11-23
functions and features, 11-20
NM configuration reference, 11-26
signal flow, 11-21
slots, 11-25
specifications, 11-27
working principle, 11-21
obu1
application, 11-31
characteristic code, 11-36, B-14
front panel, 11-34
functions and features, 11-32
NM configuration reference, 11-37
signal flow, 11-33
slots, 11-36
specifications, 11-37
working principle, 11-33
obu2
application, 11-39
characteristic code, 11-44, B-14
front panel, 11-42
functions and features, 11-40
NM configuration reference, 11-45
signal flow, 11-41
slots, 11-44
specifications, 11-45
working principle, 11-41
olp
application, 14-14
characteristic code, 14-20, B-20
front panel, 14-18
functions and features, 14-15
NM configuration reference, 14-21
signal flow, 14-16
slots, 14-20
specifications, 14-21
version, 14-13
working principle, 14-16
optical fiber
classification, 18-6
connectors, 18-7
FC/PC, 18-6, 18-7
LC/PC, 18-6, 18-7
LSH/APC, 18-6, 18-7
SC/PC, 18-6, 18-7
P
PDU grounding cable, 18-9
R
rmu9
application, 10-2
front panel, 10-6
functions and features, 10-3
NM configuration reference, 10-8
signal flow, 10-4
slots, 10-8
specifications, 10-9
working principle, 10-4
roam
application, 10-11
front panel, 10-13
functions and features, 10-11
NM configuration reference, 10-17
signal Flow, 10-12
slots, 10-17
specifications, 10-17
working principle, 10-12
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Index
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i-5
S
sbm2
application, 9-46
front panel, 9-48
functions and features, 9-47
signal flow, 9-47
slots, 9-50
specifications, 9-51
working principle, 9-47
sc1
application, 13-3
characteristic code, 13-8
front panel, 13-7
functions and features, 13-3
NM configuration reference, 13-9
signal flow, 13-4
slots, 13-8
specifications, 13-9
version, 13-2
working principle, 13-4
sc2
application, 13-11
characteristic code, 13-16
front panel, 13-15
functions and features, 13-12
NM configuration reference, 13-17
signal flow, 13-12
slots, 13-16
specifications, 13-17
version, 13-11
working principle, 13-12
scc
application, 12-2
front panel, 12-5
functions and features, 12-2
jumper, 12-7
signal flow, 12-3
slots, 12-6
specifications, 12-7
version, 12-2
working principle, 12-3
scs
application, 14-24
characteristic code, 14-28, B-20
front panel, 14-26
functions and features, 14-24
NM configuration reference, 14-28
signal flow, 14-25
slots, 14-28
specifications, 14-29
working principle, 14-25
subrack
data communication interfaces, 2-12
equipment maintenance interfaces, 2-12
slot description, 2-4
structure, 2-2
subrack power cable, 18-5
T
tbe
application, 6-31
front panel, 6-37
functions and features, 6-32
NM configuration reference, 6-39
signal flow, 6-34
slots, 6-39
specifications, 6-41
working principle, 6-34
tdg
application, 6-47
front panel, 6-50
functions and features, 6-47
NM configuration reference, 6-52
signal flow, 6-48
slots, 6-52
specifications, 6-55
working principle, 6-48
tdx
application, 6-58
front panel, 6-63
functions and features, 6-59
NM configuration reference, 6-65
signal flow, 6-60
slots, 6-65
specifications, 6-68
version, 6-58
working principle, 6-60
tmx
signal flow, 5-301
slots, 5-305
working principle, 5-301
tom
application, 6-71
functions and features, 6-74
signal flow, 6-76
slots, 6-87
specifications, 6-94
T2000 configuration reference, 6-87
working principle, 6-76
tqm
application, 6-102
front panel, 6-107
functions and features, 6-103
NM configuration reference, 6-108
signal flow, 6-104
slots, 6-108
specifications, 6-112
working principle, 6-104
tqs
application, 6-119
front panel, 6-122
functions and features, 6-119
NM configuration reference, 6-124
Index
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description
i-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)
signal flow, 6-120
slots, 6-124
specifications, 6-126
working principle, 6-120
tqx
application, 6-130
front panel, 6-133
functions and features, 6-130
signal flow, 6-131
slots, 6-135
specifications, 6-137
T2000 configuration reference, 6-135
working principle, 6-131
tsxl
application, 6-139
front panel, 6-142
functions and features, 6-140
NM configuration reference, 6-144
signal flow, 6-140
slots, 6-144
specifications, 6-146
working principle, 6-140
V
va1
application, 16-3
characteristic code, 16-7, B-21
front panel, 16-5
functions and features, 16-3
NM configuration reference, 16-7
signal flow, 16-4
slots, 16-7
specifications, 16-8
version, 16-2
working principle, 16-4
va4
application, 16-10
characteristic code, 16-14, B-21
front panel, 16-12
functions and features, 16-10
NM configuration reference, 16-14
signal flow, 16-11
slots, 16-14
specifications, 16-15
working principle, 16-11
W
WMU
signal flow, 15-16
working principle, 15-16
wmu
slots, 15-18
version, 15-14
WSD9
signal flow, 10-22
working principle, 10-22
wsd9
application, 10-20
front panel, 10-23
functions and features, 10-21
NM configuration reference, 10-26
slots, 10-25
specifications, 10-26
wsm9
application, 10-29
front panel, 10-32
functions and features, 10-30
NM configuration reference, 10-35
signal flow, 10-31
slots, 10-34
specifications, 10-35
working principle, 10-31
wsmd4
application, 10-38
front panel, 10-41
functions and features, 10-38
NM configuration reference, 10-43
signal flow, 10-39
slots, 10-43
specifications, 10-44
working principle, 10-39
X
xcs
application, 7-3
front panel, 7-5
functions and features, 7-3
signal flow, 7-4
slots, 7-6
specifications, 7-6
version, 7-2
working principle, 7-4
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description Index
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i-7